Watlow Controller Catalog - Southwest Heater and Control

Watlow Controller Catalog - Southwest Heater and Control
W
A
T
L
O
W
Table of Contents
Custom Temperature and
Power Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
Systems Division . . . . . . . . . . . . .3
Quick Reference Guide . . . . . . . . .4
Manufacturing Facilities . . . . . . .23
Sales Support Offices . . . . . . . . .24
Temperature Controllers
Single-Loop Controllers
Auto-Tuning PID
SERIES SD31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
SERIES SD_C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
SERIES SD6C_D . . . . . . . . . . . .33
SERIES 96 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
SERIES 988/989 . . . . . . . . . . . .39
SERIES F4P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
SERIES PD - Single Loop . . . . . .49
MICRODIN® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
On-Off
SERIES CV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
SERIES CF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
SERIES 80M6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
PID with Time/Temperature Profiling
SERIES SD_R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
SERIES SD6R_D . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
SERIES 96_AA . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
SERIES 981/982 . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
SERIES F4S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
Limits/Alarms
SERIES LV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
SERIES LF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
SERIES SD_L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
SERIES SD6L_D . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
SERIES 97 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
Temperature Meter
SERIES TM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Single-Loop Accessories
Current Transformers . . . . . . . . . . .97
Adapter Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Noise Suppression Devices . . . . . .98
Multi-Loop Controllers
Auto-Tuning PID
SERIES 998/999 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
SERIES PD - Dual Loop . . . . . . . .103
CLS200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
MLS300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
SERIES D8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
PID with Time/Temperature Profiling
CLS200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
MLS300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
SERIES F4D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
SERIES N7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
MINICHEF® 2000 . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Limits/Alarms
TLM-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
CAS200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
PID with Programmable Logic
CPC400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
PPC-2000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
Multi-Loop Accessories
DAC/SDAC Modules . . . . . . . . . .159
Communication Gateways
EM GATEWAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193
CDN GATEWAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
Software
WATVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
ANAWIN3® (PPC) . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
WATCONNECT™ . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
LOGICPRO™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
Power Controllers
Control Systems
DIN-A-MITE® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
Style A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
Style B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
Style C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
Style D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
SERIES CZR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
POWER SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
E-SAFE® RELAY . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
Solid State Relays (SSRs) . . . . . .181
QPAC SCRs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
Power Accessories . . . . . . . . . . .189
Process Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
Control Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
Control Consoles . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
Control Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
Control Accessories . . . . . . . . . .221
Controller Output
Comparison Guide . . . . . . . . . . .225
Temperature Sensor
Ranges and Tolerances . . . . . . .228
Think Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
Terms and Conditions . . . . . . . . .230
Replacement SCRs
and Diodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
Current Transformers . . . . . . . . .189
Noise Suppression Devices . . . .190
CE Filters for DIN-A-MITEs . . . . .190
DIN-Rail Mount Fuse Holders . . .191
Semiconductor Fuses . . . . . . . . .191
Customer Assistance
Customer Assistance
Communication Gateways
and Software
1
Custom
Temperature and
Power Controllers
Your Complete
Source For Solutions
With Control
Confidence®
If the controllers contained in this
catalog do not meet your application
needs, contact Watlow about a
custom controller solution. Whether
the application requires a
temperature or power controller—or
a complete, ready-to-install control
panel—Watlow has the engineering
and manufacturing expertise to
make your application a reality.
But more than that, Watlow provides
you with a cooperative partnership
based on service and ongoing
product support. We have the
experience, stability and total
thermal system expertise to produce
the controller that’s right for your
application.
Our Experience Includes:
• Environmental chambers and
ovens
• Foodservice equipment
• Medical equipment
• Packaging
• Plastics
• Refrigerated transport
• Semiconductor
Partnerships
Partnership means providing the
best solution for your application;
being there after the product is
delivered to make sure you receive
optimum performance and value.
Here is a brief overview of our
partnering process:
1. Define specific application needs
2. Design the hardware package
3. Design the software
4. Refine order and meet
specifications and requirements
2
5. Deliver prototype
6. Review prototype for changes and
revisions; refine hardware and
software; produce and test
changes; deliver new prototype
7. Begin production and continue
testing
8. File product documentation; apply
for agency approvals; begin line
production
9. Provide ongoing product support
Advanced Technology
Watlow offers the most modern
engineering, testing and production
facilities. Our focus on electronics
requires a significant investment in
state-of-the-art technology and our
engineers to continue their
education in training programs that
keep our personnel on the forefront
of innovation. This advantage is
available to give your company’s
product the competitive edge.
Innovation
Watlow offers a diversity of
experience. By serving many
different industries, we offer a
blending of technological
backgrounds as well as an
awareness of the latest in controller
technology and advances. Watlow’s
versatility means we’re not limited to
the conventions of any one industry.
It’s easier for us to bring in better,
innovative solutions.
Accountability
We assume full accountability for
managing the development process
to a successful conclusion. A
partnership with Watlow means you
can devote your own resources to
your core competencies. We work
within your time requirements and
we guarantee confidentiality and
protection of proprietary information.
Controller Manufacturing Involves:
Hardware Design
• Microprocessor, analog and
discreet digital
• Surface mount technology
• Through-hole technology
• Qualification lab
• Electromagnetic compatibility
• Environmental testing
• Shock and vibration
• Agency approvals
Packaging Design
• Mold design
• Mold tools
• Injection molding in plant
PC Board Design
• Multi-layer
• Double-sided
Software Design
• High level language for flexibility
and fast development
• Software demo design
• Communications
• Application overview screens
• Custom menus and functions
• Custom logic functions
• Custom communication protocols
Ask Watlow
To find out more about Watlow’s
custom controller capability, contact
your local Watlow representative
listed on pages 24 and 25.
W
A
T
L
O
W
Systems Division
Outsourcing Thermal
System Integration
Customer Assistance
Technical support
• Total system support, both
hardware and software
• Prototyping, on-site pre-work and
field testing
• Support during the conceptual
phase and design cycle
• On-site during start-up
• On-site troubleshooting
Watlow has developed a new
Systems Division to better serve the
needs of our customers. Watlow’s
product focus on heaters, sensors
and controllers—the components of
a thermal system—has now been
expanded. Now, Watlow can work
with the customer to design,
manufacture, assemble, install and
warranty entire thermal systems.
Watlow Systems Division offers the
following capabilities:
• Axial and SMT assembly
• Utilizing Watlow components
allows us to provide you with a
more extensive total system
warranty
• Watlow’s single-source
responsibility creates consistency
throughout every phase of the
project, maximizing synergy
between the design, manufacturing,
assembly and installation
• Watlow is as flexible to your needs
as required; select one service or
an entire turnkey system:
• Prototyping, on-site pre-work and
field testing
• Optimizing existing thermal
systems and creating retrofit
plans
• Total system support, both
hardware and software
• Providing design concepts
• Assisting in initial start-up
• Providing on-site troubleshooting
Paste screening - product test
• PCB test and calibration
Services Offered
Watlow Systems Division offers the
following services:
Procurement
• Mechanical / electrical component
• Strategic partnerships
• Stocking
Design
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Optimizing existing thermal systems
Retrofit plans
Component interface
Package
Product tester
Standard system products
Mold designs
Thermal process design
Vacuum and injection mold design
• Machining
General CNC
Precision machining
Gun boring
• Welding and brazing
MIG, TIG and Stick
Laser
Vacuum
• Sheet metal fabrication
Aluminum and steel
Stainless steel and most alloys
• Finishing
Plating, anodizing, hard coating
Special coating
Painting and silk screening
• Agency approvals
Manufacturing
• Plastic molding
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
• Metal casting
ASME vessel fabrication
Skid fabrication
Standard products
Custom engineered products
Contract assembly
Supports remote warehousing
Remote manufacturing
Kitting of components
• Product testing / compliance
• System application expertise
• Purchasing / contracting
• Literature and documentation
support
3
Power
Supply
Outputs
Inputs
Control
Loop
Controller
Quick
Reference Guide
Single-Loop
Auto-Tuning
1
1 universal Hardware: Thermocouple, RTD, VÎ(dc), mA
2 outputs
Function: Control - Heat/Cool, Alarm
Hardware: Switched dc, Open Collector,
SSR, EMR, VÎ(dc), mA
100-240VÅ(ac)
24Vı(ac/dc)
3 outputs, 2 outputs on 1⁄32 DIN
Function: Control - Heat/Cool, Alarm
Hardware: Switched dc, Open Collector,
SSR, EMR, VÎ(dc), mA
100-240VÅ(ac)
24Vı(ac/dc)
2 outputs
Function: Control - Heat/Cool, Alarm
Hardware: Switched dc, SSR, EMR,
VÎ(dc), mA
100-240VÅ(ac)
24Vı(ac/dc)
SERIES SD31 Page 27
Watlow USA Manufacturing Facility (F.O.B.): Winona, Minnesota
1
1 universal Hardware: Thermocouple, RTD, VÎ(dc), mA
SERIES SD_C Page 29
Watlow USA Manufacturing Facility (F.O.B.): Winona, Minnesota
1
1 universal Hardware: Thermocouple, RTD, VÎ(dc), mA
SERIES SD6C_D Page 33
Watlow USA Manufacturing Facility (F.O.B.): Winona, Minnesota
1
1 universal Hardware: Thermocouple, RTD, VÎ(dc), mA
1 auxiliary Functions: Event, Remote Set point input
Hardware: VÎ(dc, Resistance contact)
4 outputs
100-240VÅ(ac)
Function: Control - Heat/Cool, Alarm,
24Vı(ac/dc)
Retransmit
Hardware: Switched dc, Open Collector,
SSR, EMR, VÎ(dc), mA
SERIES 96 Page 35
Watlow USA Manufacturing Facility (F.O.B.): Winona, Minnesota
1
1 universal Hardware: Thermocouple, RTD, VÎ(dc), mA
2 auxiliary Functions: Event, Remote Set point, Slidewire,
Potentiometer, Current transformer, Cascade,
Differential, Ratio
Hardware: Thermocouple, RTD, VÎ(dc), mA,
Resistance contact
4 outputs
Function: Control - Heat/Cool, Alarm,
Retransmit, Duplex, Signal conditioner
power supply
Hardware: Switched dc, Open Collector,
SSR, EMR, VÎ(dc), mA
100-240VÅ(ac)
24Vı(ac/dc)
SERIES 988/989 Page 39
Watlow USA Manufacturing Facility (F.O.B.): Winona, Minnesota
Abbreviation Legend
SWÎ(dc) = Switched Direct Current
DC Pw. Sup. = DC Power Supply
EMR = Electromechanical Relay
H = Horizontal
4
H/V = Horizontal or Vertical
Hum./Dehum.= Humidify/Dehumidify
Int./Ext. = Internal/External
LCD = Liquid Crystal Display
LED = Light Emitting Diode
UL® and C-UL® are registered trademarks of Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc.
mA = Milliamp
N/A = Not Applicable
OC = Open Collector
Opt. Rmt. = Optional Remote
Retx = Retransmit
Rev/Dir = Reverse/Direct
W
A
T
L
O
W
Accuracy
Time/Temp
Profiling
Communications
Indication
Display
Single line
4 digit
Digital LED
±0.1 percent
span
EIA/TIA-485 - Modbus™ RTU
Modbus™, WATVIEW
±0.1 percent
span
EIA/TIA-485 - Modbus™ RTU
IrDA wireless
Modbus™ IrDA via IRCOMM
WATVIEW
±0.1 percent
span
DeviceNet™ on Canbus
±0.1 percent
span
EIA/TIA-485 - Modbus™ RTU
EIA/TIA-232 - Modbus™ RTU
WATVIEW
±0.1 percent
span
EIA/TIA-485 - Modbus™ RTU
EIA/TIA-232 - Modbus™ RTU
EIA/TIA-422 - Modbus™ RTU
Control
Mode
Agency
Approvals
Customer Assistance
Size
Mounting
Quick
Reference Guide
Single-Loop
Auto-Tuning Cont.
1
⁄32 DIN
UL®, CSA, CE, NSF,
30.8 mm (1.21 in.) (H) NEMA 4X (IP65)
53.6 mm (2.11 in.) (W)
PID
SERIES SD31 Page 27
Watlow USA Manufacturing Facility (F.O.B.): Winona, Minnesota
⁄32, 1⁄16
⁄8, 1⁄4 DINs
1
1
UL®, CSA, CE, FM, NSF,
NEMA 4X (IP65)
PID
Dual line
4 digit
Digital LED
SERIES SD_C Page 29
Watlow USA Manufacturing Facility (F.O.B.): Winona, Minnesota
1
⁄16 DIN
52 mm (2.04 in.) (H)
52 mm (2.04 in.) (W)
UL®, CSA, CE, FM,
NEMA 4X (IP65)
PID
Dual line
4 digit
Digital LED
SERIES SD6C_D Page 33
Watlow USA Manufacturing Facility (F.O.B.): Winona, Minnesota
⁄16 DIN
52 mm (2.04 in.) (H)
52 mm (2.04 in.) (W)
1
UL®, C-UL®, CE,
NEMA 4X (IP65)
PID
Dual line
4 digit
Digital LED
SERIES 96 Page 35
Watlow USA Manufacturing Facility (F.O.B.): Winona, Minnesota
⁄8 DIN
Vertical or
Horizontal
55 mm x 102 mm
(2.17 in. x 4.02 in.)
102 mm x 55 mm
(4.02 in. x 2.17 in.)
1
UL®, C-UL®, CE,
NEMA 4X (IP65)
PID
Dual line
4 digit
Digital LED
SERIES 988/989 Page 39
Watlow USA Manufacturing Facility (F.O.B.): Winona, Minnesota
RH = Relative Humidity
RTD = Resistance Temperature Detector
SSR = Solid State Relay
T/C = Thermocouple
V = Vertical
VÎ(dc) = Volts Direct Current
Disclaimers
a Select models only.
b Requires optional enhanced software.
Modbus™ is a trademark of Schneider Automation Incorporated
DeviceNet™ is a trademark of the Open DeviceNet Vendors Association
Symbols
Î = Direct Current
Å = Alternating Current
ı = Direct or Alternating Current
5
Power
Supply
Outputs
Inputs
Control
Loop
Controller
Quick
Reference Guide
Single-Loop
Auto-Tuning
1
1 universal Hardware: Thermocouple, RTD, VÎ(dc), mA
4 auxiliary Functions: Event
Hardware: VÎ(dc), Resistance contact
4 outputs
Function: Control - Heat/Cool, Alarm,
Retransmit, Single or Dual
Hardware: Switched dc, Open Collector,
SSR, EMR, VÎ(dc), mA
100-240VÅ(ac)
24Vı(ac/dc)
4 outputs
Function: Control - Heat/Cool, Alarm,
On-board datalogging memory
Hardware: Switched dc, Open Collector,
SSR, EMR, VÎ(dc), mA
24Vı(ac/dc)
2 outputs
Function: Control, Alarm
Hardware: Switched dc, EMR
24Vı(ac/dc)
Single output
Function: Control - Heat/Cool
Hardware: Switched dc, EMR
120VÅ(ac)
230-240VÅ(ac)
24VÅ(ac)
Single output
Function: Control - Heat/Cool, Alarm
Hardware: Switched dc, EMR
120VÅ(ac)
230-240VÅ(ac)
24VÅ(ac)
Single output
Function: Control - Heat/Cool, Alarm
Hardware: EMR
120VÅ(ac)
240VÅ(ac)
SERIES F4P Page 45
Watlow Manufacturing Facility (F.O.B.): Winona, Minnesota
1
1 universal Hardware: Thermocouple, RTD, VÎ(dc), mA
2 auxiliary Functions: Event, Current transformer
SERIES PDS Page 49
Watlow USA Manufacturing Facility (F.O.B.): Winona, Minnesota
1
1 universal Hardware: Thermocouple, RTD
MICRODIN® Page 53
Watlow USA Manufacturing Facility (F.O.B.): Winona, Minnesota
On-Off
1
Single input
Hardware: Thermocouple, RTD
SERIES CV Page 57
Watlow USA Manufacturing Facility (F.O.B.): Winona, Minnesota
1
Single input
Hardware: Thermocouple, RTD
SERIES CF Page 59
Watlow USA Manufacturing Facility (F.O.B.): Winona, Minnesota
1
Single input
Hardware: Thermocouple
SERIES 80M6 Page 61
Watlow USA Manufacturing Facility (F.O.B.): Winona, Minnesota
6
W
A
T
L
O
W
EIA/TIA-485 - Modbus™ RTU
EIA/TIA-232 - Modbus™ RTU
±0.1 percent
span
Ethernet - Modbus™ TCP/IP
HTTP, FTP
±0.1 percent
span
EIA/TIA-485 - Modbus™ RTU
EIA/TIA-232 - Modbus™ RTU
±1 percent
span
None
±1 percent
span
None
± 10°F
None
Time/Temp
Profiling
Accuracy
Communications
Indication
Display
±0.1 percent
span
Control
Mode
Size
Mounting
Five lines
4 digit LED
4 line LCD
Customer Assistance
Agency
Approvals
Quick
Reference Guide
Single-Loop
Auto-Tuning Cont.
⁄4 DIN
100 mm x 100 mm
(3.94 in. x 3.94 in.)
1
UL®, C-UL®, CE,
NEMA 4X (IP65)
PID
SERIES F4P Page 45
Watlow USA Manufacturing Facility (F.O.B.): Winona, Minnesota
1
⁄8 DIN
Sub-panel or
Din-rail mounting
UL®, C-UL®, CSA, CE
PID
SERIES PDS Page 49
Watlow USA Manufacturing Facility (F.O.B.): Winona, Minnesota
1
⁄8 DIN
Sub-panel or
Din-rail mounting
UL®, C-UL®, CE
PID
MICRODIN Page 53
Watlow USA Manufacturing Facility (F.O.B.): Winona, Minnesota
On-Off Cont.
⁄8 DIN square
UL®, CSA, CE,
72 mm x 72 mm
ANSI gas appliance
(2.83 in. x 2.83 in.) or
DIN-rail mount
1
On-off
Single line
4 digit LED
SERIES CV Page 57
Watlow USA Manufacturing Facility (F.O.B.): Winona, Minnesota
⁄8 DIN square
72 mm x 72 mm or
(2.83 in. x 2.83 in.)
DIN-rail mount or
open board or
potted case
1
UL®, CSA, CE,
ANSI gas appliance
On-off
None
SERIES CF Page 59
Watlow USA Manufacturing Facility (F.O.B.): Winona, Minnesota
Open board
UL®, C-UL®
On-off
None
SERIES 80M6 Page 61
Watlow USA Manufacturing Facility (F.O.B.): Winona, Minnesota
7
Power
Supply
Outputs
Inputs
Control
Loop
Controller
Quick
Reference Guide
Single-Loop
PID with Time/Temperature Profiling
1
1 universal Hardware: Thermocouple, RTD, VÎ(dc), mA
3 outputs (2 on SD3R)
Function: Control - Heat/Cool, Alarm
Hardware: Switched dc, Open Collector,
SSR, EMR, VÎ(dc), mA
100-240VÅ(ac)
24ı(ac/dc)
2 outputs
Function: Control - Heat/Cool, Alarm
Hardware: Switched dc, SSR, EMR,
VÎ(dc), mA
100-240VÅ(ac)
24ı(ac/dc)
SERIES SD_R Page 63
Watlow USA Manufacturing Facility (F.O.B.): Winona, Minnesota
1
1 universal Hardware: Thermocouple, RTD, VÎ(dc), mA
SERIES SD6R_D Page 67
Watlow USA Manufacturing Facility (F.O.B.): Winona, Minnesota
1
1 universal Hardware: Thermocouple, RTD, VÎ(dc), mA
1 auxiliary Functions: Event, Remote Set point input
Hardware: VÎ(dc), Resistance contact
4 outputs
100-240VÅ(ac)
Function: Control - Heat/Cool, Alarm,
24ı(ac/dc)
Retransmit,
Hardware: Switched dc, Open Collector,
SSR, EMR, VÎ(dc), mA
SERIES 96_AA Page 69
Watlow USA Manufacturing Facility (F.O.B.): Winona, Minnesota
1
1 universal Hardware: Thermocouple, RTD, VÎ(dc), mA
2 auxiliary Functions: Event, Slidewire
Hardware: Thermocouple, TRD, VÎ(dc), mA,
Resistance contact
4 outputs
Function: Control - Heat/Cool, Alarm,
Retransmit, Signal conditioner
power supply
Hardware: Switched dc,Open Collector,
SSR, EMR, VÎ(dc), mA
100-240VÅ(ac)
24ı(ac/dc)
4 outputs
Function: Control - Heat/Cool,
Compressor, Alarm, Retransmit
Hardware: Single or Dual,
Switched dc, Open Collector,
SSR, EMR, VÎ(dc), mA
8 Digital Outputs
100-240VÅ(ac)
24ı(ac/dc)
SERIES 981/982 Page 73
Watlow USA Manufacturing Facility (F.O.B.): Winona, Minnesota
1
1 universal Hardware: Thermocouple, RTD, VÎ(dc), mA, RH percent
5 auxiliary Functions: Cascade, Event
Hardware: Thermocouple, TRD, VÎ(dc), mA,
Resistance contact
SERIES F4S Page 77
Watlow USA Manufacturing Facility (F.O.B.): Winona, Minnesota
8
W
A
T
L
O
W
Time/Temp
Profiling
Accuracy
Communications
Indication
Display
Dual line
4 digit
Digital LED
±0.1 percent
span
EIA/TIA-485 - Modbus™ RTU
IrDA wireless (Except SD3R)
Modbus™ IrDA via IRCOMM
4 profiles
40 total steps
±0.1 percent
span
DeviceNet™ on Canbus
4 profiles
40 total steps
±0.1 percent
span
EIA/TIA-485 - Modbus™ RTU
EIA/TIA-232 - Modbus™ RTU
2 profiles
16 total steps
±0.1 percent
span
EIA/TIA-485 - Modbus™ RTU
EIA/TIA-232 - Modbus™ RTU
EIA/TIA-422 - Modbus™ RTU
4 profiles
24 total steps
±0.1 percent
span
EIA/TIA-485 - Modbus™ RTU
EIA/TIA-232 - Modbus™ RTU
40 profiles
256 total steps
Control
Mode
Agency
Approvals
Customer Assistance
Size
Mounting
Quick
Reference Guide
Single-Loop
PID with Time/Temperature Profiling Cont.
⁄32, 1⁄16
⁄8, 1⁄4 DINs
1
1
UL®, CSA, CE,
NEMA 4X (IP65)
PID
SERIES SD_R Page 63
Watlow USA Manufacturing Facility (F.O.B.): Winona, Minnesota
⁄16 DIN
52 mm (2.04 in.) (H)
52 mm (2.04 in.) (W)
1
UL®, CSA, CE,
NEMA 4X (IP65)
PID
Dual line
4 digit
Digital LED
SERIES SD6R_D Page 67
Watlow USA Manufacturing Facility (F.O.B.): Winona, Minnesota
1
⁄16 DIN
52 mm (2.04 in.) (H)
52 mm (2.04 in.) (W)
UL®, C-UL®, CE,
NEMA 4X (IP65)
PID
Dual line
4 digit
Digital LED
SERIES 96_AA Page 69
Watlow USA Manufacturing Facility (F.O.B.): Winona, Minnesota
1
⁄8 DIN
Vertical or
Horizontal
55 mm x 102 mm
(2.17 in. x 4.02 in.)
102 mm x 55 mm
(4.02 in. x 2.17 in.)
UL®, C-UL®, CE,
NEMA 4X (IP65)
PID
Dual line
4 digit
Digital LED
SERIES 981/982 Page 73
Watlow USA Manufacturing Facility (F.O.B.): Winona, Minnesota
1
⁄4 DIN
100 mm x 100 mm
(3.94 in. x 3.94 in.)
UL®, C-UL®, CE,
NEMA 4X (IP65)
PID
Five lines
4 digit LED
4 line LCD0
SERIES F4S Page 77
Watlow USA Manufacturing Facility (F.O.B.): Winona, Minnesota
9
Power
Supply
Outputs
Inputs
Control
Loop
Controller
Quick
Reference Guide
Single-Loop
Limits/Alarms
1
Single Input
Hardware: Thermocouple, RTD
Single output
Function: Limit, Alarm
Hardware: EMR
120VÅ(ac)
230-240VÅ(ac)
24VÅ(ac)
Single Output
Function: Limit, Alarm
Hardware: EMR
120VÅ(ac)
230-240VÅ(ac)
24VÅ(ac)
3 outputs (2 on SD3L)
Function: Limit, Alarm
Hardware: Switched dc, Open Collector,
SSR, EMR, VÎ(dc), mA
100-240VÅ(ac)
24ı(ac/dc)
2 outputs
Function: Limit, Alarm
Hardware: Switched dc, SSR,
EMR, VÎ(dc), mA
100-240VÅ(ac)
24ı(ac/dc)
4 outputs
Function: Limit, Alarm, Retransmit
Hardware: Switched dc, Open Collector,
SSR, EMR, VÎ(dc), mA
100-240VÅ(ac)
24ı(ac/dc)
SERIES LV Page 81
Watlow USA Manufacturing Facility (F.O.B.): Winona, Minnesota
1
Single Input
Hardware: Thermocouple, RTD
SERIES LF Page 83
Watlow USA Manufacturing Facility (F.O.B.): Winona, Minnesota
1
1 universal Hardware: Thermocouple, RTD, VÎ(dc), mA
SERIES SD_L Page 85
Watlow USA Manufacturing Facility (F.O.B.): Winona, Minnesota
1
1 universal Hardware: Thermocouple, RTD, VÎ(dc), mA
SERIES SD6L_D Page 89
Watlow USA Manufacturing Facility (F.O.B.): Winona, Minnesota
1
1 universal Hardware: Thermocouple, RTD, VÎ(dc), mA
1 auxiliary Functions: Event, Remote Set point Input
Hardware: VÎ(dc), Resistance contact
SERIES 97 Page 91
Watlow USA Manufacturing Facility (F.O.B.): Winona, Minnesota
10
W
A
T
L
O
W
Time/Temp
Profiling
Communications
Accuracy
Indication
Display
Control
Mode
Size
Mounting
Customer Assistance
Agency
Approvals
Quick
Reference Guide
Single-Loop
Limits/Alarms Cont.
1
⁄8 DIN square
FM, UL®, CSA, CE,
72 mm x 72 mm
ANSI gas appliance,
(2.83 in. x 2.83 in.) or DIN 3440
DIN-rail mount
High/low
limit
Single line
4 digit LED
±1 percent
span
None
±1 percent
span
None
±0.1 percent
span
EIA/TIA-485 - Modbus™ RTU
IRDA wireless (except SD3L)
Modbus™ IrDA via IRCOMM
±0.1 percent
span
DeviceNet™ on Canbus
±0.1 percent
span
EIA/TIA-485 - Modbus™ RTU
EIA/TIA-232 - Modbus™ RTU
SERIES LV Page 81
Watlow USA Manufacturing Facility (F.O.B.): Winona, Minnesota
1
⁄8 DIN square
72 mm x 72 mm
(2.83 in. x 2.83 in.)
DIN-rail mount
or open board or
potted case
FM, UL®, CSA, CE,
ANSI gas appliance,
DIN 3440
High/low
limit
None
SERIES LF Page 83
Watlow USA Manufacturing Facility (F.O.B.): Winona, Minnesota
⁄32, 1⁄16
⁄8, 1⁄4 DINs
1
1
UL®, CSA, CE, FM,
NEMA 4X (IP65)
On-off
Dual line
4 digit
Digital LED
SERIES SD_L Page 85
Watlow USA Manufacturing Facility (F.O.B.): Winona, Minnesota
⁄16 DIN
52 mm (2.04 in.) (H)
52 mm (2.04 in.) (W)
1
UL®, CSA, CE, FM,
NEMA 4X (IP65)
On-off
Dual line
4 digit
Digital LED
SERIES SD6L_D Page 89
Watlow USA Manufacturing Facility (F.O.B.): Winona, Minnesota
⁄16 DIN
52 mm (2.04 in.) (H)
52 mm (2.04 in.) (W)
1
FM, CE,
NEMA 4X (IP65)
On-off
Dual line
4 digit LED
4 line LCD0
SERIES 97 Page 91
Watlow USA Manufacturing Facility (F.O.B.): Winona, Minnesota
11
Power
Supply
Outputs
Inputs
Control
Loop
Controller
Quick
Reference Guide
Single-Loop
Temperature Meter
1
Single Input
Hardware: Thermocouple, RTD
None - Indicator only
120VÅ(ac)
230-240VÅ(ac)
24VÅ(ac)
SERIES TM Page 95
Watlow USA Manufacturing Facility (F.O.B.): Winona, Minnesota
Communication Gateways
Ethernet to EIA-485/232 Modbus™ RTU converter
24Vı(ac/dc)
Allows the following Modbus™ controllers to connect
to Ethernet: SERIES SD, 96, 97,981/982, 998/999,
F4, CLS200, POWER SERIES, MICRODIN
EM GATEWAY Page 193
Watlow USA Manufacturing Facility (F.O.B.): Winona, Minnesota
1
DeviceNet™ to EIA-485/232 Modbus™ RTU converter
11-28VÎ(dc)
Allows the following Modbus™ controllers to connect
to DeviceNet™: SERIES 96, 97, CLS200, MICRODIN
CDN GATEWAY Page 195
Watlow USA Manufacturing Facility (F.O.B.): Winona, Minnesota
Multi-Loop
Auto-Tuning PID
2
Differential, Ratio
1 universal Hardware: Thermocouple, RTD, VÎ(dc), mA
2 auxiliary Functions: RH percent, Event
Hardware: Thermocouple, RTD, VÎ(dc), mA,
Resistance contact
4 outputs
Function: Control - Heat/Cool, Alarm,
Retransmit, Signal conditioner
power supply
Hardware: Switched dc, Open Collector,
SSR, EMR, VÎ(dc), mA
100-240VÅ(ac)
24Vı(ac/dc)
5 outputs
Function: Control - Heat/Cool, Alarm,
Retransmit, On-board data logging
memory
Hardware: Switched dc, Open Collector,
SSR, EMR, VÎ(dc), mA
24Vı(ac/dc)
SERIES 998/999 Page 99
Watlow USA Manufacturing Facility (F.O.B.): Winona, Minnesota
2
2 universal
Hardware: Thermocouple, RTD, VÎ(dc), mA
2 auxiliary Functions: Event, Current transformer
SERIES PDD Page 103
Watlow USA Manufacturing Facility (F.O.B.): Winona, Minnesota
12
W
A
T
L
O
W
Time/Temp
Profiling
Communications
Indication
Display
Single line
4 digit LED
Accuracy
Control
Mode
Size
Mounting
Indicator
only
Customer Assistance
Agency
Approvals
Quick
Reference Guide
Single-Loop
Temperature Meter Cont.
⁄8 DIN square
UL®, CSA, CE
72 mm x 72 mm
(2.83 in. x 2.83 in.) or
DIN-rail mount
1
±1 percent
span
None
SERIES TM Page 95
Watlow USA Manufacturing Facility (F.O.B.): Winona, Minnesota
Communication Gateways Cont.
CE
Ethernet Modbus™ TCP
HTTP - e-mail or alarm notification
EM GATEWAY Page 193
Watlow USA Manufacturing Facility (F.O.B.): Winona, Minnesota
CDN GATEWAY Page 195
Watlow USA Manufacturing Facility (F.O.B.): Winona, Minnesota
Multi-Loop
Auto-Tuning PID Cont.
1
⁄8 DIN
Vertical or
Horizontal
55 mm x 102 mm
(2.17 in. x 4.02 in.)
102 mm x 55 mm
(4.02 in. x 2.17 in.)
UL®, C-UL®, CE,
NEMA 4X (IP65)
PID
Dual line
4 digit
Digital LED
±0.1 percent
span
EIA/TIA-485 - Modbus™ RTU
EIA/TIA-232 - Modbus™ RTU
EIA/TIA-422 - Modbus™ RTU
±0.1 percent
span
Ethernet - Modbus™ TCP/IP
HTTP, FTP
SERIES 998/999 Page 99
Watlow USA Manufacturing Facility (F.O.B.): Winona, Minnesota
1
⁄8 DIN
Sub-panel or
DIN-rail mounting
UL®, C-UL®, CSA, CE
PID
SERIES PDD Page 103
Watlow USA Manufacturing Facility (F.O.B.): Winona, Minnesota
13
Power
Supply
Outputs
Inputs
Control
Loop
Controller
Quick
Reference Guide
Multi-Loop
Auto-Tuning PID
4, 8 or 16 4, 8 or 16 Analog - Functions: Control Feedback,
Cascade, Differential, Ratio, Remote Set point
Hardware: Thermocouple, RTD (4 and 8 loop only)
VÎ(dc), mA
8 Digital - Functions: Job Select, Output Override
Hardware: VÎ(dc)
1 Pulse - Functions: 2kHz Rate Control Feedback
Hardware: VÎ(dc)
36 Digital
Functions: Control Heat/Cool, Alarm,
Retransmit, Global Alarm, System Safe
Hardware: Switched dc, Open Collector
15-24VÎ(dc)
36 Digital
Functions: Control Heat/Cool, Alarm,
Retransmit, Global Alarm, System Safe
Hardware: Switched dc, Open Collector
12-24VÎ(dc)
20 Digital
Functions: Control Heat/Cool, Alarm,
Retransmit, Global Alarm, System Safe
Hardware: Switched dc, Open Collector
15-24VÎ(dc)
36 Digital
Functions: Control Heat/Cool, Alarm,
Retransmit, Global Alarm, System Safe
Event
Hardware: Switched dc, Open Collector
15-24VÎ(dc)
36 Digital
Functions: Control Heat/Cool, Alarm,
Retransmit, Global Alarm, System Safe,
Event
Hardware: Switched dc, Open Collector
12-24VÎ(dc)
CLS200 Page 107
Watlow USA Manufacturing Facility (F.O.B.): Winona, Minnesota
16 or 32
16 or 32 Analog - Functions: Control Feedback,
Cascade, Differential,Ratio, Remote Set point
Hardware: Thermocouple, RTD, VÎ(dc), mA
8 Digital - Functions: Job Select, Output Override
Hardware: VÎ(dc)
1 Pulse - Functions: 2kHz Rate Control Feedback
Hardware: VÎ(dc)
MLS300 Page 111
Watlow USA Manufacturing Facility (F.O.B.): Winona, Minnesota
4 or 8
4 or 8 Analog - Functions: Control Feedback,
Cascade, Differential, Ratio, Remote Set point
Hardware: Thermocouple, RTD, VÎ(dc), mA
8 Digital - Functions: Job Select, Output Override
Hardware: VÎ(dc)
D8 Page 115
Watlow USA Manufacturing Facility (F.O.B.): Winona, Minnesota
PID with Time/Temperature Profiling
4, 8 or 16 4, 8 or 16 Analog - Function: Control Feedback
Hardware: Thermocouple, RTD (4 and 8 loop only)
VÎ(dc), mA
8 Digital - Functions: Job Select, Output Override,
Trigger
Hardware: VÎ(dc)
1 Pulse - Functions: 2kHz Rate Control Feedback
Hardware: VÎ(dc)
CLS200 Page 119
Watlow USA Manufacturing Facility (F.O.B.): Winona, Minnesota
16 or 32
16 or 32 Analog - Functions: Control Feedback
Hardware: Thermocouple, RTD (4 and 8 loop only)
VÎ(dc), mA
8 Digital - Functions: Job Select, Output Override,
Trigger
Hardware: VÎ(dc)
1 Pulse - Functions: 2kHz Rate Control Feedback
Hardware: VÎ(dc)
MLS300 Page 123
Watlow USA Manufacturing Facility (F.O.B.): Winona, Minnesota
14
W
A
T
L
O
W
Time/Temp
Profiling
Communications
Accuracy
Indication
Display
Control
Mode
Size
Mounting
Customer Assistance
Agency
Approvals
Quick
Reference Guide
Multi-Loop
Auto-Tuning PID Cont.
⁄8 DIN Horizontal
1
UL®, C-UL®, CE
PID
2 x 16
Vacuum
Fluorescent
Display
±0.08 percent
span typical
EIA/TIA-485 - Modbus™ RTU
EIA/TIA-232 - Modbus™ RTU
±0.08 percent
span typical
EIA/TIA-485 - Modbus™ RTU
EIA/TIA-232 - Modbus™ RTU
±0.08 percent
span typical
DeviceNet™
±0.08 percent
span typical
EIA/TIA-485 - Modbus™ RTU
EIA/TIA-232 - Modbus™ RTU
17 Profiles
20 Steps Each
±0.08 percent
span typical
EIA/TIA-485 - Modbus™ RTU
EIA/TIA-232 - Modbus™ RTU
17 Profiles
20 Steps Each
CLS200 Page 107
Watlow USA Manufacturing Facility (F.O.B.): Winona, Minnesota
1
⁄8 DIN Horizontal
Sub-panel mount
analog input module
UL®, C-UL®, CE
PID
2 x 16
Vacuum
Fluorescent
Display
MLS300 Page 111
Watlow USA Manufacturing Facility (F.O.B.): Winona, Minnesota
⁄8 DIN Horizontal
1
UL®, C-UL®, CE
PID
2 x 16
Vacuum
Fluorescent
Display
D8 Page 115
Watlow USA Manufacturing Facility (F.O.B.): Winona, Minnesota
PID with Time/Temperature Profiling Cont.
⁄8 DIN Horizontal
1
UL®, C-UL®, CE
PID
2 x 16
Vacuum
Fluorescent
Display
CLS200 Page 119
Watlow USA Manufacturing Facility (F.O.B.): Winona, Minnesota
1
⁄8 DIN Horizontal
Sub-panel mount
analog input module
UL®, C-UL®, CE
PID
2 x 16
Vacuum
Fluorescent
Display
MLS300 Page 123
Watlow USA Manufacturing Facility (F.O.B.): Winona, Minnesota
15
Power
Supply
Outputs
Inputs
Control
Loop
Controller
Quick
Reference Guide
Multi-Loop
PID with Time/Temperature Profiling
2
3 universal
Hardware: Thermocouple, RTD, VÎ(dc), mA,
RH percent
4 auxiliary
Functions: Cascade, Event
Hardware: Thermocouple, RTD, VÎ(dc), mA,
Resistance contact
4 outputs
Function: Control - Heat/Cool, Alarm,
Retransmit (Single or Dual)
Hardware: Switched dc, Open Collector,
SSR, EMR, VÎ(dc), mA
8 Digital outputs
100-240VÅ(ac)
24Vı(ac/dc)
6 outputs
Function: Control, Alarm
24VÅ(ac)
3 outputs
Function: Control Heat, Alarm
Hardware: Switched dc, SSR
2 digital outputs
Function: Event
Hardware: Switched dc, SSR
24VÅ(ac)
2 or 10
Functions: Channel and Global High
Limit Annunciation
Hardware: Relay
10-26VÎ(dc)
36 Digital
Functions: Alarm, Global Alarm,
System Safe
Hardware: Switched dc, Open Collector
15-24VÎ(dc)
SERIES F4D Page 127
Watlow USA Manufacturing Facility (F.O.B.): Winona, Minnesota
4
Hardware: Thermocouple, RTD, VÎ(dc), mA
SERIES N7 Page 131
Watlow USA Manufacturing Facility (F.O.B.): Winona, Minnesota
2
Two inputs
Hardware: Thermocouple, RTD
MINICHEF® 2000 Page 135
Watlow USA Manufacturing Facility (F.O.B.): Winona, Minnesota
Limits/Alarms
8
8 Analog
Function: High Limit Alarm
Hardware: Thermocouple, RTD
TLM-8 Page 139
Watlow USA Manufacturing Facility (F.O.B.): Winona, Minnesota
16
16 Analog - Function: High, Low, Deviation Alarm
Indicator
Hardware: Thermocouple, VÎ(dc), mA
8 Digital - Functions: Job Select
Hardware: VÎ(dc)
1 Pulse - Functions: 2 kHz Rate
Hardware: VÎ(dc)
CAS200 Page 143
Watlow USA Manufacturing Facility (F.O.B.): Winona, Minnesota
16
W
A
T
L
O
W
Time/Temp
Profiling
Accuracy
Communications
Indication
Display
±0.1 percent
span
Control
Mode
Size
Mounting
Five lines
5 digit LED
4 line LCD
Customer Assistance
Agency
Approvals
Quick
Reference Guide
Multi-Loop
PID with Time/Temperature Profiling Cont.
1
⁄4 DIN
100 mm x 100 mm
(3.94 in. x 3.94 in.)
UL®, C-UL®, CE,
NEMA 4X (IP65)
PID
EIA/TIA-485 - Modbus™ RTU
EIA/TIA-232 - Modbus™ RTU
40 profiles
256 total steps
SERIES F4D Page 127
Watlow USA Manufacturing Facility (F.O.B.): Winona, Minnesota
Flush mount
UL®, C-UL®, CSA, CE,
NSF, NAFEM data
protocol communications
PID
Dual line
1.1°C
4 digit
7 segment
LED
8 digit
alphanumeric
Ethernet - NAFEM protocol
EIA/TIA-485 - Modbus™ RTU
EIA/TIA-232 - Modbus™ RTU
SERIES N7 Page 131
Watlow USA Manufacturing Facility (F.O.B.): Winona, Minnesota
Flush mount
UL®, C-UL®, CSA, CE,
NSF, AGA
PID
Single line
5 digit LED
±0.35 percent
span
MINICHEF 2000 Page 135
Watlow USA Manufacturing Facility (F.O.B.): Winona, Minnesota
Limits/Alarms Cont.
DIN-rail or Fastener
Sub-panel mount
UL®, C-UL®, CE, FM
On-off
±5 percent
or 1 percent
of trip point
TLM-8 Page 139
Watlow USA Manufacturing Facility (F.O.B.): Winona, Minnesota
⁄8 DIN Horizontal
1
UL®, C-UL®, CE
On-off
2 x 16
Vacuum
Fluorescent
Display
±0.08 percent
span typical
EIA/TIA-485 - Modbus™ RTU
EIA/TIA-232 - Modbus™ RTU
CAS200 Page 143
Watlow USA Manufacturing Facility (F.O.B.): Winona, Minnesota
17
Power
Supply
Outputs
Inputs
Control
Loop
Controller
Quick
Reference Guide
Multi-Loop
PID with Programmable Logic
4 or 8
4 or 8 Analog - Functions: Control Feedback, Programmable Logic, Cascade, Differential, Ratio, Remote
Set point Hardware: Thermocouple, RTD, VÎ(dc), mA
8 Digital - Functions: Programmable Logic, Job Select,
Output Override
Hardware: VÎ(dc)
1 Pulse - Functions: 2kHz Rate, Programmable Logic
Hardware: VÎ(dc)
36 Digital
Functions: Control Heat/Cool, Programmable Logic, Alarm, Retransmit, Global
Alarm, System Safe
Hardware: Switched dc, Open Collector
15-24VÎ(dc)
Up to 288 Digital - Functions: Control
Heat/Cool, Programmable Logic, Alarm,
Retransmit, Global Alarm, System Safe
Hardware: Switched dc, Open Collector,
relay
Up to 48 Analog - Functions: Control
Heat/Cool, Programmable Logic,
Retransmit Hardware: VÎ(dc) or mA
12-26VÎ(dc)
CPC400 Page 147
Watlow USA Manufacturing Facility (F.O.B.): Winona, Minnesota
8 to 48
8 to 48 Analog - Functions: Control Feedback, Programmable Logic, Cascade, Differential, Ratio
Hardware: Thermocouple, RTD, VÎ(dc), mA
Up to 26 Digital - Function; Programmable Logic
Hardware: VÎ(dc), VÅ(ac)
29 Pulse - Functions: 10kHz Quadrapture Rate/Count
(1 Single-Phase), Programmable Logic
Hardware: VÎ(dc)
PPC-2000 Page 151
Watlow USA Manufacturing Facility (F.O.B.): Winona, Minnesota
18
W
A
T
L
O
W
Time/Temp
Profiling
Communications
Accuracy
Indication
Display
Control
Mode
Agency
Approvals
Customer Assistance
Size
Mounting
Quick
Reference Guide
Multi-Loop
PID with Programmable Logic Cont.
⁄8 DIN Horizontal
1
UL®, C-UL®, CE
PID
2 x 16
Vacuum
Fluorescent
Display
±0.08 percent
span typical
EIA/TIA-485 - Modbus™ RTU
EIA/TIA-232 - Modbus™ RTU
±0.11 percent
span typical
2 Communications Ports
EIA/TIA-485 - Modbus™ RTU
EIA/TIA-232 - Modbus™ RTU
CPC400 Page 147
Watlow USA Manufacturing Facility (F.O.B.): Winona, Minnesota
DIN-rail or Fastener
Sub-panel mount
UL®, C-UL®, CE
PID
PPC-2000 Page 151
Watlow USA Manufacturing Facility (F.O.B.): Winona, Minnesota
19
Operating
Environment
Agency
Approvals
Mounting
Output/
Features Mode
Inputs
Phase
Maximum
Current
Controller
Quick
Reference Guide
Power Controllers - SCRs (Silicon Controlled Rectifiers)
DIN-A-MITE
Up to 25 amps
@ 600VÅ(ac)
1-phase
Vı(ac/dc) contactor,
4-20mA
Burst Fire
DIN-rail,
Sub-panel
UL®, C-UL®,
CE
80°C (176°F)
Maximum
0 to 90 percent
RH noncondensing
Burst Fire
Shorted SCR
alarm
DIN-rail,
Sub-panel
UL®, C-UL®,
CE
80°C (176°F)
Maximum
0 to 90 percent
RH noncondensing
Burst Fire
Shorted SCR
alarm
Open heater
alarm on Zero
Cross
Phase-angle
(1-phase only)
DIN-rail,
Sub-panel
UL®, C-UL®,
CE
80°C (176°F)
Maximum
0 to 90 percent
RH noncondensing
Burst Fire
Shorted SCR
alarm, Load
Current Monitor
CT, On-board
semiconductor
fusing
Sub-panel
UL®, C-UL®,
CE
80°C (176°F)
Maximum
0 to 90 percent
RH noncondensing
Style A Page 166
Watlow USA Manufacturing Facility (F.O.B.): Winona, Minnesota
Up to 40 amps
@ 600VÅ(ac)
1-phase
3-phase, 2-leg
3-phase, 3-leg
Vı(ac/dc) contactor,
4-20mA, multi-zone
input
Style B Page 167
Watlow USA Manufacturing Facility (F.O.B.): Winona, Minnesota
Up to 80 amps
@ 600VÅ(ac)
1-phase
3-phase, 2-leg
3-phase, 3-leg
Vı(ac/dc) contactor,
4-20mA, multi-zone
input
Potentiometer
Style C Page 168
Watlow USA Manufacturing Facility (F.O.B.): Winona, Minnesota
Up to 100 amps
@ 600VÅ(ac)
1-phase
Vı(ac/dc) contactor
Style D Page 171
Watlow USA Manufacturing Facility (F.O.B.): Winona, Minnesota
20
W
A
T
L
O
W
Operating
Environment
Agency
Approvals
Mounting
Output/
Features Mode
Inputs
Phase
Maximum
Current
Customer Assistance
Controller
Quick
Reference Guide
Power Controllers - SCRs (Silicon Controlled Rectifiers)
CZR
18-50 amps
up to 600VÅ(ac)
1-phase
Vı(ac/dc) contactor
Zero-cross
Random
DIN-rail,
Sub-panel
UL®, CSA,
VDE, CE
75°C (167°F)
Maximum
0 to 90 percent
RH noncondensing
0-20mA and
Burst Fire, zero0-10VÎ(dc) scalable, crossed, Phasemultizone input
angle, Load
Current Monitor
CT, Soft Start heater bakeout,
Alarm output,
Heater diag.
Sub-panel
UL®, C-UL®,
VDE, CE
65°C (149°F)
Maximum
0 to 90 percent
RH noncondensing
VÅ(ac) contactor
Definite
purpose
relay and
MDR
mounting
footprint
UL®, C-UL®
55°C (131°F)
Maximum
5 to 85 percent
RH noncondensing
Sub-panel
UL®, CSA
CE, VDE
50°C (122°F)
Maximum with
heat sink
0 to 90 percent
RH noncondensing
UL®, C-UL®
up to 300
amps
50°C (122°F)
Maximum
0 to 90 percent
RH noncondensing
CZR Page 173
Watlow USA Manufacturing Facility (F.O.B.): Winona, Minnesota
POWER SERIES
65 - 250 amps
1-phase
3-phase, 2-leg
3-phase, 3-leg
3-phase, 4-wire, wye
2-single-phase zones
3-single-phase zones
POWER SERIES Page 175
Watlow USA Manufacturing Facility (F.O.B.): Winona, Minnesota
Hybrid
E-SAFE ® RELAY
20 or 40 amps
208/204VÅ(ac)
Three-pole
E-SAFE® RELAY Page 179
Watlow USA Manufacturing Facility (F.O.B.): Winona, Minnesota
Solid State Relays - SSRs
10 to 75 amps
Up to 600VÅ(ac)
1-phase
Vı(ac/dc) contactor
Random fire
Burst fire,
zero-cross - SBL
Shorted SCR
alarm - SDA
Vı(ac/dc) contactor
4-20mA
Bursrt fire,
Sub-panel
Phase-angle,
(No phase-angle
on 2-leg model)
SSR Page 181
Watlow USA Manufacturing Facility (F.O.B.): Winona, Minnesota
QPAC - SCRs
300 to 1000 amps 1-phase
Up to 575VÅ(ac) 3-phase, 2-leg
3-phase, 3-leg
QPAC Page 185
Watlow USA Manufacturing Facility (F.O.B.): Winona, Minnesota
21
Customer
Assistance
Replacement
Controllers
22
Existing Controller
Suggested New Replacement
Page
SERIES 93
SERIES SD6C
29
SERIES 94
SERIES SD6L
85
SERIES 935
SERIES SD31 or SD3C
SERIES 945
SERIES SD_C
29
SERIES 988LF
SERIES SD_C
29
SERIES 101
SERIES CV
57
SERIES 102
SERIES CV
57
SERIES 103
SERIES CV
57
SERIES 104
SERIES CV or SERIES CF
57 or 59
SERIES 942
SERIES 96_AA or SERIES SD4R
69 or 63
SERIES 142
SERIES LV or SERIES LF
81 or 83
SERIES 145
SERIES LV
SERIES 146
SERIES LV
SERIES 147
SERIES LV or SERIES LF
SERIES 550
SERIES TM
95
SERIES 733/734
SERIES N7
131
MDR
E-SAFE®
179
RELAY
27 or 29
81
81
81 or 83
W
A
T
L
O
W
Customer
Assistance
United States Manufacturing
Facilities
Anaheim, California
Watlow AOV, Inc.
Manufactures:
• Silicone Rubber Heaters
1400 North Kellogg Drive, Suite A
Anaheim, CA 92807
Phone: 714-779-2252
FAX: 714-777-9626
Batavia, Illinois
Watlow Batavia
Manufactures:
• Cast-In Heaters
1310 Kingsland Drive
Batavia, IL 60510
Phone: 630-879-2696
FAX #1: 630-879-1101
FAX #2: 630-482-2042
Chesterfield, Missouri
Watlow Engineering
Manufactures:
• Machines
636 Goddard Avenue
Chesterfield, MO 63005
Phone: 636-530-0288
Fax: 636-530-0395
Columbia, Missouri
Watlow Columbia/Ceramic Fiber
Manufactures:
• Ceramic Fiber Heaters
2407 Big Bear Court
Columbia, MO 65202
Phone: 573-443-8817
FAX: 573-443-8818
Watlow Columbia/Flexible
Manufactures:
• Flexible Heaters
2101 Pennsylvania Drive
Columbia, MO 65202
Phone: 573-474-9402
FAX: 573-474-5859
Fenton, Missouri
Single Iteration
A Consulting Services Division
of Watlow
909 Horan Drive
Fenton, MO 63026
Phone: 866-449-6846
FAX: 636-349-5352
Hannibal, Missouri
Watlow Hannibal
Manufactures:
• Circulation Heaters
• Duct Heaters
• Immersion Heaters
• Multicell Heaters
• Tubular Heaters
• Thick Film Heaters
#6 Industrial Loop Road
P.O. Box 975
Hannibal, MO 63401
Phone: 573-221-2816
FAX: Tubular/Process/Multicell
573-221-3723
FAX: Thick Film
573-221-7578
Richmond, Illinois
Watlow Richmond
Manufactures:
• RTDs, Thermocouples, Thermistors
• Thermocouple Wire and Cable
• Temperature Measurement Devices
5710 Kenosha Street, P.O. Box 500
Richmond, IL 60071
Phone: 815-678-2211
FAX: 815-678-3961
St. Louis, Missouri
World Headquarters and
Watlow St. Louis
Manufactures:
• Band Heaters
• Cable Heaters
• FIREROD® Heaters
• Radiant Heaters
• Special Heaters
• Strip Heaters
12001 Lackland Road
St. Louis, MO 63146
Phone: 314-878-4600
FAX: 314-878-6814
Watsonville, California
Watlow Anafaze
Manufactures:
• Multi-Loop Controls
• High Level Software
Phone: 507-454-5300
FAX: 507-452-4507
Customer Assistance
Watlow
Manufacturing
Facilities
Winona, Minnesota - Controllers
Watlow Winona, Inc.
Manufactures:
• Custom Electronic Controllers
• Power Controllers
• Safety and Limit Controllers
• Single-Loop Controllers
1241 Bundy Boulevard,
P.O. Box 5580
Winona, MN 55987-5580
Phone: 507-454-5300
FAX: 507-452-4507
Winona, Minnesota - Polymer
Watlow Polymer
Technologies, Inc.
Manufactures:
• Polymer Heaters
1265 East Sanborn Street
Winona, MN 55987
Phone: 507-457-9797
FAX: 507-457-9736
Wright City, Missouri
Watlow Process Systems
Manufactures:
• Process Heating Systems
#10 Cooperative Way
Wright City, Missouri 63390
Phone: 636-745-7575
FAX: 636-745-0537
Asian Manufacturing Facilities
Singapore
Watlow Asia Engineering
Manufactures:
• FIREROD Heaters
• Thermocouples
• Pump Line Heaters
• Controllers
• Power Controllers
16 Ayer Rajah Crescent, #03-23
Singapore 139949
Phone: +65-6777-1266
FAX: +65-6777-7662
23
Customer
Assistance
Watlow
Manufacturing
Facilities
European Manufacturing Facilities
Germany
Watlow GmbH
Manufactures:
• Cable Heaters
• Cartridge Heaters
(FIREROD, EB Cartridge and
Metric FIREROD)
• Silicone Rubber Heaters
• K-RING® Heaters
• Pump Line Heaters
• Electronic Assemblies
Lauchwasenstr. 1
Postfach 1165
D 76709 Kronau, Germany
Phone: +49-7253-94-00-0
FAX: +49-7253-94-00-44
Italy
Watlow Italy, S.r.l.
Manufactures:
• Thermocouples
Via Meucci 14
20094 Corsico - MI, Italy
Phone: +39-02-4588841
FAX: +39-02-45869954
United Kingdom
Watlow Limited
Manufactures:
• Band Heaters
• Cartridge Heaters
• FIREROD Heaters
• Silicone Rubber Heaters
• Thermocouples
Robey Close
Linby Industrial Estate
Linby, Nottingham, England
NG15 8AA
Phone: +44-0-115-964-0777
FAX: +44-0-115-964-0071
Latin American Manufacturing
Facilities
Mexico
Watlow de Mexico, S.A. de C.V.
Manufactures:
• FIREROD Heaters
(Cartridge and Metric)
• Ceramic Knuckle Heaters
• THINBAND® Heaters
• HV Band Heaters
• Silicone Rubber Heaters
• Tubular Heaters
• Cable Heaters
Av. Epigmenio Gonzalez No. 5
Col. Parques Industriales
Querétaro C.P. 76130
Querétaro, Mexico
Phone: +52-442-217-62-35
Fax: +52-442-217-64-03
Sales Support
United States Sales Offices
Atlanta
1320 Highland Lake Drive
Lawrenceville, GA 30045-8225
Phone: 770-972-4948
Fax: 770-972-5138
Austin
12343 Hymeadow, Suite 2I
Austin, TX 78750-1830
Phone: 512-249-1900
Fax: 512-249-0082
Birmingham
308 Honeysuckle Lane
Chelsea, AL 35043-9669
Phone: 205-678-2358
Fax: 205-678-2567
24
Charlotte
10915 Tara Oaks Drive
Charlotte, NC 28227-5493
Phone: 704-573-8446
Fax: 866-422-5998
Cleveland
28 West Aurora Road
Northfield, OH 44067-2063
Phone: 330-467-1423
Fax: 330-467-1659
Chicago
1320 Chase Street, Suite 2
Algonquin, IL 60102-9668
Phone: 847-458-1500
Fax: 847-458-1515
Dallas
609 Storrs St.
Rockwall, TX 75087
Phone: 972-620-6030
Fax: 972-620-8620
Cincinnati
Denver
5945 West Sumac Avenue
Littleton, CO 80123-0886
Phone: 303-798-7778
Fax: 303-798-7775
4700 Duke Drive, Suite 125
Mason, OH 45040-9379
Phone: 513-398-5500
Fax: 513-398-7575
W
A
T
L
O
W
Customer
Assistance
United States Sales Offices Cont.
Detroit
155 Romeo Road, Suite 600
Rochester, MI 48307-1580
Phone: 248-651-0500
Fax: 248-651-6164
Houston
3403 Chapel Square Drive
Spring, TX 77388-5160
Phone: 281-440-3074
Fax: 281-440-6873
Indianapolis
160 W. Carmel Drive, Suite 204
Carmel, IN 46032-4745
Phone: 317-575-8932
Fax: 317-575-9478
Kansas City
P.O. Box 15539
Lenexa, KS 66285-5539
Phone: 913-897-3973
Fax: 913-897-4085
Los Angeles
1914 West Orangewood Avenue
Suite 101
Orange, CA 92868-2005
Phone: 714-935-2999
Fax: 714-935-2990
Maryland/Virginia
85 Old Dublin Pike
Doylestown, PA 18901-2468
Phone: 215-345-8130
Fax: 215-345-0123
Milwaukee/Appleton
400 South Linwood Avenue, Suite 13
Appleton, WI 54914-4970
Phone: 920-993-2161
Fax: 920-993-2162
Minneapolis
14551 Judicial Road
Suite 127
Burnsville, MN 55306-5529
Phone: 952-892-9222
Fax: 952-892-9223
Nashville
212 Hidden Lake Road
Hendersonville, TN 37075-5502
Phone: 615-264-6148
Fax: 615-264-5654
Saint Louis
12001 Lackland Road
St. Louis, MO 63146-4039
Phone: 636-441-5077
Fax: 636-447-8770
New England
4 John Tyler Street, Suite E
Merrimack, NH 03054-4800
Phone: 603-882-1330
Fax: 603-882-1524
San Francisco
780 Montague Expressway,
Suite 308
San Jose, CA 95131-1317
Phone: 408-434-1894
Fax: 408-435-5409
New York/Upstate
6032 Old Beattie Road
Lockport, NY 14094-7943
Phone: 716-438-0454
Fax: 716-438-0082
Orlando
5514 Meadow Pine Ct.
Orlando, FL 32819
Phone: 407-351-0737
Fax: 407-351-6563
Philadelphia
85 Old Dublin Pike
Doylestown, PA 18901-2468
Phone: 215-345-8130
Fax: 215-345-0123
Phoenix
14664 North 15th Drive
Phoenix, AZ 85023-5179
Phone: 602-795-7712
Fax: 602-298-6960
Pittsburgh
1241 West North Avenue
Pittsburgh, PA 15233-1935
Phone: 412-322-5004
Fax: 412-322-1322
Portland
1306 Northeast 149th Place
Vancouver, WA 98684-3658
Phone: 360-254-1009
Fax: 360-254-2912
Sacramento
1698 River Oaks Circle
Fairfield, CA 94533-7797
Phone: 707-425-1155
Fax: 707-425-4455
Customer Assistance
Sales Support
Seattle
1420 NW Gilman Blvd., Suite 2571
Issaqua, WA 98027-5394
Phone: 425-222-4090
Fax: 425-222-5162
Tampa/St. Petersburg
831 Huntington Court
Winter Park, FL 32789-4722
Phone: 407-647-9052
Fax: 407-647-5466
Tulsa
4444 East 66th Street, Suite 101
Tulsa, OK 74136-4205
Phone: 918-496-2826
Fax: 918-494-8901
Asian Sales Offices
Australia
Watlow Australia Pty. Ltd.
23 Gladstone Park Drive
Tullamarine, VIC 3043
Australia
Phone: 61 (39) 335-6449
FAX: 61 (39) 330-3566
Sales Territory: Australia,
New Zealand
Asian Sales Offices
China
Watlow China
Rm 1903, Chang De Building
No. 478-5 Chang Shou Road
Shanghai 200060, China
Tel: +86-21-62772138
+86-21-62273133
Fax: +86-21-62278559
Sales Territory : China
25
Customer
Assistance
Japan
Watlow Japan Ltd.
Azabu Embassy Heights 106
1-11-12 Akasaka
Minato-Ku, Tokyo, Japan 107-0052
Phone: 011-81-3-5403-4688
FAX: 011-81-3-5575-3373
Sales Territory: Japan
Korea
Watlow Korea Co., Ltd.
3rd Fl., Taehong Bldg.
20-6 Yangjae-dong, Seocho-gu
Seoul, Korea 137-130
Phone: 82 (2) 575-9804
FAX: 82 (2) 575-9831
Sales Territory: Korea
Malaysia
Watlow Malaysia Sdn Bhd
38B Jalan Tun Dr Awang
11900 Bayan Lepas, Penang
Malaysia
Phone: 60 (4) 641-5977
FAX: 60 (4) 641-5979
Sales Territory: Malaysia
Singapore
Watlow Singapore Pte. Ltd.
55 Ayer Rajah Crescent, #03-23
Singapore 139949
Phone: +(65) 67739488
FAX: +(65) 67780323
Sales Territory: Singapore, South
East Asia , Hong Kong, India, China
Sales Support
Taiwan
Watlow Taiwan
10F-1 No. 189
Chi-Shen 2nd Road
Kaohsiung, Taiwan, 801
Phone: 886-7-288-5168
FAX: 886-7-288-5568
Sales Territory: Taiwan
26
Canadian Sales Offices
Ontario
Watlow Ontario
60 Bristol Road East, Suite 460
Mississauga, Ontario L4Z 3K8
Canada
Phone: 905-979-3507
FAX: 905-979-4296
Quebec and Atlantic Canada
Watlow Quebec & Atlantic Canada
C.P. 68084
Blainville, Quebec J7C 4Z4 Canada
Phone: 450-433-1309
FAX: 450-433-0457
Western Canada
Watlow Western Canada
9912 Lougheed Highway
Burnaby, British Columbia V3J 1N3
Canada
Phone: 604-444-4881
Fax: 604-444-4883
European Sales Offices
France
Watlow France, S.A.R.L.
Immeuble Somag
16 Rue Ampere
Cergy Pointoise 95307
Phone: 33 (1) 3073-2425
FAX: 33 (1) 3073-2875
Sales Territory: France
Germany
Watlow GmbH
Industriegebiet Heidig
Lauchwasenstr. 1
Postfach 1165
76709 Kronau, Germany
Phone: +49-7253-9400-0
FAX: +49-7253-9400-44
Sales Territory:
All Other European Countries
Italy
Watlow Italy, S.r.l.
Via Meucci 14
20094 Corsico - MI, Italy
Phone: +39-02-4588841
Fax: +39-02-45869954
Sales Territory: Italy
United Kingdom
Watlow Limited
Robey Close Linby Ind. Estate
Linby Nottingham
England, NG15 8AA
Phone: +44 (0) 115 964 0777
FAX: +44 (0) 115 964 0071
Sales Territory: Great Britain, Ireland
Latin American Sales Office
Mexico
Watlow de Mexico S.A. de C.V.
Av. Epigmenio Gonzalez No. 5
Col. Parques Industriales
Querétaro CP-76130
Querétaro, Mexico
Phone: +52 442 217-62-35
FAX: +52 442 217-64-03
Sales Territory: Mexico and
Latin America
Corporate Headquarters
Watlow Electric
Manufacturing Company
St. Louis, MO
12001 Lackland Road
St. Louis, MO 63146
Phone: 314-878-4600
FAX: 314-434-1020
Sales Territory: All countries and
Canadian provinces not specified.
W
A
T
L
O
W
Auto-Tuning PID
Controllers
SD31
Modbus™ is a registered trademark of Schneider
Automation, Inc.
Auto-Tuning PID
UL® and C-UL® are registered trademarks of
Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc.
Output 1
Control
Input
Control or Alarm
Output 2
Control, Alarm or
Communications
Variable burst fire
• Prolongs heater life
• Reduces replacement costs
“Save and Restore” feature
• Allows the user to save individual
or factory settings
Specifications
Line Voltage/Power
• 100 to 240VÅ(ac), +10/-15
percent; (85-264VÅ[ac]) 50/60Hz,
±5 percent
• 24Vı(ac/dc), +10/-15 percent;
50/60Hz, ±5 percent
• 10VA maximum power
consumption
• Data retention upon power failure
via nonvolatile memory
Environment
• -18 to 65°C (0 to 149°F) operating
temperature
• -40 to 85°C (-40 to 185°F) storage
temperature
• 0 to 90 percent RH, non-condensing
Accuracy
• Calibration accuracy and sensor
conformity: ±0.1 percent of span,
±1°C @ the calibrated ambient
temperature and rated line voltage
• Calibration ambient temperature =
25°C ±3°C (77°F ±5°F)
• Accuracy span: 540°C (1000°F)
minimum
• Temperature stability: ±0.1°C/°C
(±0.2°F/°F) rise in ambient
maximum
Agency Approvals
• UL® 3121, C-UL®‚ CSA, CE,
IP65/NEMA 4X
• NSF for Type J, K, T and E
thermocouples
27
Single-Loop
The SERIES SD family of PID
temperature controllers utilizes
today’s advanced micro-electronics
technology to provide the value,
benefits and accuracy you’ve come
to expect from Watlow. The SERIES
SD31 offers improved accuracy of
0.1 percent of span as well as a
faster sampling rate of 6.5Hz in a
1
⁄32 DIN package.
The SERIES SD31 controller delivers
many flexible, user-friendly options.
Easily choose factory or user
defaults and display either process
or set point values. Process inputs
are scalable and invertible from the
front panel. Other features include
Variable Burst Fire and flexible
Outputs, that users can select as
On-Off, Heat/Cool or as Process or
Deviation Alarms. Users can also
select between 11 different Thermocouples, a 100 Ohm RTD, a 0 to
20mA or 0 to 10V process input - all
from the front panel - which
eliminates the need for dip-switches.
With optional EIA-485 communications, you can configure,
monitor and data log with such
optional software products like
WATVIEW.
Features and Benefits
Simplified navigation
• Allows users to navigate forwards
or backwards from any menu
INFOSENSE™ sensor technology
• Thermal sensing technology
improves accuracy by a minimum
of 50 percent
Watlow’s patented User Defined
Menu System
• Allows users to define, save, and
access their most important Menu
settings
Agency approvals
• UL®‚ C-UL®, CE IP65/NEMA 4X,
plus CSA and NSF
Auto-Tuning PID
Controllers
SD31
Specifications Cont.
Controller
• Microprocessor based userselectable control modes
• Single universal input, up to three
outputs
• Control sampling rates: Input =
6.5Hz, Display = 10Hz and
Outputs = 6.5Hz
Operator Interface
• Single 4 digit, 7 segment LED
display
• “Set” infinity and up down keys
• Isolated EIA-485 Modbus™ serial
communications, 9600, 19.2K
or 38.4K baud rates
Wiring Termination-Touch Safe
Terminals
• Input power and control outputs
12 to 22 AWG
• Sensor inputs and process
outputs 20 to 28 AWG
Universal Input
• Thermocouple, grounded or
ungrounded sensors
• RTD 2- or 3-wire, platinum, 100Ω
@ 0°C calibration to DIN-curve
(0.00385 Ω/Ω/°C)
• Process, 0-20mA @ 100Ω, or
0-10VÎ(dc) @ 20kΩ input
impedance; Scalable
• Inverse scaling
• >20MΩ input impedance
• Maximum of 20Ω source resistance
Allowable Operating Range
Type J:
0 to
815°C
(32 to 1500°F)
Type K:
-200 to 1370°C
(-328 to 2500°F)
Type T:
-200 to
400°C
(-328 to
750°F)
Type N:
0 to 1300°C
(32 to 2372°F)
Type E:
-200 to
800°C
(-328 to 1470°F)
Type C:
0 to 2315°C
(32 to 4200°F)
Type D:
0 to 2315°C
(32
to 4200°F)
28
F.O.B.: Winona, Minnesota
Type PTII:
0 to 1395°C
(32 to 2543°F)
Type R:
0 to 1760°C
(32 to 3200°F)
Type S:
0 to 1760°C
(32 to 3200°F)
Type B:
0 to 1816°C
(32 to 3300°F)
RTD (DIN): -200 to
800°C
(-328 to 1472°F)
Process: -1999 to 9999 units
Control Outputs
Outputs 1 or 2
• User selectable for heat/cool as
on-off, P, PI, PD, PID or
Alarm action.
• Electromechanical relay. Form
A, rated 2A @ 120VÅ(ac),
2A @ 240VÅ(ac) or 2A @
30VÎ(dc)
• Switched dc non-isolated
minimum turn on voltage of
6VÎ(dc) into a minimum 500Ω
load with a maximum on voltage
of not greater than 12VÎ(dc)
into an infinite load. Maximum
switched dc power supply
current available for up to two
outputs is 60mA
• Solid state relay, Form A, 0.5A @
24VÅ(ac) minimum, 264VÅ(ac)
maximum, opto-isolated, without
contact suppression
• Process output (Non Isolated)
User-selectable 0-10VÎ(dc),
0-5VÎ(dc), 1-5VÎ(dc) @
1KΩ minimum, 0-20mA, 4-20mA
@ 800Ω maximum
• Open collector 42VÎ(dc) @
250mA maximum
• EIA-485 serial communications
with Modbus™ protocol
(output 2 only)
• 9600, 19.2K or 38.4 baud rates
Communications
• Modbus™ EIA-485
• WATVIEW
Dimensions
• 1⁄32 DIN size
• 97.8 mm (3.85 in.) behind panel
maximum
• Width 52.6 mm (2.07 in.)
• Height 29.7 mm (1.17 in.)
Ordering Information
To order, complete the model number on the right with the information below.
S D 31 - _ _ _ A- A A_ _
DIN Size
3 = 1⁄32 DIN
Control Type
1 = 1⁄32 DIN single display PID control
Power Supply
H = 100 to 240Vı(ac/dc)
L = 24 to 28Vı(ac/dc)
Output 1
C = Switched dc
K = SSR, Form A, 0.5A
F = Universal process
J = Mechanical relay, Form A, 2A
Output 2
A = None
C = Switched dc
K = SSR, Form A, 0.5A
J = Mechanical relay, Form A, 2A
U = EIA-485 Modbus™ communications
Display Colors and Custom Options
0R = Red (Single display units)
0G = Green (Single display units)
XX = Custom options, special overlays, etc.
W
A
T
L
O
W
Auto-Tuning PID
Controllers
SD_C
The features and performance
offered by SERIES SD_C controllers
make them ideally suited for a broad
range of applications in temperature
and process control.
Available in ⁄32, ⁄16, ⁄8 and ⁄4 DINpanel mount sizes, Watlow’s SERIES
SD_C controllers are backed by an
industry leading three-year warranty
from Watlow Winona. The SERIES
SD_C controllers are NSF, UL® and
C-UL® listed, CSA and CE certified
and include the NEMA 4X (IP65) seal.
1
1
1
1
Features and Benefits
INFOSENSE™ sensor technology
• Improves sensor accuracy by a
minimum of 50 percent
Auto-Tuning PID
Advanced features of SERIES SD_C
controllers include EIA-485 Modbus™
serial communications, Watlow’s
INFOSENSE™ sensor technology,
infrared remote communications
operation, Watlow’s patented User
Definable Menu System and a “Save
and Restore” feature that allows the
restoration of either factory or userdefined settings.
Output 1
SD
1
2
3
Control
Input
%
Control or Alarm
Output 2
Control, Alarm or Communications
Output 3 *
Infrared
Configure**
Control or Alarm
*1/32 DIN cannot have an Output 3.
**Infrared option is not available on 1/32 DIN.
Infrared
Monitor**
WATVIEW HMI
(Human Machine Interface)
Specifications
• Permits operation, configuration
and data logging via a standard
Windows® PC
• 100 to 240VÅ(ac), +10/-15
percent; (85-264VÅ[ac])
50/60Hz, ±5 percent
Infrared communications (optional)
• 24Vı(ac/dc), +10/-15 percent;
50/60Hz, ±5 percent
Line Voltage/Power
User Defined Menu System
• Facilitates recipe management
and data logging
• Allows the user to assign up to
20 parameters in the operations
menu
• Allows easier controller setup,
operation and monitoring
• Data retention upon power failure
via nonvolatile memory
Dual displays
• Improves operational efficiency
Environment
• Provides better recognition of
process changes
• -18 to 65°C (0 to 149°F) operating
temperature
“Save and Restore” feature
• 10VA maximum power consumption
• Allows the user to save individual
or factory settings
• -40 to 85°C (-40 to 185°F) storage
temperature
Variable burst fire
• 0 to 90 percent RH, non-condensing
• Prolongs heater life
• Reduces replacement costs
Windows® is a registered trademark of Microsoft
Corporation.
29
Single-Loop
The SERIES SD_C controllers
include a universal sensor input with
up to three outputs that can be
programmed for heat or cool temperature control or to operate as
process or deviation alarms.
Programming inverse scaling is also
simplified with the user-friendly setup menu, providing additional value
without additional cost.
Auto-Tuning PID
Controllers
SD_C
Operator Interface
• Dual 4 digit, 7 segment LED
displays
Specifications Cont.
Accuracy
• Calibration accuracy and sensor
conformity: ±0.1 percent of span,
±1°C @ the calibrated ambient
temperature and rated line
voltage
• Calibration ambient temperature
= 25°C ±3°C (77°F ±5°F)
• Accuracy span: 540°C (1000°F)
minimum
• Temperature stability: ±0.1°C/°C
(±0.2°F/°F) rise in ambient
maximum
• Advance, infinity and up down
keys
• Optional IrDA infrared port (not
available on 1⁄32 DIN)
• Isolated EIA-485 Modbus™ serial
communications. 9600, 19.2K or
38.4K baud rates
Wiring Termination -Touch Safe
Terminals
• Input power and control outputs
12 to 22 AWG
• Sensor inputs and process
outputs 20 to 28 AWG
Agency Approvals
Universal Input
• UL® 3121, C-UL®‚ CSA, CE,
NEMA 4X/IP65
• Thermocouple, grounded or
ungrounded sensors
• Limit version features FM approval
• RTD 2- or 3-wire, platinum, 100Ω
@ 0°C calibration to DINcurve (0.00385 Ω/Ω/°C)
• NSF for Type J, K, T and E
thermocouples
Controller
• Microprocessor based userselectable control modes
• Process, 0-20mA @ 100Ω, or
0-10VÎ(dc) @ 20kΩ input
impedance; Scalable
• Single universal input, up to three
outputs
• Inverse scaling
• Control sampling rates:
Input = 6.5Hz, Display = 10Hz,
and Outputs = 6.5Hz
• Maximum of 20Ω source
resistance
• >20MΩ input impedance
Dimensions
DIN Size
Behind Panel
(max.)
Width
Height
⁄32 DIN
97.8 mm
(3.85 in.)
52.6 mm
(2.07 in.)
29.7 mm
(1.17 in.)
⁄16 DIN
97.8 mm
(3.85 in.)
52.1 mm
(2.05 in.)
52.1 mm
(2.05 in.)
⁄8 DIN
Vertical
97.8 mm
(3.85 in.)
52.8 mm
(2.08 in.)
99.8 mm
(3.93 in.)
⁄8 DIN
Horizontal
97.8 mm
(3.85 in.)
99.8 mm
(3.93 in.)
52.8 mm
(2.08 in.)
⁄4 DIN
101.1 mm
(3.98 in.)
99.8 mm
(3.93 in.)
99.8 mm
(3.93 in.)
1
1
1
1
1
30
Allowable Operating Range
Type J:
0 to
815°C
(32 to 1500°F)
Type K:
-200 to 1370°C
(-328 to 2500°F)
Type T:
-200 to
400°C
(-328 to
750°F)
Type N:
0 to 1300°C
(32 to 2372°F)
Type E:
-200 to
800°C
(-328 to 1470°F)
Type C:
0 to 2315°C
(32 to 4200°F)
Type D:
0 to 2315°C
(32 to 4200°F)
Type PTII:
0 to 1395°C
(32 to 2543°F)
Type R:
0 to 1760°C
(32 to 3200°F)
Type S:
0 to 1760°C
(32 to 3200°F)
Type B:
0 to 1816°C
(32 to 3300°F)
RTD (DIN): -200 to
800°C
(-328 to 1472°F)
Process: -1999 to 9999 units
Control Outputs
Outputs 1, 2 , 3 (Output 3 not
available on 1⁄32 DIN)
• User selectable for heat/cool as
on-off, P, PI, PD, PID or Alarm
action. Not valid for limit controls
• Electromechanical relay. Form A,
rated 2A @ 120VÅ(ac), 2A @
240VÅ(ac) or 2A @ 30VÎ(dc)
• Switched dc non-isolated
minimum turn on voltage of
6VÎ(dc) into a minimum 500Ω
load with a maximum on voltage
of not greater than 12VÎ(dc) into
an infinite load. Maximum switched
dc power supply current available
for up to two outputs is 60mA
• Solid state relay, Form A, 0.5A @
24VÅ(ac) minimum, 264VÅ(ac)
maximum, opto-isolated, without
contact suppression
W
A
T
L
O
W
Auto-Tuning PID
Controllers
SD_C
Advantages of IDC include
automated logging of key process
variables, increased accuracy
and ease of use for recipe or configuration setups. Infrared data
communications enhances controller
data exchange in physically
restricting environments (such as
semiconductor clean rooms,
governmental radio-active test labs
or those hard to reach areas) and
reduces the use of paper to record
instrument information as well as
human transposition errors.
Specifications Cont.
• Process output (Non Isolated)
User-selectable 0-10VÎ(dc),
0-5VÎ(dc), 1-5VÎ(dc) @
1KΩ minimum, 0-20mA, 4-20mA
@ 800Ω maximum
• Electromechanical relay. Form C,
rated 5A @ 120VÅ(ac),
5A @ 240VÅ(ac) or 5A @
30VÎ(dc)
• 9600, 19.2K or 38.4K baud rates
WATVIEW HMI
WATVIEW, Watlow’s Windows®
based HMI (Human Machine Interface) software, supports the SERIES
SD controllers. The software can be
used to setup, monitor and edit the
values of controller parameters, to
monitor and manage alarms and to
log and graph process data.
Auto-Tuning PID
Infrared Communications
• EIA-485 serial communications
with Modbus™ protocol
The Infrared Data Communications
(IDC) option is available on all
SERIES SD controller models except
the 1⁄32 DIN and can support complete
SERIES SD parameter configuration
and operation. The IDC option
supports wireless communications
with PDAs (personal digital assistants)
or other devices equipped with
infrared communications that support
the Infrared Data Association (IrDA)
1.0 Standard.
The actual user interface or
configuration is dependent on the
master device application software.
A source for this software is Instant
HMI from Software Horizons.
For more information, visit
www.instanthmi.com/watlow.
Typical Block Diagram
SERIES SD PID
SERIES SD Limit
1
Input 1
2
3
Oven
LIMIT SD
SD
%
1
2
3
Output 1
Output 2
RESET
Limit
Sensor
Temperature
Sensor
Alarm
Heaters
Form C Relay
Note: Consult user manual for proper wiring.
31
Single-Loop
• Open collector 42VÎ(dc) @
250mA maximum
Auto-Tuning PID
Controllers
SD_C
F.O.B.: Winona, Minnesota
Ordering Information
To order, complete the model number on the right with the information below.
SERIES SD_C = Single channel PID controllers
DIN Sizes
3 = 1⁄32 DIN
6 = 1⁄16 DIN
8 = 1⁄8 DIN Vertical
9 = 1⁄8 DIN Horizontal
4 = 1⁄4 DIN
INFOSENSE™ Sensor Technology
Watlow’s INFOSENSE™ sensor
technology improves temperature
sensing accuracy by 50 percent.
Each INFOSENSE “smart” sensor
contains four numeric values located
on tags attached to each sensor that
are programmed into the SERIES SD
controller memory. These values
characterize Watlow sensors and
allow the controller to provide
enhanced accuracy.
Control Type
C = PID Control Dual Display
Power Supply
H = 100 to 240Vı(ac/dc)
L = 24 to 28Vı(ac/dc)
Output 1
C = Switched dc
K = SSR, Form A, 0.5A
F = Universal process
J = Mechanical relay, Form A, 2A
Output 2
A = None
C = Switched dc
K = SSR, Form A, 0.5A
J = Mechanical relay, Form A, 2A
U = EIA-485 Modbus™ communications
Output 3 (Not available on 1⁄32 DIN)
A = None
C = Switched dc/open collector
K = SSR, Form A, 0.5A
F = Universal process
E = Mechanical relay, Form C, 5A
Infrared Comms Options (IrDA)
A = None (Default selection on 1⁄32 DIN)
R = IrDA ready (Not available on 1⁄32 DIN)
Display Colors and Custom Options
RG= Red Green (Dual display units)
RR = Red Red (Not available on 1⁄32 DIN Dual Display)
XX = Custom options, special overlays, etc.
32
S D _C - _ _ _ _ - _ A _ _
W
A
T
L
O
W
Auto-Tuning PID
Controllers
SD6C_D
Auto-Tuning PID
Features and Benefits
Variable burst fire
• Prolongs heater life
Ordering Options including
DeviceNet™ on CAN or
SEMI-SIG-ODVA protocols
• Provides DeviceNet™ on CAN for
Semiconductor applications
• DeviceNet™ on CAN for the
packaging or general industrial
markets
DeviceNet™
SD D-NET
SD
1
2
3
%
Control
Input
Output 1
Control or Alarm
Output 2
NET MOD
Control or Alarm
Specifications
Accuracy
Line Voltage/Power
• Calibration accuracy and sensor
conformity: ±0.1 percent of span,
±1°C @ the calibrated ambient
temperature and rated line
voltage
• 100 to 240VÅ(ac), +10/-15
percent; (85-264VÅ[ac]) 50/60Hz,
±5 percent
• 24Vı(ac/dc), +10/-15 percent;
50/60Hz, ±5 percent
• 10VA maximum power
consumption
• Data retention upon power failure
via nonvolatile memory
Environment
• -18 to 65°C (0 to 149°F) operating
temperature
• Calibration ambient temperature =
25°C ±3°C (77°F ±5°F)
• Accuracy span: 540°C (1000°F)
minimum
• Temperature stability: ±0.1°C/°C
(±0.2°F/°F) rise in ambient
maximum
• -40 to 85°C (-40 to 185°F) storage
temperature
• 0 to 90 percent RH,
non-condensing
DeviceNet™ is a trademark of the Open DeviceNet
Vendors Association.
33
Single-Loop
Watlow SERIES SD6C_D offers
excellent static Set Point control and
application flexibility in a 1⁄16th DIN
panel mount package. The SERIES
SD6C_D controller has been
successfully tested for use with both
ODVA and Semi-conductor SIG
standards for DeviceNet™ on CAN
networks.
The SD6C_D single channel
controller includes a universal
sensor input with two outputs that
can be configured as heat or cool or
alarm. The DeviceNet™ communications interface is supplied
with either a five pin circular DIN
connector for Semiconductor SIG
specific applications, or with a five
position removable screw terminal
connector for traditional market
applications.
Additional features of the SD6C_D
family of controllers include Watlow’s
INFOSENSE™ sensor technology, a
user definable menu system and a
Save and Restore feature that allows
the restoration of factory and user
defined parameter values.
Watlow SD6C_D DeviceNet™
controllers offer a three year
warranty; are UL®, C-UL® listed,
CSA, CE and NSF certified and
include IP65/NEMA 4 ratings.
Auto-Tuning-PID
Controllers
SD6C_D
Specifications Cont.
Agency Approvals
• UL® 3121, C-UL®‚ CSA, CE,
IP65/NEMA 4X and NSF-2
• Microprocessor based
user-selectable control modes
• Single universal input, up to three
outputs
• Control sampling rates: Input =
6.5Hz, Display = 10Hz and
Outputs = 6.5Hz
Operator Interface
• Dual 4 digit, 7 segment LED
displays
• Advance, infinity and up down
keys
• DeviceNet™ on CAN or
SEMI-SIG-ODVA protocols
Allowable Operating Range
Type J:
0
(32
to
to
815°C
1500°F)
Type K:
-200
(-328
to
to
1370°C
2500°F)
Type T:
-200
(-328
to
to
400°C
750°F)
Type N:
0
(32
to
to
1300°C
2372°F)
-200
(-328
Type C:
0
(32
Type D:
0
(32
Type PTII:
0
(32
Type R:
0
(32
Type S:
0
(32
Type B:
0
(32
RTD (DIN): -200
(-328
Process: -1999
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
800°C
1470°F)
2315°C
4200°F)
2315°C
4200°F)
1395°C
2543°F)
1760°C
3200°F)
1760°C
3200°F)
1816°C
3300°F)
800°C
1472°F)
9999 units
Type E:
34
F.O.B.: Winona, Minnesota
Control Outputs
Outputs 1 and 2
• User selectable for heat/cool as
on-off, P, PI, PD, PID or Alarm
action.
• Electromechanical relay. Form A,
rated 2A @ 120VÅ(ac), 2A @
240VÅ(ac) or 2A @ 30VÎ(dc)
• Switched dc non-isolated
minimum turn on voltage of
6VÎ(dc) into a minimum 500Ω
load with a maximum on voltage
of not greater than 12VÎ(dc) into
an infinite load. Maximum switched
dc power supply current available
for up to two outputs is 60mA
• Solid state relay, Form A, 0.5A @
24VÅ(ac) minimum, 264VÅ(ac)
maximum, opto-isolated, without
contact suppression
• Process output (Non Isolated)
User-selectable 0-10VÎ(dc),
0-5VÎ(dc), 1-5VÎ(dc) @
1KΩ minimum, 0-20mA, 4-20mA
@ 800Ω maximum
• Electromechanical relay. Form C,
rated 5A @ 120VÅ(ac),
5A @ 240VÅ(ac) or 5A @
30VÎ(dc)
• Open collector 42VÎ(dc) @
250mA maximum
Dimensions
SD6C_D or SD6R_D or SD6L_D
• 1⁄16 DIN Size
• 97.8 mm (3.85 in.) behind panel
maximum
• Width 52.1 mm (2.05 in.)
• Height 52.1 mm (2.05 in.)
Ordering Information
To order, complete the model number on the right with the information below.
S D 6 C- _ _ _ A -D _ _ _
SERIES SD6C_D = 1⁄16 DIN panel mount PID controller
with DeviceNet™
Control Type
C = PID controller
Power Supply
H = 100 to 240Vı(ac/dc)
L = 24 to 28Vı(ac/dc)
Output 1
C = Switched dc
K = SSR, Form A, 0.5A
F = Universal process
J = Mechanical relay, Form A, 2A
Output 2
A = None
C = Switched dc
K = SSR, Form A, 0.5A
J = Mechanical relay, Form A, 2A
U = EIA-485 Modbus™ communications
DeviceNet™ Communications
N = DeviceNet™ on CAN (packaging or general industrial markets)
S = SEMI-SG-ODVA compliant (semi-conductor markets)
Display Colors and Custom Options
RG= Red Green (with Watlow name and SD logo)
RR = Red Red (with Watlow name and SD logo)
AA = Red Green (SD logo only)
AB = Red Red (SD logo only)
W
A
T
L
O
W
Auto-Tuning PID
Controllers
SERIES 96
96
1
2
3
4
%
Output 1
Control
Auto-Tuning PID
Features and Benefits
Input 1
Process
Output 2
Control or Alarm
Output 3
Alarm
Input 2
Event
Output 4
Alarm, Analog or
Communications
Burst fire
• Increases heater life / better
temperature controllability
One input, one auxiliary input, four
outputs
• Powerful flexibility at a competitive
price
No dipswitches
• Easily configurable from the front
panel
Multiple set points
• Flexible automatic control
Plugable output modules
• Field expandable
Fast 10Hz sampling
• Improved control responsiveness
Programmable menus (Patented)
• Can be self-tailored for exact user
needs
Open loop break protection
• Indication of thermal loop problem
NEMA 4X (IP65)1
Specifications
• Water and corrosion resistant front
panel can be washed down
Operating Environment
• 0 to 65°C (32 to 149°F)
16 programmable ramp and soak
steps
Controller
• Microprocessor-based, user
selectable control modes
• Profiles of dynamic production
processes can be programmed
into the controller
Automatic-tuning
• Easy one step tuning of PID
control parameters
Applications
• Packaging
• Semiconductor
• Food processing
• Lab equipment
• Furnace and ovens
• Plastics
• Heat and cool auto-tune for
control outputs
• Universal input one, auxiliary
input two, four outputs
• Control outputs user selectable as
on-off, P, PI, PID
Warranty2
• Industry leading three-years
a
b
To effect NEMA 4X (IP65) rating requires a
minimum mounting panel thickness of 1.5 mm
(0.06 in.) and surface finish not rougher than
0.000812 mm (0.000032 in.).
Electromechanical relays warranted for 100,000
closures only. Solid state switching devices
recommended for applications requiring fast
cycle times or extended service life.
35
Single-Loop
Watlow’s SERIES 96 is a powerful
1
⁄16 DIN dual display controller that
offers many advanced functions.
This controller can be tailored to
perform hardware and software
needs with hardware modules that
are plugable and exchangeable,
and software menus that may be
user programmed to fit exact
application requirements.
With one universal input, a second
auxiliary input and four outputs the
SERIES 96 can be programmed to
perform: temperature measurement,
input event switching, remote set
point input, heating, boost heating,
cooling, alarms, digital communications and retransmit.
With fast 10Hz sampling, variable
time base burst firing outputs, NEMA
4X front panel and 0.1 percent
calibration accuracy, this controller
can easily handle some of the
toughest application needs.
Auto-Tuning PID
Controllers
SERIES 96
Specifications Cont.
• Input sampling rates: Single input
10Hz (100ms), dual input 5Hz
(200ms) digital filter adjustable
• Display update: 2Hz (500ms),
time filter adjustable
• Output update: burst, 0.1 to 999.9
seconds
• Input/Output/Communication
isolation
• Displayed in °C, °F, or process
units
Operator Interface
• Dual four-digit LED displays:
upper 10.2 mm (0.4 in.), lower
6.2 mm (0.244 in.)
• Advance, Up Arrow, Down Arrow,
Infinity tactile keys
Standard Conditions For
Specifications
• Ambient temperature 25°C (77°F)
±3°C, rated line voltage,
50 to 60Hz, 0 to 90 percent
RH non-condensing, 15 minute
warm-up
Universal Input 1
Thermocouple
• Type J, K, T, N, C (W5), E, Pt 2, D
(W3), B, R, S thermocouple
• >20MΩ input impedance
• Maximum 20Ω source resistance
• 30µA open detection bias
RTD
• 2- or 3-wire platinum, 100Ω
• JIS and DIN-curves
• Whole or tenth degree indication
• 150µA nominal RTD excitation
current
Process
• Range selectable: 0-10VÎ(dc),
0-5VÎ(dc), 1-5VÎ(dc), 0-20mA,
4-20mA
• Voltage input impedance 20kΩ
• Current input impedance 100Ω
• Minimum current source
resistance 1MΩ
36
• Input resolution 50,000 bits
(approx.) at full scale
• Electrical life 100,000 cycles at
rated current
• mV input impedance 20MΩ
• For resistive loads only, must use
RC suppression for inductive
loads
Input 2
Event Input
• Contact or voltage
• 20KΩ input impedance
• Voltage input: event high state
3 to 36VÎ(dc), event low state
0 to 2VÎ(dc)
• Resistance/contact input: event
high state >23kΩ, event low state
0 to 2kΩ
Remote Set Point Input: mA or
VÎ(dc) Range Selectable
• Voltage input impedance 20kΩ
• Current input impedance 100Ω
Process
• Range selectable: 0-20mA,
4-20mA, 0-5VÎ(dc), 1-5VÎ(dc),
0-10VÎ(dc)
• Reverse or direct acting
• 0 to 10VÎ(dc) voltage output into
1000Ω minimum load resistance
• 0 to 20mA current output into
800Ω maximum load resistance
• Resolution:
VÎ(dc) ranges = 2.5mV nominal
mA ranges = 5µA nominal
• Calibration accuracy:
Output Types
Open Collector/Switched DC
• Open collector configuration:
Maximum voltage 42VÎ(dc)
Maximum current 200mA
Maximum on resistance 1.1Ω
Maximum off state leakage
current 100µA
• Temperature stability 100ppm/°C
Retransmit
• Switched dc configuration:
Switched dc supply voltage
22 to 28VÎ(dc)
dc supply current limited to 30mA
• 0 to 10VÎ(dc) voltage output into
a 1,000Ω minimum load
resistance
Solid State Relay
• Optically isolated
• Zero cross switched
• Without contact suppression
• Minimum load current 0.5mA rms
• Maximum current 0.5A rms at
20 to 280VÅ(ac)
• Maximum off state leakage
current 10µA rms
• For resistive loads only, must use
RC suppression for inductive
loads
Electromechanical Relay
• Form C contact configuration
• Minimum load current 10mA @
5VÎ(dc)
• Rated resistive and inductive
loads: 2A @ 250VÅ(ac) or
30VÎ(dc) maximum
VÎ(dc) ranges = ±15mV
mA ranges = ±30µA
• Range selectable: 0-20mA,
4-20mA, 0-5VÎ(dc), 1-5VÎ(dc),
0-10VÎ(dc)
• 0 to 20mA current output into an
800Ω maximum load resistance
• Resolution:
VÎ(dc) ranges = 2.5mV nominal
mA ranges = 5µA nominal
• Calibration accuracy:
VÎ(dc) ranges = ±15mV
mA ranges = ±30µA
• Temperature stability 100ppm/°C
Communications
• EIA/TIA-485, EIA/TIA-232
• Opto-isolated
• Modbus™ RTU protocol
• 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200
baud rates
• 32 maximum units can be
connected (With additional 485
repeater hardware, up to 247
units may be connected)
W
A
T
L
O
W
Auto-Tuning PID
Controllers
SERIES 96
Allowable Operating Ranges
Type J
0
(32
to 815°C
to 1500°F)
0.1
0
(32
to 815°C
to 1500°F)
1.0
-270
(-454
to 1370°C
to 2500°F)
0.1
-200
(-328
to 1000°C
to 1832°F)
1.0
-270
(-454
to
to
400°C
750°F)
0.1
-200
(-328
to
to
400°C
750°F)
1.0
0
(32
to 1300°C
to 2372°F)
0.1
0
(32
to 1000°C
to 1832°F)
1.0
-270
(-454
to 800°C
to 1470°F)
0.1
-200
(-328
to 800°C
to 1472°F)
1.0
0
(32
to 2315°C
to 4200°F)
0.1
0
(32
to 1000°C
to 1832°F)
1.0
0
(32
to 2315°C
to 4200°F)
0.1
0
(32
to 1000°C
to 1832°F)
1.0
0
(32
to 1395°C
to 2543°F)
0.1
0
(32
to 1000°C
to 1832°F)
Type R
1.0
0
(32
to 1760°C
to 3200°F)
Type S
1.0
0
(32
to 1760°C
to 3200°F)
Type B
1.0
0
(32
to 1816°C
to 3300°F)
DIN
1.0
-200
(-328
to 800°C
to 1472°F)
0.1
-200
(-328
to 800°C
to 1472°F)
1.0
-200
(-328
to 630°C
to 1166°F)
0.1
-200
(-328
to 630°C
to 1166°F)
Type K
Type T
Type N
Type E
Type C
Type D
Pt 2
JIS
Process
Auto-Tuning PID
1.0
-1999 to 9999 units
37
Single-Loop
Specifications Cont.
Accuracy
• Input ranges
Type J
0
to 750°C
(32
to 1382°F)
Type K
-200
to 1250°C
(-328
to 2282°F)
Type T
-200
to 350°C
(-328
to 662°F)
Type N
0
to 1250°C
(32
to 2282°F)
Type E
-200
to 900°C
(-328
to 1470°F)
Type C(W5)
0
to 2315°C
(32
to 4200°F)
Type D(W3)
0
to 2315°C
(32
to 4200°F)
Pt 2
0
to 1393°C
(32
to 2540°F)
Type R
0
to 1450°C
(32
to 2642°F)
Type S
0
to 1450°C
(32
to 2642°F)
Type B
870
to 1700°C
(1598
to 3092°F)
DIN
-200
to 800°C
(-328
to 1472°F)
JIS
-200
to 630°C
(-328
to 1166°F)
Process
-1999
to 9999 units
Thermocouple Inputs
• Calibration accuracy ±0.1 percent
of span ±1°C at standard conditions
Exceptions:
Type T: 0.12 percent of span for
-200°C to -50°C (-328°F to -58°F)
Types R and S: 0.15 percent of
span for 0°C to 100°C (32°F to
212°F)
Type B: 0.24 percent of span
for 870°C to 1700°C (1598°F to
3092°F)
• Accuracy span: 540°C (1000°F)
minimum
• Temperature stability: ±0.1
degree per degree change in
ambient
RTD Inputs
• Calibration accuracy ±0.1 percent
of span ±1°C at standard
conditions
• Accuracy span: 540°C (1000°F)
minimum
• Temperature stability: ±0.05
degree per degree change in
ambient
Process Inputs
• Voltage input ranges
Accuracy ±15mV ±1 LSD at
standard conditions
Temperature stability
±100ppm/°C maximum
• Milli-amp input ranges
Accuracy ±30µA ±1 LSD at
standard conditions
Temperature stability
±100ppm/°C maximum
Agency Approvals
• UL® 916, File #E185611, C-UL®,
CE, NEMA 4X
Terminals
• Touch safe
• 22 to 12 AWG
Power
• 100-240VÅ(ac) +10 percent,
-15 percent; 50/60Hz, ±5 percent
• 24-28VÅ(ac) or VÎ(dc) +10
percent, -15 percent; 50/60Hz,
±5 percent
• 7.0VA maximum power
consumption
• Data retention upon power failure
via nonvolatile memory
Operating Environment
• 0 to 65°C (32 to 149°F)
• 0 to 90 percent RH, non-condensing
• Storage temperature: -40 to 85°C
(-40 to 185°F)
Controller Weight (approx.)
• 0.2 kg
(0.4 lb)
Auto-Tuning PID
Controllers
F.O.B.: Winona, Minnesota
Ordering Information
SERIES 96
To order, complete the code number on the right with the information below:
96 __-____-____
232
485 Comm
Retransmit
Alarm
Control
Event &
Remote
Set Point
Universal
Input
Functionality Matrix
SERIES 96 = Microprocessor-based 1⁄16 DIN, with universal
input 1. Options include: software, power supply, input 2,
outputs and display color.
Power Supply
A
=
100-240Vı(ac/dc)
B
=
24-28Vı(ac/dc)
Input 1
Input 2
Output 1
Input 2
0
=
1
=
Output 2
Output 3
Output 4
Dimensions
Overall
Height:
52 mm
Width:
52 mm
Length:
107 mm
(2.05 in.)
(2.05 in.)
(4.2 in.)
Depth behind panel surface
98.4 mm
(3.875 in.)
None
Event input and 0-5VÎ(dc)/4-20mA (Remote set point input)
Output 1
C
=
Switched dc/open collector
D
=
Electromechanical relay, Form C, 2A, without RC suppression
F
=
Universal Process, range selectable: 0-20mA, 4-20mA,
0-5VÎ(dc), 1-5VÎ(dc), 0-10VÎ(dc)
K
=
0.5A solid state relay without RC suppression
Output 2
A
=
C
=
D
=
F
=
K
=
None
Switched dc/open collector
Electromechanical relay, Form C, 2A, without RC suppression
Universal Process, range selectable: 0-20mA, 4-20mA,
0-5VÎ(dc), 1-5VÎ(dc), 0-10VÎ(dc)
0.5A solid state relay without RC suppression
Output 3
A
=
None
D
=
Electromechanical relay, Form C, 2A, without RC suppression
Output 4
A
=
D
=
R
=
U
=
M =
None
Electromechanical relay, Form C, 2A, without RC suppression
232 Communications
485 Communications
Universal Retransmit, range selectable: 0-20mA, 4-20mA,
0-5VÎ(dc), 1-5VÎ(dc), 0-10VÎ(dc)
Software/Preset Parameters
00 =
Standard software
Display/Overlay
Upper/Lower
RR =
Red/Red display
RG =
Red/Green display
GR
GG
107.747 mm
(4.242 in.)
=
=
Upper/Lower
Green/Red display
Green/Green display
Panel Cutout
44.958 mm x 44.958 mm
(1.77 in. x 1.77 in.)
98.425 mm
(3.875 in.)
52.070 mm
(2.050 in.)
96
1
59.182 mm
(2.330 in.)
9.322 mm
(0.367 in.)
38
2
3
4
%
52.070 mm
(2.050 in.)
W
A
T
L
O
W
Auto-Tuning PID
Controllers
SERIES 988/989
Input 2
Type B, C, D, E, J,
K, N, R, S, T or Pt 2
Thermocouple,
DIN/JIS RTD or
Process, Slidewire,
Current Transformer or
Digital Event
Input 3
Digital Event
Features and Benefits
L1
L2
L3
DEV
% OUT
MODE
Serial communications
A 10Hz sampling rate, along with
the burst fire
UL®, CE and NEMA 4X (IP65)
approvals
• Provides precise process control
• Help ensure product and operator
safety
• Eliminate the need for external
devices
Output 3
Alarm
Transmitter Power Supply
Analog Retransmit
SERIES 988
• Support for one-on-one as well as
remote networking of controllers
Signal conditioner power supply
options
DISPLAY
AUTO
MAN
• Add to application versatility
• Provides advanced cascade, ratio
or dual PID control
L4
Output 4
Alarm
Transmitter Power Supply
Serial Communications
Percent Power
• Provide application versatility
Enhanced software option
Output 2
Closed Loop PID,
on-off Control
Open Loop
Percent Power
Control Alarm
Transmitter Power Supply
PROCESS
Process Deviation
from Set Point
Three inputs and four outputs
Universal high or low voltage
power supply, horizontal or vertical
mounting and display color options
WATL W
Input 1
Type B, C, D, E, J,
K, N, R, S, T or Pt 2
Thermocouple,
DIN/JIS RTD or
Process
Output 1
Closed Loop PID,
on-off Control
Open Loop
Percent Power
Auto-Tuning PID
Performance Capabilities
• Accuracy to 0.1 percent of span
• Operating environment
0 to 65°C (32 to 149°F)
Auto-tune
Heat/Cool
Dual digital displays
• Provide simultaneous viewing of
the set point and the actual process
Applications
• Any process requiring cascade,
ratio, burst fire or slidewire
feedback control
• Food processing
• Packaging
• Plastics processing
• Semiconductor manufacturing
1
Three-year warranty 2
• Provides Control Confidence®
2
To effect NEMA 4X (IP65) rating requires a
minimum mounting panel thickness of 1.5 mm
(0.06 in.) and surface finish not rougher than
0.000812 mm (0.000032 in.).
Electromechanical relays warranted for 100,000
closures only. Solid state switching devices
recommended for applications requiring fast
cycle times or extended service life.
39
Single-Loop
Watlow's SERIES 988 (vertical)
and SERIES 989 (horizontal)
temperature/process controllers are
designed and manufactured for the
demanding requirements of the
industrial controller market. No other
controller offers the flexibility,
compact size and durability of the
SERIES 988/989. The controller’s
industry leading feature set is its
compact 1⁄8 DIN size and NEMA 4X1
(IP65) water and corrosion resistant
front panel.
The SERIES 988/989 has the autotuning and alarm features you would
expect. Additionally, several unique
control algorithms, not common to
this price range, extend the SERIES
988/989’s application potential. From
the long list of product features, the
SERIES 988/989's ability to provide
single unit cascade control of a
process is perhaps the most unique.
Other features include heater current
monitoring, remote set point input,
differential or ratio control.
Auto-Tuning PID
Controllers
SERIES 988/989
Enhanced Software
Cascade Control
Cascade control is a control strategy
in which one control loop provides the
set point for another loop. It allows the
process or part temperature to be
reached quickly while minimizing
overshoot. Cascade is used to
optimize the performance of thermal
systems with long lag times.
• Precise control via cascade
configuration
• Display of both process variables
• Low cost; one unit does the work
of two
• Increased operator productivity
with fast setup
Ratio Control
Whether mixing materials or
controlling temperature indirectly,
ratio control with the SERIES 988
provides automatic set point
adjustments in response to system
changes.
• Simplified process control; one
controller does the work of two
• Low cost solution; one controller,
display access - both process
variables
• One controller for many applications
• Easy setup; increased operator
productivity
Outer-Loop
Thermocouple
Input 1
WATL W
Input 2
L1
L2
DEV
% OUT
L3
40
Oil Out
L4
DISPLAY
AUTO
MAN
MODE
Inner-Loop
Thermocouple
Heater
Limit
SERIES 988
Limit Sensor
Lube O il Ta nk
WATL W
4-20mA Valve Controller Output
PROCESS
L1
L2
L3
DEV
L4
Material A
Controlled Stream
DISPLAY
% OUT
Analog
Input 1
AUTO
MAN
Analog
Input 2
MODE
Material C
Mixed Material
SERIES 988
Material B
Wild Stream
Flow Sensor
Flow Sensor
Current Monitor
Current monitoring provides system
performance and status information.
The SERIES 988 accepts current
transformer signal with no
conditioning.
• Easily accessible heater status
• System performance data for
troubleshooting or design
enhancements
• System protection; fast shut down
with overcurrent
• Easy setup: no external signal
conditioner required
Oil In
Output 1
PROCESS
Power Controller
WATL W
Controller
Output
PROCESS
L1
DEV
% OUT
Analog
Input 1
Analog
Input 2
L2
L3
Current
Transformer
L4
DISPLAY
Alarm
Output
AUTO
MAN
MODE
SERIES 988
Current Monitor
Thermocouple
Circulation
Heater
W
A
T
L
O
W
Auto-Tuning PID
Controllers
SERIES 988/989
Enhanced Software Cont.
Slidewire Feedback Valve Control
Valve positioning feedback (percent
open, percent close) provides
precise process control. The SERIES
988 is configurable for a wide variety
of valves.
• Accepts virtually any valve input
• Front panel valve position display
• Increased valve life with
anti-hunting parameter
• Greater process efficiency with
precise control
• Easy setup; increased operator
productivity
Agency Approvals
• CE
• 89/336/EEC Electromagnetic
Compatibility Directive
CCW - Open
Input 1
L1
DEV
% OUT
L2
L3
L4
CW - Close
DISPLAY
AUTO
MAN
Input 2
MODE
SERIES 988
Slide Wire Feedback / Position Sensor
Thermocouple
Use Up To Four Outputs
The controller can have up to four
outputs total, including the standard
Watlow output options, along with
retransmit and communications. Up
to three outputs can be defined as a
power supply output to power
external signal conditioners,
eliminating the need for an external
power supply. The output types are
recognized by the controller to
simplify setup and operation, with no
need for DIP switches.
Three Inputs Allow Greater
Flexibility
To accommodate unique system
configurations, the SERIES 988
offers two universal analog inputs
and one event (digital) input. The
event input allows the operator to
select a function at the close of a
switch. This can lock out the front
panel, switch PID values, go to a
remote or second set point, etc. The
inputs are optically isolated from all
outputs, eliminating the need for
external isolation circuitry.
•
•
•
•
•
•
• MODE, AUTO/MAN, DISPLAY,
UP and DOWN keys
EN 50081-2: 1994 Emissions
EN 50082-2: 1994 Immunity
73/23/EEC Low Voltage Directive
EN 61010-1: 1993 Safety
UL® #873, C-UL® File #43684
NEMA 4X
Operator Interface
• Local/remote set point capability
• Dual, 4 digit LED displays
Upper: 10 mm (0.4 in.)
Lower: 8 mm (0.3 in.)
Auto-Tuning PID
Specifications
Control Mode
• Dual input, quad output, optional
retransmit of set point or process
variable
• Programmable direct and
reverse acting control outputs
• One step auto-tuning
PROCESS
Accuracy
• Calibration accuracy and sensor
conformity: ±0.1 percent of span,
±1 LSD, 25°C ±3°C (77°F ±5°F)
ambient and rated line voltage
±10 percent
• Accuracy span: 540°C (1000°F)
minimum
• Temperature stability: 0.1°C/°C
(±0.2°F/°F) change in ambient
41
Single-Loop
Product Highlights
Easy to Operate
The SERIES 988's operator interface
features the simplicity you expect
from a Watlow controller. The display
key allows the operator to view
information pertinent to the process,
including, among others, deviation
from set point, percent output and
units of measurement.
The display key also returns the
operator to the process and set point
display from anywhere in the menu
system. The setup menu is
segmented into input, output, global,
and communication parameters and
you can move forward or backward
throughout the parameter sequence.
WATL W
Auto-Tuning PID
Controllers
Type R
SERIES 988/989
Specifications Cont.
Sensors/Inputs
• Contact input for software
function select (event input)
• Thermocouple Types B, C1, D1,
E, J, K, N, R, S, T and Pt 21
• RTD resolution in 1° or
0.1° increments
• Process variables: 0-50mV,
0-20mAÎ(dc), 4-20mAÎ(dc),
0-5VÎ(dc), 1-5VÎ(dc),
0-10VÎ(dc)
• Slidewire, digital event input or
heater current options
• Sensor break protection
de-energizes system for safety,
or selectable bumpless transfer to
manual operation. Latching
or non-latching
• °C or °F display or process units,
user selectable
Input Range
Specified temperature ranges
represent the controller's operational
span. Refer to page 228 for ANSI
(thermocouple) and DIN/JIS (RTD)
temperature sensor ranges/
tolerances.
Thermocouple
Type B
870
(1598
1
Type C
0
(32
Type D1
0
(32
Type E
-200
(-328
Type J
0
(32
Type K
-200
(-328
Type N
0
(32
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
1816°C
3300°F)
2316°C
4200°F)
2316°C
4200°F)
799°C
1470°F)
816°C
1500°F)
1371°C
2500°F)
1300°C
2372°F)
0 to 1760°C
(32 to 3200°F)
Type S
0 to 1760°C
(32 to 3200°F)
Type T
-200 to
399°C
(-328 to
750°F)
Pt 21
0 to 1395°C
(32 to 2543°F)
RTD Resolution (DIN or JIS)
1° (DIN)
-200 to
800°C
(-328 to 1472°F)
1° (JIS)
-200 to
630°C
(-328 to 1166°F)
0.1° (DIN and JIS)
-73.3 to 537.7°C
(-99.9 to 999.9°F)
Process
0-5VÎ(dc)
1-5VÎ(dc)
0-10VÎ(dc)
0-20mAÎ(dc)
4-20mAÎ(dc)
0-50mVÎ(dc)
Slidewire
Current
Potentiometer
-999
-999
-999
-999
-999
-999
100
0
0
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
9999 units
9999 units
9999 units
9999 units
9999 units
9999 units
1200Ω
50mA
1200Ω
Output Options
• Solid state relay, Form A, 0.5A @
24VÅ(ac) min., 253VÅ(ac) max.,
opto-isolated, burst fire switching.
With or without contact
suppression. Off state output
impedance is 20kΩ with RC
suppression, 31MΩ without
contact suppression
• Open collector or switched dc
signal provides a minimum turn on
voltage of 3VÎ(dc) into a
minimum 500Ω load; maximum on
voltage not greater than 32VÎ(dc)
into an infinite load, isolated
• Electromechanical relay2,
Form C, 5A @ 120/240VÅ(ac), 6A
@ 28VÎ(dc), 1⁄8 hp @ 120VÅ(ac),
125VA @ 120VÅ(ac). With or
without contact suppression. Off
state output impedance with RC
suppression is 20kΩ
• Process, 0-20mAÎ(dc),
4-20mAÎ(dc) into 800Ω
maximum, 0-5VÎ(dc), 1-5VÎ(dc),
or 0-10VÎ(dc) into 1kΩ minimum
reverse acting, isolated
• Electromechanical relay2,
Form A/B, 5A @ 120/240VÅ(ac),
6A @ 28VÎ(dc), 1⁄8 hp @
120VÅ(ac), 125VA @ 120VÅ(ac),
without contact suppression
• External transmitter power supply,
5, 12 or 20VÎ(dc) @ 30mA
• EIA/TIA-232 communications or
EIA/TIA-485, EIA/TIA-422
communications, opto-isolated
• Retransmit: 0-20mAÎ(dc),
4-20mAÎ(dc) with 600Ω max.
load impedance, or 0-5VÎ(dc),
1-5VÎ(dc) and 0-10VÎ(dc) with
500Ω min. load impedance
Line Voltage/Power
• 100-240Vı(ac/dc) +10 percent,
-15 percent; 50/60Hz, ±5 percent
• 24-28Vı(ac/dc) +10 percent,
-15 percent; 50/60Hz ±5 percent
• Power consumption 16VA
maximum
• Fused internally (factory
replaceable only) Slo-Blo® type
(time-lag):
2A, 250V for high voltage versions
5A, 250V for low voltage versions
• Data retention upon power failure
via non-volatile memory
1
2
Not an ANSI symbol.
Electromechanical relays warranted for 100,000
closures only. Solid state switching devices
recommended for applications requiring fast
cycle times or extended service life.
Slo-Blo® is a registered trademark of Littelfuse, Inc.
42
W
A
T
L
Auto-Tuning PID
Controllers
SERIES 988/989
Specifications Cont.
Operating Environment
• 0 to 65°C (32 to 149°F)
• 0 to 90 percent RH, non-condensing
Storage Temperature
• -40 to 85°C (-40 to 185°F)
Terminals
• #6 compression universal head
screws, accepts 20-14 gauge
wire
Availability
Four working days for orders less
than 20 units. For orders over 20
units, consult factory for release and
shipment schedules.
a
b
Electromechanical relays warranted for 100,000
closures only. Solid state switching devices
recommended for applications requiring fast
cycle times or extended service life.
A current transformer input cannot be used in
conjunction with a process output installed on
output 1.
F.O.B.: Winona, Minnesota
Ordering Information
To order, complete the code number to the right with the information below:
98__-____-____
SERIES 988/989 = Single channel, temperature/process controller,
1 analog input, 1 digital input, 1 analog or digital input, 4 outputs.
Power Supply & Mounting
6
= 24 to 28Vı(ac/dc) nominal, vertical mounting
7
= 24 to 28Vı(ac/dc) nominal, horizontal mounting
8
= 100 to 240Vı(ac/dc) nominal vertical mounting
9
= 100 to 240Vı(ac/dc) nominal horizontal mounting
Software
A
= Standard
B
= Enhanced (Includes cascade, ratio, duplex, dual PID set)
S
= Special customer feature
Input 1
1
= Thermocouple only (Excluding Type B, R and S)
2
= Universal signal conditioner
Input 2
0
= None
1
= Thermocouple only (Excluding Type B, R and S)
2
= Universal signal conditioner
3
= Slidewire feedback
4
= Current transformerb
5
= Digital contact event (One digital event is standard on all units)
Output 1
B
= Solid state relay, Form A, 0.5A, with RC suppression
C
= Switched dc or open collector, isolated
D
= Electromechanical relaya, Form C, 5A with RC suppression
E
= Electromechanical relaya, Form C, 5A without contact suppression
F
= Universal process, 0-5VÎ(dc), 1-5VÎ(dc), 0-10VÎ(dc), 0-20mA,
4-20mA, isolated
K
= Solid state relay, Form A, 0.5A, without contact suppression
Output 1
A
= None
B
= Solid state relay, Form A, 0.5A, with RC suppression
C
= Switched dc or open collector, isolated
D
= Electromechanical relaya, Form C, 5A with RC suppression
E
= Electromechanical relaya, Form C, 5A without contact suppression
F
= Universal process 0-5VÎ(dc), 1-5VÎ(dc), 0-10VÎ(dc),
0-20mA, 4-20mA, isolated
K
= Solid state relay, Form A, 0.5A, without contact suppression
T
= External signal conditioner power supply, 5, 12 or 20VÎ(dc) @ 30mA
Output 3
A
= None
B
= Solid state relay, Form A, 0.5A, with RC suppression
C
= Switched dc, isolated
J
= Electromechanical relaya, Form A or B, 5A without contact suppression
K
= Solid state relay, Form A, 0.5A without contact suppression
M
= Retransmit, 0-20mA, 4-20mA
N
= Retransmit, 0-5VÎ(dc), 1-5VÎ(dc), 0-10VÎ(dc)
T
= External signal conditioner power supply, 5, 12 or 20VÎ(dc) @ 30mA
Output 4
A
= None
B
= Solid state relay, Form A, 0.5A, with RC suppression
C
= Switched dc or open collector, isolated
D
= Electromechanical relaya, Form C, 5A with RC suppression
E
= Electromechanical relaya, Form C, 5A without contact suppression
K
= Solid state relay, Form A, 0.5A without contact suppression
R
= EIA/TIA-232 communications, opto-isolated
S
= EIA/TIA-485/EIA/TIA-422 communications, opto-isolated
U
= EIA/TIA-232/EIA/TIA-485 software selectable
T
= External signal conditioner power supply, 5, 12 or 20VÎ(dc) @ 30mA
Display
GG = Green/Green displays
RR = Red/Red displays
GR = Green/Red displays
XX = Custom overlays or default settings
RG = Red/Green displays
Auto-Tuning PID
Shipping Weight
• 1.35 kg
(3.0 lbs)
W
43
Single-Loop
Controller Weight
• 0.45 kg
(1.0 lb)
O
Auto-Tuning PID
Controllers
SERIES 988/989
Dimensions
100 mm
(4.03 in.)
WATL W
Vertical Orientation
WATL W
PROCESS
Overall
Height:
100 mm
(4.03 in.)
DSPY
MODE
DEV
AUTO
% OUT
MAN
55 mm
(2.18 in.)
PROCESS
Width:
55 mm
(2.18 in.)
L1
Depth:
120 mm
(4.74 in.)
% OUT
L2
DEV
L3
L4
100 mm
(4.03 in.)
DISPLAY
L1
L2
L3
SERIES 989
L4
AUTO
MAN
Bezel
Height:
100 mm
(4.03 in.)
Width:
55 mm
(2.18 in.)
Depth:
15 mm
(0.68 in.)
Height:
90 mm
(3.6 in.)
Width:
45 mm
(1.7 in.)
Depth:
105 mm
(4.06 in.)
MODE
SERIES 988
55 mm
(2.18 in.)
Chassis
Adjustable
Mounting Bracket
Panel
Panel Cutout
Maximum Panel
Thickness
9.65 mm (0.38 in.)
90 mm
(3.6 in.)
92 mm + 0.8
(3.62 in. + 0.03 -0.00)
45 mm + 0.6
(1.77 in. + 0.02 -0.00)
105 mm
(4.06 in.)
15 mm
(0.68 in.)
System Diagram
DIN-A-MITE®
Power Controller
High Limit
Mechanical
Contactor
Heater
Thermocouple
Limit Sensor
WATL W
PROCESS
SERIES LV
Limit
Controller
SERIES 982
Chart
Recorder
44
Thermocouple
Temperature Sensor
W
A
T
L
O
W
Auto-Tuning PID
Controllers
SERIES F4P
The SERIES F4P 1⁄4 DIN temperature
process controllers offer the performance and features to meet a
wide range of industrial processing
needs. The F4P process controllers
are ideally suited for semiconductor
manufacturing equipment, plastics
processing and packaging
equipment and industrial process
control applications.
The four digital inputs can be used
to remotely modify the operation of
the controller or enable the display
of pre-defined operator messages.
Advanced features include cascade,
ratio, differential, slidewire and
retransmit options.
Serial communication and dual
alarm relays are included in the base
unit. The SERIES F4P is packaged
with a NEMA 4X front face to
withstand harsh environments and a
four inch deep case with removable
connectors for wiring convenience.
The SERIES F4P controller is manufactured by ISO 9001 registered
Watlow Winona and is backed with a
three-year warranty.
4 Digital
Inputs
1B
…A larm 1 L o D eviation
–1 F
A djusts V alue
B ack
N ext
1 Communication
Input/Output
1
2
2 Control
Outputs
2 Alarm
Outputs
2 Retransmit
Outputs
(Optional)
Guided set-up
• Removes “guess work” from the
set up process
High performance 16-bit
microprocessor
• Provides precise process control
with 20Hz update rate (input 1)
• Saves time by reducing
programming errors
• Calibration accuracy of
+/- 0.1 percent of span
High definition, four-line LCD display
• Simplifies the set up process and
operations
Universal input
• Allows application versatility
• Quickly and easily identifies
process, alarm and set point values
Modbus™ communications ready
• Equipped to handle RS-232 or
EIA-485 communications
Features and Benefits
Information “I” key
• Displays essential elements from
the user manual on board
Customized menuing
• Quickly displays up to 16
parameters
Auto-Tuning PID
The enhanced software option
enables the SERIES F4P to support
complex control applications such
as cascade, ratio and differential
control.
F4
1A
1 or 3 Universal
Analog Inputs
• Eliminates the need for dip switches
Field upgradeable firmware
• Downloads available @ no charge
from www.watlow.com/F4
• Reduces downtime
• Eliminates the need for an RMA
• Allows users to create custom
messaging and easily identify key
events or alarms
45
Single-Loop
This competitively priced controller
features a four line, high definition
LCD interface display along with an
information key that makes set up
and control operation significantly
easier with less chance for error. A
16 bit microprocessor supports all
the accuracy and performance
advantages you have come to
expect from a Watlow controller.
Auto-Tuning PID
Controllers
SERIES F4P
General Purpose Control Operation
The SERIES F4P temperature
process controller is a single channel
PID controller that supports either
closed or open loop operation. The
design utilizes the latest technology
to provide a controller capable to
meeting very complex processing
needs while maintaining an easily
understood operator interface.
Full non-abbreviated parameter
choices are displayed using a four
line liquid crystal display. The display
is back lit for wide angle viewing. The
firmware guides the operator through
parameter choices for feature
configuration. An information key (I)
provides the operator with detailed
help information regarding the
parameter or feature being
configured. The main page menu can
be programmed to display output
power through 16 control variables
including: bar graphs, set points and
operating ranges. Up to four
programmable messages can be
activated remotely to let the operator
know that the process requires their
attention.
Five sets of PID values can be autotuned to support varying system
reaction over the complete operating
range. Up to 10 offset points can
programmed to compensate for
differences between the actual
process value and sensor readings
caused by sensor placement.
Control Inputs
Up to three universal analog inputs
are supported. These inputs are
configured through software to
support thermocouples, RTDs and
process (voltage/current) sensors.
Auxiliary inputs 2 and 3 can function
as a remote set point input, sources
for retransmission or as the outer loop
for cascade operation.
Digital Inputs
These four inputs are programmable
and can be used to remotely modify
the operation of the controller as well
as displaying pre-programmed
messages on the operations display.
46
Control Outputs
Heat/cool or reverse/direct action is
supported. Time based outputs can
be configured for variable burst fire or
a cycle time can be selected. On-off
boost heat or boost cool operation is
also supported. Boost operation is
enabled based on load power
requirements.
Alarms
Two alarms are included in the base
unit. These alarms are programmable
as process, deviation or rate.
Serial Communications
Both EIA-232 and EIA-485
communications are included in the
base unit. The SERIES F4P operates
via the Modbus™ RTU protocol.
The F4P responds to requests for
information only when queried. Baud
rate selections are 9600 or 19200.
Retransmit
Up to two optional programmable
voltage or current signal retransmit
outputs are supported. Retransmit
sources include up to three process
variables, set point and output
percent power.
Enhanced Control Operation
When the enhanced operation option
is ordered, the F4P process controller
is supplied with two additional
universal analog inputs (inputs 2 and
3) and enhanced firmware to support
numerous features that utilize the two
additional inputs. The enhanced
control option can be configured to
support cascade control, differential
control, ratio control and slidewire
valve control. The enhanced control
option can also alternate between
control inputs, display up to three
process variables and support
remote set point operation.
In this sample application the SERIES
F4P process controller utilizes the
enhanced cascade control feature to
heat lube oil to 51.6˚C (125˚F).
Cascade control is a control strategy
in which one control loop provides
the set point for another loop. It allows
the process or part temperature to be
reached quickly while minimizing
overshoot. Cascade is used to
optimize the performance of thermal
systems with long lag times. Input 3
measures the lube oil temperature
before it leaves the tank. Input 1
measures the heater temperature.
The input 3 process value is
compared to the set point which
generates and internal set point used
to control the heater.
Specifications
Universal Analog Inputs 1 (2 and 3
optional)
• Update rates: IN1 = 20Hz, IN2
and IN3 = 10Hz
Thermocouple
• Type J, K, T, N, C (W5), E, Pt 2,
D (W3), B, R, S
RTD
• 2- or 3-wire platinum, 100Ω
• JIS or DIN-curves, 1.0 or 0.1
indication
• 500 or 1KΩ RTD available
Process
• Input resolution ≈ 50,000 bits at
full scale
• Range selectable: 0-10VÎ(dc),
0-5VÎ(dc), 1-5VÎ(dc), 0-50mV,
0-20mA, 4-20mA
• Voltage input impedance 20KΩ
• Current input impedance 100Ω
Digital Inputs (4)
• Update rate = 10Hz
• Contact or dc voltage; 36VÎ(dc)
max
• 10KΩ input impedance
Control Outputs (1A, 1B)
• Update rate = 20Hz
Open Collector/Switched dc
• Internal load switching (nominal):
Switched dc, 22 to 28VÎ(dc),
limited @ 30mA
• External load switching max.:
Open collector 42VÎ(dc) @ 0.5A
Solid-state Relay
• Zero switched, optically coupled,
0.5A @ 24VÅ(ac)
minimum, 253VÅ(ac) max.
W
A
T
L
O
W
Auto-Tuning PID
Controllers
SERIES F4P
• 39VA maximum power
consumption
Specifications Cont.
• Form C, 2A @ 250VÅ(ac) or
30VÎ(dc) max.
• Data retention upon power failure
via nonvolatile memory. Sensor
input isolation from input to input
to output to communication
circuitry is 500VÅ(ac).
• Resistive or inductive load
Operating Environment
• Without contact suppression
• 0 to 65°C (32 to 149°F)
Process Outputs (Optional
Retransmit)
• 0 to 90 percent RH, non-condensing
Electromechanical Relay
• Update rate = 1Hz
dc ranges = 2.5mV nominal
mA ranges = 5µA nominal
• Calibration accuracy:
dc ranges = ±15mV
mA ranges = ±30µA
• Temperature stability 100ppm/°C
Alarm Outputs
• Output update rate 1Hz
• Electromechanical relay, Form C,
2A @ 30VÎ(dc) or 240VÅ(ac) max.
Communications
• EIA-232 and EIA-485 serial
communications with Modbus™
RTU protocol. 9600 or 19.2K
baud rate
Safety and Agency Approvals
• Calibration accuracy and sensor
conformity: ±0.1 percent of span
±1°C @ 25°C ±3°C (77°F ±5°F)
ambient, and rated line voltage
±10 percent with the following
exceptions:
Type T: 0.12 percent of span for
-200°C to -50°C (-328°F to -58°F)
Types R and S: 0.15 percent of
span for 0°C to 100°C (32°F to
212°F)
Type B: 0.24 percent of span for
870°C to 1700°C (1598°F to
3092°F)
• Accuracy span: Less than or
equal to operating ranges, 540°C
(1000°F) minimum
• Temperature stability: ±0.1°C/°C
(±0.1°F/°F) rise in ambient for
thermocouples
• UL®/C-UL® 916-listed,
File # E185611 process control
equipment
• ±0.05°C/°C (±0.05°F/°F) rise in
ambient for RTD sensors
• NEMA 4X and IP65
• Process: 5, seven-segment
LED red
• CE to EN 61010-1 and 61326
Terminals
• Touch-safe, removable terminal
blocks, accepts 12 to 22-gauge
wire
Power
• 100-240VÅ(ac), -15 percent,
+10 percent; 50/60Hz, ±5 percent
• 24-28Vı(ac/dc), -15 percent,
+10 percent (order option)
Displays
• Control interface display:
high-definition LCD green
Sensor Operating Ranges
Type J:
0 to 815°C
(32 to 1500°F)
Type K:
-200 to 1370°C
(-328 to 2500°F)
Type T:
-200 to 400°C
(-328 to 750°F)
Type N:
0 to 1300°C
(32 to 2372°F)
Input ranges
Type J:
0
(32
Type K:
-200
(-328
Type T:
-200
(-328
Type N:
0
(32
Type E:
-200
(-328
Type C:
0
(32
Type D:
0
(32
Type Pt 2:
0
(32
Type R:
0
(32
Type S:
0
(32
Type B:
0
(32
RTD (DIN): -200
(-328
RTD (JIS): -200
(-328
Process: -19,999
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
Auto-Tuning PID
• Resolution:
Accuracy
-200 to 800°C
(-328 to 1470°F)
Type C:
0 to 2315°C
(32 to 4200°F)
Type D:
0 to 2400°C
(32 to 4352°F)
Type Pt 2:
0 to 1395°C
(32 to 2543°F)
Type R:
0 to 1760°C
(32 to 3200°F)
Type S:
0 to 1760°C
(32 to 3200°F)
Type B:
0 to 1816°C
(32 to 3300°F)
RTD (DIN): -200 to 800°C
(-328 to 1472°F)
RTD (JIS): -200 to 800°C
(-328 to 1166°F)
Process: -19,999 to 30,000 units
Sensor Accuracy Ranges
815°C
1500°F)
1370°C
2500°F)
400°C
750°F)
1300°C
2372°F)
800°C
1470°F)
2315°C
4200°F)
2400°C
4352°F)
1395°C
2543°F)
1760°C
3200°F)
1760°C
3200°F)
1816°C
3300°F)
800°C
1472°F)
800°C
1166°F)
30,000 units
47
Single-Loop
• User-selectable 0-10VÎ(dc),
0-5VÎ(dc), 1-5VÎ(dc) @1KΩ min.,
0-20mA, 4-20mA @ 800Ω max.
• Storage temperature: -40 to 70°C
(-40 to 158°F)
Type E:
Auto-Tuning PID
Controllers
F.O.B.: Winona, Minnesota
Ordering Information
SERIES F4P
To order, complete the code number to the right with the information below:
SERIES F4P = 1⁄4 DIN temperature process controller
F4 P
-
SERIES F4P
Panel Cutout
92 mm x 92 mm
(3.622 in. x 3.622 in.)
Temperature/Process Controller
Single channel temperature/
process controller, two alarms,
EIA-232/485 comms, four
event inputs
99.82 mm
(3.930 in.)
99.82 mm
(3.930 in.)
108.81 mm
(4.824 in.)
Power Supply
H =
100-240Vı(ac/dc)
L =
24-28Vı(ac/dc)
Output 1A
C =
Open collector/switched dc
E =
Electromechanical relay, Form C
2 amp without contact suppression
K =
Solid state Form A 0.5 amp relay
without contact suppression
F =
Process, 0-5, 1-5, 0-10VÎ(dc),
0-20mA, 4-20mA
108.05 mm
(4.254 in.)
97.79 mm
(3.850 in.)
Output 1B
A =
None
E =
Electromechanical relay, Form C
2A without contact suppression
C =
Open collector/switched dc
K =
Solid state Form A 0.5 amp relay
without contact suppression
F =
Process, 0-5, 1-5, 0-10VÎ(dc),
0-20mA, 4-20mA
Enhanced Control Operation
A =
Standard control operation
B =
Enhanced control operation, dual universal
inputs, cascade, ratio, duplex, differential,
slidewire
10.26 mm
(.404 in.)
Specifications Cont.
Dimensions
• Width x height x depth
99 mm x 99 mm x 97 mm panel
mount (3.93 in. x 3.93 in. x 3.85 in.)
48
Auxiliary Retransmit Module
0 =
None
1 =
Single retransmit output 0-5, 1-5, 0-10VÎ(dc),
0-20mA, 4-20mA
2 =
Dual retransmit outputs 0-5, 1-5, 0-10VÎ(dc),
0-20mA, 4-20mA
Language and RTD Options
1 = English with 100Ω RTD
2 = German with 100Ω RTD
3 = French with 100Ω RTD
4 = Spanish with 100Ω RTD
5
6
7
8
=
=
=
=
English with 500 & 1KΩ RTD
German with 500 & 1KΩ RTD
French with 500 & 1KΩ RTD
Spanish with 500 & 1KΩ RTD
Display and Custom Options
RG= Red/Green display
XX = Custom options, software, setting parameters, overlays
A
-
W
A
T
L
O
W
Auto-Tuning PID
Controllers
SERIES PD
Single Loop
Watlow’s new SERIES PD controller
utilizes embedded Ethernet technology to provide a convenient,
economical means for setting up
and viewing key process variables
such as temperature, pressure and
humidity. The DIN-rail mount SERIES
PD controller offers up to four
control/alarm outputs, as well as a
digital/current transformer input.
Advanced features of the SERIES PD
controller include internal data
logging of key control parameters,
INFOSENSE-P technology, heater
burn out detection and an enhanced
control algorithm.
Auto-Tuning PID
Ethernet-based products are rapidly
gaining popularity in industrial
applications because they allow
an instantaneous exchange of
information between processing
equipment and the company’s
management system.
Ethernet
Communications
1 Universal
Analog Input
(Single Channel)
PD
PID Controller
Power
Ethernet Link
Ethernet Activity
1
Input Error
2
Input Error
Output
1
Output
2
Output
3
Output
4
4 outputs
can be
configured or
event (alarm)
outputs. Any
output can be
assigned
to either
channel 1 or 2.
Address
The SERIES PD controller is backed
by a three-year warranty from Watlow
Winona and is UL® 508, C-UL®, CSA
and CE approved.
49
Single-Loop
Watlow’s SERIES PD controller is
ideally suited for a wide range of
temperature or process control
applications where the operator
interface is supported from a remote
location. The SERIES PD provides
interfacing via embedded firmware
which serves dedicated web pages.
These pages support key functions
including operation, alarm monitoring,
configuration and are displayed using
standard web browser software.
The SERIES PD is also capable of
generating e-mail messages for
remote alarm notification.
Auto-Tuning PID
Controllers
Advanced control algorithm
SERIES PD
Single Loop
• Tighter process control
Heater burn out detection
Features and Benefits
• Improved process yields
Ethernet connectivity
Internal data logging
• Convenient, easy to use operator
interface
• Reduces external hardware
demands
• Simplified process monitoring
Virtual or hardware alarms with
e-mail delivery
DIN-rail sub panel mounting
• Remote alarm notification
• Quick, economic installation
Watlow INFOSENSE™ sensor
technology
Front View
• INFOSENSE™ technology
improves sensor accuracy by a
minimum of 50 percent
8 mm
(0.318 in.)
Bracket for
Panel Mounting
(#6 Screw
or m3.5 Required)
Top/Bottom
Mount
Hole Offset
Side View
PD
PID Controller
Power
Ethernet Link
107 mm
(4.225 in.)
146 mm
(3.750 in.)
DINrail
Ethernet Activity
1
Input Error
2
Input Error
118 mm
(4.650 in.)
Output
1
Output
2
Output
3
Output
4
Min. Clearance
Between Rail
Centerlines
146 mm
(5.750 in.)
Address
129 mm
(5.062 in.)
Min. Clearance 51 mm
(2 in.)
73 mm
(2.875 in.)
42 mm
(1.637 in.)
PD
PD
Attachment Angle
PID Controller
PID Controller
DINrail
Power
Power
Ethernet Link
Ethernet Link
Ethernet Activity
Ethernet Activity
1
Input Error
1
Input Error
2
Input Error
2
Input Error
10°
Address
1
Output
Output
2
Output
2
Output
3
Output
3
Output
4
Output
4
Address
42 mm
(1.650 in.)
50
1
Output
W
A
T
L
O
W
Auto-Tuning PID
Controllers
SERIES PD
Single Loop
Specifications
Power
• 24Vı(ac/dc), +10/-15 percent,
50/60Hz, ±5 percent
• 12VA maximum power
consumption
Universal Inputs
(Electrically Isolated)
• Thermocouple, grounded or
ungrounded sensors
• RTD 2-or 3-wire, platinum,
100Ω @ 0°C calibration to
DIN-curve (0.00385 Ω/Ω/°C)
• Process 0-20mA @ <100Ω,
or 0-10VÎ(dc) @ 10kΩ input
impedance (50,000 bits @
full scale)
Environment
• Contact or dc voltage
• 0 to 65°C (32 to 149°F) operating
temperature
• 10KΩ input impedance
• -40 to 85°C (-40 to 185°F) storage
temperature
• 0 to 50mA CT input into 100Ω
impedance
• 0 to 90 percent RH, non-condensing
Allowable Input Operating Range
Type J:
-200 to
1200°C
(-328 to
2192°F)
Type K:
-270 to
1370°C
(-454 to
2500°F)
Type T:
-270 to
400°C
(-454 to
750°F)
Type N:
-270 to
1300°C
(-454 to
2372°F)
Type E:
-270 to
975°C
(-454 to
1790°F)
Type C:
0 to
2315°C
(32 to
4200°F)
Type D:
0 to
2315°C
(32 to
4200°F)
Type PTII:
0 to
1395°C
(32 to
2543°F)
Type R:
0 to
1760°C
(32 to
3200°F)
Type S:
0 to
1760°C
(32 to
3200°F)
Type B:
0 to
1815°C
(32 to
3300°F)
RTD (DIN): -200 to
800°C
(-328 to
1470°F)
Process V:
0 to
10VÎ(dc)
Process I:
0 to
20mA
Accuracy
• Calibration accuracy and sensor
conformity: ±0.1 percent of span,
±1°C @ the calibrated ambient
temperature and rated line voltage
• Calibration ambient temperature
= 25°C ±3°C (77°F ±5°F)
• Accuracy span: 540°C (1000°F)
minimum
• Temperature stability: ±0.1°C/°C
(±0.2°F/°F) rise in ambient
maximum
Agency Approvals
• UL® 508, C-UL®, CSA and CE
Controller
• Microprocessor based userselectable control modes
• Single or dual channel universal
inputs
• Current transformer inputs/digital
inputs
• Up to four programmable outputs
• Update rates, inputs = 10Hz,
outputs = 10Hz
Current Transformer Inputs
• Open collector/switched dc
• Open collector 42VÎ(dc)
maximum @ 0.5A
• Switched dc 22 to 28VÎ(dc)
limited @ 30mA
• Solid state relay, Form A, 0.5A @
24VÅ(ac) minimum, 264VÅ(ac)
maximum, opto-isolated, without
contact suppression
• User-selectable 0-10VÎ(dc), 1KΩ
minimum, scalable, 0-20mA @
800Ω maximum, scalable
• Electromechanical relay. Form C,
rated 5A @ 120VÅ(ac) or 5A @
240VÅ(ac) or 5A @ 30VÎ(dc)
Auto-Tuning PID
Digital Inputs
• User selectable as: on-off, P, PI,
PD, PID, heat, cool, alarm action
or retransmit with process output
type hardware
Communications
• TCP/IP/Ethernet
• Modbus™ TCP
• Ethernet RJ 45 connector,
10 base T
• HTTP interface
• DHCP, auto IP or fixed IP address
Dimensions
• Width x height x depth
42 mm x 116 mm x 132 mm
(1.64 in. x 4.56 in. x 5.19 in.)
DIN-rail or chassis mount, DIN-rail
spec DIN 5022
35 mm x 7.5 mm (1.38 in. x 0.30 in.)
Operator Interface
• Browser based HMI (Human
Machine Interface)
Wiring Termination
• Touch safe removable terminals
• 14 to 22 AWG
51
Single-Loop
• Data retention upon power failure
via nonvolatile memory
Control/Alarm Outputs (1 - 4)
Auto-Tuning PID
Controllers
SERIES PD
Single Loop
F.O.B.: Winona, Minnesota
Ordering Information
To order, complete the model number on the right with the information below.
P D S_ - _ _ _ _ - _ A _ _
Auxiliary Inputs
1 =
Dual digital inputs
2 =
One CT input and one digital input
3 =
Dual CT inputs (dual channel only)
Output 1
C =
K =
F =
J =
Switched dc, open collector
SSR, Form A, 0.5A
Universal process
Mechanical relay, Form A, 2Aa
Output 2
A =
C =
K =
E =
None
Switched dc, open collector
SSR, Form A, 0.5A
Mechanical relay, Form C, 2Aa
Output 3
A =
C =
K =
F =
E =
None
Switched dc, open collector
SSR, Form A, 0.5A
Universal process
Mechanical relay, Form C, 2Aa
Output 4
A =
C =
K =
E =
None
Switched dc, open collector
SSR, Form A, 0.5A
Mechanical relay, Form C, 2Aa
On Board Data Logging
0 =
None
1 =
16 megabytes of memory
Custom Options
AA =
Watlow logo
BB =
No logo
a
Electromechanical relays warranted for 100,000
closures only. Solid state switching devices
recommended for applications requiring fast cycle
times or extended service life.
52
W
A
T
L
O
W
Auto-Tuning PID
Controllers
MICRODIN®
Auto-Tuning PID
The behind-the-panel, DIN-rail mount
design of the MICRODIN controller
provides significant savings by
eliminating the need for expensive
panel hole punching and by
simplifying panel wiring. Combine
these savings with touch-safe
removable connectors and the result
is low installation costs and minimal
down time for service and repair.
MICRODIN is the perfect solution for
applications that require top-of-theline dedicated temperature control
loops with no user interface
integrated into a complete control
system using digital communications.
The absence of an operator interface
makes the MICRODIN excellent for
use with PC-based software, such as
WATVIEW.
Performance Capabilities
• Accuracy to ±0.1 percent of span
• Operating environment
0 to 65°C (32 to 149°F)
Features and Benefits:
EIA-485 serial communications
with Modbus™ RTU protocol
• Provides easy remote set up and
monitoring
DIN-rail/sub panel mounting
• Offers fast, low cost installation,
eliminating expensive panel hole
punch operations
MicroDIN
Temperature Controller
Single
Thermocouple,
or RTD Input
Control Output
PID or on-off
Power
Comms
Control
Output
Alarm
Output
Alarm
Input
Error
Address
Touch-safe removable connectors
Applications
• Easy and quick to remove for
replacement and servicing
• Food processing
Single control output with alarm
output
• Packaging
• Provides simple programming and
operation of controller
• Scientific instrumentation
• Medical and dental equipment
• Plastics processing
Discrete loops of control,
auto-tuning
• Gives performance equal to
discrete panel-mount controllers,
highly reliable
10Hz update rate
• Improves input sampling and
controllability
53
Single-Loop
The Watlow MICRODIN® SERIES
controllers provide precise
measurement and control with easy
communication to personal
computers and programmable logic
controllers used in laboratories and
industry. This superior controller is
designed with simple and straightforward commands to make it easy to
set up and operate. The MICRODIN
is a high-performance controller that
is capable of stand-alone operation
and uses the popular Modbus™
communications protocol with a
standard EIA-485 serial interface for
parameter set up and viewing.
Auto-Tuning PID
Controllers
MICRODIN
Sensors Inputs
Output 1: User selectable
Specifications
• Sensor input sampling rate:
10 samples/second 10Hz
• On-off; P, PI, PD, PID heat or cool
action adjustable switching
differential: 1 to 9999 or 0.1 to
999.9 °C or °F
Control Mode
• Microprocessor-based, user
selectable control modes
• Single input, single output
• Heat or cool auto-tuning
Agency Approvals
• UL®, C-UL® 508 recognized, File
#E102269 Industrial Control
Equipment
• CE to EN 61010
Operator Interface
• EIA-485 serial communications
with Modbus™ RTU protocol
• Thermocouple, grounded or
ungrounded sensors
• RTD 2- or 3-wire, platinum, 100Ω @
0˚C calibration to JIS curve
(0.003916Ω/Ω/°C) or DIN-curve
(0.00385Ω/Ω/°C)
• Proportional band: 0 to 9999, or
0.0 to 999.9 °C or °F
• Sensor break protection deenergizes control output to protect
system or selectable bumpless
transfer to manual operation
• Reset: 0.00 to 99.99 repeats per
minute
• °F or °C, user selectable
Type B T/C
• 9600, 19200 user selectable baud
rates
0
(32
to 1816°C
to 3300°F)
Type C (W5) T/C
• One to 63 user selectable
address range
0
(32
to 2315°C
to 4200°F)
Type D (W3) T/C
0
(32
to 2315°C
to 4200°F)
• Cycle time: 0.1 to 60.0 seconds
• Process or deviation alarm with
flashing alarm status indicator
• Alarm with separate high and low
set points
• Hysteresis: 1 to 9999° switching
differential
Primary Control Output
(heating or cooling)
• Calibration accuracy and sensor
conformity: ±0.1 percent of span
25°C ±3°C (±1 @ 77°F ±5˚F)
ambient, and rated line voltage
±10 percent with the following
exceptions:
Type E T/C
-200
(-328
to 800°C
to 1472°F)
Type J T/C
0
(32
to 815°C
to 1382°F)
Type K T/C
-200
(-328
to 1370°C
to 2500°F)
Type T: 0.12 percent of span for
-200°C to -50°C (-328°F to -58°F)
• Internal load switching (nominal):
Switched dc (isolated) signal, 22 to
28VÎ(dc), current limited @ 30mA
Type N T/C
0
(32
to 1300°C
to 2372°F)
• Overload current and short circuit
protection
Pt 2
0
(32
to 1395°C
to 2543°F)
Type R T/C
0
(32
to 1760°C
to 3200°F)
• External load switching
(maximum): Open collector up to
42VÎ(dc) @ 1A with external
power supply
Type S T/C
0
(32
to 1760°C
to 3200°F)
Types R and S: 0.15 percent of
span for 0°C to 100°C (32°F to
212°F)
Type B: 0.24 percent of span for
870°C to 1700°C (1598°F to
3092°F)
• Accuracy span: Less than or
equal to operating ranges, 540°C
(1000°F) minimum
• Temperature stability: ±0.2°C/°C
(±0.2°F/°F) rise in ambient
maximum for thermocouples,
±0.05°C/°C (±0.05°F/°F) rise in
ambient maximum for RTD sensors
• Voltage stability: ±0.01 percent
of span per percent of rated line
voltage
54
• Derivative/rate: 0.00 to 9.99 minutes
Output 2: User selectable
• Sensor operating ranges:
Accuracy
• Integral: 0.00 to 99.99 minutes per
repeat
Type T T/C
RTD (DIN)
RTD (JIS)
-200
(-328
to
to
400°C
750°F)
-200
(-328
to 800°C
to 1472°F)
-200
(-328
to 630°C
to 1166°F)
• Tenth degree resolution
selectable over sensor operating
range within limits of -199.9 to
999.9, except for thermocouple
Types B, R and S
• Output update rate: 10 per
second, 10Hz (maximum)
Alarm Output:
• Output update rate 2 per second
(2Hz)
• Electromechanical relay, Form A,
2A @ 30VÎ(dc) or 240VÅ(ac),
• Alarm output can be latching or
non-latching, and process or
deviation with separate high and
low values. Alarm silencing (inhibit)
on power-up
Electromagnetic Compatibility
and Immunity
• Complies with EN 50081,
EN 50082
W
A
T
L
O
W
Auto-Tuning PID
Controllers
F.O.B.: Winona, Minnesota
MICRODIN
Specifications Cont.
Terminals
Ordering Information
To order, complete the code number on the right with the information below:
• Touch-safe set screw type,
accepts 26-14 gauge wire
UD1A-1CES-____
Power
• 24-28V‡(ac/dc), -15 percent,
+10 percent (20.4 to
30.8V‡(ac/dc); 50/60Hz,
±5 percent for VÅ(ac)
MICRODIN = DIN-rail mount temperature control. 1 sensor input,
1 control output, 1 alarm output, no operator interface and EIA-485
Modbus™ RTU serial communications with Quick Start Guide.
• 5VA typical power consumption
1A
• Data retention upon power failure
via nonvolatile memory
Input
Hardware
Type B, C, D, E, J, K, N, Pt 2, R, S, T,
1°RTD, 0.1°RTD (JIS and DIN)
Control Output
C
=
Switched dc, logic signal, non-isolated1
Alarm Output
Operating Environment
E
• 0 to 65°C (32 to 149°F)
• 0 to 90 percent RH, non-condensing
• Storage temperature: -40 to 70°C
(-40 to 158°F)
=
Auto-Tuning PID
• Sensor input isolation to switched
dc output and communication
circuitry 500VÅ(ac) dielectric
Single channel, low voltage1
=
Electromechanical relay, Form A, 2A, w/o contact suppression2
Communications
S
=
EIA/TIA-485 communications, opto-isolated, Modbus™ RTU protocol
Software
00
=
Standard
XX
=
Custom setup parameters
Custom Options
00
=
None
AA
=
No Watlow logo on front bezel
XX
=
Custom bezel or label
1
An IEC 742 rated power supply is required for CE
compliance.
2
Electromechanical relays are warranted for
100,000 closures only.
Availability
Stock: Same day shipment on
orders of 10 units or less; 10 working
days on orders greater than 10
units.
Non-Stock: 10 working days
Stock List
Code Number
UDIA-1CES-0000
Input
T/C and RTD
Output 1
Switched dc
Output 2
Relay, 2A
Power
24 to 28 V
Front Bezel
English
55
Single-Loop
1
=
Auto-Tuning PID
Controllers
MICRODIN
Mounting a MICRODIN controller
Dimensions
Bracket for
8 mm
panel mounting (.318 in.)
(#6 screw
or m3.5 required)
DIN-rail
Side View
Width:
42 mm
(1.64 in.)
Height:
118 mm
(4.65 in.)
Top/bottom
mount
hole offset
MicroDIN
Temperature Controller
Depth:
132 mm
107 mm
(4.225 in.)
146 mm
(3.750 in.)
(5.19 in.)
DINrail
Chassis
Power
118 mm
(4.650 in.)
Alarm
Input
Error
Width:
42 mm
(1.64 in.)
Height:
118 mm
(4.65 in.)
Depth:
129 mm
(5.06 in.)
Address
129 mm
(5.062 in.)
Front View
Comms
Control
Output
Min. Clearance
between rail
centerlines
146 mm
(5.750 in.)
Min. Clearance 51 mm 42 mm
(2 in.)
(1.637 in.)
73 mm
(2.875 in.)
MicroDIN
MicroDIN
Temperature Controller
Temperature Controller
Power
Power
DINrail
Comms
Comms
Control
Output
Control
Output
Alarm
Alarm
Input
Error
Input
Error
Address
Address
42 mm
(1.650 in.)
Attachment Angle
10°
System Diagram
DIN-A-MITE®
Power Controller
High Limit
Mechanical
Contactor
Heater
Thermocouple
Limit Sensor
MicroDIN
Temperature Controller
Power
Comms
Control
Output
Alarm
Input
Error
Address
56
SERIES LV
Limit
Controller
Thermocouple
Temperature Sensor
W
A
T
L
O
W
On-Off Controllers
SERIES CV
Sensor Input
Thermocouple
• Grounded or ungrounded
• Type E, J, K or T thermocouple
• >10 MΩ input impedance
• 250 nV input referenced error per
1Ω source resistance
RTD
• 2-wire platinum, 100Ω
• DIN-curve (0.00385 curve)
• 125 µA nominal RTD excitation
current
Input Accuracy Span Range
Type E:
-200 to
800°C
(-328 to 1470°F)
Type J:
0 to
750°C
(32 to 1382°F)
Type K:
-200 to 1250°C
(-328 to 2282°F)
Type T:
-200 to
350°C
(-328 to
662°F)
RTD (DIN) -200 to
800°C
(-328 to 1472°F)
Thermocouple Input
• Calibration accuracy: ±1 percent
of input accuracy span, ±1° at
standard conditions and actual
calibration ambient. Exception:
Type T, ±2.4 percent of input
accuracy span for -200 to 0°C
(-328 to 32°F)
• Temperature stability: ±0.3 degree
per degree change in ambient
On-Off
UL® and C-UL® are registered trademarks of
Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc.
Heat or cool operation
• Provides application flexibility
Fahrenheit or Celsius operation
with indication
• Offers application flexibility
Agency approvals
• Meet certification
requirements/compliance
Microprocessor based technology
• Ensures accurate repeatable control
Specifications
On-Off Controller
• Microprocessor based, on-off
control mode
• Nominal switching hysteresis,
typically 1.7°C (3°F)
• Input filter time: 1 second
Operator Interface
• Four digit, seven segment LED
displays, 7 mm (0.28 in.) high
• °C or °F indicator LED
• Load indicator LED
• Continuous turn, velocity sensitive
rotary encoder for set point
adjustment
• Front panel key push for set point
or push for show process options
Standard Conditions For
Specifications
• Rated line voltage, 50 to 60Hz,
0 to 90 percent, RH, noncondensing, 15-minute warm-up
• Calibration ambient range: 25°C
(77°F) ±3°C
57
Single-Loop
Watlow’s family of microprocessor
based temperature controllers
provide an economical solution
for applications requiring simple
on-off control. These controllers
are available in a broad range of
packaging options, allowing users
to select the best version for their
individual application. The controllers
are available with an operator
interface and can be ordered in 1⁄8
DIN square panel mount or DIN-rail
mount configurations.
The SERIES CV temperature controller
incorporates a microprocessor
design platform. This design provides significant improvements in
the performance, repeatability and
accuracy offered by Watlow’s
current line of analog basic
temperature controllers.
The SERIES CV controller includes
an operator interface for viewing
and selecting the set point. A red,
four-character seven segment LED
displays the set point with a push to
show process option. The set point
selection is made with a continuous
turn rotary encoder. Operating range
temperature values are customer
definable in the product configuration part number.
The SERIES CV controllers are UL®
and C-UL® listed and carry CSA and
CE approvals. Watlow’s temperature
controllers include industry leading
service and support and are backed
by a three-year warranty.
Applications
• Food preparation
• Industrial machinery
• Packaging
• Plastics processing
Features and Benefits
Adjustable set points
• Offer control flexibility
Four character LED display
• Improves set point selection
accuracy
Multiple mounting options
• Minimize installation time
On-Off Controllers
SERIES CV
Specifications Cont.
RTD Input
• Calibration accuracy ±1 percent
of input accuracy span ±1° at
standard conditions and actual
calibration ambient
• Temperature stability: ±0.2 degree
per degree change in ambient
Allowable Operating Ranges
Type E:
-200 to 800°C
(-328 to 1470°F)
Type J:
-210 to 1038°C
(-346 to 1900°F)
Type K:
-270 to 1370°C
(-454 to 2500°F)
Type T:
-270 to 400°C
(-454 to 750°F)
RTD (DIN) -200 to 800°C
(-328 to 1472°F)
Output Types
Switched dc (non-isolated)
• Supply voltage maximum:
24VÎ(dc) into an infinite load
• Supply voltage minimum: 5VÎ(dc)
at 10mA
• Minimum load impedance: 500Ω
Electromechanical Relay, Form C
• Minimum load current: 100mA
• 8 A @ 240VÅ(ac) or 30VÎ(dc)
maximum, resistive
• 250VA pilot duty, 120/240VÅ(ac)
maximum, inductive
• Use RC suppression for inductive
loads
• Electrical life 100,000 cycles at
rated current
Agency Approvals
• UL® 60730-1 Recognized
Temperature Controller and
Indicator
• UL® 197 Reviewed for Use in
Cooking Appliances
• ANSI Z21.23 Gas Appliance
Thermostat Approval
• Temperature Control and
Indicator CSA 22.2 No. 24
58
F.O.B.: Winona, Minnesota
Terminals
• 6.3 mm (0.25 in.) quick connect,
push on terminal
Power
• 24VÅ(ac) +10 percent; -15
percent; 50/60Hz, ±5 percent
• 120VÅ(ac) +10 percent; -15
percent; 50/60Hz, ±5 percent
• 230 to 240VÅ(ac) +10 percent;
-15 percent; 50/60Hz, ±5 percent
• 10VA maximum power consumption
• Data retention upon power failure
via nonvolatile memory
Operating Environment
• 0 to 70°C (32 to 158°F)
• 0 to 90 percent RH, non-condensing
• Storage temperature: -40 to 85°C
(-40 to 185°F)
Dimensions
• DIN-rail model can be DIN-rail or
chassis mount
DIN-rail spec DIN 50022, 35 mm x
7.5 mm (1.38 in. x 0.30 in.)
Style
Width
Height
Depth
DIN-rail
78.1 mm
(3.08 in.)
72.4 mm
(2.85 in.)
112.3 mm
(4.42 in.)
72.4 mm
(2.85 in.)
90.7 mm
(3.57 in.)
Behind panel
51.7 mm
(2.04 in.)
Square 1⁄8
DIN-panel
Ordering Information
To order, complete the model number on the right with the information below.
CV
SERIES CV = On-off controller rotary set point adjustment,
four character, seven segment display
Power Supply
B = 120VÅ(ac), switched dc output
C = 120VÅ(ac), eight amp relay output
D = 230 to 240VÅ(ac), switched dc output
E = 230 to 240VÅ(ac), eight amp relay output
F = 24VÅ(ac), switched dc output
G = 24VÅ(ac), eight amp relay output
Package
1 = Panel mount square 1⁄8 DIN
2 = DIN-rail mount
Sensor Type and Scale
H = T/C Type J Fahrenheit (-346 to 1900˚F)
J = T/C Type J Celsius (-210 to 1038˚C)
K = T/C Type K Fahrenheit (-454 to 2500˚F)
L = T/C Type K Celsius (-270 to 1370˚C)
M = T/C Type T Fahrenheit (-454 to 750˚F)
N = T/C Type T Celsius (-270 to 400˚C)
P = RTD Fahrenheit (-328 to 1472˚F)
R = RTD Celsius (-200 to 800˚C)
S = T/C Type E Fahrenheit (-328 to 1470˚F)
T = T/C Type E Celsius (-200 to 800˚C)
Control Type
H = Heat
C = Cool
Low Set Point Operating Range Value1
High Set Point Operating Range Value1
Overlay/Customs Options
A = Standard
B = Push to show process
C = Push to adjust set point
1A (-) is used in the left most digit of the set point operating ranges to indicates a negative
temperature value
W
A
T
L
O
W
On-Off Controllers
SERIES CF
RTD
• 2-wire platinum, 100Ω
• DIN-curve (0.00385 curve)
• 125 µA nominal RTD excitation
current
Input Accuracy Span Range
Type E:
-200 to
800°C
(-328 to 1470°F)
Type J:
0 to
750°C
(32 to 1382°F)
Type K:
-200 to 1250°C
(-328 to 2282°F)
Type T:
-200 to
350°C
(-328 to
662°F)
RTD (DIN) -200 to
800°C
(-328 to 1472°F)
Thermocouple Input
• Calibration accuracy: ±1 percent
of input accuracy span, ±1° at
standard conditions and actual
calibration ambient. Exception:
Type T, ±2.4 percent of input
accuracy span for -200 to 0°C
(-328 to 32°F)
• Temperature stability: ±0.3 degree
per degree change in ambient
RTD Input
• Calibration accuracy ±1 percent
of input accuracy span ±1° at
standard conditions and actual
calibration ambient
• Temperature stability: ±0.2 degree
per degree change in ambient
On-Off
Fahrenheit or Celsius operation
with indication
• Offers application flexibility
Agency approvals
• Meet certification
requirements/compliance
Microprocessor based technology
• Ensures accurate repeatable control
Specifications
On-Off Controller
• Microprocessor based, on-off
control mode
• Nominal switching hysteresis,
typically 1.7°C (3°F)
• Input filter time: 1 second
Standard Conditions For
Specifications
• Rated line voltage, 50 to 60Hz,
0 to 90 percent RH noncondensing, 15-minute warm-up
• Calibration ambient range: 25°C
(77°F) ±3°C
Sensor Input
Thermocouple
• Grounded or ungrounded
• Type E, J, K or T thermocouple
• >10 MΩ input impedance
• 250 nV input referenced error per
1Ω source resistance
59
Single-Loop
Watlow’s new family of microprocessor based temperature
controllers provide an economical
solution for applications requiring
simple on-off control. These
controllers are available in a broad
range of packaging options, allowing
users to select the best version for
their individual application. The
controllers are available without an
operator interface and can be
ordered in square 1⁄8 DIN panel
mount, DIN-rail mount or open board
design configurations.
The SERIES CF temperature
controller incorporates a microprocessor design platform.
This design provides significant
improvements in the performance,
repeatability and accuracy offered
by Watlow’s current line of analog
basic temperature controllers.
The SERIES CF controller offers fixed
set points and is supplied without an
operator interface. Operating set
point temperature values are
customer definable in the product
configuration part number.
The new temperature controllers are
UL® and C-UL® listed and carry CSA
and CE approvals. Watlow’s basic
temperature controllers include
industry leading service and support
and are backed by a three-year
warranty.
Applications
• Food preparation
• Industrial machinery
• Packaging
• Plastics processing
Features and Benefits
Fixed set points
• Provide tamper-proof operation
Multiple mounting options
• Minimize installation time
Heat or cool operation
• Provides application flexibility
On-Off Controllers
SERIES CF
Specifications Cont.
Allowable Operating Ranges
Type E:
-200 to
800°C
(-328 to 1470°F)
Type J:
-210 to 1038°C
(-346 to 1900°F)
Type K:
-270 to 1370°C
(-454 to 2500°F)
Type T:
-270 to
400°C
(-454 to
750°F)
RTD (DIN) -200 to
800°C
(-328 to 1472°F)
Output Types
Switched dc (non-isolated)
• Supply voltage maximum:
24VÎ(dc) into an infinite load
• Supply voltage minimum: 5VÎ(dc)
at 10mA
• Minimum load impedance: 500Ω
Electromechanical Relay, Form C
• Minimum load current: 100mA
• 8 A @ 240VÅ(ac) or 30VÎ(dc)
maximum, resistive
• 250VA pilot duty, 120/240VÅ(ac)
maximum, inductive
• Use RC suppression for inductive
loads
• Electrical life 100,000 cycles at
rated current
Agency Approvals
• UL® 60730-1 Recognized
Temperature Controller and
Indicator
• UL® 197 Reviewed for Use in
Cooking Appliances
• ANSI Z21.23 Gas Appliance
Thermostat Approval
• Temperature Control and
Indicator CSA 22.2 No. 24
Terminals
• 6.3 mm (0.25 in.) quick connect,
push on terminal
60
F.O.B.: Winona, Minnesota
Power
• 24VÅ(ac) +10 percent; -15
percent; 50/60Hz, ±5 percent
• 120VÅ(ac) +10 percent; -15
percent; 50/60Hz, ±5 percent
• 230 to 240VÅ(ac) +10 percent;
-15 percent; 50/60Hz, ±5 percent
• 10VA maximum power
consumption
• Data retention upon power failure
via nonvolatile memory
Operating Environment
• 0 to 70°C (32 to 158°F)
• 0 to 90 percent RH, non-condensing
• Storage temperature: -40 to 85°C
(-40 to 185°F)
Dimensions
• DIN-rail model can be DIN-rail or
chassis mount
DIN-rail spec DIN 50022, 35 mm x
7.5 mm (1.38 in. x 0.30 in.)
Style
Width
Height
Depth
Open Board
61.7 mm
(2.43 in.)
70.1 mm
(2.76 in.)
78.1 mm
(3.08 in.)
72.4 mm
(2.85 in.)
61.7 mm
(2.43 in.)
102.9 mm
(4.05 in.)
112.3 mm
(4.42 in.)
72.4 mm
(2.85 in.)
45.1 mm
(1.78 in.)
46.6 mm
(1.84 in.)
90.7 mm
(3.57 in.)
Behind panel
51.7 mm
(2.04 in.)
Potted
DIN-Rail
Square 1⁄8
DIN-panel
Ordering Information
To order, complete the model number on the right with the information below.
CF
AAAA
SERIES CF = On-off controller, fixed set point,
no user interface
Power Supply
B = 120VÅ(ac), switched dc output
C = 120VÅ(ac), eight amp relay output
D = 230 to 240VÅ(ac), switched dc output
E = 230 to 240VÅ(ac), eight amp relay output
F = 24VÅ(ac), switched dc output
G = 24VÅ(ac), eight amp relay output
Package
1 = Panel mount square 1⁄8 DIN
2 = DIN-rail mount
3 = Open board, non potted
4 = Potted case
Sensor Type and Scale
H = T/C Type J Fahrenheit (-346 to 1900˚F)
J = T/C Type J Celsius (-210 to 1038˚C)
K = T/C Type K Fahrenheit (-454 to 2500˚F)
L = T/C Type K Celsius (-270 to 1370˚C)
M = T/C Type T Fahrenheit (-454 to 750˚F)
N = T/C Type T Celsius (-270 to 400˚C)
P = RTD Fahrenheit (-328 to 1472˚F)
R = RTD Celsius (-200 to 800˚C)
S = T/C Type E Fahrenheit (-328 to 1470˚F)
T = T/C Type E Celsius (-200 to 800˚C)
Control Type
H = Heat
C = Cool
Fixed Set Point Temperature Value1
Overlay/Customs Options
A = Standard
1A (-) is used in the left most digit of the fixed set point indicates a negative temperature value
W
A
T
L
O
W
On-Off Controllers
SERIES 80M6
On-Off
The SERIES 80M6 consists of a
temperature controller along with a
relay output potted in a rugged,
plastic shell. This feature makes the
SERIES 80M6 ideal for foodservice
and other applications requiring
rugged construction.
Applications
Specifications
With 6.35 mm (0.25 in.) quick
connect terminals for thermocouple
input, power input and relay output
as well as a sub-panel mount, the
SERIES 80M6 also allows for simple,
quick installation. The SERIES 80M6
provides the convenience of
precision temperature control with
the turn of a potentionmeter and fits
within the same footprint as the
current Watlow 80M5.
• Proofers
Control Mode
• Ovens
• On-off control with a -16˚C (4˚F)
switching hysteresis for
Type E thermocouple
The SERIES 80M6 controller is
backed by a 12-month warranty from
Watlow Winona and is UL® 873 and
C-UL® recognized.
Compact size
Input
• Easily retrofittable to the current
80M5
• Type E thermocouple
• Deep Fryers
• Griddles
• General heating applications
Features and Benefits
Potted shell design
• Safe for use in various
environmental conditions
• Space-saving replacement for
filled-bulb controllers
Open sensor protection
• Contacts de-energize in the event
of an open sensor, turning off
power to the load and preventing
a runaway
Quick connect terminals
Operator Interface
• Remote set point potentiometer user mounted potentiometer
provides set point adjustment and
indication
• User provided dial scale
• Sensor may be isolated or
grounded
• Sensor break protection
de-energized output
Output
• Electromechanical relay, SPST,
sealed, 24VÎ(dc), 30A @
120VÅ(ac), 30A @ 240VÅ(ac)
UL® rated
• Fast, easy installation
On-off control
• Provides simple, reliable
operation
61
Single-Loop
Watlow’s SERIES 80M6 temperature
controllers provide an economical,
easy to install unit for temperature
sensing and control in a space
saving package. The SERIES 80M6
delivers single zone, on-off heating
control and is available in three
temperature ranges. The controller
features open sensor and positive
off circuit protection, preventing
heating once the sensor temperature
falls below the low end of the set
point range.
On-Off Controllers
F.O.B.: Winona, Minnesota
SERIES 80M6
Ordering Information
Specifications Cont.
Power
• 240VÅ(ac) line, 204 min,
264 max, VRMS
• Nominal voltage - 120 VRMS
+10 percent, -15 percent (102 to
132VÅ(ac)), 240VRMS +10
percent, -15 percent (204 to
264VÅ(ac))
• Switching differential 2 min,
4 max, F
• Power requirements - 4.0 VA
nominal
80M6-2623-2AAD —
65.5 to 287.8˚C (150 to 550˚F)
80M6-2624-2AAD —
10 to 121.1˚C (50 to 250˚F)
• Positive off switch point 5˚ min,
25˚ max, mechanical degree
from CCW
80M6-2634-2AAD —
10 to 218.3˚C (50 to 425˚F)
Wiring Diagram
• Frequency - 47 to 63Hz (50Hz
±5 percent and 60Hz ±5 percent)
Operating Environment
L2
• Operating temperature up to
-0 to 55˚C (32 to 131˚F)
L1
240
• 0 - 90 percent RH,
non-condensing
L1
120
• Shipping and storage
temperature, 40 to 70˚C
(104 to 158˚F)
Dimensions
NO
COM
T/C (+)
Control
• Length: 112.5 mm (4.428 in.)
T/C (-)
• Width: 91.8 mm (3.615 in.)
• Height: 38.1 mm (1.500 in.)
• Weight: 0.3402 kg (0.75 lb)
Set Pot Assembly
Set Pot Cutout
• Pot depth behind:
12.7 mm (0.5 in.)
• Shaft depth in front:
25.4 mm (1.0 in.)
13.49 mm ± 0.79 mm
(0.531 in. ± 0.031 in.)
• Lead length: 1066.8 mm (42 in.)
• Weight: 0.01 kg (0.03 lb)
Agency Approvals
• UL® 873 and C-UL® recognized
Terminals
• Quick connects, 6.4 mm (0.25 in.)
Accuracy
• Calibration accuracy ±10˚F
30°
• 120VÅ(ac) line, 102 min,
132 max, VRMS
Ø 0.3900
Ø 0.1560
62
W
A
T
L
O
W
PID with Time/
Temperature
Profiling Controllers
SERIES SD_R
Control
Input
11
22
33
%
Control, Event or Alarm
Output 2
Control, Event, Alarm or Communications
Output 3 *
Infrared
Configure**
Control, Event or Alarm
*1/32 DIN cannot have an Output 3.
**Infrared option is not available on 1/32 DIN.
Features and Benefits
INFOSENSE™ sensor technology
• Improves sensor accuracy by a
minimum of 50 percent
User Defined Menu System
• Allows the user to assign up to
20 parameters in the operations
menu
• Improves operational efficiency
“Save and Restore” feature
• Allows the user to save individual
or factory settings
WATVIEW HMI
(Human Machine Interface)
• Permits operation, configuration
and data logging via a standard
Windows® PC
Infrared
Monitor**
Infrared communications (optional)
• Facilitates recipe management
and data logging
• Allows easier controller setup,
operation and monitoring
Dual display
• Provides better recognition of
process changes
63
Single-Loop
UL® and C-UL® are registered trademarks of
Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc.
Modbus™ is a trademark of Schneider Automation, Inc.
Windows® is a registered trademark of the Microsoft
Corporation.
Output 1
SD
SD
PID with Time/Temperature Profiling
The SERIES SD family of PID
temperature controllers utilizes
today’s advanced technology to
provide the value, benefits and
accuracy you’ve come to expect
from Watlow. The features and
performance offered by SERIES SD
controllers make them ideally suited
for a broad range of applications in
temperature and process control.
The SERIES SD single channel
controllers include a universal sensor
input with up to three outputs that
can be programmed for heat or cool
temperature control, or to operate as
process or deviation alarms.
Programming inverse scaling is also
simplified with the user-friendly setup menu, providing additional value
without additional cost.
Advanced features of SERIES SD
controllers include EIA-485 Modbus™
serial communications, Watlow’s
INFOSENSE™ sensor technology,
infrared remote communications
operation, Watlow’s patented User
Definable Menu System and a “Save
and Restore” feature that allows the
restoration of either factory or userdefined settings.
Available in 1⁄32, 1⁄16, 1⁄8 and 1⁄4 DIN
panel mount sizes, Watlow’s SERIES
SD family is backed by an industry
leading three-year warranty from
Watlow Winona. The SERIES SD
controllers are UL® and C-UL® listed,
CSA, CE , NSF certified and include
the NEMA 4X (IP65) seal.
The SD_R ramping controllers are
single input devices which will have
profiling capability:
• Four profiles (maximum)
• 10 steps each (maximum)
• Five Profile Step Types:
• Set point (ramp)
• Soak
• Jump loop
• Link
• End
PID with Time/
Temperature
Profiling Controllers
SERIES SD_R
Specifications
Line Voltage/Power
• 100 to 240VÅ(ac), +10/-15
percent; (85-264VÅ[ac])
50/60Hz, ±5 percent
• 24Vı(ac/dc), +10/-15 percent;
50/60Hz, ±5 percent
• 10VA maximum power
consumption
• Data retention upon power failure
via nonvolatile memory
Environment
• -18 to 65°C (0 to 149°F) operating
temperature
• -40 to 85°C (-40 to 185°F) storage
temperature
• 0 to 90 percent RH, non-condensing
Accuracy
• Calibration accuracy and sensor
conformity: ±0.1 percent of span,
±1°C @ the calibrated ambient
temperature and rated line voltage
• Calibration ambient temperature =
25°C ±3°C (77°F ±5°F)
• Accuracy span: 540°C (1000°F)
minimum
• Temperature stability: ±0.1°C/°C
(±0.2°F/°F) rise in ambient
maximum
Agency Approvals
• UL® 3121, C-UL®‚ CSA, CE, NEMA
4X/IP65
• Limit version features FM approval
• NSF for Type J, K, T & E
thermocouples
Controller
• Microprocessor based userselectable control modes
• Single universal input, up to three
outputs
• Control sampling rates: Input =
6.5Hz, Display = 10Hz and
Outputs = 6.5Hz
Operator Interface
• Dual 4 digit, 7 segment LED displays
• Advance, infinity and up down
keys
• Optional IrDA infrared port
(not available on 1⁄32 DIN)
• Isolated EIA-485 Modbus™ serial
communications. 9600, 19.2K or
38.4K baud rates.
Wiring Termination-Touch Safe
Terminals
• Input power and control outputs
12 to 22 AWG
• Sensor inputs and process
outputs 20 to 28 AWG
Universal Input
• Thermocouple, grounded or
ungrounded sensors
• RTD 2- or 3-wire, platinum, 100Ω
@ 0°C calibration to DIN-curve
(0.00385 Ω/Ω/°C)
• Process, 0-20mA @ 100Ω, or
0-10VÎ(dc) @ 20kΩ input
impedance; Scalable
• Inverse scaling
• >20MΩ input impedance
• Maximum of 20Ω source
resistance
Allowable Operating Range
Type J:
0 to
815°C
(32 to 1500°F)
Type K:
-200 to 1370°C
(-328 to 2500°F)
-200 to
400°C
(-328 to
750°F)
Type N:
0 to 1300°C
(32 to 2372°F)
Type E:
-200 to
800°C
(-328 to 1470°F)
Type C:
0 to 2315°C
(32 to 4200°F)
Type D:
0 to 2315°C
(32 to 4200°F)
Type PTII:
0 to 1395°C
(32 to 2543°F)
Type R:
0 to 1760°C
(32 to 3200°F)
Type S:
0 to 1760°C
(32 to 3200°F)
Type B:
0 to 1816°C
(32 to 3300°F)
RTD (DIN): -200 to
800°C
(-328 to 1472°F)
Process: -1999 to 9999 units
Control Outputs
Outputs 1, 2 , 3 (Output 3 not
available on 1⁄32 DIN)
• User selectable for heat/cool as
on-off, P, PI, PD, PID or Alarm
action. Not valid for limit controls
• Electromechanical relay. Form A,
rated 2A @ 120VÅ(ac),2A @
240VÅ(ac) or 2A @ 30VÎ(dc)
Dimensions
DIN Size
Behind Panel
(max.)
Width
Height
⁄ 32 DIN
97.8 mm
(3.85 in.)
52.6 mm
(2.07 in.)
29.7 mm
(1.17 in.)
⁄16 DIN
97.8 mm
(3.85 in.)
52.1 mm
(2.05 in.)
52.1 mm
(2.05 in.)
⁄8 DIN
Vertical
97.8 mm
(3.85 in.)
52.8 mm
(2.08 in.)
99.8 mm
(3.93 in.)
⁄8 DIN
Horizontal
97.8 mm
(3.85 in.)
99.8 mm
(3.93 in.)
52.8 mm
(2.08 in.)
⁄4 DIN
101.1 mm
(3.98 in.)
99.8 mm
(3.93 in.)
99.8 mm
(3.93 in.)
1
1
1
1
1
64
Type T:
W
A
T
L
O
W
PID with Time/
Temperature
Profiling Controllers
SERIES SD_R
INFOSENSE™ Sensor Technology
Watlow’s INFOSENSE™ sensor
technology improves temperature
sensing accuracy by 50 percent.
Each INFOSENSE “smart” sensor
contains four numeric values located
on tags attached to each sensor
that are programmed into the
SERIES SD controller memory.
These values characterize Watlow
sensors and allow the controller to
provide enhanced accuracy.
Typical Block Diagram
SERIES SD PID
SERIES SD Limit
1
Input 1
2
3
Oven
LIMIT SD
SD
%
1
2
3
Output 1
Output 2
RESET
Limit
Sensor
Temperature
Sensor
Alarm
Heaters
Form C Relay
Note: Consult user’s manual for wiring.
65
Single-Loop
PID with Time/Temperature Profiling
Specifications Cont.
• Switched dc non-isolated
minimum turn on voltage of
6VÎ(dc) into a minimum 500Ω
load with a maximum on voltage
of not greater than 12VÎ(dc) into
an infinite load. Maximum switched
dc power supply current available
for up to two outputs is 60mA
• Solid state relay, Form A, 0.5A @
24VÅ(ac) minimum, 264VÅ(ac)
maximum, opto-isolated, without
contact suppression
• Process output (Non Isolated)
User-selectable 0-10VÎ(dc),
0-5VÎ(dc), 1-5VÎ(dc) @
1KΩ minimum, 0-20mA, 4-20mA
@ 800Ω maximum
• Electromechanical relay. Form C,
rated 5A @ 120VÅ(ac),
5A @ 240VÅ(ac) or 5A @
30VÎ(dc)
• Open collector 42VÎ(dc) @
250mA maximum
• EIA-485 serial communications
with Modbus™ protocol
WATVIEW HMI
WATVIEW, Watlow’s Windows®
based HMI (Human Machine Interface) software, supports the SERIES
SD controllers. The software can be
used to setup, monitor and edit the
values of controller parameters, to
monitor and manage alarms and to
log and graph process data.
PID with Time/
Temperature
Profiling Controllers
SERIES SD_R
F.O.B.: Winona, Minnesota
Ordering Information
To order, complete the model number on the right with the information below.
SERIES SD_R = Single channel ramping controllers
S D _ R- _ _ _ _- _ A _ _
DIN Sizes
3 = 1⁄32 DIN
6 = 1⁄16 DIN
8 = 1⁄8 DIN Vertical
9 = 1⁄8 DIN Horizontal
4 = 1⁄4 DIN
Control Type
R = Ramping Dual Display
Power Supply
H = 100 to 240Vı(ac/dc)
L = 24 to 28Vı(ac/dc)
Infrared Communications
The Infrared Data Communications
(IDC) option is available on all
SERIES SD controller models except
the 1⁄ 32 DIN and can support complete
SERIES SD parameter configuration
and operation. The IDC option
supports wireless communications
with PDAs (personal digital assistants)
or other devices equipped with
infrared communications that support
the Infrared Data Association (IrDA)
1.0 Standard.
The actual user interface or
configuration is dependent on the
master device application software.
A source for this software is Instant
HMI from Software Horizons.
For more information, visit
www.instanthmi.com/watlow.
Advantages of IDC include
automated logging of key process
variables, increased accuracy
and ease of use for recipe or configuration setups. Infrared data
communications enhances controller
data exchange in physically
restricting environments (such as
semiconductor clean rooms,
governmental radio-active test labs
or those hard to reach areas) and
reduces the use of paper to record
instrument information as well as
human transposition errors.
66
Output 1
C = Switched dc
K = SSR, Form A, 0.5A
F = Universal process
J = Mechanical relay, Form A, 2Aa
Output 2
A = None
C = Switched dc
K = SSR, Form A, 0.5A
J = Mechanical relay, Form A, 2Aa
U = EIA/485 Modbus™ communications
Output 3 (Not available on 1⁄32 DIN)
A = None
C = Switched dc/open collector
K = SSR, Form A, 0.5A
F = Universal process
E = Mechanical relay, Form C, 5Aa
Infrared Comms Options (IrDA)
A = None (Default selection on 1⁄32 DIN)
R = IrDA ready (Not available on 1⁄32 DIN)
Display Colors and Custom Options
RG= Red Green (Dual display units)
RR = Red Red (Not available on 1⁄32 DIN Dual Display)
XX = Custom options, special overlays, etc.
a
Electromechanical relays warranted for 100,000
closures only. Solid state switching devices
recommended for applications requiring fast cycle
times or extended service life.
W
A
T
L
O
W
PID with Time/
Temperature
Profiling Controllers
SERIES SD6R_D
DeviceNet™
SD D-NET
SD
11
22
3
%
Output 1
Control
Input
Control or Alarm
Output 2
NET MOD
Control or Alarm
Specifications
Accuracy
Line Voltage/Power
• Calibration accuracy and sensor
conformity: ±0.1 percent of span,
±1°C @ the calibrated ambient
temperature and rated line
voltage
• 100 to 240VÅ(ac), +10/-15
percent; (85-264VÅ[ac]) 50/60Hz,
±5 percent
• 24Vı(ac/dc), +10/-15 percent;
50/60Hz, ±5 percent
• 10VA maximum power
consumption
• Data retention upon power failure
via nonvolatile memory
Environment
• -18 to 65°C (0 to 149°F) operating
temperature
• -40 to 85°C (-40 to 185°F) storage
temperature
• 0 to 90 percent RH, non-condensing
• Calibration ambient temperature =
25°C ±3°C (77°F ±5°F)
• Accuracy span: 540°C (1000°F)
minimum
• Temperature stability: ±0.1°C/°C
(±0.2°F/°F) rise in ambient
maximum
Agency Approvals
• UL® 3121, C-UL®‚ CSA, CE,
IP65/NEMA 4X and NSF-2
DeviceNet™ is a trademark of the Open DeviceNet
Vendors Association.
67
Single-Loop
PID with Time/Temperature Profiling
Watlow SERIES SD6R_D offers
excellent static set point or
Profile/Ramping control and
application flexibility in a 1⁄16th DIN
panel mount package. The SERIES
SD6R_D controller has been
successfully tested for use with both
ODVA and Semi-conductor SIG
standards for DeviceNet™ on CAN
networks. Ramping profile capabilities
include four profiles (maximum), 10
steps each (maximum) and five profile
step types (Set Point, Soak, Jump
Loop, Link and End).
The SD6R_D single channel controller
includes a universal sensor input with
two outputs that can be configured as
heat or cool or alarm. The DeviceNet™
communications interface is supplied
with either a five pin circular DIN
connector for Semiconductor SIG
specific applications, or with a five
position removable screw terminal
connector for traditional market
applications.
Additional features of the SD6R_D
family of controllers include Watlow’s
INFOSENSE™ sensor technology, a
user definable menu system as well
as a Save and Restore feature that
allows the restoration of factory and
user defined parameter values.
Watlow SD6R_D DeviceNet™
controllers offer a three year warranty,
are UL®, C-UL® listed, CSA, CE
and NSF certified, and include
IP65/NEMA 4 ratings.
Features and Benefits
Variable burst fire
• Prolongs heater life
Ordering Options including
DeviceNet™ on CAN or
SEMI-SIG-ODVA protocols
• Provides DeviceNet™ on CAN for
Semiconductor applications
• DeviceNet™ on CAN for the
packaging or general industrial
markets
PID with Time/
Temperature
Profiling Controllers
SERIES SD6R_D
Control Outputs 1 & 2
Specifications Cont.
• User selectable for heat/cool as
on-off, P, PI, PD, PID or Alarm
action
Controller
• Microprocessor based userselectable control modes
• Single universal input, up to three
outputs
• Control sampling rates: input =
6.5Hz, display = 10Hz, outputs =
6.5Hz
Operator Interface
• Dual 4 digit, 7 segment LED
displays
• Advance, infinity and up down
keys
• DeviceNet™ on CAN (for the
packaging or general industrial
markets) or SEMI-SIG-ODVA (for
the semi-conductor industry)
Allowable Operating Range
68
F.O.B.: Winona, Minnesota
Type J:
0
(32
to
to
815°C
1500°F)
Type K:
-200
(-328
to
to
1370°C
2500°F)
Type T:
-200
(-328
to
to
400°C
750°F)
Type N:
0
(32
to
to
1300°C
2372°F)
Type E:
-200
(-328
to
to
800°C
1470°F)
Type C:
0
(32
to
to
2315°C
4200°F)
Type D:
0
(32
to
to
2315°C
4200°F)
Type PTII:
0
(32
to
to
1395°C
2543°F)
Type R:
0
(32
to
to
1760°C
3200°F)
Type S:
0
(32
to
to
1760°C
3200°F)
Type B:
0
(32
to
to
1816°C
3300°F)
RTD (DIN): -200
(-328
to
to
800°C
1472°F)
Process: -1999
to
9999 units
• Electromechanical relay. Form A,
rated 2A @ 120VÅ(ac), 2A @
240VÅ(ac) or 2A @ 30VÎ(dc)
• Switched dc non-isolated
minimum turn on voltage of
6VÎ(dc) into a minimum 500Ω
load with a maximum on voltage
of not greater than 12VÎ(dc) into
an infinite load. Maximum switched
dc power supply current available
for up to two outputs is 60mA
• Solid-state relay, Form A, 0.5A @
24VÅ(ac) minimum, 264VÅ(ac)
maximum, opto-isolated, without
contact suppression
• Process output (Non Isolated)
User-selectable 0-10VÎ(dc),
0-5VÎ(dc), 1-5VÎ(dc) @
1KΩ minimum, 0-20mA, 4-20mA
@ 800Ω maximum
• Electromechanical relay. Form C,
rated 5A @ 120VÅ(ac),
5A @ 240VÅ(ac) or 5A @
30VÎ(dc)
• Open collector 42VÎ(dc) @
250mA maximum
Dimensions
SD6C_D or SD6R_D or SD6L_D
• 1⁄16 DIN Size
• 97.8 mm (3.85 in.) behind panel
maximum
• Width 52.1 mm (2.05 in.)
• Height 52.1 mm (2.05 in.)
Ordering Information
To order, complete the model number on the right with the information below.
S D 6 R- _ _ _ A - D _ _ _
SERIES SD = 1/16 DIN-panel mount ramping controller with DeviceNet™
Control Type
R = PID Control plus ramping option
Power Supply
H = 100 to 240Vı(ac/dc)
L = 24 to 28Vı(ac/dc)
Output 1
C = Switched dc
K = SSR, Form A, 0.5A
J = Mechanical relay, Form A, 2A2
F = Universal process
Output 2
A = None
C = Switched dc
K = SSR, Form A, 0.5A
J = Mechanical relay, Form A, 2A2
DeviceNet™ Communications
N = DeviceNet™ on CAN (packaging or general industrial markets)
S = SEMI-SG-ODVA compliant (semi-conductor markets)
Display Colors and Custom Options
RG= Red Green (with Watlow name and SD logo)
RR = Red Red (with Watlow name and SD logo)
AA = Red Green (SD logo only)
AB = Red Red (SD logo only)
2
Electromechanical relays warranted for 100,000
closures only. Solid state switching devices
recommended for applications requiring fast cycle
times or extended service life.
W
A
T
L
O
W
PID with Time/
Temperature
Profiling Controllers
SERIES 96_ AA
• Operating environment
0 to 65°C (32 to 149°F)
96
1
2
3
4
%
Output 1
Control
Output 2
Control or Alarm
Output 3
Alarm
Input 2
Event
Output 4
Alarm, Analog or
Communications
Features and Benefits
Profiles
• Two (2) 8-step profiles can be
linked to create one (1) 15-step
profile
Burst fire
• Increase heater life / better
temperature controlability
Open loop break protection
Specifications
• Indication of thermal loop problem
Controller
• Microprocessor-based, user
selectable control modes
NEMA 4X
(IP65) 1
• Water and corrosion resistant front
panel can be washed down
Compact size
One input, one auxiliary input, four
outputs
• Allows it to be mounted in small
areas
• Powerful flexibility at a competitive
price
Automatic tuning
No dipswitches
• Easy one step tuning of PID
control parameters
• Easily configurable from the front
panel
Three-year warranty2
Multiple set points
Applications
• Packaging
• Semiconductor
• Food processing
• Lab equipment
• Furnace and ovens
• Plastics
• Flexible automatic control
Plugable output modules
• Field expandable
Fast 10Hz sampling
• Improved control responsiveness
• Heat and cool auto-tune for
control outputs
• Universal input one, auxiliary
input two, four outputs
• Control outputs user selectable as
on-off, P, PI, PID
• Provides Control Confidence®
1
2
To effect NEMA 4X(IP65) rating requires a
minimum mounting panel thickness of 1.5 mm
(0.06 in.) and surface finish not rougher than
0.000812 mm (0.000032 in.).
Electromechanical relays warranted for 100,000
closures only. Solid state switching devices
recommended for applications requiring fast cycle
times or extended service life.
69
Single-Loop
Performance Capabilities
Input 1
Process
PID with Time/Temperature Profiling
Watlow’s SERIES 96 is a powerful
1
⁄16 DIN dual display controller that
offers many advanced functions.
This new controller can be tailored
to perform hardware and software
needs with hardware modules that
are plugable and exchangeable,
and software menus that may be
user programmed to fit exact
application requirements.
With one universal input, a second
auxiliary input and four outputs the
SERIES 96 can be programmed to
perform: temperature measurement,
input event switching, heating, boost
heating, cooling, alarms, digital
communications and retransmit.
With fast 10Hz sampling, variable
time base burst firing outputs, NEMA
4X front panel and 0.1 percent
calibration accuracy, this controller
can easily handle some of the
toughest application needs.
PID with Time/
Temperature
Profiling Controllers
SERIES 96_AA
Specifications Cont.
• Input sample period; Single input
10Hz (100ms), dual input 5Hz
(200ms) digital filter adjustable
• Display update; 2Hz (500ms),
time filter adjustable
• Output update; burst, 0.1 to 999.9
seconds
• Input / Output/Communication
isolation
• Displayed in °C, °F or process
units
Operator Interface
• Dual four-digit LED displays:
upper 10.2 mm (0.4 in.), lower
6.2 mm (0.244 in.)
• Advance, Up Arrow, Down Arrow,
Infinity tactile keys
Standard Conditions For
Specifications
• Ambient temperature 25°C (77°F)
±3°C, rated line voltage, 50 to
60Hz, 0 to 90 percent RH noncondensing, 15 minute warm-up
Universal Input 1
Thermocouple
• Type J, K, T, N, C (W5), E, Pt 2, D
(W3), B, R, S thermocouple
• >20MΩ input impedance
• Maximum 20Ω source resistance
• 30µA open detection bias
RTD
• 2- or 3-wire platinum, 100Ω
• JIS and DIN-curves
• Whole or tenth degree indication
• 150µA nominal RTD excitation
current
Process
• Range selectable: 0-10VÎ(dc),
0-5VÎ(dc), 1-5VÎ(dc), 0-20mA,
4-20mA
• Voltage input impedance 20kΩ
• Current input impedance 100Ω
• Minimum current source
resistance 1MΩ
70
• Input resolution 50,000 bits
(approx.) at full scale
• mV input impedance 20MΩ
Input 2
Event Input
• Contact or voltage
• 20KΩ input impedance
• Voltage input: event high state
3 to 36VÎ(dc), event low state
0 to 2VÎ(dc)
• Resistance/contact input: event
high state >23kΩ, event low state
0 to 2kΩ
Output Types
Open Collector/Switched DC
• Open collector configuration:
Maximum voltage 42VÎ(dc)
Maximum current 200mA
Maximum on resistance 1.1Ω
Maximum off state leakage
current 100µA
• Switched dc configuration:
Switched dc supply voltage
22 to 28VÎ(dc) dc supply current
limited to 30mA
Solid State Relay
• Optically isolated
• Zero cross switched
• Without contact suppression
• Minimum load current 0.5mA rms
• Maximum current 0.5A rms at
20 to 280VÅ(ac)
• Maximum off state leakage
current 10µA rms
• For resistive loads only, must use
RC suppression for inductive
loads
Electromechanical Relay
• Form C contact configuration
• Minimum load current 10mA @
5VÎ(dc)
• Rated resistive and inductive
loads: 2A @ 250VÅ(ac) or
30VÎ(dc) maximum
• Electrical life 100,000 cycles at
rated current
• For resistive loads only, must use
RC suppression for inductive
loads
Process
• Range selectable: 0-20mA,
4-20mA, 0-5VÎ(dc), 1-5VÎ(dc),
0-10VÎ(dc)
• Reverse or direct acting
• 0 to 10VÎ(dc) voltage output into
1000Ω minimum load resistance
• 0 to 20mA current output into
800Ω maximum load resistance
• Resolution:
VÎ(dc) ranges = 2.5mV nominal
mA ranges = 5µA nominal
• Calibration accuracy:
VÎ(dc) ranges = ±15mV
mA ranges = ±30µA
• Temperature stability 100ppm/°C
Retransmit
• Range selectable: 0-20mA,
4-20mA, 0-5VÎ(dc), 1-5VÎ(dc),
0-10VÎ(dc)
• 0 to 10VÎ(dc) voltage output into
a 1,000Ω minimum load
resistance
• 0 to 20mA current output into an
800Ω maximum load resistance
• Resolution:
VÎ(dc) ranges = 2.5mV nominal
mA ranges = 5µA nominal
• Calibration accuracy:
VÎ(dc) ranges = ±15mV
mA ranges = ±30µA
• Temperature stability 100ppm/°C
Communications
• EIA/TIA-485, EIA/TIA-232
• Opto-isolated
• Modbus™ RTU protocol
• 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200
baud rates
• 32 maximum units can be
connected (With additional 485
repeater hardware, up to 247
units may be connected)
W
A
T
L
O
W
PID with Time/
Temperature
Profiling Controllers
SERIES 96_ AA
RTD Inputs
• Calibration accuracy ±0.1 percent
of span ±1°C at standard
conditions
Accuracy
Input ranges
Type J
Type K
Type T
Type C(W5)
Type D(W3)
-200
(-328
to 1250°C
to 2282°F)
-200
(-328
to 1250°C
to 2282°F
0
(32
to 1250°C
to 2282°F)
-200
(-328
to 900°C
to 1652°F)
0
(32
to 2315°C
to 4200°F)
0
(32
to 2315°C
to 4200°F)
Accuracy ±30µA ±1 LSD at
standard conditions
Temperature stability
±100ppm/°C maximum
0
(32
to 1393°C
to 2540°F)
Type R
0
(32
to 1450°C
to 2642°F)
0
(32
to 1450°C
to 2642°F)
870
(1598
to 1700°C
to 3092°F)
• Touch safe
-200
(-328
to 800°C
to 1472°F)
Power
-200
(-328
to 630°C
to 1166°F)
Type B
DIN
JIS
Process
-1999 to 9999 units
Thermocouple Inputs
• Calibration accuracy ±0.1 percent
of span ±1°C at standard
conditions
Exceptions:
Type T: 0.12 percent of span for
-200°C to -50°C (-328°F to -58°F)
Types R and S: 0.15 percent of
span for 0°C to 100°C (32°F to
2120°F)
Type B: 0.24 percent of span for
870°C to 1700°C (1598°F to
3092°F)
• Accuracy span: 540°C (1000°F)
minimum
• Temperature stability: ±0.1
degree per degree change in
ambient
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
815°C
1500°F)
815°C
1499°F)
1370°C
2498°F)
999.9°C
1831.8°F)
400°C
750°F)
400°C
750°F)
1300°C
2372°F)
999.9°C
1831.8°F)
800°C
1470°F)
800°C
1472°F)
2315°C
4200°F)
999.9°C
1831.8°F)
2315°C
4200°F)
999.9°C
1831.8°F)
1395°C
2543°F)
999.9°C
999.9°F)
1760°C
3200°F)
1760°C
3200°F)
1816°C
3300°F)
800°C
1472°F)
-199.9
(-327.8
1.0
-200
(-328
to
to
to
to
800°C
1472°F)
630°C
1166°F)
1.0
0.1
Type T
1.0
0.1
Type N
• Milli-amp input ranges
Pt 2
Type S
Type K
Accuracy ±15mV ±1 LSD at
standard conditions
Temperature stability
±100ppm/°C maximum
0
(32
0
(32
-270
(-454
-199.9
(-327.8
-270
(-454
-199.9
(-327.8
0
(32
0
(32
-270
(-454
-199.9
(-327.8
0
(32
0
(32
0
(32
0
(32
0
(32
0
(32
0
(32
0
(32
0
(32
-200
(-328
0.1
• Temperature stability: ±0.05
degree per degree change in
ambient
Process Inputs
• Voltage input ranges
1.0
1.0
0.1
Type E
1.0
0.1
Agency Approvals
• UL® 916, File #E185611, C-UL®,
CE, NEMA 4X
Type C
1.0
0.1
Terminals
• 22 to 12 AWG
• 100-240VÅ(ac) +10 percent,
-15 percent; 50/60Hz, ±5 percent
• 24-28VÅ(ac) or VÎ(dc) +10
percent, -15 percent; 50/60Hz,
±5 percent
Type D
1.0
0.1
Pt 2
1.0
0.1
• 7.0VA maximum power
consumption
Type R
1.0
• Data retention upon power failure
via nonvolatile memory
Type S
1.0
Type B
1.0
DIN
1.0
Operating Environment
• 0 to 65°C (32 to 149°F)
• 0 to 90 percent RH, non-condensing
• Storage temperature: -40 to 85°C
(-40 to 185°F)
0.1
Controller Weight (approx.)
• 0.2 kg
(0.4 lb)
JIS
0.1
-199.9 to 630.0°C
(-327.8 to 1166°F)
Process -1999 to 9999 units
71
Single-Loop
Type E
to 750°C
to 1382°F)
Type J
PID with Time/Temperature Profiling
Type N
0
(32
• Accuracy span: 540°C (1000°F)
minimum
Allowable Operating Ranges
PID with Time/
Temperature
Profiling Controllers
SERIES 96_ AA
F.O.B.: Winona, Minnesota
Ordering Information
To order, complete the code number on the right with the information below:
Functionality Matrix
232
485 Comm
Retransmit
Alarm
Control
Event &
Remote
Set Point
Universal
Input
96 __-____-____
Input 1
SERIES 96 = Microprocessor-based 1⁄16 DIN, with universal
input 1. Options include: software, power supply, input 2,
outputs and display color.
Power Supply
Input 2
A
=
B
=
Input 2
Output 1
Output 2
Output 3
Output 4
Dimensions
Overall
Height:
52 mm
Width:
52 mm
Length:
107 mm
100-240Vı(ac/dc)
24-28Vı(ac/dc)
0
=
None
1
=
Event input and 0-5VÎ(dc)/4-20mA (Remote set point input)
Output 1
(2.05 in.)
(2.05 in.)
(4.2 in.)
Depth behind panel surface
98.4 mm (3.875 in.)
C
D
F
=
=
=
K
=
Output 2
A
C
D
F
=
=
=
=
K
=
Output 3
Switched dc/open collector
Electromechanical relay, Form C, 2A, without RC suppression2
Universal Process, range selectable: 0-20mA, 4-20mA,
0-5VÎ(dc), 1-5VÎ(dc), 0-10VÎ(dc)
0.5A solid state relay without RC suppression
None
Switched dc/open collector
Electromechanical relay, Form C, 2A, without RC suppression2
Universal Process, range selectable: 0-20mA, 4-20mA,
0-5VÎ(dc), 1-5VÎ(dc), 0-10VÎ(dc)
0.5A solid state relay without RC suppression
A
=
None
D
=
Electromechanical relay, Form C, 2A, without RC suppression2
Output 4
A
D
R
U
M
2
Electromechanical relays warranted for 100,000
closures only. Solid state switching devices
recommended for applications requiring fast cycle
times or extended service life.
=
=
=
=
=
None
Electromechanical relay, Form C, 2A, without RC suppression2
232 Communications
485 Communications
Universal Retransmit, range selectable: 0-20mA, 4-20mA,
0-5VÎ(dc), 1-5VÎ(dc), 0-10VÎ(dc)
Software/Preset Parameters
AA =
Ramping software
Display/Overlay
RR =
RG =
Upper/Lower
Red/Red display
Red/Green display
GR
GG
107.747 mm
(4.242 in.)
98.425 mm
(3.875 in.)
=
=
Upper/Lower
Green/Red display
Green/Green display
Panel Cutout
44.958 mm x 44.958 mm
(1.77 in. x 1.77 in.)
52.070 mm
(2.050 in.)
96
1
2
3
4
%
59.182 mm
(2.330 in.)
52.070 mm
(2.050 in.)
9.322 mm
(0.367 in.)
72
W
A
T
L
O
W
PID with Time/
Temperature
Profiling Controllers
SERIES 981/982
WATL W
Input 1
Type B, C, D, E, J,
K, N, R, S, T or Pt 2
Thermocouple,
DIN/JIS RTD or
Process
Input 2
Slidewire or
Digital Event
PROCESS
L1
L2
L3
DEV
% OUT
Output 2
PID, on-off Control
Alarm
Transmitter Power Supply
L4
DISPLAY
HOLD
RUN
Input 3
Digital Event
Output 1
PID, on-off Control
Output 3
Alarm
Transmitter Power Supply
Analog Retransmit
Event
MODE
SERIES 982
Process Deviation
from Set Point
Optional retransmit of set point or
process variable
• For master programmer or chart
recorder connection
Hardware and software parameter
lockout options
• Provide several levels of operator
security
UL®, CE, NEMA 4X1 (IP65) front panel
• Provides corrosion resistance
10Hz sampling rate and
burst-fire control
• Delivers smooth, accurate
process control
Output 4
Alarm
Transmitter Power Supply
Event
Serial Communications
Slidewire feedback
• Interfaces with most slidewire
input positioning devices
Three-year warranty 2
• Provides Control Confidence®
Applications
• Any process requiring
time/temperature profile control
• Processes requiring slidewire
control of valves or positions
1
2
To effect NEMA 4X (IP65) rating requires a
minimum mounting panel thickness of 1.5 mm
(0.06 in.) and surface finish not rougher than
0.000812 mm (0.000032 in.).
Electromechanical relays warranted for 100,000
closures only. Solid state switching devices
recommended for applications requiring fast
cycle times or extended service life.
73
Single-Loop
Auto-tune
Heat/Cool
PID with Time/Temperature Profiling
The Watlow SERIES 981 (horizontal)
and SERIES 982 (vertical) are 1⁄8 DIN
time/temperature profile controllers.
Among the most easy-to-use
time/temperature profile controllers,
they are designed with most typical
programming needs in mind. Both
vertical and horizontal models offer
four-file/24-step program capability
or easy-to-use fixed set point
operation.
Time/temperature profile operation
includes four files with six steps in
each file. Programming options
include ramp-rate or time-based
profiles, guaranteed soak deviation,
program looping and program status
selection after power outage. The
files may be linked to create a single
24-step program.
The primary analog input accepts
11 different thermocouple types,
RTD or scalable process inputs. A
second analog input can be factory
configured for a slidewire feedback
input, common in gas valve control.
With up to two event inputs, the
SERIES 981/982 offers remote
program start or hold capability and
allows the operator to program a
wait-for event.
Performance Capabilities
• Exceptional accuracy to
±0.1 percent of span
• Operating environment
0 to 55°C (32 to 130°F)
Features and Benefits
Four files/six steps per file
• Meets the need of most time/
temperature profile applications
(files may be linked together)
Auto-tuning of both heat and cool
outputs
• Provide easy operation with onestep tuning of system parameters
Optional dual auxiliary outputs
• Give flexibility to time-based
events or alarm outputs
PID with Time/
Temperature
Profiling Controllers
SERIES 981/982
Applications Cont.
• Complex process furnaces
• Environmental chambers
• Processes needing data logging
Specifications
Control Mode
• Single input, quad output,
optional retransmit of set point or
process variable
• Programmable direct and
reverse acting control outputs
• 4-file/6 steps per file time/
temperature profile or fixed set
point control
• Ramp-rate or time-based
programming
• Selectable control status following
power loss
Agency Approvals
• 89/336/EEC Electromagnetic
Compatibility Directive
• EN 50081-2: 1994 Emissions
• EN 50082-2: 1994 Immunity
• 73/23/EEC Low Voltage Directive
• EN 601010-1: 1993 Safety
• UL® #873, C-UL® File #43684
• NEMA 4X
Operator Interface
• Dual, four digit LED displays.
Upper: 10 mm (0.4 in.)
Lower: 8 mm (0.3 in.)
• MODE, HOLD/RUN, DISPLAY,
UP and DOWN keys
Accuracy
• Calibration accuracy and sensor
conformity: ±0.1 percent of span,
±1 LSD, 25°C ±3°C (77°F ±5°F)
ambient and rated line voltage
±10 percent
• Accuracy span: 540°C (1000°F)
minimum
• Temperature stability: 0.1°C/°C
(± 0.2°F/°F) change in ambient
Sensors/Inputs
• Contact input for software function
select (event input)
74
• Thermocouple Types B, C1, D1,
E, J, K, N, R, S, T and Pt 21
• RTD resolution in 1° or 0.1°
RTD scales
• Process variables: 0-50mVÎ(dc),
0-20mAÎ(dc), 4-20mAÎ(dc),
0-5VÎ(dc), 1-5VÎ(dc), 0-10VÎ(dc)
• Slidewire or digital event input
options
• Sensor break protection
de-energizes system for safety.
Latching or non-latching
Input Range
Specified temperature ranges
represent the controller's operational
span.
Thermocouple
Available with basic or
universal signal conditioner
0 to 2316°C
Type C1
(32 to 4200°F)
Type D1
0 to 2316°C
(32 to 4200°F)
Type E
-200 to
799°C
(-328 to 1470°F)
Type J
0 to
816°C
(32 to 1500°F)
Type K
-200 to 1371°C
(-328 to 2500°F)
Type N
0 to 1300°C
(32 to 2372°F)
Type T
-200 to
399°C
(-328 to
750°F)
Pt 21
0 to 1395°C
(32 to 2543°F)
Available with universal signal
conditioner
Type B
870 to 1816°C
(1598 to 3300°F)
Type R
0 to 1760°C
(32 to 3200°F)
Type S
0 to 1760°C
(32 to 3200°F)
RTD Resolution (DIN or JIS)
1° (DIN)
-200 to
800°C
(-328 to 1472°F)
1° (JIS)
-200 to
630°C
(-328 to 1166°F)
0.1° (DIN and JIS)
-73.3 to 537.7°C
(-99.9 to 999.9°F)
Process
0-5VÎ(dc)
1-5VÎ(dc)
0-10VÎ(dc)
0-20mAÎ(dc)
4-20mAÎ(dc) 0-50mVÎ(dc)
-999 to 9999 units
#2 input slidewire feedback
100 to 1200Ω
Output Options
• Solid state relay, Form A, 0.5A @
24VÅ(ac) min., 253VÅ(ac) max.,
opto-isolated, burst fire switching.
With or without contact
suppression. Off state output
impedance is 20kΩ with RC
suppression, 31MΩ without
contact suppression
• Open collector or switched dc
signal provides a minimum turn on
voltage of 3VÎ(dc) into a
minimum 500Ω load; maximum on
voltage not greater than 32VÎ(dc)
into an infinite load, isolated
• Electromechanical relay2,
Form C, 5A @ 120/240VÅ(ac), 6A
@ 28VÎ(dc), 1⁄8 hp. @ 120VÅ(ac),
125VA @ 120VÅ(ac). With or
without contact suppression. Off
state output impedance with RC
suppression is 20kΩ
• Process, 0-20mAÎ(dc),
4-20mAÎ(dc) into 800Ω
maximum, 0-5VÎ(dc), 1-5VÎ(dc),
or 0-10VÎ(dc) into 1kΩ minimum
reverse acting, isolated
• Electromechanical relay2,
Form A/B, 5A @ 120/240VÅ(ac),
6A @ 28VÎ(dc), 1⁄8 hp. @
120VÅ(ac), 125VA @ 120VÅ(ac).
Without contact suppression
1
2
Not an ANSI Symbol.
Electromechanical relays warranted for 100,000
closures only. Solid state switching devices
recommended for applications requiring fast cycle
times or extended service life.
W
A
T
L
O
W
PID with Time/
Temperature
Profiling Controllers
F.O.B.: Winona, Minnesota
SERIES 981/982
Ordering Information
• External transmitter power supply,
5, 12 or 20VÎ(dc) @ 30mA
• EIA/TIA-232 communications or
EIA/TIA-485/EIA/TIA-422
communications, opto-isolated
• Retransmit: 0-20mAÎ(dc),
4-20mAÎ(dc) with 600Ω max.
load impedance, or 0-5VÎ(dc),
1-5VÎ(dc) and 0-10VÎ(dc) with
500Ω min. load impedance
Line Voltage/Power
• 100-240Vı(ac/dc) +10 percent,
-15 percent; 50/60Hz, ±5 percent
• 24 to 28Vı(ac/dc) +10 percent,
-15 percent; 50/60Hz, ±5 percent
• Fused internally (factory replaceable only) Slo-Blo® type (time-lag)
2A, 250V for high voltage versions
5A, 250V for low voltage versions
• Power consumption
16VA maximum
• Data retention upon power failure
via non-volatile memory
Operating Environment
• 0 to 55°C (32 to 130°F)
• 0 to 90 percent RH, non-condensing
SERIES 981/982 = Ramping controller
1 analog input, 4 outputs, 2 digital inputs
Electromechanical relays warranted for 100,000
closures only. Solid state switching devices
recommended for applications requiring fast cycle
times or extended service life.
b
Output cannot be configured as an event output.
c
Event output capable.
Availability
Four working days for orders less
than 20 units. For orders over 20
units, consult factory for release and
shipment schedules.
Slo-Blo® is a registered trademark of
Littelfuse, Inc.
Quencharc® is a registered trademark of ITW
Paktron.
Software
C = Standard (4-file/6 step per file program capability)
S = Special customer feature
Input 1
1 = Basic thermocouple signal conditioner
(excluding Type B, R and S)
2 = Universal signal conditioner (see Range Information)
Input 2
0 = None
3 = Slidewire feedback (see Range Information)
5 = Second digital event (one digital event is standard on all units)
Output 1b
B
= Solid state relay, Form A, 0.5A, with RC suppression
C
= Switched dc or open collector, isolated
D
= Electromechanical relaya, Form C, 5A with RC suppression
E
= Electromechanical relaya, Form C, 5A without contact suppression
F
= Universal process, 0-5VÎ(dc), 1-5VÎ(dc), 0-10VÎ(dc),
0-20mAÎ(dc), 4-20mAÎ(dc), isolated
K
= Solid state relay, Form A, 0.5A, without contact suppression
Output 2 b
A
= None
B
= Solid state relay, Form A, 0.5A, with RC suppression
C
= Switched dc or open collector, isolated
D
= Electromechanical relaya, Form C, 5A with RC suppression
E
= Electromechanical relaya, Form C, 5A without contact suppression
F
= Universal process 0-5VÎ(dc), 1-5VÎ(dc), 0-10VÎ(dc),
0-20mAÎ(dc), 4-20mAÎ(dc), isolated
K
= Solid state relay, Form A, 0.5A, without contact suppression
T
= External signal conditioner power supply, 5, 12 or 20VÎ(dc) @ 30mA
Output 3c
A
= None
B
= Solid state relay, Form A, 0.5A, with RC suppression
C
= Switched dc or open collector, isolated
J
= Electromechanical relaya, Form A or B, 5A without contact suppression
K
= Solid state relay, Form A, 0.5A without contact suppression
M
= Retransmit, 0-20mAÎ(dc), 4-20mAÎ(dc)
N
= Retransmit, 0-5VÎ(dc), 1-5VÎ(dc), 0-10VÎ(dc)
T
= External signal conditioner power supply, 5, 12 or 20VÎ(dc) @ 30mA
Output 4c
A
= None
B
= Solid state relay, Form A, 0.5A, with RC suppression
C
= Switched dc or open collector, isolated
D
= Electromechanical relaya, Form C, 5A with RC suppression
E
= Electromechanical relaya, Form C, 5A without contact suppression
K
= Solid state relay, Form A, 0.5A without contact suppression
R
= EIA/TIA-232 communications, opto-isolated
S
= EIA/TIA-485/EIA/TIA-422 communications, opto-isolated
U
= EIA/TIA-232, EIA/TIA-485 software selectable, communications, opto-isolated
T
= External signal conditioner power supply, 5, 12 or 20VÎ(dc) @ 30mA
Display Color (Upper/Lower)
GG = Green/Green
GR = Green/Red
XX = Custom overlays or default settings
RG =
RR =
Red/Green
Red/Red
75
Single-Loop
a
Power Supply & Mounting
1 = 100 to 240Vı(ac/dc) nominal, horizontal mounting
2 = 100 to 240Vı(ac/dc) nominal, vertical mounting
3 = 24 to 28Vı(ac/dc) nominal, horizontal mounting
4 = 24 to 28Vı(ac/dc) nominal, vertical mounting
PID with Time/Temperature Profiling
Note: If this output will drive a solenoid, MDR,
contactor or other inductive device, order a
Quencharc® (0804-0147-0000) for output protection.
See user’s manual for wiring.
To order, complete the code number with the information below:
98_C-____-____
PID with Time/
Temperature
Profiling Controllers
SERIES 981/982
Dimensions
Storage Temperature
• -40 to 85°C (-40 to 185°F)
Terminals
• #6 compression universal head
screws, accepts 28-14 gauge
wire
Controller Weight
• 0.45 kg
(1.0 lb)
Shipping Weight
• 1.35 kg
(3.01 lbs)
100 mm
(4.03 in.)
WATL W
WATL W
PROCESS
DSPY
MODE
55 mm
(2.18 in.)
PROCESS
L1
L2
L3
DEV
HOLD
% OUT
RUN
L1
DEV
L4
100 mm
(4.03 in.)
DISPLAY
HOLD
RUN
MODE
SERIES 982
Dimensions
Vertical Orientation
55 mm
(2.18 in.)
Overall
Height:
L3
% OUT
SERIES 981
L4
L2
100 mm
Width:
55 mm
(2.18 in.)
Depth:
120 mm
(4.74 in.)
Height:
100 mm
(4.03 in.)
Width:
55 mm
(2.18 in.)
Depth:
15 mm
(0.68 in.)
90 mm
(3.6 in.)
Adjustable
Mounting Bracket
Panel
(4.03 in.)
Panel Cutout
Bezel
Maximum Panel
Thickness
9.65 mm (0.38 in.)
90 mm
(3.6 in.)
Chassis
Height:
Width:
45 mm
(1.7 in.)
Depth:
105 mm
(4.06 in.)
92 mm + 0.8
(3.62 in. + 0.03 -0.00)
105 mm
(4.06 in.)
15 mm
(0.68 in.)
45 mm + 0.6
(1.77 in. + 0.02 -0.00)
120 mm
(4.74 in.)
System Diagram
DIN-A-MITE®
Power Controller
High Limit
Mechanical
Contactor
Heater
Thermocouple
Limit Sensor
WATL W
PROCESS
SERIES LV
Limit
Controller
SERIES 982
Chart
Recorder
76
Thermocouple
Temperature Sensor
W
A
T
L
O
W
PID with Time/
Temperature
Profiling Controllers
SERIES F4S
The SERIES F4S 1⁄4 DIN industrial
ramping controllers offer an easy to
set up and operate solution for the
most demanding ramp and soak
processing applications. The
features and performance of these
units make them ideally suited for
environmental chamber or furnace
and oven applications.
1B
Up to 256 steps can be programmed
into as many as 40 nameable profiles.
Profiles can be programmed to wait
for events or for up to three different
process variables. A guaranteed
soak feature allows you to set how
closely your process needs to be
controlled.
The four digital event inputs can be
programmed to remotely start,
pause or terminate any of your
preprogrammed process recipes.
The eight event outputs are segment
programmable, or three of them can
be assigned to programmable
compressor and boost heat/boost
cool control. A real time clock can
be used to start a profile at any time.
Serial communication and dual
alarm relays are included in the base
unit. The SERIES F4S ramping
controllers are packaged with a
NEMA 4X front face to withstand
harsh environments and a 101.6 mm
(4.0 in.) deep case with removable
connectors for wiring convenience.
F4
1A
1
2
i
Features and Benefits
Universal inputs
Guided 256 step, 40 profile ramp
and soak programmable memory
• Provide application versatility
• Supports a wide range of
processing applications
• Field upgradeable
High definition four line LCD
controller interface display
Expandable modular construction
Enhanced environmental chamber
control
• Simplifies setup and operation
• Supports humidity, compressor,
boost heat/boost cool control
Menu customization
Cascade control
• Offers enhanced process
monitoring
• Provides precise two variable
control
High performance 16 bit
microprocessor
• Auxiliary inputs required
(ordering option)
• Precise process control
Real time clock with battery backup
• 20Hz update rate on input 1
• Offers operational flexibility and
peace of mind
• 10Hz update rate on inputs 2 and 3
Field upgradeable firmware
• Downloads available at no charge
from www.watlow.com/F4
• Reduces downtime
• Eliminates the need for an RMA
77
Single-Loop
Channel 1
Temperature
PID with Time/Temperature Profiling
The F4S is a competitively priced
controller which features a four line,
high definition LCD interface display
that makes profile programming and
controller configuration significantly
faster and easier. A 16 bit microprocessor supports all the accuracy
and performance advantages you
have come to expect from a Watlow
controller.
PID with Time/
Temperature
Profiling Controllers
SERIES F4S
Set Point Ramp and Soak
Programming
The enhanced programming features
found in the SERIES F4S ramping
controllers are the result of listening
to our customers’ demand for greater
capabilities with reduced
programming complexity.
A profile guide leads the programmer
through the programming process by
offering choices for step
configuration. For better operator
recognition, profiles and digital I/O
used for events can be given names
of up to 10 characters in length.
Five step types including ramp, soak,
jump, auto start and end offer the
programmer complete flexibility.
Ramp steps can be based on time or
rate. Ramp and soak steps can be
programmed to wait for up to four
event inputs and three process
variables. Up to eight event outputs
are step selectable. Since your
thermal systems characteristics may
change over the operating range,
up to 10 sets of PID heat/cool
parameters are step selectable.
The auto start step can start a profile
based on a set date, a day of the
week or daily, the choice is yours.
The jump step can be used to jump
within a profile or to another profile.
The end step terminates a program
with the control outputs programmed
to your process needs.
Temperature Chamber Application with Cascade
Input 1
(Inner Loop)
Input 3
(Outer Loop)
Outer Loop Temperature Sensor
Inner Loop Temperature Sensor
Serial Communication
EIA-232 and EIA-485 serial
communication interfaces are
included in the base unit of both
the SERIES F4S (single channel)
and the SERIES F4D (dual channel)
controllers. The baud rate is
selectable as either 9600 or 19200
baud. The protocol is Modbus™.
Panel Cutout
92 mm x 92 mm
(3.622 in. x 3.622 in.)
108.05 mm
(4.254 in.)
99.82 mm
(3.930 in.)
97.79 mm
(3.850 in.)
99.82 mm
(3.930 in.)
108.81 mm
(4.824 in.)
Alarms
Two Form “C” electromechanical
alarm relays are included in the
base units. These alarms can be
programmed as either process or
deviation alarms. The alarms can be
tied to up to three process variables.
78
10.26 mm
(.404 in.)
Optional Retransmit(s)
Optional retransmit capability is
available to retransmit one or two
variables. These variables include up
to three process variables, control
set points or percent load power.
W
A
T
L
O
W
PID with Time/
Temperature
Profiling Controllers
SERIES F4S
Solid State Relay
Power
Specifications
• Zero switched, optically coupled,
0.5A @ 24VÅ(ac) minimum,
253VÅ(ac) maximum
• 100-240VÅ(ac), -15 percent,
+10 percent; 50/60Hz, ±5 percent
Dimensions
• 24-28Vı(ac/dc), -15 percent,
+10 percent (order option)
• Update rate = 1Hz
• 39VA maximum power
consumption
Universal Analog Inputs 1
(2 and 3 Optional)
• User selectable 0-10VÎ(dc),
0-5VÎ(dc), 1-5VÎ(dc) @ 1KΩ min.,
0-20mA, 4-20mA @ 800Ω max.
• Data retention upon power failure
via nonvolatile memory (seven
years for battery backed ram)
• Resolution:
dc ranges = 2.5mV nominal
mA ranges = 5µA nominal
• Sensor input isolation from input
to input to output to communication circuitry is 500VÅ(ac)
• Calibration accuracy:
dc ranges = ±15mV
mA ranges = ±30µA
• Temperature stability 100ppm/°C
Operating Environment
• Updates rates, IN1 = 20Hz, IN2
and IN3 = 10HZ
Thermocouple
• Type J, K, T, N, E, C (W5), D (W3),
PTII, R, S, B
• Input impedance 20MΩ
RTD
• 2- or 3-wire platinum, 100, 500 or
1000Ω
• JIS or DIN-curves, 1.0 or 0.1
indication
Process
• Input resolution ≈50,000 bits at
full scale
• 0 to 55°C (32 to 130°F)
• 0 to 90 percent RH, non-condensing
Alarm Outputs
• Storage temperature: -40 to 70°C
(-40 to 158°F)
• Output update rate 1Hz
Accuracy
• Electromechanical relay, Form C,
2A @ 30VÎ(dc) or 240VÅ(ac)
maximum
• Calibration accuracy and sensor
conformity: ±0.1 percent of span
±1°C @ 25°C ±3°C (77°F ±5°F)
ambient and rated line voltage
±10 percent with the following
exceptions:
Digital Outputs (8)
• Range selectable: 0-10VÎ(dc),
0-5VÎ(dc), 1-5VÎ(dc),
0-50mV, 0-20mA, 4-20mA
• Update rate = 10Hz
• Voltage input impedance 20KΩ
• On = 0.2VÎ(dc) max @ 50mA sink
• Current input impedance 100Ω
• Internal supply: 5VÎ(dc), @ 80mA
Digital Inputs (4)
Communications
Types R and S: 0.15 percent of
span for 0°C to 100°C (32°F to
212°F)
• Update rate = 10Hz
• Contact or dc voltage (36VÎ(dc)
maximum)
EIA-232 and EIA-485 serial
communications with Modbus™
RTU protocol
Type B: 0.24 percent of span for
870°C to 1700°C (1598°F to
3092°F)
• 10KΩ input impedance
Safety and Agency Approvals
Control Outputs (1A, 1B)
• Update rate = 20Hz
Open Collector/Switched dc
• Internal load switching (nominal):
Switched dc, 22 to 28VÎ(dc),
limited @ 30mA
• External load switching
(maximum):
Open collector 42VÎ(dc) @ 0.5A
• Open collector output
• Off = 42VÎ(dc) max @ 10µA
•
UL®/C-UL®
916 listed, File
# E185611, process control
equipment
• IP65 and NEMA 4X
• CE to EN 61010-1 and 631326
Terminals
• Touch-safe removable terminal
blocks, accepts 12 to 22
gauge wire
Type T: 0.12 percent of span for
-200°C to -50°C (-328°F to -58°F)
• Accuracy span: Less than or
equal to operating ranges,
540°C (1000°F) minimum
• Temperature stability: ±0.1°C/°C
(±0.1°F/°F) rise in ambient for
thermocouples
±0.05°C/°C (±0.05°F/°F) rise in
ambient for RTD sensors
Displays
• Process: Five, seven segment
LED, red
• Control interface display: high
definition LCD, green
79
Single-Loop
Process Outputs
(Optional Retransmit)
PID with Time/Temperature Profiling
• Width x height x depth
99 mm x 99 mm x 97 mm panel
mount (3.93 in. x 3.93 in. x 3.85 in.)
PID with Time/
Temperature
Profiling Controllers
SERIES F4S
Sensor Operating Ranges:
Type J:
0 to 815°C
(32 to 1500°F)
Type K:
-200 to 1370°C
(-328 to 2500°F)
Type T:
-200 to 400°C
(-328 to 750°F)
Type N:
0 to 1300°C
(32 to 2372°F)
Type E:
-200 to 800°C
(-328 to 1472°F)
Type C: (W5)
0 to 2315°C
(32 to 4200°F)
Type D: (W3)
0 to 2400°C
(32 to 4352°F)
Type PTII:
0 to 1395°C
(32 to 2543°F)
Type R:
0 to 1760°C
(32 to 3200°F)
Type S:
0 to 1760°C
(32 to 3200°F)
Type B:
0 to 1816°C
(32 to 3300°F)
RTD (DIN):
-200 to 800°C
(-328 to 1472°F)
RTD (JIS):
-200 to 800°C
(-328 to 1472°F)
Process:-19,999 to 30,000 units
Sensor Accuracy Ranges:
Input ranges
Type J:
0 to 750°C
(32 to 1382°F)
Type K:
-200 to 1250°C
(-328 to 2282°F)
Type T:
-200 to 350°C
(-328 to 662°F)
Type N:
0 to 1250°C
(32 to 2282°F)
Type E:
-200 to 800°C
(-328 to 1472°F)
Type C(W5):
0 to 2315°C
(32 to 4200°F)
Type D(W3):
0 to 2400°C
(32 to 4352°F)
Type PTII:
0 to 1393°C
(32 to 2540°F)
Type R:
0 to 1450°C
(32 to 2642°F)
Type S:
0 to 1450°C
(32 to 2642°F)
Type B:
870 to 1700°C
(1598 to 3092°F)
RTD (DIN):
-200 to 800°C
(-328 to 1472°F)
RTD (JIS):
-200 to 630°C
(-328 to 1166°F)
Process:-19,999 to 30,000 units
80
F.O.B.: Winona, Minnesota
Ordering Information
To order, complete the code number on the right with the information below:
F4 S
SERIES F4S = 1⁄4 DIN, single channel ramping controller
Single Channel Ramping Controller
1 universal analog input, 4-digital inputs, 8-digital outputs,
2 alarms, EIA-232/485 comms
Power Supply
H = 100-240Vı(ac/dc)
L = 24-28Vı(ac/dc)
Output 1A
C = Open collector/switched dc
F = Process, 0-5, 1-5, 0-10VÎ(dc), 0-20mA, 4-20mA
K = Solid state Form A 0.5 amp relay
Output 1B
A = None
C = Open collector/switched dc
F = Process, 0-5, 1-5, 0-10VÎ(dc), 0-20mA, 4-20mA
K = Solid state Form A 0.5 amp relay
Auxiliary Input Module
0 = None
6 = Dual universal inputs
Auxiliary Retransmit Module
0 = None
1 = Single retransmit output 0-5, 1-5, 0-10VÎ(dc), 0-20mA, 4-20mA
2 = Dual retransmit outputs 0-5, 1-5, 0-10VÎ(dc), 0-20mA, 4-20mA
Language and RTD Options
1 = English with 100Ω RTD
2 = German with 100Ω RTD
3 = French with 100Ω RTD
4 = Spanish with 100Ω RTD
5 = English with 500 and 1KΩ RTD
6 = German with 500 and 1KΩ RTD
7 = French with 500 and 1KΩ RTD
8 = Spanish with 500 and 1KΩ RTD
Display and Custom Options
RG = Standard display (Red/Green display only)
XX = Custom options: software, setting parameters, overlay
-
A
-
W
A
T
L
O
W
Limits /Alarms
SERIES LV
Operator Interface
• Four digit, seven segment LED
displays, 7 mm (0.28 in.) high
• °C or °F indicator LED
• Alarm indicator LED
• Continuous turn, velocity sensitive
rotary encoder for set point
adjustment
• Front panel SET/RESET
Standard Conditions For
Specifications
• Rated line voltage, 50 to 60Hz,
0 to 90 percent RH noncondensing, 15-minute warm-up
• Calibration ambient range: 25°C
(77°F) ±3°C
Sensor Input
Thermocouple
• Grounded or ungrounded
• Type E, J, K, T thermocouple
• >10 MΩ input impedance
• 250 nV input referenced error per
1Ω source resistance
RTD
• 2-wire platinum, 100Ω
• DIN-curve (0.00385 curve)
• 125 µA nominal RTD excitation
current
Limits /Alarms
UL® and C-UL® are registered trademarks of
Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc.
Multiple mounting options
• Minimize installation time
High or low limit with auto or
manual reset
• Provides application flexibility
Fahrenheit or Celsius operation
with indication
• Offers application flexibility
Sensor break protection
• Provides positive system shutdown
Agency approvals
• Meet certification
requirements/compliance
Microprocessor based technology
• Ensures accurate repeatable control
Specifications
Limit Controller
• Microprocessor based, limit
controller
• Nominal switching hysteresis,
typically 1.7°C (3°F)
• High or low limit, factory selectable
• Latching output requires manual
reset upon over or under
temperature condition
• Manual or automatic reset on
power loss, factory selectable
• Internal front panel or external
customer supplied
momentary reset switch
• Input filter time: 1 second
81
Single-Loop
Watlow’s family of microprocessorbased limit controllers provides an
economical solution for applications
requiring temperature limit control.
These limits are available in a broad
range of packaging options, allowing
users to select the best version for
their individual application. The limits
are available with an operator
interface and can be ordered in 1⁄8
DIN-square panel mount or DIN-rail
mount design configurations.
The LV limit family incorporates a
microprocessor design platform.
This design provides significant
improvements in the performance,
repeatability and accuracy offered
by Watlow’s current line of analog
limit controllers.
The variable SERIES LV limit
includes an operator interface for
viewing and selecting the set point.
A red, four-character seven segment
LED displays the set point. The set
point selection is made with a
continuous turn rotary encoder.
Operating range temperature values
are customer definable in the
product configuration part number.
The limit controllers are FM
approved with special UL® approval
for the open board potted versions.
Watlow’s limit controllers include
industry leading service and support
and are backed by a three-year
warranty.
Applications
• Food preparation
• Industrial machinery
• Packaging
• Plastics processing
Features and Benefits
Adjustable set points
• Offer control flexibility
Four character LED display
• Improves set point selection
accuracy
Limits /Alarms
SERIES LV
Specifications Cont.
Input Accuracy Span Range
Type E:
-200 to
800°C
(-328 to 1472°F)
Type J:
0 to
750°C
(32 to 1382°F)
Type K:
-200 to 1250°C
(-328 to 2282°F)
Type T:
-200 to
350°C
(-328 to
662°F)
RTD (DIN) -200 to
800°C
(-328 to 1472°F)
Thermocouple Input
• Calibration accuracy: ±1 percent
of input accuracy span, ±1° at
standard conditions and actual
calibration ambient. Exception:
Type T, ±2.4 percent of input
accuracy span for -200 to 0°C
(-328 to 32°F)
• Temperature stability: ±0.3° per
degree change in ambient
RTD Input
• Calibration accuracy ±1 percent
of input accuracy span ±1° at
standard conditions and actual
calibration ambient
• Temperature stability: ±0.2° per
degree change in ambient
Allowable Operating Ranges
Type E:
-200 to
800°C
(-328 to 1472°F)
Type J:
-210 to 1038°C
(-346 to 1900°F)
Type K:
-270 to 1370°C
(-454 to 2500°F)
Type T:
-270 to
400°C
(-454 to
750°F)
RTD (DIN) -200 to
800°C
(-328 to 1472°F)
Electromechanical Relay, Form C
• Minimum load current: 100mA
• 8 A @ 240VÅ(ac) or 30VÎ(dc)
maximum, resistive
• 250VA pilot duty, 120/240VÅ(ac)
maximum, inductive
• Use RC suppression for inductive
loads
• Electrical life 100,000 cycles at
rated current
82
F.O.B.: Winona, Minnesota
External Reset Switch
• Momentary, dry contact closure
Agency Approvals
• UL® 873 recognized temperature
regulator
• UL® 197 reviewed for use in
cooking appliances
• ANSI Z21.23 Gas appliance
thermostat approval
• DIN 3440 - Temperature control
and limiting devices for heat
generating systems
• CSA C22.2#24 approved limit
control (applied for)
• FM Class 3545 temperature limit
switches (applied for)
Terminals
• 6.3 mm (0.25 in.) quick connect,
push on terminal
Power
• 24VÅ(ac) +10 percent; -15 percent;
50/60Hz, ±5 percent
• 120VÅ(ac) +10 percent; -15 percent;
50/60Hz, ±5 percent
• 230 to 240VÅ(ac) +10 percent;
-15 percent; 50/60Hz, ±5 percent
• 10VA maximum power consumption
• Data retention upon power failure
via nonvolatile memory
Operating Environment
• 0 to 70°C (32 to 158°F)
• 0 to 90 percent RH, non-condensing
• Storage temperature: -40 to 85°C
(-40 to 185°F)
Dimensions
• DIN-rail model can be DIN-rail or
chassis mount
DIN-rail spec DIN 50022, 35 mm x
7.5 mm (1.38 in. x 0.30 in.)
Style
Width
Height
Depth
DIN-rail
78.1 mm
(3.08 in.)
72.4 mm
(2.85 in.)
112.3 mm
(4.42 in.)
72.4 mm
(2.85 in.)
90.7 mm
(3.57 in.)
Behind panel
51.7 mm
(2.04 in.)
Square 1⁄8
DIN-panel
Ordering Information
To order, complete the model number on the right with the information below.
LV
SERIES LV = Limit controller with eight amp relay output.
Rotary set point, adjustment, four character,
seven segment display, reset switch
Power Supply
C = 120VÅ(ac)
E = 230 to 240VÅ(ac)
G = 24VÅ(ac)
Package
1 = Panel mount square 1⁄8 DIN
2 = DIN-rail mount
Sensor Type and Scale
H = T/C Type J Fahrenheit (-346 to 1900˚F)
J = T/C Type J Celsius (-210 to 1038˚C)
K = T/C Type K Fahrenheit (-454 to 2500˚F)
L = T/C Type K Celsius (-270 to 1370˚C)
M = T/C Type T Fahrenheit (-454 to 750˚F)
N = T/C Type T Celsius (-270 to 400˚C)
P = RTD Fahrenheit (-328 to 1472˚F)
R = RTD Celsius (-200 to 800˚C)
S = T/C Type E Fahrenheit (-328 to 1470˚F)
T = T/C Type E Celsius (-200 to 800˚C)
Limit Type
U = High limit manual reset
W = High limit auto reset
Y = Low limit manual reset
Z = Low limit auto reset
Low Set Point Operating Range Value1
High Set Point Operating Range Value1
Overlay/Customs Options
A = Standard
1A (-) is used in the left most digit of the set point operating ranges to indicate a negative temperature value
W
A
T
L
O
W
Limits /Alarms
SERIES LF
Sensor Input
Thermocouple
• Grounded or ungrounded
• Type E, J, K, T thermocouple
• >10 MΩ input impedance
• 250 nV input referenced error per
1Ω source resistance
RTD
• 2-wire platinum, 100Ω
• DIN-curve (0.00385 curve)
• 125 µA nominal RTD excitation
current
Input Accuracy Span Range
Type E:
-200 to 800°C
(-328 to 1472°F)
Type J:
0 to 750°C
(32 to 1382°F)
Type K:
-200 to 1250°C
(-328 to 2282°F)
Type T:
-200 to 350°C
(-328 to 662°F)
RTD (DIN) -200 to 800°C
(-328 to 1472°F)
Thermocouple Input
• Calibration accuracy: ±1 percent
of input accuracy span, ±1° at
standard conditions and actual
calibration ambient. Exception:
Type T, ±2.4 percent of input
accuracy span for -200 to 0°C
(-328 to 32°F)
• Temperature stability: ±0.3° per
degree change in ambient
Limits /Alarms
Fahrenheit or Celsius operation
with indication
• Offers application flexibility
Sensor break protection
• Provides positive system shutdown
Agency approvals
• Meet certification
requirements/compliance
Microprocessor based technology
• Ensures accurate repeatable control
Specifications
Limit Controller
• Microprocessor based, limit
controller
• Nominal switching hysteresis,
typically 1.7°C (3°F)
• High or low limit, factory selectable
• Latching output requires manual
reset upon over or under
temperature condition
• Manual or automatic reset on
power loss, factory selectable
• External customer supplied
momentary reset switch
• Input filter time: 1 second
Standard Conditions For
Specifications
• Rated line voltage, 50 to 60Hz,
0 to 90 percent RH non-condensing,
15-minute warm-up
• Calibration ambient range: 25°C
(77°F) ±3°C
83
Single-Loop
Watlow’s family of microprocessorbased limit controllers provide an
economical solution for applications
requiring temperature limit control.
These limits are available in a broad
range of packaging options, allowing
users to select the best version for
their individual application. The
controllers are available without an
operator interface and can be
ordered in square 1⁄8 DIN-panel
mount, DIN-rail mount or open board
design configurations.
The LF limit family incorporates a
microprocessor design platform.
This design provides significant
improvements in the performance,
repeatability and accuracy offered
by Watlow’s current line of analog
basic temperature controllers.
The fixed SERIES LF limit offers
fixed set points and is supplied
without an operator interface.
Operating set point temperature
values are customer definable in the
product configuration part number.
The LF limit controllers are FM
approved with special UL® approval
for the open board potted versions.
Watlow’s limit controllers include
industry leading service and support
and are backed by a three-year
warranty.
Applications
• Food preparation
• Industrial machinery
• Packaging
• Plastics processing
Features and Benefits
Fixed set points
• Provide tamper-proof operation
Multiple mounting options
• Minimize installation time
High or low limit with auto or
manual reset
• Provides application flexibility
Limits /Alarms
SERIES LF
Specifications Cont.
RTD Input
• Calibration accuracy ±1 percent
of input accuracy span ±1° at
standard conditions and actual
calibration ambient
• Temperature stability: ±0.2° per
degree change in ambient
Allowable Operating Ranges
Type E:
-200 to
800°C
(-328 to 1472°F)
Type J:
-210 to 1038°C
(-346 to 1900°F)
Type K:
-270 to 1370°C
(-454 to 2500°F)
Type T:
-270 to
400°C
(-454 to
750°F)
RTD (DIN) -200 to
800°C
(-328 to 1472°F)
Output Types
Electromechanical Relay, Form C
• Minimum load current: 100mA
• 8 A @ 240VÅ(ac) or 30VÎ(dc)
maximum, resistive
• 250VA pilot duty, 120/240VÅ(ac)
maximum, inductive
• Use RC suppression for inductive
loads
• Electrical life 100,000 cycles at
rated current
External Reset Switch
• Momentary, dry contact closure
Agency Approvals
SERIES LF (potted version only)
• UL® 991 recognized temperature
limit for cooking industry
• CSA E60730-1, E60730-2-9
approved temperature regulator
for cooking industry (applied for)
SERIES LF (including potted version)
• UL® 873 recognized temperature
regulator
• UL® 197 reviewed for use in
cooking appliances
• ANSI Z21.23 Gas appliance
thermostat approval
84
F.O.B.: Winona, Minnesota
• DIN 3440 - Temperature control
and limiting devices for heat
generating systems
• CSA C22.2#24 approved limit
control (applied for)
• FM Class 3545 temperature limit
switches (applied for)
Terminals
• 6.3 mm (0.25 in.) quick connect,
push on terminal
Power
• 24VÅ(ac) +10 percent; -15
percent; 50/60Hz, ±5 percent
• 120VÅ(ac) +10 percent; -15
percent; 50/60Hz, ±5 percent
• 230 to 240VÅ(ac) +10 percent;
-15 percent; 50/60Hz, ±5 percent
• 10VA maximum power
consumption
• Data retention upon power failure
via nonvolatile memory
Operating Environment
• 0 to 70°C (32 to 158°F)
• 0 to 90 percent RH, non-condensing
• Storage temperature: -40 to 85°C
(-40 to 185°F)
Dimensions
• DIN-rail model can be DIN-rail or
chassis mount
DIN-rail spec DIN 50022, 35 mm x
7.5 mm (1.38 in. x 0.30 in.)
Style
Width
Height
Depth
Open Board
61.7 mm
(2.43 in.)
70.1 mm
(2.76 in.)
78.1 mm
(3.08 in.)
72.4 mm
(2.85 in.)
61.7 mm
(2.43 in.)
102.9 mm
(4.05 in.)
112.3 mm
(4.42 in.)
72.4 mm
(2.85 in.)
45.1 mm
(1.78 in.)
46.6 mm
(1.84 in.)
90.7 mm
(3.57 in.)
Behind panel
51.7 mm
(2.04 in.)
Potted
DIN-rail
Square 1⁄8
DIN-panel
Ordering Information
To order, complete the model number on the right with the information below.
LF
AAAA
SERIES LF = Limit controller with eight amp relay output.
Fixed set point, no user interface
Power Supply
C = 120VÅ(ac)
E = 230 to 240VÅ(ac)
G = 24VÅ(ac)
Package
1 = Panel mount square 1⁄8 DIN
2 = DIN-rail mount
3 = Open board, non potted
4 = Potted case
Sensor Type and Scale
H = T/C Type J Fahrenheit (-346 to 1900˚F)
J = T/C Type J Celsius (-210 to 1038˚C)
K = T/C Type K Fahrenheit (-454 to 2500˚F)
L = T/C Type K Celsius (-270 to 1370˚C)
M = T/C Type T Fahrenheit (-454 to 750˚F)
N = T/C Type T Celsius (-270 to 400˚C)
P = RTD Fahrenheit (-328 to 1472˚F)
R = RTD Celsius (-200 to 800˚C)
S = T/C Type E Fahrenheit (-328 to 1470˚F)
T = T/C Type E Celsius (-200 to 800˚C)
Limit Type
U = High limit manual reset
W = High limit auto reset
Y = Low limit manual reset
Z = Low limit auto reset
Fixed Set Point Temperature Value1
Overlay/Customs Options
A = Standard
1A
(-) is used in the left most digit of the fixed set point indicates a negative temperature value
W
A
T
L
O
W
Limits /Alarms
SERIES SD_L
The SERIES SD family of limit
controllers has been designed with
the same microprocessor-based
technology as the SERIES SD PID
family of temperature controllers.
The limits come with FM (Factory
Mutual) agency approval — the
industry’s most recognized
designation for insurance concerns.
The SD_L limit family is also
designed to work with Watlow’s
HMI software WATVIEW.
Limits /Alarms
Limits are recommended and are
often required in applications where
thermal runaway could result in
costly operator safety concerns,
product scrap, damage to capital
equipment or a fire hazard.
LIMIT SD
1
2
Output 1
3
Control
Input
Limit
Output 2
Limit, Alarm or Communications
Output 3 *
RESET
Infrared
Configure**
Limit or Alarm
*1/32 DIN cannot have an Output 3.
**Infrared option is not available on 1/32 DIN.
Infrared
Monitor**
Features and Benefits
FM approved
Watlow’s patented User Defined
Menu System
• Allows the user to assign up to 20
parameters in the operations menu
Up to three outputs (two for 1⁄32 DIN)
Specifications
• Results in application versatility
Line Voltage/Power
Dual display on all limit models
• 100 to 240VÅ(ac), +10/-15
percent; (85-264VÅ[ac])
50/60Hz, ±5 percent
• Improves operational efficiency
• Provides better recognition of
process changes
“Save and Restore” feature for
user settings
Infrared communications (optional)
• Allows the user to save individual
or factory settings
• Eliminates the need to contact the
OEM or factory to restore settings
WATVIEW HMI
(Human Machine Interface)
• Permits operation, configuration
and data logging via a standard
Windows® PC
Windows® is a registered trademark of
Microsoft Corporation.
• Facilitates recipe management
and data logging
• Allows easier controller setup,
operation and monitoring
Watlow’s INFOSENSE™ sensor
technology
• 24Vı(ac/dc), +10/-15 percent;
50/60Hz, ±5 percent
• 10VA maximum power
consumption
• Data retention upon power failure
via nonvolatile memory
• Thermal sensing technology
improves sensor accuracy by a
minimum of 50 percent
85
Single-Loop
Limit controllers are typically added
to thermal applications to monitor an
over-temperature condition as a
safety precaution. Limit controllers
provide a redundant safety
assurance to guard against
instances where a high temperature
runaway condition could result from
a shorted input sensor, or from an
output device that fails in a closed
position.
Limits /Alarms
SERIES SD_L
Wiring Termination -Touch Safe
Terminals
Specifications Cont.
Environment
• Input power and control outputs
12 to 22 AWG
• -18 to 65°C (0 to 149°F) operating
temperature
• -40 to 85°C (-40 to 185°F) storage
temperature
• 0 to 90 percent RH, noncondensing
Accuracy
• Calibration accuracy and sensor
conformity: ±0.1 percent of span,
±1°C @ the calibrated ambient
temperature and rated line
voltage
• Calibration ambient temperature
= 25°C ±3°C (77°F ±5°F)
• Accuracy span: 540°C (1000°F)
minimum
• Sensor inputs and process
outputs 20 to 28 AWG
Universal Input
• Thermocouple, grounded or
ungrounded sensors
• RTD 2- or 3-wire, platinum, 100Ω
@ 0°C calibration to
DIN-curve (0.00385 Ω/Ω/°C)
• Process, 0-20mA @ 100Ω, or
0-10VÎ(dc) @ 20kΩ input
impedance; Scalable
• Inverse scaling
• >20MΩ input impedance
• Maximum of 20Ω source
resistance
• Microprocessor based userselectable control modes
Allowable Operating Range
Type J:
0 to
815°C
(32 to 1500°F)
Type K:
-200 to 1370°C
(-328 to 2500°F)
Type T:
-200 to
400°C
(-328 to
750°F)
Type N:
0 to 1300°C
(32 to 2372°F)
Type E:
-200 to
800°C
(-328 to 1470°F)
Type C:
0 to 2315°C
(32 to 4200°F)
• Single universal input, up to three
outputs
Dimensions
• Temperature stability: ±0.1°C/°C
(±0.2°F/°F) rise in ambient maximum
Agency Approvals
• FM and NEMA 4X/IP65
• UL® 3121, C-UL®‚ CSA, CE for
outputs 2 and 3
• NSF for Type J, K, T and E
thermocouples
Controller
• Control sampling rates:
input = 6.5Hz, display = 10Hz,
outputs = 6.5Hz
DIN Size
• Optional IrDA infrared port
(not available on 1⁄32 DIN)
• Isolated EIA-485 Modbus™ serial
communications
Modbus™ is a trademark of AEG Schneider
Automation, Inc.
86
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
2315°C
4200°F)
1395°C
2543°F)
1760°C
3200°F)
1760°C
3200°F)
1816°C
3300°F)
800°C
1472°F)
9999 units
Control Outputs
Output 1
• Electromechanical relay. Form A,
rated 2A @ 120VÅ(ac), or
240VÅ(ac) or 30VÎ(dc)
Output 2
• Electromechanical relay or E/A
485 comms, or switched DC,
or SSR
Output 3
• (not available on 1⁄32 DIN) 5 amp
Form C EM-relay, or SSR,
universal process, or switched DC
Width
Height
⁄32 DIN
97.8 mm
(3.85 in.)
52.6 mm
(2.07 in.)
29.7 mm
(1.17 in.)
⁄16 DIN
97.8 mm
(3.85 in.)
52.1 mm
(2.05 in.)
52.1 mm
(2.05 in.)
⁄8 DIN
Vertical
97.8 mm
(3.85 in.)
52.8 mm
(2.08 in.)
99.8 mm
(3.93 in.)
⁄8 DIN
Horizontal
97.8 mm
(3.85 in.)
99.8 mm
(3.93 in.)
52.8 mm
(2.08 in.)
⁄4 DIN
101.1 mm
(3.98 in.)
99.8 mm
(3.93 in.)
99.8 mm
(3.93 in.)
1
1
• Advance, infinity and up down
keys
0
(32
Type PTII:
0
(32
Type R:
0
(32
Type S:
0
(32
Type B:
0
(32
RTD (DIN): -200
(-328
Process:- 1999
Behind Panel
(max.)
Operator Interface
• Dual 4 digit, 7 segment LED
displays
Type D:
1
1
1
W
A
T
L
O
W
Limits /Alarms
SERIES SD_L
Typical Block Diagram
SERIES SD PID
SERIES SD Limit
1
Input 1
2
3
Oven
LIMIT SD
SD
%
1
2
3
Output 1
Limit
Sensor
Output 2
RESET
Temperature
Sensor
Alarm
Heaters
Limits /Alarms
Note: Consult user manual for proper wiring.
infrared communications that support
the Infrared Data Association (IrDA)
1.0 Standard.
The actual user interface or
configuration is dependent on the
master device application software.
A source for this software is Instant
HMI from Software Horizons.
For more information, visit
www.instanthmi.com/watlow.
Infrared Communications
The Infrared Data Communications
(IDC) option is available on all
SERIES SD controller models except
the 1⁄32 DIN and can support complete
SERIES SD parameter configuration
and operation. The IDC option
supports wireless communications
with PDAs (personal digital assistants)
or other devices equipped with
Advantages of IDC include
automated logging of key process
variables, increased accuracy
and ease of use for recipe or configuration setups. Infrared data
communications enhances controller
data exchange in physically
restricting environments (such as
semiconductor clean rooms,
governmental radio-active test labs
or those hard to reach areas) and
reduces the use of paper to record
instrument information as well as
human transposition errors.
WATVIEW HMI
WATVIEW, Watlow’s Windows®
based HMI (Human Machine Interface) software, supports the SERIES
SD controllers. The software can be
used to setup, monitor and edit the
values of controller parameters, to
monitor and manage alarms and to
log and graph process data.
87
Single-Loop
Form C Relay
Limits /Alarms
SERIES SD_L
F.O.B.: Winona, Minnesota
Ordering Information
To order, complete the model number on the right with the information below.
S D L - _ J _ _- _ A _ _
SERIES SD_L = Temperature limit controllers①
DIN Sizes
3 = 1⁄32 DIN
6 = 1⁄16 DIN
8 = 1⁄8 DIN Vertical
9 = 1⁄8 DIN Horizontal
4 = 1⁄4 DIN
Control Type
L = Limit Control Dual Display
Power Supply
H = 100 to 240Vı(ac/dc)
L = 24 to 28Vı(ac/dc)
Output 1
J = Mechanical relay, Form A, 2A
Output 2
A = None
C = Switched dc
K = SSR, Form A, 0.5A
J = Mechanical relay, Form A, 2A
U = EIA-485 Modbus™ communications
Output 3 (Not available on 1⁄32 DIN)
A = None
C = Switched dc/open collector
K = SSR, Form A, 0.5A
F = Universal process
E = Mechanical relay, Form C, 5A
Infrared Comms Options (IrDA)
A = None (Default selection on 1⁄32 DIN)
R = IrDA ready (Not available on 1⁄32 DIN)
Display Colors and Custom Options
RG = Red Green (Dual display units)
RR = Red Red (Not available on 1⁄32 DIN Dual Display)
XX = Custom options, special overlays, etc.
① Only
88
available in dual displays, red/green.
W
A
T
L
O
W
Limits /Alarms
SERIES SD6L_D
Limits /Alarms
DeviceNet™ is a trademark of the Open DeviceNet
Vendors Association.
UL® and C-UL® are registered trademarks of
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
DeviceNet™
SDL D-NET
SD
1
2
3
%
Control
Input
Output 1
Limit
NET MOD
Output 2
RESET
Limit or Alarm
Features and Benefits
Variable burst fire
• Prolongs heater life
Ordering Options including
DeviceNet™ on CAN or
SEMI-SIG-ODVA protocols
• Provides DeviceNet™ on CAN for
Semiconductor applications
• DeviceNet™ on CAN for the
packaging or general industrial
markets
Specifications
Line Voltage/Power
• 100 to 240VÅ(ac), +10/-15
percent; (85-264VÅ[ac])
50/60Hz, ±5 percent
• 24Vı(ac/dc), +10/-15 percent;
50/60Hz, ±5 percent
• 10VA maximum power
consumption
• Data retention upon power failure
via nonvolatile memory
89
Single-Loop
Watlow SERIES SD6L_D offers
excellent Limit control and
application flexibility in a 1⁄16th DIN
panel mount package. The SERIES
SD6L_D controller has been
successfully tested for use with both
ODVA and Semi-conductor SIG
standards for DeviceNet™ on CAN
networks and comes with FM
Approval.
The SD6L_D single channel
controller includes a universal
sensor input with two outputs.
Output 1 comes preconfigured with
a Mechanical Relay dedicated for
safety shutdown purposes to meet
FM requirements. Output 2 can be
configured as an Alarm. The
DeviceNet™ communications
interface is supplied with either a five
pin circular DIN connector for
Semiconductor SIG specific
applications, or with a five position
removable screw terminal connector
for traditional market applications.
Additional features of the SD6L_D
family of controllers include Watlow’s
INOFSENSE™ sensor technology, a
user definable menu system as well
as a Save and Restore feature that
allows the restoration of factory and
user defined parameter values.
Watlow SD6L_D DeviceNet™ Limit
controllers include a three year
warranty and are FM approved with
IP65/NEMA 4, CE and NSF ratings.
When not used as a Limit device the
following agency approvals apply:
UL®, C-UL® listed, and CSA ratings.
Limits /Alarms
SERIES SD6L_D
Specifications Cont.
Environment
• -18 to 65°C (0 to 149°F) operating
temperature
• -40 to 85°C (-40 to 185°F) storage
temperature
• 0 to 90 percent RH, noncondensing
Accuracy
• Calibration accuracy and sensor
conformity: ±0.1 percent of span,
±1°C @ the calibrated ambient
temperature and rated line
voltage
• Calibration ambient temperature
= 25°C ±3°C (77°F ±5°F)
• Accuracy span: 540°C (1000°F)
minimum
• Temperature stability: ±0.1°C/°C
(±0.2°F/°F) rise in ambient
maximum
Agency Approvals
• FM, IP65/NEMA 4X and NSF-2
• UL® 3121, C-UL®‚ CSA, CE,
F.O.B.: Winona, Minnesota
Type T:
-200
(-328
Type N:
0
(32
Type E:
-200
(-328
Type C:
0
(32
Type D:
0
(32
Type PTII:
0
(32
Type R:
0
(32
Type S:
0
(32
Type B:
0
(32
RTD (DIN): -200
(-328
Process: -1999
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
400°C
750°F)
1300°C
2372°F)
800°C
1470°F)
2315°C
4200°F)
2315°C
4200°F)
1395°C
2543°F)
1760°C
3200°F)
1760°C
3200°F)
1816°C
3300°F)
800°C
1472°F)
9999 units
Control Outputs
• Electromechanical relay. Form A,
rated 2A @ 120VÅ(ac),2A @
240VÅ(ac) or 2A @ 30VÎ(dc)
• Switched dc non-isolated
minimum turn on voltage of
6VÎ(dc) into a minimum 500Ω
load with a maximum on voltage
of not greater than 12VÎ(dc) into
an infinite load. Maximum
switched dc power supply current
available for up to two outputs is
60mA
• Solid-state relay, Form A, 0.5A @
24VÅ(ac) minimum, 264VÅ(ac)
maximum, opto-isolated, without
contact suppression
• Electromechanical relay. Form C,
rated 5A @ 120VÅ(ac), 5A @
240VÅ(ac) or 5A @ 30VÎ(dc)
• Open collector 42VÎ(dc) @
250mA maximum
Dimensions
• 1⁄16 DIN Size
• 97.8 mm (3.85 in.) behind panel
maximum
• Width 52.1 mm (2.05 in.)
• Height 52.1 mm (2.05 in.)
Ordering Information
To order, complete the model number on the right with the information below.
S D 6 L -_ J _ A - D _ _ _
Controller
• Microprocessor based userselectable control modes
• Single universal input, up to three
outputs
• Control sampling rates: Input =
6.5Hz, Display = 10Hz and
Outputs = 6.5Hz
Operator Interface
• Dual 4 digit, 7 segment LED
displays
• DeviceNet™ on CAN or
• Semi-SIG-ODVA
Allowable Operating Range
Type J:
0 to 815°C
(32 to 1500°F)
Type K:
-200 to 1370°C
(-328 to 2500°F)
90
SERIES SD = 1/16 DIN-panel mount limit controller with DeviceNet™
Control Type
L = Limit control dual display
Power Supply
H = 100 to 240Vı(ac/dc)
L = 24 to 28Vı(ac/dc)
Output 1
J = Mechanical relay, Form A, 2A
Output 2
A = None
C = Switched dc
K = SSR, Form A, 0.5A
J = Mechanical relay, Form A, 2A
DeviceNet™ Communications
N = DeviceNet™ on CAN (packaging or general industrial markets)
S = SEMI-SIG-ODVA compliant (semi-conductor markets)
Display Colors and Custom Options
RG = Red Green (with Watlow name and SD logo)
RR = Red Red (with Watlow name and SD logo)
AA = Red Green (SD logo only)
AB = Red Red (SD logo only)
W
A
T
L
O
W
Limits /Alarms
SERIES 97
The SERIES 97 is recommended for
any application where thermal
runaway could result in large product
scrap costs, affect operator safety,
cause damage to equipment or
create a fire hazard.
The SERIES 97 is manufactured by
ISO 9001 registered Watlow Winona
and reliably backed up by a threeyear warranty.
2
3
4
Output 1
Limit Relay
Limits /Alarms
The SERIES 97 limit controller is
added to thermal applications to limit
over-temperature conditions. The
SERIES 97 limit controller provides
safety assurance against instances
where a high temperature runaway
condition could occur from a shorted
input sensor or an output device that
could fail in a closed position.
LIMIT 97
1
Input 1
Process
Output 2
Alarm
Output 3
Alarm
Input 2
Remote Reset
or Hardware
Lockout
RESET
Output 4
Alarm, Analog or
Communications
Features and Benefits
Four outputs
Programmable messages
(Patented)
• Handles high/low limit, alarms,
communication and retransmit
requirements
• Controller can be set up to display
user programmed limit message
NEMA 4X (IP65)
• Water and corrosion resistant;
front panel can be washed down
Microprocessor-based
• Accurate set point settings and
quick output response
Second auxiliary input
• Remote reset capability
Software and hardware lockouts
• High security
• Three-year warranty provides
Control Confidence®
Applications
• Furnace and ovens
• Environmental chambers
• Semiconductor
• Food processing
• Boilers
• Laboratory equipment
91
Single-Loop
Watlow’s SERIES 97 is a microprocessor-based controller with a
single input, second auxiliary input
and four outputs. Input 1 is used to
measure temperature from a sensor.
Input 2 can be utilized as a remote
reset switch or a hardware lockout
switch. With up to four outputs, the
controller is versatile in handling
applications that require a high/low
limit, alarms, retransmit and
communications. The control is so
user friendly it can be set up to
display safety and limit messages
created by the end user to meet the
exact application need.
Limits /Alarms
SERIES 97
Specifications
Controller
• Microprocessor-based
• Universal input 1, auxiliary input 2,
4 outputs
• Input sample period; Single input
10Hz (100 msec), dual input 5Hz
(200 msec) digital filter adjustable
• Display update; 2Hz (500 msec),
time filter adjustable
• Input/Output/Communication
isolation
• Displayed in °C, °F
Operator Interface
• Dual 4-digit LED displays: upper
10.2 mm (0.4 in.), lower 6.2 mm
(0.244 in.)
• Voltage input: event high state 3
to 36VÎ(dc), event low state 0 to
2VÎ(dc)
• Resistance/contact input: event
high state > 23kΩ, event low state
0 to 2kΩ
Output Types
Open Collector/Switched DC
• Open collector configuration:
Maximum voltage 42VÎ(dc)
Maximum current 200mA
Maximum “on” resistance 1.1Ω
Maximum off state leakage
current 100µA
• Switched dc configuration:
Switched dc supply voltage 22 to
28VÎ(dc) dc supply current
limited to 30mA
Solid State Relay
• Optically isolated
• Advance, Up Arrow, Down Arrow,
Reset tactile keys
• Zero cross switched
Standard Conditions For
Specifications
• Minimum load current 0.5mA rms
• Ambient temperature 25°C (77°F)
±3°C, rated line voltage, 50 to
60Hz, 0 to 90 percent RH noncondensing, 15 minute warm-up
Universal Input 1
Thermocouple
• Type J, K, T, N, C (W5), E, PTII, D
(W3), B, R, S thermocouple types
• >20MΩ input impedance
• Maximum 20Ω source resistance
• 30mA open detection bias
RTD
• 2- or 3-wire platinum, 100Ω
• JIS and DIN-curves
• Whole or tenth degree indication
• 150µA nominal RTD excitation
current
Input 2
Event Input
• Contact or voltage
• 20KΩ input impedance
• Without contact suppression
• Maximum current 0.5A rms at 20
to 280VÅ(ac)
• Maximum off state leakage
current 10µA rms
• For resistive loads only, must use
RC suppression for inductive
loads
Electromechanical Relay
• Form C contact configuration
• Minimum load current 10mA @
5VÎ(dc)
• Rated resistive and inductive
loads: 2A @ 250VÅ(ac) or
30VÎ(dc) maximum
• Electrical life 100,000 cycles at
rated current
• For resistive loads only, must use
RC suppression for inductive
loads
Retransmit
• Range selectable: 0-20mA,
4-20mA, 0-5VÎ(dc), 1-5VÎ(dc),
0-10VÎ(dc)
• 0 to 10VÎ(dc) voltage output into
a 1,000Ω minimum load
resistance
92
• 0 to 20mA current output into an
800Ω maximum load resistance
• Resolution:
VÎ(dc) ranges = 2.5mV nominal
mA ranges = 5µA nominal
• Calibration accuracy:
VÎ(dc) ranges = ±15mV
mA ranges = ±30µA
• Temperature stability 100ppm/°C
Communications
• EIA/TIA-485, EIA/TIA-232
• Opto-isolated
• Modbus™ RTU protocol
• 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200
baud rates
• 32 maximum units can be
connected (With additional 485
repeater hardware, up to 247
units may be connected)
Accuracy
• Input ranges
Type J:
0
(32
Type K:
-200
(-328
Type T:
-200
(-328
Type N:
0
(32
Type E:
-200
(-328
Type C(W5): 0
(32
Type D(W3): 0
(32
Type PTII:
0
(32
Type R:
0
(32
Type S:
0
(32
Type B:
870
(1598
DIN:
-200
(-328
JIS:
-200
(-328
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
750°C
1382°F)
1250°C
2282°F)
350°C
662°F)
1250°C
2282°F)
900°C
1470°F)
2315°C
4200°F)
2315°C
4200°F)
1393°C
2540°F)
1450°C
2642°F)
1450°C
2642°F)
1700°C
3092°F)
800°C
1472°F)
630°C
1166°F)
Modbus™ is a trademark of AEG Schneider
Automation.
W
A
T
L
O
W
Limits /Alarms
Terminals
SERIES 97
• Touch safe
Specifications Cont.
Thermocouple Inputs
• 22 to 12 AWG
• Calibration accuracy ±0.1 percent
of span ±1˚C at standard
conditions
• 100-240VÅ(ac) +10 percent,
-15 percent; 50/60Hz, ±5 percent
Power
Exceptions:
Type T: 0.12 percent of span for
-200°C to -50°C (-328°F to -58°F)
Types R and S: 0.15 percent of
span for 0°C to 100°C (32°F to
212°F)
• Temperature stability: ±0.1° per
degree change in ambient
• Data retention upon power failure
via nonvolatile memory
Operating Environment
• 0 to 65°C (32 to 149°F)
• 0 to 90 percent RH, non-condensing
• Storage temperature: -40 to 85°C
(-40 to 185°F)
Dimensions
RTD Inputs
• Width 52 mm (2.05 in.)
• Calibration accuracy ±0.1 percent
of span ±1˚C at standard
conditions
• Height 52 mm (2.05 in.)
• Accuracy span: 540°C (1000°F)
minimum
• Temperature stability: ±0.05° per
degree change in ambient
• Length 107 mm (4.2 in.)
• Depth behind panel surface
98.4 mm (3.875 in.)
• Approximate controller weight
0.2 kg (0.4 lbs)
Agency Approvals
• FM Class 3545, File # J.I.
1B5A6.AF
• NEMA 4X, IP65
• CE 89/336/EEC, electromagnetic
compatibility directive
CE 73/23/EEC, low-voltage
directive
Functionality Matrix
Universal
Input
Event
High/
Low
Limit
High/
232
Low
485
Alarm Retransmit Comm
Input 1
Input 2
Output 1
Output 2
Output 3
Output 4
Limits /Alarms
• Accuracy span: 540°C (1000°F)
minimum
• 7.0VA maximum power
consumption
Note: These specifications are subject to change without prior notice.
93
Single-Loop
Types B: 0.24 percent of span for
870°C to 1700°C (1598°F to
3092°F)
• 24-28VÅ(ac) or VÎ(dc) +10
percent, -15 percent; 50/60Hz,
±5 percent
Allowable Operating Ranges
Type J:
1.0
0 to 815°C
(32 to 1500°F)
0.1
0 to 815°C
(32 to 1500°F)
Type K:
1.0 -270 to 1370°C
(-454 to 2500°F)
0.1 -200 to 1000°C
(-328 to 1832°F)
Type T:
1.0 -270 to 400°C
(-454 to 750°F)
0.1 -200 to 400°C
(-328 to 750°F)
Type N: 1.0
0 to 1300°C
(32 to 2372°F)
0.1
0 to 1000°C
(32 to 1832°F)
Type E:
1.0 -270 to 1800°C
(-454 to 3272°F)
0.1 -110 to 800°C
(-166 to 1472°F)
Type C: 1.0
0 to 2315°C
(32 to 4200°F)
0.1
0 to 1000°C
(32 to 1832°F)
Type D: 1.0
0 to 2315°C
(32 to 4200°F)
0.1
0 to 1000°C
(32 to 1832°F)
Type PTII: 1.0
0 to 1395°C
(32 to 2543°F)
0.1
0 to 1000°C
(32 to 1832°F)
Type R:
1.0
0 to 1760°C
(32 to 3200°F)
Type S:
1.0
0 to 1760°C
(32 to 3200°F)
Type B:
1.0
0 to 1816°C
(32 to 3300°F)
DIN
1.0 -200 to 800°C
(-328 to 1472°F)
0.1 -200 to 800°C
(-328 to 1472°F)
JIS
1.0 -200 to 630°C
(-328 to 1166°F)
0.1 -200 to 630°C
(-328 to 1166°F)
Limits /Alarms
SERIES 97
F.O.B.: Winona, Minnesota
Ordering Information
To order, complete the model number on the right with the information below.
97
SERIES 97 = Microprocessor-based 1⁄16 DIN with universal input 1,
thermocouple and RTD. Options include: software, power supply,
input 2, four outputs and display color
Power Supply
A
= 100-240Vı(ac/dc)
B
= 24-28Vı(ac/dc)
Auxiliary Input 2
0
= None
1
= Event input
Limit Output 1
D
= Electromechanical relay, Form C, 2A, without RC suppression
Alarm Output 2
A
= None
C
= Switched dc output/open collector
D
= Electromechanical relay, Form C, 2A, without RC suppression
K
= 0.5A Solid State Relay without RC suppression
Alarm Output 3
A
= None
D
= Electromechanical relay, Form C, 2A, without RC suppression
Panel Cutout
44.958 mm x 44.958 mm
(1.77 in. X 1.77 in.)
52.070 mm
(2.050 in.)
96
1
2
3
4
%
52.070 mm
(2.050 in.)
Auxiliary Output 4
A
= None
D
= Electromechanical relay, Form C,
2A, without RC suppression
R
= 232 Communications
U
= 485 Communications
M
= Universal Retransmit, range selectable: 0-20mA, 4-20mA,
0-5VÎ(dc), 1-5VÎ(dc),0-10VÎ(dc)
Software/Preset Parameters
00 = Standard software
RESET
Display/Overlay
Upper/Lower
RR = Red/Red display
RG = Red/Green display
GR = Green/Red display
GG = Green/Green display
107.747 mm
(4.242 in.)
98.425 mm
(3.875 in.)
59.182 mm
(2.330 in.)
Customer’s Front Panel
9.322 mm
(0.367 in.)
94
-
-
W
A
T
L
O
W
Temperature Meter
SERIES TM
Watlow’s new family of microprocessor based temperature meters
provide an economical solution for
applications requiring process
temperature viewing. The
temperature meter can be ordered
in 1⁄8 DIN-square panel mount or
DIN-rail mount design configurations.
Applications
Standard Conditions For
Specifications
• Rated line voltage, 50 to 60Hz,
0 to 90 percent RH, non-condensing,
15-minute warm-up
Thermocouple Input
• Calibration accuracy: ±1 percent
of input accuracy span, ±1° at
standard conditions and actual
calibration ambient. Exception:
Type T, ±2.4 percent of input
accuracy span for -200 to 0°C
(-328 to 32°F)
• Food preparation
• Calibration ambient range: 25°C
(77°F) ±3°C
• Industrial machinery
Sensor Input
• Packaging
Thermocouple
• Plastics processing
• Grounded or ungrounded
Features and Benefits
• Temperature stability: ±0.3
degree per degree change in
ambient
• Type E, J, K or T thermocouple
Four character LED display
RTD Input
• >10 MΩ input impedance
• Easy to see process value
Multiple mounting options
• 250 nV input referenced error per
1Ω source resistance
• Minimize installation time
RTD
• Calibration accuracy ±1 percent
of input accuracy span ±1° at
standard conditions and actual
calibration ambient
Fahrenheit or Celsius operation
with indication
• 2-wire platinum, 100Ω
• Offers application flexibility
• 125 µA nominal RTD excitation
current
Agency approvals
• Meet certification
requirements/compliance
Microprocessor based technology
• Ensures accurate repeatable
temperature display
Specifications
Operator Interface
• Four digit, seven segment LED
displays, 7 mm (0.28 in.) high
• °C or °F indicator LED
• DIN-curve (0.00385 curve)
Input Accuracy Span Range
Type E:
-200 to
800°C
(-328 to 1470°F)
Type J:
0 to
750°C
(32 to 1382°F)
Type K:
-200 to 1250°C
(-328 to 2282°F)
Type T:
-200 to
350°C
(-328 to
662°F)
RTD (DIN) -200 to
800°C
(-328 to 1472°F)
• Temperature stability: ±0.2
degree per degree change in
ambient
Allowable Operating Ranges
Type E:
-200 to
800°C
(-328 to 1470°F)
Type J:
-210 to 1038°C
(-346 to 1900°F)
Type K:
-270 to 1370°C
(-454 to 2500°F)
Type T:
-270 to
400°C
(-454 to
750°F)
RTD (DIN) -200 to
800°C
(-328 to 1472°F)
UL® and C-UL® are registered trademarks of
Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc.
95
Single-Loop
The new temperature meters are
UL® and C-UL® listed and carry CSA
and CE approvals. Watlow’s
temperature meters include industry
leading service and support and are
backed by a three-year warranty.
Temperature Meter
The TM temperature meter
incorporates a microprocessor
design platform. A red, fourcharacter seven segment LED
displays the temperature process
value.
Temperature Meter
F.O.B.: Winona, Minnesota
SERIES TM
Dimensions
Specifications Cont.
• DIN-rail model can be DIN-rail or
chassis mount
Agency Approvals
• UL® 60730-1 Recognized
Temperature Controller and
Indicator
• UL® 197 Reviewed for use in
cooking appliances
• ANSI Z21.23 Gas Appliance
Thermostat approval
DIN-rail spec DIN 50022, 35 mm x
7.5 mm (1.38 in. x 0.30 in.)
Style
Width
Height
Depth
DIN-rail
78.1 mm
(3.08 in.)
72.4 mm
(2.85 in.)
112.3 mm
(4.42 in.)
72.4 mm
(2.85 in.)
90.7 mm
(3.57 in.)
Behind panel
51.7 mm
(2.04 in.)
Square 1⁄8
DIN-panel
• Temperature Control and
Indicator CSA 22.2 No. 24
Ordering Information
Terminals
To order, complete the model number on the right with the information below.
• 6.3 mm (0.25 in.) quick connect,
push on terminal
Power
• 24VÅ(ac) +10 percent;
-15 percent; 50/60Hz, ±5 percent
• 120VÅ(ac) +10 percent;
-15 percent; 50/60Hz, ±5 percent
• 230 to 240VÅ(ac) +10 percent;
-15 percent; 50/60Hz, ±5 percent
• 10VA maximum power
consumption
• Data retention upon power failure
via nonvolatile memory
Operating Environment
• 0 to 70°C (32 to 158°F)
• 0 to 90 percent RH,
non-condensing
• Storage temperature: -40 to 85°C
(-40 to 185°F)
TM
SERIES TM = Indicator only, four character,
seven segment display
Power Supply
B = 120VÅ(ac)
D = 230 to 240VÅ(ac)
F = 24VÅ(ac)
Package
1 = Panel mount square 1⁄8 DIN
2 = DIN-rail mount
Sensor Type and Scale
H = T/C Type J Fahrenheit
(-346 to 1900˚F)
J = T/C Type J Celsius
(-210 to 1038˚C)
K = T/C Type K Fahrenheit
(-454 to 2500˚F)
L = T/C Type K Celsius
(-270 to 1370˚C)
M = T/C Type T Fahrenheit
(-454 to 750˚F)
N = T/C Type T Celsius
(-270 to 400˚C)
P = RTD Fahrenheit
(-328 to 1472˚F)
R = RTD Celsius
(-200 to 800˚C)
S = T/C Type E Fahrenheit
(-328 to 1470˚F)
T = T/C Type E Celsius
(-200 to 800˚C)
Overlay/Customs Options
A = Standard
96
A AAAA AAAA
W
A
T
L
O
Single-Loop
Controllers
Accessories
The following accessories and
replacement parts are available to
enhance the application and service
of Watlow temperature controllers.
To order, simply identify the
specification of the desired part and
use its code number.
Consult your Watlow representative
for availability.
F.O.B.: Winona, Minnesota
Current Transformers
Code No.
Current Ratio
Current Transformer
16-0246a
0 to 50 amps:
16-0008b
75 amp:
16-0044
100 amp:
16-0072
125 amp:
16-0008
150 amp:
16-0045
200 amp:
16-0073
300 amp:
Interstage Transformer
16-0176
5 amp:
0 to 50mA
5 amp
5 amp
5 amp
5 amp
5 amp
5 amp
20mA
Note: An interstage transformer
(code no. 16-0176) is required with any
current transformer rated 75 amps or above.
1Superceeds code numbers 16-0230,
16-0231, 16-0232, 16-0233.
2Use two wire passes through the current
transformer 16-0008 for 75 amp applications.
To order, complete the code number to the right with the information below:
Adapter plates to reduce panel cutout size.
Adapter Plate Size and Configuration
65 =
66 =
95 =
96 =
67 =
97 =
98 =
99 =
85a =
86a =
87a =
88a =
Finish
1
2
3
Black anodize
Stainless steel
=
=
0216-08__-P00_
Accessories
Ordering Information
⁄4 DIN to single/horizontal or vertical 1⁄8 DIN
⁄4 DIN to single 1⁄16 DIN
1
⁄4 DIN to single/horizontal 1⁄32 DIN
1
⁄4 DIN to dual/ horizontal 1⁄32 DIN
Vertical 1⁄8 DIN to 1⁄16 DIN
Vertical 1⁄8 DIN to single horizontal 1⁄32 DIN
Vertical 1⁄8 DIN to dual horizontal 1⁄32 DIN
Horizontal 1⁄8 DIN to horizontal 1⁄32 DIN
95 x 170 mm (3.75 in. x 6.75 in.) blank plate/no cutout
95 x 170 mm (3.75 in. x 6.75 in.) to dual 1⁄16 DIN
95 x 170 mm (3.75 in. x 6.75 in.) to single 1⁄16 DIN
95 x 170 mm (3.75 in. x 6.75 in.) to single 1⁄8 DIN
1
aAvailable
in stainless steel finish only.
97
Single-Loop
Panel Mount Adapter Plates
Panel mount adapter plates provide
a convenient, cost saving way to
modify existing controller panels.
Available in popular DIN and nonDIN sizes, adapter plates make
changing out old, larger size
temperature controllers with more
sophisticated, compact controllers
easy. Simply complete the build-acode with the specifications you
require.
W
Single-Loop
Controllers
Accessories
Replacement Parts
Description
SERIES 981/2/3/4/6/7/8/9
Mounting collar
Mounting bracket
Protective terminal cover
Internal bezel gasket
Case gasket
Electromechanical relay a
Solid state relay a
Quencharc® RC suppressor
Noise Suppression Devices
MOV, 150VÅ(ac), 20 joule
Quencharc® RC suppressor
Code No.
0822-0438-0000
Z100-0636-0000
0822-0444-0000
0830-0425-0000
0830-0424-0000
0003-0103-0000
0842-0164-0000
0804-0147-0000
0802-0273-0000
0804-0147-0000
aSolder-in
part. Solder-in parts require opening the controller and soldering the component into
the circuit board. Note: opening the controller for installation will void warranty! To retain
warranty protection, Watlow Winona can install component. Consult factory for details.
Quencharc® is a registered trademark of ITW Paktron, Division of Illinois Tool Works.
98
W
A
T
L
O
W
Auto-Tuning PID
Controllers
SERIES 998/999
The Watlow SERIES 998 (vertical)
and the SERIES 999 (horizontal)
are 1⁄8 DIN dual channel process
controllers offering two channels of
PID control in a single package. With
up to six outputs, this controller is
well suited for most applications
where multiple process parameters
need controlling.
The SERIES 998/999 features a
NEMA 4Xb (IP65) front panel to
withstand wet and corrosive
environments. Compact four-inch
case depth and palm-safe wiring
terminals make installation easy.
The two universal signal conditioner
inputs accept 11 different
thermocouple types, RTD and
scaleable process inputs. A single
event input allows operators to turn
control outputs off, lock out the front
panel or reset the alarm remotely.
• Optional two alarm outputs
• Optional retransmit output
• Optional serial communications
Performance Capabilities
PROCESS
Input 2
Type B, C, D, E, J,
K, N, R, S, T or Pt 2
Thermocouple,
DIN/JIS RTD or
Process
1A
2A
CH A
CH B
1B
2B
DISPLAY
AUTO
MAN
Input 3
Digital Event
• Accuracy to ±0.1 percent of span
Percent Power
• Operating environment
0 to 65°C (32 to 149°F)
• Provide two complete control
loops in a single package
Auto-tuning
• For one step tuning of system
parameters for each channel
Optional dual alarm outputs
• User-selectable to monitor either
channel
Optional serial communications
• Provides remote operation using a
host computer
Output 3
Alarm
Transmitter Power Supply
Analog Retransmit
MODE
SERIES 998
Features and Benefits
Two analog inputs, four control
outputs and two alarm outputs
Output Channel B
Dual Outputs
Closed Loop PID,
on-off Control
Open Loop
Percent Power
Hardware and software lockout
options
• Offer several parameter levels of
operator security
UL®, CE, NEMA 4X1 (IP65) front
panel
• Provides corrosion resistance
5Hz sampling rate per channel and
variable time base burst-fire
control
• Delivers smooth, accurate
process control
Three-year warranty2
• Provides Control Confidence®
Output 4
Alarm
Transmitter Power Supply
Analog Retransmit
Serial Communications
Applications
• Any process requiring multiple
control loops
• Complex process furnaces
• Environmental chambers
• Processes needing control/
monitoring from a computer
UL® is a registered trademark of Underwriter’s
Laboratories, Inc.
1
2
To effect NEMA 4X (IP65) rating requires a
minimum mounting panel thickness of
1.5 mm (0.06 in.) and surface finish not rougher
than 0.000812 mm (0.000032 in.).
Electromechanical relays warranted for 100,000
closures only. Solid state switching devices
recommended for applications requiring fast
cycle times or extended service life.
99
Multi-Loop
• Dual heat/cool outputs per
channel
WATL W
Input 1
Type B, C, D, E, J,
K, N, R, S, T or Pt 2
Thermocouple,
DIN/JIS RTD or
Process
Output Channel A
Dual Outputs
Closed Loop PID,
on-off Control
Open Loop
Percent Power
Auto-Tuning PID
Output options provide application
flexibility:
Auto-tune
Heat/Cool
Auto-Tuning PID
Controllers
SERIES 998/999
Specifications
Control Mode
• Dual input, four control outputs
and two additional output options
selected as retransmit, alarms or
digital communication outputs
• Programmable direct and
reverse acting control outputs
• One step auto-tuning
Agency Approvals
• 89/336/EEC Electromagnetic
Compatibility Directive
• EN 50081-2: 1994 Emissions
• EN 50082-2: 1994 Immunity
• 73/23/EEC Low Voltage Directive
• EN 61010-1: 1993 Safety
• UL® #873, C-UL® File #43684
• NEMA 4X
Operator Interface
• Dual, four-digit LED displays:
upper; 10 mm (0.4 in.),
lower; 8 mm (0.3 in.)
• MODE, AUTO/MANUAL,
DISPLAY, UP and DOWN keys
Accuracy
• Calibration accuracy and sensor
conformity: ±0.1 percent of span,
±1 LSD, 25°C ±3°C (77°F ±5°F)
ambient and rated line voltage
±10 percent
• Accuracy span: 540°C (1000°F)
minimum
• Temperature stability: 0.1°C/°C
(±0.2°F/°F) change in ambient
Sensors/Inputs
• Contact input for software
function select (event input)
• Thermocouple Types B, Cb, Db,
E, J, K, N, R, S, T and Pt 22
• RTD resolution in 1° or 0.1°
increments
• Process variables: 0-100mV,
0-20mA, 4-20mA, 0-5VÎ(dc),
1-5VÎ(dc) or 0-10VÎ(dc)
• Sensor break protection
de-energizes to protect system
• Selectable bumpless transfer to
manual operation; latching or
non-latching
• °C or °F display or process units,
user selectable
Input Range
Specified temperature ranges
represent the controller's operational
span. Refer to ANSI (thermocouple)
and DIN/JIS (RTD) temperature
sensor ranges/ tolerances
Thermocouple
(Available with basic or universal
signal conditioner)
0 to 2316°C
Type Cb
(32 to 4200°F)
b
Type D
0 to 2316°C
(32 to 4200°F)
Type E
-200 to
799°C
(-328 to 1470°F)
Type J
0 to
816°C
(32 to 1500°F)
Type K
-200 to 1371°C
(-328 to 2500°F)
Type N
0 to 1300°C
(32 to 2372°F)
Type T
-200 to
399°C
(-328 to 750°F)
b
0 to 1395°C
Pt 2
(32 to 2543°F)
(Available with universal signal
conditioner)
Type B
870 to 1816°C
(1598 to 3300°F)
Type R
0 to 1760°C
(32 to 3200°F)
Type S
0 to 1760°C
(32 to 3200°F)
RTD Resolution (DIN or JIS)
1° (DIN)
-200 to 800°C
(-328 to 1472°F)
1° (JIS)
-200 to 630°C
(-328 to 1166°F)
0.1° (DIN and JIS)
-73.3 to 537.7°C
(-99.9 to 999.9°F)
Process
0-50mVÎ(dc)
1-5VÎ(dc)
0-20mA
-999
0-5VÎ(dc)
0-10VÎ(dc)
4-20mA
to 9999 units
Control Channel A and B Output
Options
• Dual switched dc signal provides
a source voltage of 23.5 to
30.2VÎ(dc), with a source
resistance of 1500Ω, isolated
• Dual electromechanical relaya,
Form A, 2A @ 120/240VÅ(ac),
2A @ 28VÎ(dc), without contact
suppression
• Single process, 0-20mA, 4-20mA,
0-5VÎ(dc), 1-5VÎ(dc) or
0-10VÎ(dc) reverse acting,
isolated
• Dual solid state relay, Form A,
0.5A @ 24VÅ(ac) min., 253VÅ(ac)
max., opto-isolated, burst fire
switching. Without contact
suppression. Off state output
impedance is 31MΩ without
contact suppression
Auxiliary Output 3 and 4 Options
• Solid state relay, Form A, 0.5A @
24VÅ(ac) min., 253VÅ(ac) max.,
opto-isolated, burst fire switching.
With or without contact
suppression. Off state output
impedance is 20kΩ with RC
suppression, 31MΩ without
contact suppression
a
b
Electromechanical relays warranted for 100,000
closures only. Solid state switching devices
recommended for applications requiring fast
cycle times or extended service life.
Not an ANSI symbol.
C-UL® is a registered trademark of Underwriter’s
Laboratories, Inc.
100
W
A
T
L
Auto-Tuning PID
Controllers
SERIES 998/999
Specifications Cont.
• Open collector or switched dc
signal provides a minimum turn
on voltage of 3VÎ(dc) into a
minimum 500Ω load; maximum on
voltage not greater than 32VÎ(dc)
into an infinite load, isolated
• Electromechanical relaya,
Form C, 5A @ 120/240VÅ(ac),
6A @ 28VÎ(dc), 1/8 hp. @
120VÅ(ac), 125VA @ 120VÅ(ac).
With or without contact suppression. Off state output impedance
with RC suppression is 20kΩ
• Retransmit: 0-20mA, 4-20mA with
600Ω max. load impedance, or
0-5VÎ(dc), 1-5VÎ(dc) and
0-10VÎ(dc) with 500Ω min. load
impedance
• EIA/TIA-232 or EIA/TIA-485,
EIA/TIA-422 communications,
opto-isolated
• External transmitter power supply,
5, 12 or 20VÎ(dc) @ 30mA
a
b
Electromechanical relays warranted for 100,000
closures only. Solid state switching devices
recommended for applications requiring fast
cycle times or extended service life.
Not an ANSI symbol.
Slo-Blo® is a registered trademark of Littelfuse, Inc.
F.O.B.: Winona, Minnesota
Ordering Information
To order, complete the code number to the right with the information below:
99_D-____-____
SERIES 998/999 = Dual channel microprocessor based, dual input,
six output temperature control, 1⁄8 DIN vertical or horizontal
Hardware
6 = 24-28Vı(ac/dc) nominal, vertical mounting
7 = 24-28Vı(ac/dc) nominal, horizontal mounting
8 = 100-240Vı(ac/dc) nominal, vertical mounting
9 = 100-240Vı(ac/dc) nominal, horizontal mounting
Software
D = Dual channel software
S = Special customer feature
Channel A Input
1 = Basic thermocouple signal conditioner (excluding Types B, R and S)
2 = Universal signal conditioner (see Range Information)
Channel B Input
1 = Basic thermocouple signal conditioner (excluding Types B, R and S)
2 = Universal signal conditioner (see Range Information)
Channel A Outputs
C =
E =
F =
Dual switched dc, isolated
Dual electromechanical relaya, Form A, 2A, without contact suppression
Single universal process. 0-5VÎ(dc), 1-5VÎ(dc), 0-10VÎ(dc),
0-20mA, 4-20mA, isolated
K = Dual solid state relay, Form A, 0.5A, without contact suppression
Channel B Outputs
C =
E =
F =
Dual switched dc, isolated
Dual electromechanical relaya, Form A, 2A, without contact suppression
Single universal process, 0-5VÎ(dc), 1-5VÎ(dc), 0-10VÎ(dc),
0-20mA, 4-20mA, isolated
K = Dual solid state relay, Form A, 0.5A, without contact suppression
Output 3
A = None
B = Solid state relay, Form A, 0.5A, with RC suppression
C = Switched dc or open collector, isolated
J = Electromechanical relaya, Form A or B, 5A, without contact suppression
K = Solid state relay, Form A, 0.5A, without contact suppression
M = Retransmit, 0-20mA, 4-20mA
N = Retransmit, 0-5VÎ(dc), 1-5VÎ(dc), 0-10Î(dc)
T = External signal conditioner power supply, 5, 12 or 20VÎ(dc) @ 30mA
Output 4
A = None
B = Solid state relay, Form A, 0.5A, with RC suppression
C = Switched dc or open collector, isolated
D = Electromechanical relaya, Form C, 5A, with RC suppression
E = Electromechanical relaya, Form C, 5A, without contact suppression
K = Solid state relay, Form A, 0.5A, without contact suppression
R = Isolated EIA/TIA-232 communications
S = Isolated EIA/TIA-485/EIA/TIA-422 communications
U = EIA/TIA-232, EIA/TIA-485 software selectable
T = External signal conditioner power supply, 5, 12 or 20VÎ(dc) @ 30mA
Display/Overlay
GG =
GR =
XX =
Green/Green display
RG = Red/Green display
Green/Red display
RR = Red/Red display
Custom overlays or default settings
101
Multi-Loop
Availability
Four working days on orders less
than 20 units. For orders over 20
units, consult factory for releases
and shipment schedules.
W
Auto-Tuning PID
Line Voltage/Power
• 100-240Vı(ac/dc) +10 percent,
-15 percent; 50/60Hz, ±5 percent
• 24-28Vı(ac/dc) +10 percent,
-15 percent; 50/60Hz, ±5 percent
• Fused internally (factory
replaceable only) Slo-Blo® type
(time-lag)
2A, 250V for high voltage versions
5A, 250V for low voltage versions
• Power consumption
16VA maximum
• Data retention upon power failure
via non-volatile memory
O
Auto-Tuning PID
Controllers
SERIES 998/999
Sample/Update Rates
• 1 input: 10Hz
• 2 inputs: 5Hz
• Retransmit: 1Hz
• Remote set point: 1Hz
• PID: 10Hz
• Outputs: 10Hz
• Display: 2Hz
100 mm
(4.03 in.)
WATL W
WATL W
PROCESS
DSPY
55 mm
(2.18 in.)
PROCESS
1A
2A
1B
CH A
2B
100 mm
(4.03 in.)
CH A
AUTO
CH B
MAN
DISPLAY
CH B
1A
Operating Environment
• 0 to 65°C (32 to 149°F)
• 0 to 90 percent RH,
non-condensing
2A
1B
SERIES 999
2B
AUTO
MAN
MODE
SERIES 998
Storage Temperature
• -40 to 85°C (-40 to 185°F)
Terminals
• #6 compression universal head
screws, accepts 28 to 14-gauge
wire
Controller Weight
• 0.45 kg
(1.0 lb)
Shipping Weight
• 1.35 kg
(3.1 lbs)
Adjustable
Mounting Bracket
Panel
55 mm
(2.18 in.)
Panel Cutout
Maximum Panel
Thickness
9.65 mm (0.38 in.)
90 mm
(3.6 in.)
92 mm + 0.8
(3.62 in. + 0.03 -0.00)
45 mm + 0.6
(1.77 in. + 0.02 -0.00)
Dimensions
Vertical Orientation
Overall
Height:
Width:
Depth:
100 mm
55 mm
120 mm
(4.03 in.)
(2.18 in.)
(4.74 in.)
Bezel
Height:
Width:
Depth:
100 mm
55 mm
15 mm
(4.03 in.)
(2.18 in.)
(0.68 in.)
Chassis
Height:
Width:
Depth:
MODE
105 mm
(4.06 in.)
15 mm
(0.68 in.)
System Diagram
DIN-A-MITE®
Power Controller
Environmental
Chamber
High Limit
Mechanical
Contactor
Heater
WATL W
Cooling
Fan
PROCESS
Humidifier
Dehumidifier
90 mm
45 mm
105 mm
(3.6 in.)
(1.7 in.)
(4.06 in.)
SERIES 982
Chart
Recorder
SERIES LV
Limit
Controller
Thermocouple
Limit Sensor
Dry Temperature RTD Sensor
102
Wet Bulb RTD Temperature Sensor
W
A
T
L
O
W
Auto-Tuning PID
Controllers
SERIES PD
Dual Loop
Watlow’s SERIES PD controllers
utilize embedded Ethernet
technology to provide a convenient,
economical means for setting up and
viewing key process variables such
as temperature, pressure and
humidity. Available in single or dual
channel versions, the DIN-rail mount
SERIES PD controllers offer up to four
control/alarm outputs, as well as a
digital/current transformer input
associated with each channel.
Advanced features of the SERIES PD
controllers include internal data
logging of key control parameters,
smart sensor technology, heater burn
out detection and an enhanced
control algorithm.
The SERIES PD controller is backed
by a three-year warranty from Watlow
Winona and is UL® 508, C-UL®, CSA
and CE approved.
PD
PID Controller
Power
2 Universal
Analog Inputs
(Dual Channel)
Ethernet Link
Ethernet Activity
1
Input Error
2
Input Error
Output
Event or
Current
Transformer
(CT) Inputs
1
Output
2
Output
3
Output
4
4 outputs
can be
configured as
control or event
(alarm) outputs.
Any output can
be assigned
to either
channel 1 or 2.
Address
Features and Benefits
Ethernet connectivity
Watlow INFOSENSE™ sensor
technology
• Simplified process monitoring
• INFOSENSE™ technology
improves sensor accuracy by a
minimum of 50 percent
DIN-rail sub panel mounting
Advanced control algorithm
• Quick, economic installation
• Tighter process control
• Convenient, easy to use operator
interface
103
Multi-Loop
Ethernet-based products are rapidly
gaining popularity in industrial
applications because they allow an
instantaneous exchange of
information between processing
equipment and the company’s
management system.
Ethernet
Communications
Auto-Tuning PID
Watlow’s SERIES PD controllers are
ideally suited for a wide range of
temperature or process control
applications where the operator
interface is supported from a remote
location. The SERIES PD provides
interfacing via embedded firmware
which serves dedicated web pages.
These pages support key functions
including operation, alarm
monitoring, configuration and are
displayed using standard web
browser software. The SERIES PD is
also capable of generating e-mail
messages for remote alarm
notification.
Auto-Tuning PID
Controllers
Controller
Type PTII:
• Microprocessor based
user-selectable control modes
0
(32
to 1395°C
to 2543°F)
Type R:
• Single or dual channel universal
inputs
0
(32
to 1760°C
to 3200°F)
Type S:
to 1760°C
to 3200°F)
• Improved process yields
• Current transformer inputs/digital
inputs
0
(32
Type B:
0
(32
to 1815°C
to 3300°F)
to
800°C
to 1470°F)
SERIES PD
Dual Loop
Features and Benefits Cont.
Heater burn out detection
Internal data logging
• Up to four programmable outputs
• Reduces external hardware
demands
• Update rates, inputs = 10Hz,
outputs = 10Hz
RTD (DIN): -200
(-328
Single or dual channel versions
Operator Interface
• Provides application versatility
• Browser based HMI
Process V: 0 to 10VÎ(dc)
Process I: 0 to 20mA
Virtual or hardware alarms with
e-mail delivery
Wiring Termination
• Improves quality control and
reduces maintenance costs
• 14 to 22 AWG
Specifications
Power
• 24Vı(ac/dc), +10/-15 percent,
50/60Hz, ±5 percent
• 12VA maximum power
consumption
• Data retention upon power failure
via nonvolatile memory
Environment
• 0 to 65°C (32 to 149°F) operating
temperature
• Touch safe removable terminals
Universal Inputs (Electrically
Isolated)
• Open collector/switched dc
• Open collector 42VÎ(dc)
maximum @ 0.5A
• RTD 2- or 3-wire, platinum,
100Ω @ 0°C calibration to
DIN-curve (0.00385 Ω/Ω/°C)
• Switched dc 22 to 28VÎ(dc)
limited @ 30mA
• Process 0-20mA @ <100Ω, or
0-10VÎ(dc) @ 10kΩ input
impedance (50,000 bits @ full
scale)
Digital Inputs
• Contact or dc voltage
• 0 to 90 percent RH, non-condensing
Current Transformer Inputs
Accuracy
• 0 to 50mA CT input into 100Ω
impedance
• 10KΩ input impedance
Allowable Input Operating Range
Type J:
0
(32
to
815°C
to 1500°F)
• Calibration ambient temperature =
25°C ±3°C (77°F ±5°F)
Type K:
-200
(-328
to 1370°C
to 2500°F)
• Accuracy span: 540°C (1000°F)
minimum
Type T:
-200
(-328
to
to
• Temperature stability: ± 0.1°C/°C
(±0.2°F/°F) rise in ambient
maximum
Type N:
0
(32
to 1300°C
to 2372°F)
Type E:
-200
(-328
to
800°C
to 1470°F)
Type C:
0
(32
to 2315°C
to 4200°F)
Type D:
0
(32
to 2315°C
to 4200°F)
Agency Approvals
• UL® 508, C-UL®, CSA and CE
• User selectable as: on-off, P, PI,
PD, PID, heat, cool, alarm action
or retransmit with process output
type hardware
• Thermocouple, grounded or
ungrounded sensors
• -40 to 85°C (-40 to 185°F) storage
temperature
• Calibration accuracy and sensor
conformity: ±0.1 percent of span,
±1°C @ the calibrated ambient
temperature and rated line voltage
104
Control/Alarm Outputs (1 - 4)
400°C
750°F)
• Solid state relay, Form A, 0.5A @
24VÅ(ac) minimum, 264VÅ(ac)
maximum, opto-isolated, without
contact suppression
Process Output (Optional
Retransmit)
• User-selectable 0-10VÎ(dc), 1KΩ
minimum, scalable,
0-20mA @ 800Ω maximum,
scalable
• Electromechanical relay. Form C,
rated 5A @ 120VÅ(ac) or
5A @ 240VÅ(ac) or 5A @ 30VÎ(dc)
• Ethernet communications
• Ethernet RJ 45 connector,
10 base T
• HTTP interface
• DHCP, auto IP or fixed IP address
Dimensions
• Width x height x depth
42 mm x 116 mm x 132 mm
(1.64 in. x 4.56 in. x 5.19 in.)
DIN-rail or chassis mount,
DIN-rail spec DIN 5022
35 mm x 7.5 mm
(1.38 in. x 0.30 in.)
W
A
T
L
O
W
Auto-Tuning PID
Controllers
SERIES PD
Dual Loop
Front View
Side View
8 mm
(0.318 in.)
Bracket for
Panel Mounting
(#6 Screw
or m3.5 Required)
146 mm
(3.750 in.)
Top/Bottom
Mount
Hole Offset
DINrail
PD
PID Controller
Power
Ethernet Link
107 mm
(4.225 in.)
129 mm
(5.062 in.)
Ethernet Activity
1
Input Error
2
Input Error
118 mm
(4.650 in.)
Output
73 mm
(2.875 in.)
1
Output
2
Output
3
Output
4
Min. Clearance
Between Rail
Centerlines
146 mm
(5.750 in.)
Address
DINrail
Min. Clearance 51 mm
(2 in.)
42 mm
(1.637 in.)
Attachment Angle
10
Ethernet Link
Ethernet Link
Ethernet Activity
Ethernet Activity
1
Input Error
1
Input Error
2
Input Error
2
Input Error
Address
1
Output
1
Output
Output
2
Output
2
Output
3
Output
3
Output
4
Output
4
Address
42 mm
(1.650 in.)
105
Multi-Loop
PID Controller
Power
Auto-Tuning PID
PD
PD
PID Controller
Power
Auto-Tuning PID
Controllers
SERIES PD
Dual Loop
F.O.B.: Winona, Minnesota
Ordering Information
To order, complete the code number on the right with the information below.
PDD _ -____-_A__
Auxiliary Inputs
1
=
Dual digital inputs
2
=
One CT input and one digital input
3
=
Dual CT inputs (dual channel only)
Output 1
C
=
K
=
F
=
E
=
Output 2
Switched dc, open collector
SSR, Form A, 0.5A
Universal process
Mechanical relay, Form C, 2Aa
A
=
C
=
K
=
E
=
Output 3
A =
C =
K =
F =
E =
None
Switched dc, open collector
SSR, Form A, 0.5A
Mechanical relay, Form C, 2Aa
None
Switched dc, open collector
SSR, Form A, 0.5A
Universal process
Mechanical relay, Form C, 2Aa
Output 4
A
C
K
E
=
=
=
=
None
Switched dc, open collector
SSR, Form A, 0.5A
Mechanical relay, Form C, 2Aa
On Board Data Logging
0
=
None
K
=
16 megabytes of memory
Custom Options
AA =
BB =
Watlow logo
No logo
a
Electromechanical relays warranted for 100,000
closures only. Solid state switching devices
recommended for applications requiring fast cycle
times or extended service life.
106
W
A
T
L
O
W
Auto-Tuning PID
Controllers
4-, 8-, 16-Loop
CLS200 SERIES
The Watlow Anafaze CLS200 SERIES
is a powerful line of controllers,
combining performance and flexibility
with compact design. The four, eight
and 16-loop versions provide complete
control solutions for a broad range of
applications. Support for multiple
types of sensor inputs is available,
including thermocouples, RTDs,
linear voltage, current and frequency.
Each controller can operate as a
stand-alone system, and includes
built-in serial communications for
computer interface and data
acquisition. An enhanced features
option offers cascade control, ratio
control, differential control, process
variable retransmit and remote
analog set point.
PID control of up to 16 heat and
cool loops
• Minimal panel space per loop
• Reduced installation time
• More reliable: fewer parts means
fewer failures
Auto-tune
• Less time tuning
• Achieve excellent control with less
expertise
Menu-guided operation with full
text display
• Quick controller setup
• Easy to operate
Eight jobs stored and recalled
• Quickly change from one process
to another
• Less to learn, less inventory
Sensor failure detection
• Reduces time troubleshooting
reversed, shorted and open
sensors
High/low process and deviation
alarms for each input
• Configure alarms as needed to
integrate with PLC or other control
elements
34 digital outputs
• Flexible configuration: use outputs
as needed for control, alarms and
process variable retransmit
EIA/TIA-232 and 485
communications
• Ramp and Soak see page 119
Because the CLS200 has no onboard
analog outputs, applications that
use process variable retransmit
typically require one SDAC module
per retransmitted signal.
• Use software to configure and
operate
• Integrate with other controllers
and software
Firmware Options
Choose firmware with the features
needed for the application:
• Standard—includes closed-loop
PID control, auto-tune, alarms,
job memory and failed sensor
detection
Watlow Anafaze’s
WATVIEW software is
ideal to use with the
CLS200 SERIES. See
page 197 for more
information and
ordering details.
• Extruder— includes the standard
firmware features, with PID control
specifically adapted for plastic
extruders
107
Multi-Loop
Features and Benefits
• Simply change sensor types at
the last minute
• Enhanced Features— includes
the standard firmware features
with the addition of process
variable retransmit, remote
analog set point, cascade control,
ratio control and differential
control algorithms. Each channel
can be configured for standard
PID control or one of the other
control algorithms. Each channel
of cascade control or remote
analog set point requires two
controller channels. Unused
control outputs on any channel
can be configured for retransmit.
Auto-Tuning PID
The CLS200 SERIES controllers are
UL® and C-UL® listed, meet the
requirements of the European
Community EMC Directive and carry
the CE mark.
Multiple and mixed inputs
Auto-Tuning PID
Controllers
4-, 8-, 16-Loop
CLS200 SERIES
Input Range and Accuracy
Range
Type B
Specifications
Operator Interface
Type E
• 32-character vacuum fluorescent
display
Type J
• Eight-key keypad to access
guided menus and prompts,
enter passkey sequence, set
values, switch between
single channel and multiple
channel displays
• Controller configuration can be
loaded through the standard
serial port
Analog Inputs
• CLS204
4 Differential
• CLS208
8 Differential
• CLS216
16 Single-ended
Noise Rejection
• 120db at 60Hz
Temperature Coefficient
• 40 ppm/˚C
Sensors/Inputs
• Thermocouples: User-selectable
type, direct connection,
linearization, reference junction
compensation, reversed and
shorted T/C detection and
upscale break protection with
output averaging
• RTD: (CLS204 and CLS208 only)
2- or 3-wire, platinum, 100Ω @ 0˚C,
DIN 0.003850Ω/˚C curve. Two
user-selectable ranges offer
different resolutions. Requires
scaling resistors. See Special/
Linear Inputs in Ordering
Information
• Linear: current and voltage
signals from linear transmitters
• Pulse input
108
66 to 1760°C
Pulse Input
Accuracy
±4.0°C
(150 to 3200°F) (±7.2°F)
Input Sampling Rate @ 60Hz
-200 to 787°C
Each channel has the following
scans per second:
±1.0°C
(-328 to 1448°F) (±1.8°F)
-212 to 760°C
±1.2°C
(-350 to 1400°F) (±2.2°F)
Type K
-268 to 1371°C
±1.3°C
(-450 to 2500°F) (±2.3°F)
Type R
• One TTL-level square wave input
up to 2kHz
-18 to 1766°C
±2.8°C
(0 to 3210°F) (±5.0°F)
Type S
-18 to 1760°C
Type T
-268 to 399°C
±2.8°C
(0 to 3200°F) (±5.0°F)
±1.6°C
(-450 to 750°F) (±2.9°F)
RTD’s available on CLS204 and
CLS208 only
Range
Accuracy
(RTD1)
-100 to 275°C
1.1°C
(-148 to 527°F) (2.0°F)
(RTD2)
-120 to 840°C
1.6°C
(-184 to 1544°F) (2.9°F)
Note: Accuracy @ 25˚C (77°F)
ambient. Valid for 10 to 100 percent
of span except Type B, which is
specified for 427°C to 1760°C
(800˚F to 3200˚F.) RTD is for 100
percent of span
Linear Voltage and Current Inputs
Requires scaling resistors.
See Special Inputs in Ordering
Information
0-10mAÎ(dc)
0-20mAÎ(dc)/4-20mAÎ(dc)
0-100mVÎ(dc)
0-500mVÎ(dc)
0-1VÎ(dc)
0-5VÎ(dc)
0-10VÎ(dc)
0-12VÎ(dc)
Other ranges available. Consult
factory
• CLS204: 6 samples per second,
(update time: 0.167 sec.)
• CLS208: 3 samples per second,
(update time: 0.333 sec.)
• CLS216: 1.5 samples per second,
(update time: 0.667 sec.)
Internal Measurement Resolution
• 0.006 percent, greater than 14 bits
Calibration
• Automatic zero and full scale
Digital Inputs
• TTL-level used for selecting
recipes or jobs or R/S triggers
• Eight inputs and one pulse input
with 50-pin terminal board option
• Two inputs and pulse input or
three inputs with 18-pin terminal
block option
Digital Outputs
• 34 digital outputs are available
with 50-pin terminal board option
• 10 control outputs with 18-pin
terminal block option
• One or two control outputs are
user assigned for each loop
• Each control output can be
configured for on-off time
proportioning, or distributed zero
crossing
• Outputs sink up to 60mA each at
5VÎ(dc)
• 350mA at 5VÎ(dc) available from
on-board supply
Analog Outputs
• Use DAC and SDAC accessory
modules. For process variable
retransmit, use SDAC only.
See page 159.
W
A
T
L
O
W
Auto-Tuning PID
Controllers
4-, 8-, 16-Loop
CLS200 SERIES
Serial Interface
Agency Approvals
• EIA/TIA-232 or EIA/TIA-485
• UL®, C-UL® listed: UL® 916,
Standard for Energy
Management Equipment
Baud Rate
Alarm Outputs
• Independent process and
deviation alarms for each channel
• 2400, 9600 or 19200,
user-selectable
• CE Mark: Electromagnetic
Compatibility (EMC) Directive
89/336/EEC
Communication Protocol
• Modbus™ RTU
• Alarms can operate any output not
used for control
Line Voltage/Power
• User-programmable deadband,
delay and startup suppression
• 15 to 24VÎ(dc) ± 3VÎ(dc) @ 1A
(maximum), 300mA (no load)
• Global alarm output activates
when any alarm occurs
• Watchdog output indicates
controller is functioning correctly
Dimensions
LOOP
PROCESS
RAMP
SOAK
ALARM
ACK
ALARM
MAN
AUTO
(1.96 in.)
(3.78 in.)
(1.0 in.)
UNITS
CHNG
SP
SETPOINT
STATUS
NO
YES
96 mm (3.78 in.)
(1.76 in.)
(3.55 in.)
(7.0 in.)
178 mm
(7.00 in.)
OUT%
BACK
ENTER
41 mm*
(1.60 in.)
Terminals
Bezel
Steel Case
SCSI Cable
(not used with TB-18)
*15 mm (0.6 in.) with
Right Angle SCSI Connector
Modbus™ is a trademark of
AEG Schneider Automation.
109
Multi-Loop
25 mm
(1.00 in.)
(1.96 in.)
(3.78 in.)
(8.0 in.)
Controller Weight
0.9 kg
(1.98 lbs)
Shipping Weight
1.8 kg
(4.0 lbs) 50 mm (1.96 in.)
Auto-Tuning PID
Overall
Height:
50 mm
Width:
96 mm
Depth
203 mm
Bezel
Height:
50 mm
Width:
96 mm
Depth
25 mm
Chassis
Height:
45 mm
Width:
90 mm
Depth
178 mm
Auto-Tuning PID
Controllers
4-, 8-, 16-Loop
CLS200 SERIES
Ordering Information
To order, complete the code number to the right with the information below:
2__-_______
Number of Channels
Note: Controller is configured for
thermocouples and -10 to 60mVÎ(dc)
linear inputs. For other sensors order
special inputs, see below. For analog
outputs order DAC or SDAC modules,
see page 159. For easy setup order
WATVIEW software, see page 197.
04 =
4 channel
08 =
8 channel
16 =
16 channel
Controller Type
1
=
Standard EPROM
2
=
Extruder
3
=
Ramp and soak
4
=
Enhanced features
Terminal Block
0
=
No terminal block accessory
1
=
18-pin terminal block (CLS204 and CLS208 only)
2
=
50-pin terminal block installed (includes 3 foot SCSI cable)
Power Supply
0
2
=
=
No power supply
120/240VÅ(ac), 50/60Hz power supply adapter
(5VÎ[dc], @ 4A, 15VÎ[dc] @ 1.2A) (CE approved)
SCSI Cables
0
=
No SCSI cable (3 foot cable included with 50-pin terminal block)
1
=
6 foot SCSI cable
2
=
3 foot right angle SCSI cable
3
=
6 foot right angle SCSI cable
Serial Communication Cables
0
=
No serial communications cable
1
=
10 foot serial communications cable (DB-9 female/bare wire)
2
=
25 foot serial communications cable (DB-9 female/bare wire)
3
=
50 foot serial communications cable (DB-9 female/bare wire)
Serial Communication Jumper Settings
0
=
EIA/TIA-232
1
=
EIA/TIA-485
2
=
EIA/TIA-485 terminated
Special Inputs
(Standard unit is configured for thermocouples and -10 to 60 mV linear inputs. For other sensors,
order special inputs. See below for ordering instructions. For CLS216 specify two digits, for
CLS204 and CLS208 specify one digit.)
0 or 00 = Thermocouples and -10 to 60 mV inputs only
X or XX = Number of current, voltage or RTD inputs
CLSSI__-__-__
Special/Linear Input Type
Availability
Up to four weeks, depending on
complexity and order release
quantity. Consult factory for details
110
(Not required for thermocouple sensor inputs.)
20 =
RTD 1: 0.1°, -100.0 to 275.0°C (-148.0 to 527.0°F)
Not available on CLS216
21 =
RTD 2: 1°, -120 to 840°C (-184 to 1544°F)
Not available on CLS216
43 =
0-10mAÎ(dc)
44 =
0-20mAÎ(dc)/4-20mAÎ(dc)
50 =
0-100mVÎ(dc)
52 =
0-500mVÎ(dc)
53 =
0-1VÎ(dc)
55 =
0-5VÎ(dc)
56 =
0-10VÎ(dc)
57 =
0-12VÎ(dc)
Start Channel
XX =
Channel number XX
End Channel
XX
=
Channel number XX
W
A
T
L
O
W
Auto-Tuning PID
Controllers
16-, 32-Loop
MLS300 SERIES
The Watlow Anafaze MLS300 SERIES
is a powerful line of controllers that
combines performance and flexibility
with compact design. The 16 and
32-loop versions provide complete
control solutions for a broad range of
applications. Support for multiple
types of sensor inputs is available;
including thermocouples, RTDs,
linear voltage, current and frequency.
Each controller can operate as a
stand-alone system, and includes
built-in serial communications for
computer interface and data acquisition. The enhanced features option
offers cascade, ratio and differential
control, process variable retransmit
and remote analog set point.
Auto-tuning
• Less time tuning
• Achieve excellent control with less
expertise
Menu guided operation with full
text display
• Quick controller setup
• Easy to operate
Eight jobs stored and recalled
• Quickly change from one process
to another
Multiple and mixed inputs
• Simply change sensor types at
the last minute
• Less to learn, less inventory
Sensor fail detection
• Reduces time troubleshooting
reversed, shorted and open
sensors
TIA/EIA-232 and 485
communications
• Use software to configure and
operate
• Integrate with other controllers
and software
34 digital outputs
• Flexible configuration: use outputs
as needed for control, alarms and
process variable retransmit
CIM300 option
• Small footprint per loop
• Reduced installation time
Watlow Anafaze’s
WATVIEW software is
ideal to use with the
MLS300 SERIES. See
page 197 for more
information and
ordering details.
111
Multi-Loop
The MLS300 SERIES controllers are
UL® and C-UL® listed, meet the
requirements of the European
Community EMC Directive and carry
the CE mark.
PID control of up to 16 heat and
cool loops or 32 heat loops
• Minimal panel space per loop
• Reduces installation time
• More reliable: fewer parts mean
fewer failures
High/low process and deviation
alarms for each input
• Configure alarms as needed to
integrate with PLC or other control
elements
Auto-Tuning PID
The remote analog input options
allow for shorter sensor wires and
flexible mounting which reduces
sensor cost and installation time.
Watlow’s new CIM option provides
OEMs with a space and labor saving
alternative to the standard AIM
module. This innovation allows users
to construct a wiring harness to
attach sensors via a connector
instead of connecting individual
wires to the controller.
Features and Benefits
Auto-Tuning PID
Controllers
16-, 32-Loop
MLS300 SERIES
Input Range and Accuracy
Range
Type B
Specifications
Operator Interface
• 32-character vacuum fluorescent
display
• Eight-key keypad to access
guided menus and prompts, enter
passkey sequence, set values,
switch between single channel
and multiple channel displays
• Controller’s configuration can be
loaded through the standard
serial port
Analog Inputs
• MLS316 16 Differential
• MLS332 32 Differential
Noise Rejection
• 120dB at 60Hz
Temperature Coefficient
• 40 ppm/°C
Temperature Sensors
• Thermocouples: User selectable
type, direct connection,
linearization, reference junction
compensation, reversed and
shorted T/C detection and
upscale break protection with
output averaging
• RTD: 2- or 3-wire, platinum, 100Ω
@ 0°C, DIN 0.003850Ω/°C curve.
Two user-selectable ranges offer
different resolutions. Requires
special inputs. See Ordering
Information
66 to
(150 to
Type E
-200 to
(-328 to
Type J
-212 to
(-350 to
Type K
-268 to
(-450 to
Type R
-18 to
(0 to
Type S
-18 to
(0 to
Type T
-268 to
(-450 to
RTD1 (DIN)-100 to
(-148 to
RTD2 (DIN)-120 to
(-184 to
1760°C
3200°F)
787°C
1448°F)
760°C
1400°F)
1371°C
2500°F)
1766°C
3210°F)
1760°C
3200°F)
399°C
750°F)
275°C
527°F)
840°C
1544°F)
Input Sampling Rate @ 60Hz
Accuracy
±4.0°C
(±7.2°F)
±1.0°C
(±1.8°F)
±1.2°C
(±2.2°F)
±1.3°C
(±2.3°F)
±2.8°C
(±5.0°F)
±2.8°C
(±5.0°F)
±1.6°C
(±2.9°F)
±1.1°C
(±2.0°F)
±1.6°C
(±2.9°F)
Note: Accuracy @ 25°C (77°F)
ambient. Valid for 10 to 100 percent
of span except Type B, which is
specified for 427°C (800°F) to
1760°C (3200°F). RTD is for 100
percent of span
Linear Voltage and Current Inputs
Requires special inputs.
See Ordering Information
0-10mAÎ(dc)
0-20mAÎ(dc)/4-20mAÎ(dc)
0-100mVÎ(dc)
0-500mVÎ(dc)
0-1VÎ(dc)
0-5VÎ(dc)
0-10VÎ(dc)
0-12VÎ(dc)
Other ranges available. Consult
factory
Pulse Input
One TTL-level square wave input up
to 2kHz
112
Each channel has the following
scans per second:
• MLS316: 1.5 samples per
second, (update time: 0.667 sec.)
• MLS332: 0.75 samples per
second, (update time: 1.33 sec.)
Internal Measurement Resolution
• 0.006 percent, greater than
14 bits
Calibration
• Automatic zero and full scale
Digital Inputs
• TTL level used for selecting
recipes or jobs, or R/S triggers
• Eight inputs and one pulse input
with 50-pin terminal board option
Digital Outputs
• 34 outputs available with 50-pin
terminal board option
• One or two control outputs are
user assigned for each loop
• Each control output can be
configured for on-off, time
proportioning, or distributed zero
crossing
• Outputs sink up to 60mA each at
5VÎ(dc)
Alarm Outputs
• Independent process and
deviation alarms for each channel
• Alarms can operate any output
not used for control
• Programmable deadband, delay
and startup suppression
• Global alarm output activates
when any alarm occurs
• Watchdog output indicates
controller is functioning correctly
Analog Outputs
• Use DAC and SDAC accessory
modules. For process variable
retransmit, use SDAC only, see
page 159.
W
A
T
L
O
W
Auto-Tuning PID
Controllers
16-, 32-Loop
MLS300 SERIES
Specifications Cont.
Serial Interface
• EIA/TIA-232 or EIA/TIA-485
Baud Rate
• 2400, 9600 or 19200,
user-selectable
Input Module Options
Choose the input module
appropriate for the application:
• AIM316 and AIM332 provides
screw terminations for 16 or 32
sensors
• CIM316 and CIM332 provides
DB-50 connector terminations for
16 or 32 sensors in a compact size
Communication Protocol
• Modbus™ RTU
25 mm
(1.00 in.)
41 mm*
(1.60 in.)
188 mm
(7.40 in.)
Line Voltage/Power
• 15 to 24VÎ(dc) ± 3VÎ(dc) @ 1A
Agency Approvals
• UL®, C-UL® Listed: UL® 916,
Standard for Energy Management
Equipment
• CE Mark: Electromagnetic
Compatibility (EMC) Directive
89/336/EEC
50 mm
(1.96 in.)
*15 mm (0.60 in.) with
Right Angle SCSI Connector
Processor Module (Side)
Firmware Options
PROCESS
UNITS
RAMP
SOAK
50 mm
(1.96 in.)
ALARM
ACK
ALARM
MAN
AUTO
CHNG
SP
SETPOINT
STATUS
NO
YES
OUT%
BACK
ENTER
96 mm
(3.78 in.)
Processor Module (Front)
113
Multi-Loop
LOOP
Auto-Tuning PID
Choose firmware with the features
needed for the application:
• Standard—includes closed-loop
PID control, auto-tune, alarms, job
memory and failed sensor
detection
• Extruder— includes the standard
firmware features, with PID control
specifically adapted for plastic
extruders
• Enhanced Features— includes
the standard firmware features
with the addition of process
variable retransmit, remote analog
set point, cascade control, ratio
control and differential control
algorithms. Each channel can be
configured for standard PID
control or one of the other control
algorithms. Each channel of
cascade control or remote analog
set point requires two controller
channels. Unused control outputs
on any channel can be
configured for retransmit
• Ramp and soak see page 123
Auto-Tuning PID
Controllers
F.O.B.: Winona, Minnesota
Ordering Information
16-, 32-Loop
MLS300 SERIES
To order, complete the code number to the right with the information below:
3__-_________
Analog Input Module
(AIM332 shown)
146 mm H
(5.75 in.)
165 mm L
(6.5 in.)
W
127 mm
(5.0 in.)
Compact Input Module
(CIM332 shown)
70 mm
(2.75 in.)
95 mm
(3.75 in.)
191 mm
(7.50 in.)
Input Module
16 =
16 channel analog input module (AIM316)
32 =
32 channel analog input module (AIM332)
C1 =
16 channel compact input module (CIM316)
C2 =
32 channel compact input module (CIM332)
Processor Module (MLS300-PM)
0 =
Input module only (No MLS300-PM)
1 =
MLS300-PM with standard firmware
2 =
MLS300-PM with extruder firmware
3 =
MLS300-PM with enhanced features firmware
4 =
MLS300-PM with ramp and soak firmware
Terminal Block
0 =
No terminal block accessory
1 =
50-pin terminal block, includes 3 foot SCSI cable
Power Supply
0 =
None
2 =
120/240VÅ(ac) 50/60Hz power supply adapter
[5VÎ(dc) @ 4A, 15VÎ(dc) @ 1.2A] CE approved
SCSI Cables (For use with 50-pin terminal board)
0 =
No special SCSI cable (3 foot cable is included with 50-pin terminal board)
1 =
6 foot SCSI cable
2 =
3 foot right angle SCSI cable
3 =
6 foot right angle SCSI cable
Serial Communication Cables (For communications with computer)
0 =
No serial communications cable
1 =
10 foot EIA/TIA-232 comm. cable, DB-9 female/RJ12 phone plug
2 =
25 foot EIA/TIA-232 comm. cable, DB-9 female/RJ12 phone plug
3 =
50 foot EIA/TIA-232 comm. cable, DB-9 female/RJ12 phone plug
7 =
EIA/TIA-485 terminal block with 2 foot cable
8 =
EIA/TIA-485 terminal block with 4 foot cable
Module Interconnect Cables
0 =
No special cable (4 foot cable comes with input module)
1 =
10 foot cable, RJ45 connector/RJ45 connector
2 =
25 foot cable, RJ45 connector/RJ45 connector
Serial Communication Jumper
0 =
EIA/TIA-232
1 =
EIA/TIA-485
2 =
EIA/TIA-485 terminated
Special Inputs
(Standard unit is configured for thermocouples and -10 to 60 mV linear inputs.
For other sensors, order special inputs.)
00 =
Thermocouples and -10 to 60 mV inputs only
XX =
Number of current, voltage, or RTD inputs. Include leading zero as needed
MLS300SI__-__-__
Availability
Up to four weeks depending on
complexity and order release
quantity. Consult factory for details
114
Special Input Type
20 =
RTD 1: 0.1° Platinum, -100 to 275°C (-148 to 527°F)
21 =
RTD 2: 1° Platinum, -120 to 840°C (-184 to 1544°F)
43 =
0-10mAÎ(dc)
44 =
0-20mAÎ(dc)/4-20mAÎ(dc)
50 =
0-100mVÎ(dc)
52 =
0-500mVÎ(dc)
53 =
0-1VÎ(dc)
55 =
0-5VÎ(dc)
56 =
0-10VÎ(dc)
57 =
0-12VÎ(dc)
Start Channel
XX =
Channel number XX
End Channel
XX =
Channel number XX
W
A
T
L
O
W
Auto-Tuning PID
Controllers
SERIES D8
The Watlow Anafaze SERIES D8 is
a powerful line of controllers that
combines performance and flexibility
with compact design. Compliance
with the ODVA and Semiconductor
SIG standards means this controller
is easy to integrate into systems with
DeviceNet™ networks on CAN
(Controller Area Network).
The four and eight loop versions of
SERIES D8 controllers provide
complete control solutions for a
broad range of applications.
Support for multiple types of sensor
inputs including thermocouples,
RTDs, linear voltage and current
is also available.
Each loop can be individually
configured for on-off control or PID
control. Loops can be combined to
achieve cascade, ratio or differential
control. Process variable retransmit
and remote analog set point are
included.
PID control of up to eight loops
• Minimal panel space per loop
• Reduced installation time
• More reliable: fewer parts mean
fewer failures
Complies with ODVA (Open
DeviceNet™ Vendors Association)
and Semiconductor SIG (Special
Interest Group) specifications for
DeviceNet™ on CAN (Controller
Area Network)
• Integrates with other DeviceNet™
nodes and software
• Sealed micro connector minimizes
installation time and footprint while
maximizing reliability
Advanced control utilities
• Auto-tune optimizes control with
minimal effort and expertise
• Cascade minimizes overshoot
and improves control in systems
with excessive thermal lag
• Ratio and differential enhance
control in areas where the
relationship between two or more
loops is paramount
Operator Interface
• 32-character vacuum fluorescent
display
• Eight-key keypad to access
guided menus and prompts, set
values and view channel displays
• Built-in context sensitive help
Noise Rejection
• 120dB at 60Hz
Temperature Coefficient
• 40ppm/˚C
Analog Inputs
• Thermocouples: User selectable
type, direct connection,
linearization, reference junction
compensation, reversed and
shorted T/C detection and
upscale break protection with
output averaging.
• RTD: 2- or 3-wire, platinum,
100Ω @ 0˚C, DIN-curve. Requires
scaling resistors. See special
inputs in ordering information
• Linear: current and voltage
signals from linear transmitter
DeviceNet™ is a trademark of the Open DeviceNet
Vendors Association.
115
Multi-Loop
Features and Benefits
Flexible, easy-to-use interface
• Easy set up with menu guided,
full-text prompts
• Context-sensitive, on-screen help
saves time
Specifications
Auto-Tuning PID
The SERIES D8 controllers are UL®
and C-UL® listed, meet the
requirements of the European
Community EMC Directive and carry
the CE mark.
• Rotary baud rate and node
address switches simplify setup
• Network and module status LEDs
simplify commissioning and
troubleshooting a network
Auto-Tuning PID
Controllers
SERIES D8
Internal Measurement Resolution
• 0.006 percent, greater than
14 bits
Specifications Cont.
Input Range and Accuracy
Range
Accuracy
66 to 1760°C ±4.0°C
(150 to 3200°F) (±7.2°F)
Type E
-200 to 787°C ±1.0°C
(-328 to 1448°F) (±1.8°F)
Type J
-212 to 760°C ±1.2°C
(-350 to 1400°F) (±2.2°F)
Type K -268 to 1371°C ±1.3°C
(-450 to 2500°F) (±2.4°F)
Type R
-18 to 1766°C ±2.8°C
(0 to 3210°F) (±5.0°F)
Type S
-18 to 1760°C ±2.8°C
(0 to 3200°F) (±5.0°F)
Type T
-268 to 399°C ±1.6°C
(-450 to 750°F) (±2.9°F)
RTD (DIN) -200.0 to 621.0°C ±0.5°C
(-328.0 to1150.0°F) (±0.9°F)
Note: Accuracy @ 25°C (77°F)
ambient. Valid for 10 to 100 percent
of span except Type B, which is
specified for 427°C (800°F) to
1760°C (3200°F). RTD is for 100
percent of span
Linear Voltage and Current Inputs
Digital Inputs
• TTL level used for logic, remote
alarm acknowledge, selecting
recipes or jobs
• Eight inputs with 50-pin terminal
board option
• Three inputs with 18-pin terminal
block option
Requires scaling resistors.
See special inputs in Ordering
Information
Alarm Outputs
• Independent process and
deviation alarms for each channel
• Alarms can operate any output
not used for control
• User programmable deadband,
delay and startup suppression
• Global alarm output activates
when any alarm occurs
• Watchdog output indicates
controller is functioning correctly
Type B
0-10mAÎ(dc)
0-20mAÎ(dc)/4-20mAÎ(dc)
0-100mVÎ(dc)
0-500mVÎ(dc)
0-1VÎ(dc)
0-5VÎ(dc)
0-10VÎ(dc)
0-12VÎ(dc)
Other ranges available. Consult
factory
Input Sampling Rate @ 60Hz
Each channel has the following
scans per second:
• D84: Six samples per second,
(update time: 0.167 sec.)
• D88: Three samples per second,
(update time: 0.333 sec.)
116
Calibration
• Automatic zero and full scale
Digital Outputs
• 18 digital outputs available with a
50-pin terminal board option
• 11 outputs available with 18-pin
terminal block option
• One or two control outputs are
user assigned for each loop
• Each control output can be
configured for on-off, time
proportioning, or distributed zero
crossing
• Outputs sink up to 60mA each at
5VÎ(dc)
Analog Outputs
• Use DAC and SDAC accessory
modules. See page 159.
DeviceNet™ Interface
• Fully compliant with the interface
guidelines for DeviceNet™ on
semiconductor manufacturing tools
• Supports predefined master/slave
connection set
• Group two only slave device
• Module status and network status
LEDs
• Rotary baud rate and node
address switches
• Hardware and software selectable
baud rates: 125K, 250K and 500K
• Hardware and software selectable
node address: 0 to 63
• Supports polled I/O and explicit
messaging connections
• Polled I/O response: less than 1
millisecond
• Explicit message response: less
than 50 milliseconds
• EDS (Electronic Data Sheet)
• Connector: 5-pin, micro style,
sealed, male
• Optically isolated CANBUS
interface
• Bus plugable while hot
• Bus miswire protection
Line Voltage/Power
• 15 to 24VÎ(dc) ± 3VÎ(dc) @ 1A
(loaded) or 300mA (no load)
Agency Approvals
• UL®, C-UL® Listed: UL® 916,
standard for energy management
equipment
• CE Mark: Electromagnetic
Compatibility (EMC) Directive
89/336/EEC
• ODVA conformance tested
DeviceNet™
W
A
T
L
O
W
Auto-Tuning PID
Controllers
SERIES D8
Front View
50 mm
(2.0 in.)
96 mm (3.8 in.)
Side View
188 mm (7.4 in.)
Data Rate
Address
2
2
0
0
6
P
MSD
8
500 Kb
250 Kb
125 Kb
PGM
6
LSD
41 mm to 53 mm
(1.6 in. to 2.1 in.) For Cables
and Clearance
D8 with TB18 Option for Digital I/O
25 mm
(1.0 in.)
Multi-Loop
4
Auto-Tuning PID
4
D8 with SCSI/TB50 Option for Digital I/O
TB50 Terminal Board
Option: Digital I/O
Connects Here
Connect Digital I/O
Here With TB18 Option
SCSI Cable
117
Auto-Tuning PID
Controllers
SERIES D8
F.O.B.: Winona, Minnesota
Ordering Information
To order, complete the code number on the right with the information below.
D8_0 -0000-__0_
Number of Loops
4
=
4 loop controller
8
=
8 loop controller
Digital I/O Terminations
0
=
TB18 (Screw terminals on the controller)
1
=
SCSI connector, no terminal board or cable
2
=
SCSI connector, TB50 terminal board and 3-foot cable
3
=
SCSI connector, TB50 and 6-foot cable
4
=
SCSI connector, TB50 and 3-foot right angle cable
5
=
SCSI connector, TB50 and 6-foot right angle cable
Power Supply
0
=
No power supply
1
=
CE power supply
Special Inputs
0 =
Thermocouples and -10 to 60 mV inputs only
X =
Number of current, voltage and RTD inputs
Special Inputs
Specify an input type for each channel or block of channels that needs factory installed
resistors. Include a descriptor in the controller part description in the form specified below for
each special input type. Make sure the number of special inputs specified is equal to the
number of special inputs in the controller part number
D8SI __ -__-__
Special Input Type
(Not required for thermocouple sensor inputs)
23 =
RTD
43 =
0-10mAÎ(dc)
44 =
0-20mAÎ(dc)/4-20mAÎ(dc)
50 =
0-100mVÎ(dc)
52 =
0-500mVÎ(dc)
53 =
0-1VÎ(dc)
55 =
0-5VÎ(dc)
56 =
0-10VÎ(dc)
57 =
0-12VÎ(dc)
Start Channel
XX =
Channel Number XX
End Channel
XX =
Channel Number XX
Availability
Up to four weeks, depending on
complexity and order release
quantity. Consult factory for details
118
W
A
T
L
O
W
PID with Time/
Temperature
Profiling Controllers
4-, 8-, 16-Loop
CLS200 SERIES
Ramp and soak control of up to
16 heat and cool loops
• Minimal panel space per loop
• Reduces installation time
• More reliable: fewer parts means
fewer failures
High/low process and deviation
alarms for each input
• Configure alarms as needed to
integrate with PLC or other control
elements
34 digital outputs
• Less time tuning
• Flexible configuration: use outputs
as needed for control, alarms,
process variable retransmit and
ramp soak events
• Achieve excellent control with less
expertise
EIA/TIA-232 and 485
communications
Menu-guided operation with full
text display
• Use software to configure and
operate
• Setup controller quickly
• Integrate with other controllers
and software
Auto-tuning
• Easy to operate
Eight jobs stored and recalled
• Quick to change from one
process to another
Multiple and mixed inputs
• Easy to change sensor types at
the last minute
• Less to learn, less inventory
Watlow Anafaze’s
WATVIEW software is
ideal to use with the
CLS200 SERIES. See
page 197 for more
information and
ordering details.
Sensor failure detection
• Reduces time troubleshooting
reversed, shorted and
open sensors
UL® and C-UL® are registered trademarks of
Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc.
119
Multi-Loop
The CLS200 SERIES controllers are
UL® and C-UL® listed and meet the
requirements of the European
Community EMC Directive and carry
the CE mark.
Features and Benefits
PID with Time/Temperature Profiling
The Watlow Anafaze CLS200 SERIES
is a powerful line of controllers,
combining performance and flexibility
with compact design. The four,
eight and 16 loop versions provide
complete control solutions for a
broad range of applications. Support
for multiple types of sensor inputs is
available, including thermocouples,
RTDs, linear voltage, current and
frequency. Each controller can
operate as a stand-alone system and
includes built-in serial communications for computer interface and
data acquisition. Ramp and soak
features allow complex batch
processing and sequencing. Up to
17 ramp and soak profiles can be
programmed with up to 20 steps
each. Individual loops can be
configured for standard control or
ramp soak. Unused control outputs
can be configured for events, alarms
and process variable retransmit.
PID with Time/
Temperature
Profiling Controllers
4-, 8-, 16-Loop
CLS200 SERIES
Specifications
Ramp and Soak
• Up to 17 profiles
• Up to 20 steps per profile
• Up to two trigger inputs per step
• Up to four event outputs per step
• Up to 99 repeat cycles
• One external reset digital input
• Time base: minutes/seconds or
hours/minutes
Operator Interface
• 32-character vacuum fluorescent
display
• Eight-key keypad to access
guided menus and prompts,
enter passkey sequence, set
values, switch between
single channel and multiple
channel displays
• RTD: (CLS204 and CLS208 only)
2- or 3-wire, platinum, 100Ω @ 0˚C,
DIN 0.003850Ω/˚C curve. Two
user-selectable ranges offer
different resolutions. Requires
scaling resistors. See Special/
Linear Inputs in Ordering
Information
Range
Type B
Type E
66 to 1760°C
Noise Rejection
• 120db at 60Hz
Temperature Coefficient
• 40 ppm/˚C
Sensors/Inputs
• Thermocouples: User-selectable
type, direct connection,
linearization, reference junction
compensation, reversed and
shorted T/C detection and
upscale break protection with
output averaging
±4.0°C
-200 to 787°C
Pulse Input
±1.0°C
-212 to 760°C
±1.2°C
(-350 to 1400°F) (±2.2°F)
Type K
-268 to 1371°C
±1.3°C
(-450 to 2500°F) (±2.3°F)
Type R
0-12VÎ(dc)
Other ranges available. Consult
factory
-18 to 1766°C
±2.8°C
(0 to 3210°F) (±5.0°F)
Analog Inputs
16 Single-ended
0-10VÎ(dc)
Accuracy
(-328 to 1448°F) (±1.8°F)
Type J
0-1VÎ(dc)
(150 to 3200°F) (±7.2°F)
-268 to 399°C
• CLS216
0-100mVÎ(dc)
0-5VÎ(dc)
Input Range and Accuracy
Type T
8 Differential
0-20mAÎ(dc)/4-20mAÎ(dc)
• Pulse input
-18 to 1760°C
• CLS208
0-10mAÎ(dc)
0-500mVÎ(dc)
Type S
4 Differential
Requires scaling resistors.
See Special Inputs in Ordering
Information
• Linear: current and voltage
signals from linear transmitters
• Controller configuration can be
loaded through the standard
serial port
• CLS204
Linear Voltage and Current Inputs
±2.8°C
(0 to 3200°F) (±5.0°F)
±1.6°C
(-450 to 750°F) (±2.9°F)
• One TTL-level square wave input
up to 2kHz
Input Sampling Rate @ 60Hz
Each channel has the following
scans per second:
• CLS204: 6 samples per second
(update time: 0.167 sec.)
• CLS208: 3 samples per second,
(update time: 0.333 sec.)
• CLS216: 1.5 samples per second,
(update time: 0.667 sec.)
Internal Measurement Resolution
RTD’s available on CLS204 and
CLS208 only
• 0.006 percent, greater than 14 bits
(RTD1)
• Automatic zero and full scale
(RTD2)
-100
(-148
-120
(-184
to
to
to
to
275°C
527°F)
840°C
1544°F)
1.1°C
(2.0°F)
1.6°C
(2.9°F)
Note: Accuracy @ 25˚C ambient.
Valid for 10 to 100 percent of span
except Type B, which is specified for
427°C to 1760°C (800˚F to 3200˚F.)
RTD is for 100 percent of span
Calibration
Digital Inputs
• TTL-level used for selecting
recipes or jobs, or R/S triggers
• Eight inputs and one pulse input
with 50-pin terminal board option
• Two inputs and pulse input or
three inputs with 18-pin terminal
block option
Digital Outputs
• 34 digital outputs are available
with 50-pin terminal board option
• 10 control outputs with 18-pin
terminal block option
• One or two control outputs are
user assigned for each loop
120
W
A
T
L
O
W
PID with Time/
Temperature
Profiling Controllers
4-, 8-, 16-Loop
CLS200 SERIES
Specifications Cont.
• Each control output can be
configured for on-off time
proportioning, or distributed zero
crossing
• Outputs sink up to 60mA each at
5VÎ(dc)
• 350mA at 5VÎ(dc) available from
on-board supply
Alarm Outputs
Communication Protocol
• Independent process and
deviation alarms for each channel
• Modbus™ RTU
Line Voltage/Power
• Alarms can operate any output
not used for control
• 15 to 24VÎ(dc) ± 3VÎ(dc) @ 1A
(maximum), 300mA (no load)
• User-programmable deadband,
delay and startup suppression
Agency Approvals
• Global alarm output activates
when any alarm occurs
• Watchdog output indicates
controller is functioning correctly
Serial Interface
Analog Outputs
• EIA/TIA-232 or EIA/TIA-485
• Use DAC and SDAC accessory
modules. For process variable
retransmit, use SDAC only.
See page 159
Baud Rate
• UL®, C-UL® listed: UL® 916,
Standard for Energy
Management Equipment
• CE Mark: Electromagnetic
Compatibility (EMC) Directive
89/336/EEC
• 2400, 9600 or 19200,
user-selectable
Dimensions
(1.96 in.)
(3.78 in.)
(8.0 in.)
Controller Weight
0.9 kg
(1.98 lbs)
Shipping Weight
1.8 kg
(4.0 lbs)
LOOP
PROCESS
(1.96 in.)
(3.78 in.)
Depth
25 mm
Chassis
Height:
45 mm
Width:
90 mm
Depth
178 mm
(1.0 in.)
25 mm
(1.00 in.)
RAMP
SOAK
50 mm (1.96 in.)
ALARM
ACK
ALARM
50 mm
96 mm
UNITS
MAN
AUTO
CHNG
SP
SETPOINT
STATUS
NO
YES
96 mm (3.78 in.)
(1.76 in.)
(3.55 in.)
(7.0 in.)
178 mm
(7.00 in.)
OUT%
BACK
ENTER
Multi-Loop
50 mm
96 mm
203 mm
PID with Time/Temperature Profiling
Overall
Height:
Width:
Depth
Bezel
Height:
Width:
41 mm*
(1.60 in.)
Terminals
Bezel
Steel Case
SCSI Cable
(not used with TB-18)
*15 mm (0.60 in.) with
Right Angle SCSI Connector
Modbus™ is a trademark of
AEG Schneider Automation.
121
PID with Time/
Temperature
Profiling Controllers
4-, 8-, 16-Loop
CLS200 SERIES
F.O.B.: Winona, Minnesota
Ordering Information
To order, complete the code number to the right with the information below:
2__-_______
Number of Channels
Note: Controller is configured for
thermocouples and -10 to 60mVÎ(dc)
linear inputs. For other sensors order
special inputs, see below. For analog
outputs order DAC or SDAC modules,
see page 159. For easy setup order
WATVIEW software, see page 197.
04 =
4 channel
08 =
8 channel
16 =
16 channel
Controller Type
1
=
Standard EPROM
2
=
Extruder
3
=
Ramp and soak
4
=
Enhanced features
Terminal Block
0
=
No terminal block accessory
1
=
18-pin terminal block (CLS204 and CLS208 only)
2
=
50-pin terminal block installed (includes 3 foot SCSI cable)
Power Supply
0
2
=
=
No power supply
120/240VÅ(ac), 50/60Hz power supply adapter
(5VÎ[dc], @ 4A, 15VÎ[dc] @ 1.2A) (CE approved)
SCSI Cables
0
=
No SCSI cable (3 foot cable included with 50-pin terminal block)
1
=
6 foot SCSI cable
2
=
3 foot right angle SCSI cable
3
=
6 foot right angle SCSI cable
Serial Communication Cables
0
=
No serial communications cable
1
=
10 foot serial communications cable (DB-9 female/bare wire)
2
=
25 foot serial communications cable (DB-9 female/bare wire)
3
=
50 foot serial communications cable (DB-9 female/bare wire)
Serial Communication Jumper Settings
0
=
EIA/TIA-232
1
=
EIA/TIA-485
2
=
EIA/TIA-485 terminated
Special Inputs
(Standard unit is configured for thermocouples and -10 to 60 mV linear inputs. For other sensors,
order special inputs. See below for ordering instructions. For CLS216 specify two digits, for
CLS204 and CLS208 specify one digit.
0 or 00 = Thermocouples and -10 to 60mV inputs only
X or XX = Number of current, voltage or RTD inputs
CLSSI__-__-__
Special/Linear Input Type
Availability
Up to four weeks, depending on
complexity and order release
quantity. Consult factory for details.
(Not required for thermocouple sensor inputs.)
20 =
RTD 1: 0.1°, -100.0 to 275.0°C (-148.0 to 527.0°F)
Not available on CLS216
21 =
RTD 2: 1°, -120 to 840°C (-184 to 1544°F)
Not available on CLS216
43 =
0-10mAÎ(dc)
44 =
0-20mAÎ(dc)/4-20mAÎ(dc)
50 =
0-100mVÎ(dc)
52 =
0-500mVÎ(dc)
53 =
0-1VÎ(dc)
55 =
0-5VÎ(dc)
56 =
0-10VÎ(dc)
57 =
0-12VÎ(dc)
Start Channel
XX =
Channel number XX
End Channel
XX
122
=
Channel number XX
W
A
T
L
O
W
PID with Time/
Temperature
Profiling Controllers
16-, 32-Loop
MLS300 SERIES
The MLS300 SERIES controllers are
UL® and C-UL® listed, meet the
requirements of the European
Community EMC Directive and carry
the CE mark.
Ramp and soak control of up to
16 heat and cool loops or
32 heat loops
• Minimal panel space per loop
• Reduces installation time
• More reliable: fewer parts mean
fewer failures
Auto-tuning
• Less time tuning
• Achieve excellent control with less
expertise
Menu guided operation with full
text display
• Set up controller quickly
• Easy to operate
Store and recall eight jobs
• Change quickly from one process
to another
Multiple and mixed inputs
• Easy to change sensor types at
the last minute
• Less to learn, less inventory
Sensor fail detection
• Reduces time troubleshooting
reversed, shorted and open
sensors
High/low process and deviation
alarms for each input
• Configure alarms as needed to
integrate with PLC or other control
elements
TIA/EIA-232 and 485
communications
• Use software to configure and
operate
• Integrate with other controllers
and software
34 digital outputs
• Flexible configuration: use outputs
as needed for control, alarms,
process variable retransmit and
ramp soak events
CIM300 option
• Small footprint per loop
• Reduced installation time
Watlow Anafaze’s
WATVIEW software is
ideal to use with the
MLS300 SERIES. See
page 197 for more
information and
ordering details.
123
Multi-Loop
The remote analog input options
allow for shorter sensor wires and
flexible mounting which reduces
sensor cost and installation time.
Watlow’s new CIM option provides
OEMs with a space and labor saving
alternative to the standard AIM
module. This innovation allows users
to construct a wiring harness to
attach sensors via a connector
instead of connecting individual
wires to the controller.
Features and Benefits
PID with Time/Temperature Profiling
The Watlow Anafaze MLS300 SERIES
is a powerful line of controllers that
combines performance and flexibility
with compact design. The 16 and
32 loop versions provide complete
control solutions for a broad range of
applications. Support for multiple
types of sensor inputs is available;
including thermocouples, RTDs,
linear voltage, current and frequency.
Each controller can operate as a
stand-alone system and includes
built-in serial communications for
computer interface and data
acquisition. Ramp and soak features
allow complex batch processing and
sequencing. Up to 17 ramp and soak
profiles can be programmed with up
to 20 steps each. Individual loops
can be configured for standard
control or ramp and soak. Unused
control outputs can be configured for
events, alarms and process variable
retransmit.
PID with Time/
Temperature
Profiling Controllers
16-, 32-Loop
MLS300 SERIES
Input Range and Accuracy
Type B
Specifications
Ramp and Soak
• Up to 17 profiles
• Up to 20 steps per profile
• Up to 2 trigger inputs per step
• Up to 4 event outputs per step
• Up to 99 repeat cycles
• One external reset digital input
• Time base: minutes/seconds or
hours/minutes
Type J
Type K
Type R
Type S
Type T
Accuracy
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
to
±4.0°C
(±7.2°F)
±1.0°C
(±1.8°F)
±1.2°C
(±2.2°F)
±1.3°C
(±2.3°F)
±2.8°C
(±5.0°F)
±2.8°C
(±5.0°F)
±1.6°C
(±2.9°F)
±1.1°C
(±2.0°F)
±1.6°C
(±2.9°F)
1760°C
3200°F)
787°C
1448°F)
760°C
1400°F)
1371°C
2500°F)
1766°C
3210°F)
1760°C
3200°F)
399°C
750°F)
Operator Interface
• 32-character vacuum fluorescent
display
• Eight-key keypad to access
guided menus and prompts, enter
passkey sequence, set values,
switch between single channel
and multiple channel displays
• Controller’s configuration can be
loaded through the standard
serial port
RTD1 (DIN)-100.0
(-148.0
RTD2 (DIN) -120
(-184
Analog Inputs
• MLS316 16 Differential
• MLS332 32 Differential
Requires special inputs.
See Ordering Information
275.0°C
527.0°F)
840°C
1544°F)
Note: Accuracy @ 25°C (77°F)
ambient. Valid for 10 to 100 percent
of span except Type B, which is
specified for 427°C (800°F) to
1760°C (3200°F). RTD is for 100
percent of span
Linear Voltage and Current Inputs
0-10mAÎ(dc)
0-20mAÎ(dc)/4-20mAÎ(dc)
Noise Rejection
• 120dB at 60Hz
0-100mVÎ(dc)
Temperature Coefficient
• 40 ppm/°C
0-1VÎ(dc)
Temperature Sensors
• Thermocouples: User selectable
type, direct connection,
linearization, reference junction
compensation, reversed and
shorted T/C detection and
upscale break protection with
output averaging
• RTD: 2- or 3-wire, platinum, 100Ω
@ 0°C, DIN 0.003850Ω/°C.
Two user-selectable ranges offer
different resolutions. Requires
special inputs. See Ordering
Information
124
Type E
66
(150
-200
(-328
-212
(-350
-268
(-450
-18
(0
-18
(0
-268
(-450
Range
0-500mVÎ(dc)
0-5VÎ(dc)
0-10VÎ(dc)
0-12VÎ(dc)
Other ranges available. Consult
factory
Pulse Input
One TTL-level square wave input up
to 2kHz
Input Sampling Rate @ 60Hz
Each channel has the following
scans per second:
• MLS316: 1.5 samples per
second, (update time: 0.667 sec.)
• MLS332: 0.75 samples per
second, (update time: 1.33 sec.)
Internal Measurement Resolution
• 0.006 percent, greater than
14 bits
Calibration
• Automatic zero and full scale
Digital Inputs
• TTL level used for selecting
recipes or jobs, or R/S triggers
• 8 inputs and 1 pulse input with
50-pin terminal board option
Digital Outputs
• 34 outputs available with 50-pin
terminal board option
• One or two control outputs are
user assigned for each loop
• Each control output can be
configured for on-off, time
proportioning, or distributed zero
crossing
• Outputs sink up to 60mA each at
5VÎ(dc)
Alarm Outputs
• Independent process and
deviation alarms for each channel
• Alarms can operate any output
not used for control
• Programmable deadband, delay
and startup suppression
• Global alarm output activates
when any alarm occurs
• Watchdog output indicates
controller is functioning correctly
Analog Outputs
• Use DAC and SDAC accessory
modules. For process variable
retransmit, use SDAC only.
See page 159
Serial Interface
• EIA/TIA-232 or EIA/TIA-485
Baud Rate
• 2400, 9600 or 19200, userselectable
W
A
T
L
O
W
PID with Time/
Temperature
Profiling Controllers
16-, 32-Loop
MLS300 SERIES
Specifications Cont.
25 mm
(1.00 in.)
Communication Protocol
• Modbus™ RTU
Line Voltage/Power
• 15 to 24VÎ(dc) ± 3VÎ(dc) @ 1A
Agency Approvals
• UL®, C-UL® Listed: UL® 916,
Standard for Energy Management
Equipment
• CE Mark: Electromagnetic
Compatibility (EMC) Directive
89/336/EEC
41 mm*
(1.60 in.)
188 mm
(7.40 in.)
50 mm
(1.96 in.)
*15 mm (0.60 in.) with
Right Angle SCSI Connector
Processor Module (Side)
Input Module Options
Choose the input module
appropriate for the application:
LOOP
PROCESS
UNITS
RAMP
SOAK
50 mm
(1.96 in.)
ALARM
ACK
ALARM
MAN
AUTO
CHNG
SP
SETPOINT
STATUS
NO
YES
OUT%
BACK
ENTER
Processor Module (Front)
125
Multi-Loop
96 mm
(3.78 in.)
PID with Time/Temperature Profiling
• AIM316 and AIM332 provides
screw terminations for 16 or 32
sensors
• CIM316 and CIM332 provides
DB-50 connector terminations for
16 or 32 sensors in a compact
size
PID with Time/
Temperature
Profiling Controllers
16-, 32-Loop
MLS300 SERIES
F.O.B.: Winona, Minnesota
Ordering Information
To order, complete the code number to the right with the information below:
3__-_________
Analog Input Module
(AIM332 shown)
146 mm H
(5.75 in.)
165 mm L
(6.5 in.)
W
127 mm
(5.0 in.)
Compact Input Module
(CIM332 shown)
70 mm
(2.75 in.)
95 mm
(3.75 in.)
191 mm
(7.50 in.)
Input Module
16 =
16 channel analog input module (AIM316)
32 =
32 channel analog input module (AIM332)
C1 =
16 channel compact input module (CIM316)
C2 =
32 channel compact input module (CIM332)
Processor Module (MLS300-PM)
0 =
Input module only (No MLS300-PM)
1 =
MLS300-PM with standard firmware
2 =
MLS300-PM with extruder firmware
3 =
MLS300-PM with enhanced features firmware
4 =
MLS300-PM with ramp and soak firmware
Terminal Block
0 =
No terminal block accessory
1 =
50-pin terminal block, includes 3 foot SCSI cable
Power Supply
0 =
None
2 =
120/240VÅ(ac) 50/60Hz power supply adapter
[5VÎ(dc) @ 4A, 15VÎ(dc) @ 1.2A] CE approved
SCSI Cables (For use with 50-pin terminal board)
0 =
No special SCSI cable (3 foot cable is included with 50-pin terminal board)
1 =
6 foot SCSI cable
2 =
3 foot right angle SCSI cable
3 =
6 foot right angle SCSI cable
Serial Communication Cables (For communications with computer)
0 =
No serial communications cable
1 =
10 foot EIA/TIA-232 comm. cable, DB-9 female/RJ12 phone plug
2 =
25 foot EIA/TIA-232 comm. cable, DB-9 female/RJ12 phone plug
3 =
50 foot EIA/TIA-232 comm. cable, DB-9 female/RJ12 phone plug
7 =
EIA/TIA-485 terminal block with 2 foot cable
8 =
EIA/TIA-485 terminal block with 4 foot cable
Module Interconnect Cables
0 =
No special cable (4 foot cable comes with input module)
1 =
10 foot cable, RJ45 connector/RJ45 connector
2 =
25 foot cable, RJ45 connector/RJ45 connector
Serial Communication Jumper
0 =
EIA-TIA-232
1 =
EIA-TIA-485
2 =
EIA-TIA-485 Terminated
Special Inputs
(Standard unit is configured for thermocouples and -10 to 60mV linear inputs.
For other sensors, order special inputs.)
00 =
Thermocouples and -10 to 60mV inputs only
XX =
Number of current, voltage, or RTD inputs. Include leading zero as needed
MLS300SI__-__-__
Availability
Up to four weeks depending on
complexity and order release
quantity. Consult factory for details.
126
Special Input Type
20 =
RTD 1: 0.1° Platinum, -100 to 275°C (-148 to 527°F)
21 =
RTD 2: 1° Platinum, -120 to 840°C (-184 to 1544°F)
43 =
0-10mAÎ(dc)
44 =
0-20mAÎ(dc)/4-20mAÎ(dc)
50 =
0-100mVÎ(dc)
52 =
0-500mVÎ(dc)
53 =
0-1VÎ(dc)
55 =
0-5VÎ(dc)
56 =
0-10VÎ(dc)
57 =
0-12VÎ(dc)
Start Channel
XX =
Channel number XX
End Channel
XX =
Channel number XX
W
A
T
L
O
W
PID with Time/
Temperature
Profiling Controllers
SERIES F4D
Watlow’s SERIES F4D 1⁄4 DIN
industrial controllers offer an easy
to set up and operate solution for
the most demanding ramp and
soak processing applications. The
features and performance of these
units make them ideally suited for
environmental chamber or furnace
and oven applications. Single and
dual channel versions are available.
These competitively priced
controllers feature a four line, high
definition LCD interface display that
makes profile programming and
controller configuration significantly
faster and easier. A 16 bit
microprocessor supports all the
accuracy and performance
advantages you have come to
expect from a Watlow controller.
1B
2A
2B
1
Channel 2
Humidity
i
Features and Benefits
Guided 256 step, 40 profile ramp
and soak programmable memory
• Supports a wide range of
processing applications
High definition four line LCD
controller interface display
• Simplifies setup and operation
Menu customization
Performance Capabilities
• Enhances process monitoring
• Accuracy to ±0.1 percent of span
High performance 16 bit
microprocessor
• Operating environment:
0 to 54°C (32 to 130°F)
2
• Precise process control
• 20Hz update rate on input 1
• 10Hz update rate on inputs 2 and 3
Universal inputs
• Allows application versatility
Expandable modular construction
• Field upgradable
Enhanced environmental chamber
control
• Supports humidity, compressor,
boost heat/boost cool control
Cascade control
• Allows precise two variable control
Real time clock with battery
backup
• Allows operational flexibility and
peace of mind
Field upgradeable firmware
• Downloads available @ no charge
from www.watlow.com/F4
• Reduces downtime
• Eliminates the need for an RMA
Applications
• Environmental chambers
• Heat treating
• Ovens and furnaces
• Analytical equipment
127
Multi-Loop
Serial communication and dual
alarm relays are included in the
base unit. The SERIES F4D ramping
controllers are packaged with a
NEMA 4X front face to withstand
harsh environments and a four inch
deep case with removable
connectors for wiring convenience.
F4
1A
PID with Time/Temperature Profiling
Up to 256 steps can be programmed into as many as 40 nameable
profiles. Profiles can be programmed to wait for events or for up to
three different process variables. A
guaranteed soak feature allows you
to set how closely your process
needs to be controlled.
Channel 1
Temperature
PID with Time/
Temperature
Profiling Controllers
SERIES F4D
Specifications
Dimensions
• Width x height x depth
(42 mm x 118 mm x 132 mm)
3.96 in. x 3.96 in. x 3.85 in. panel
mount
Universal Analog Inputs 1
(2-3 Optional)
Thermocouple
• Type J, K, T, N, C (W5), E, Pt 2,
D (W3), B, R, S
RTD
• 2- or 3-wire platinum, 100, 500 or
1000Ω
• JIS or DIN-curves, 1.0 or 0.1
indication
Process
• Range selectable: 0-10VÎ(dc),
0-5VÎ(dc), 1-5VÎ(dc), 0-50mV,
0-20mA, 4-20mA
• Voltage input impedance 20KΩ
• Current input impedance 100Ω
Digital Inputs (4)
• Contact or dc voltage
• 10KΩ input impedance
• Update rate = 10Hz
Control Outputs (1A, 1B, 2A, 2B)
Open Collector/Switched dc
• Internal load switching (nominal):
Switched dc, 22 to 28VÎ(dc),
limited @ 30mA
• External load switching
(maximum): Open collector
42VÎ(dc) @ 0.5A
Solid State Relay
• Zero switched, optically coupled,
0.5A @ 24VÅ(ac) minimum,
253VÅ(ac) maximum
Process Outputs (Optional
Retransmit)
• User selectable 0-10VÎ(dc),
0-5VÎ(dc), 1-5VÎ(dc),
0-20mA, 4-20mA
• Update rate = 1Hz
128
Alarm Outputs
• Output update rate = 1Hz
• Electromechanical relay, Form C,
2A @ 30VÎ(dc) or 240VÅ(ac)
maximum
Digital Outputs (8)
• Update rate = 10Hz
• Open collector output
• Off = 42VÎ(dc) max @ 10µA
• On = 0.2VÎ(dc) max @ 50mA sink
• Internal supply: 5VÎ(dc), 80mA
Communications
EIA-232 and EIA-485 serial
communications with Modbus™
RTU protocol, 9600 or 19.2K baud
Safety and Agency Approvals
• UL®/C-UL® 916 listed,
File # E185611 Process Control
Equipment
• IP65 and NEMA 4X
• CE to EN 61010-1 and EN 61326
Terminals
• Touch-safe removable terminal
blocks, accepts 12 to 22 gauge
wire
Accuracy
• Calibration accuracy and sensor
conformity: ±0.1 percent of span
±1°C @ 25°C ±3°C (77°F ±5°F)
ambient, and rated line voltage
±10 percent with the following
exceptions:
Type T: 0.12 percent of span for
-200°C to -50°C (-328°F to -58°F)
Types R and S: 0.15 percent of span
for 0°C to 100°C (32°F to 212°F)
Type B: 0.24 percent of span for
870°C to 1700°C (1598°F to 3092°F)
• Accuracy span: Less than or equal
to operating ranges, 540°C
(1000°F) minimum
• Temperature stability: ±0.1°C/°C
(±0.1°F/°F) rise in ambient for
thermocouples
±0.05°C/°C (±0.05°F/°F) rise in
ambient for RTD sensors
Displays
• Process: five seven segment
LED, red
• Control interface display: high
definition LCD, green
Sensor Operating Ranges:
Power
• 100-240VÅ(ac), -15 percent,
+10 percent; 50/60Hz, ±5 percent
• 24-28Vı(ac/dc), -15 percent,
+10 percent (order option)
• 39VA max power consumption
• Data retention upon power failure
via nonvolatile memory (7 years
for battery backed RAM).
Sensor input isolation from input
to input to output to communication circuitry is 500VÅ(ac)
Type J
0
(32
to 815°C
to 1500°F)
Type K
-200
(-328
to 1370°C
to 2500°F)
Type T
-200
(-328
to
to
Type N
0
(32
to 1300°C
to 2372°F)
Type E
-200
(-328
to 800°C
to 1470°F)
Type C
0
(32
to 2315°C
to 4200°F)
Operating Environment
• 0 to 55°C (32 to 130°F)
• 0 to 90 percent RH,
non-condensing
• Storage temperature:
-40 to 70°C (-40 to 158°F)
Type D
0
(32
to 2400°C
to 4352°F)
Pt 2
0
(32
to 1395°C
to 2543°F)
Type R
0
(32
to 1760°C
to 3200°F)
Type S
0
(32
to 1760°C
to 3200°F)
400°C
750°F)
W
A
T
L
O
W
PID with Time/
Temperature
Profiling Controllers
SERIES F4D
Specifications Cont.
Type B
0 to 1816°C
(32 to 3300°F)
RTD (DIN)
-200 to 800°C
(-328 to 1472°F)
RTD (JIS)
-200 to 800°C
(-328 to 1166°F)
Process:
-19999 to 30,000 units
Sensor Accuracy Ranges:
Input ranges
Type J
0 to 750°C
(32 to 1382°F)
Type K
-200 to 1250°C
(-328 to 2282°F)
Type T
-200 to
(-328 to
350°C
662°F)
0 to 1250°C
(32 to 2282°F)
Type E
-200 to 800°C
(-328 to 1470°F)
0 to 2315°C
(32 to 4200°F)
Type D (W3)
0 to 2400°C
(32 to 4352°F)
Pt 2
0 to 1393°C
(32 to 2540°F)
Type R
0 to 1450°C
(32 to 2642°F)
Type S
0 to 1450°C
(32 to 2642°F)
Type B
870 to 1700°C
(1598 to 3092°F)
RTD (DIN)
RTD (JIS)
Process:
-200 to 800°C
(-328 to 1472°F)
-200 to 630°C
(-328 to 1166°F)
-19999 to 30,000 units
108.05 mm
(4.254 in.)
Panel Cutout
97.79 mm
(3.850 in.)
92 mm x 92 mm
(3.622 in. x 3.622 in.)
99.82 mm
(3.930 in.)
99.82 mm
(3.930 in.)
108.81 mm
(4.284 in.)
10.26 mm
(0.404 in.)
Temperature and Humidity Chamber Application
Multi-Loop
Type C (W5)
Optional Retransmit
Optional retransmit capability is
available to retransmit one or two
variables. These variables include
up to three process variables,
control set points or percent load
power. Update rate is 1Hz.
PID with Time/Temperature Profiling
Type N
Alarms
Two Form “C” electromechanical
alarm relays are included in the
base units. These alarms can be
programmed as either process or
deviation alarms. The alarms can be
tied to up to three process variables.
Serial Communication
EIA-232 and EIA-485 serial
communication interfaces are
included in the base unit of both the
SERIES F4S (single channel) and
the SERIES F4D (dual channel)
controllers. The baud rate is
selectable as either 9600 or 19200
baud. The protocol is Modbus™.
Compressor
Cutout
Environmental Chamber
Comp.
1A
Channel 1
Temperature
LN2 Valve
2A
Channel 2
Humidity
Bi-pass Valve
1B
Cool
Boost Cool
DIN-A-MITE ®
2B
Humidify
D06
D07
De-Humidify
DIN-A-MITE
D08
DIN-A-MITE
Heat
Boost Heat
DIN-A-MITE
Humidity Sensor
Temperature Sensor
129
PID with Time/
Temperature
Profiling Controllers
SERIES F4D
F.O.B.: Winona, Minnesota
Ordering Information
To order, complete the code number on the right with the information below:
Set Point Ramp and Soak
Programming
The enhanced programming
features found in the SERIES F4D
ramping controllers are the result of
listening to our customers’ demand
for greater capabilities with reduced
programming complexity.
A profile guide leads the programmer through the programming
process by offering choices for step
configuration. For better operator
recognition profiles and digital I/O
used for events can be given names
of up to 10 characters in length.
Five step types including ramp,
soak, jump, auto start and end offer
the programmer complete flexibility.
Ramp steps can be based on time
or rate. Ramp and soak steps can
be programmed to wait for up to
four event inputs and three process
variables. Up to eight event outputs
are step selectable. Since your
thermal systems characteristics may
change over its operating range, up
to 10 sets of PID heat/cool
parameters are step selectable.
The auto start step can start a
profile based on a set date, a day
of the week, or daily, the choice is
yours. The jump step can be used
to jump within a profile or to another
profile. The end step terminates a
program with the control outputs
programmed to your process
needs.
Availability
Up to four weeks, depending on
complexity and order release
quantity. Consult factory for details.
130
F4 D_-____-____
SERIES F4D = 1⁄4 DIN dual channel ramping controller
Dual Channel Ramping Controller
3 universal analog inputs, 4-digital inputs, 8-digital outputs,
2 alarms, EIA-232/485 comms
Power Supply
H
=
100-240Vı(ac/dc)
L
=
24-28Vı(ac/dc)
Output 1A
C
=
Open collector/switched dc
F
=
Process, 0-5, 1-5, 0-10VÎ(dc), 0-20mA, 4-20mA
K
=
Solid state Form A, 0.5A amp relay
Output 1B
A
=
None
C
=
Open collector/switched dc
F
=
Process, 0-5, 1-5, 0-10VÎ(dc), 0-20mA, 4-20mA
K
=
Solid state Form A, 0.5A amp relay
Output 2A
C
=
Open collector/switched dc
F
=
Process, 0-5, 1-5, 0-10VÎ(dc), 0-20mA, 4-20mA
K
=
Solid state Form A, 0.5A amp relay
Output 2B
A
=
None
C
=
Open collector/switched dc
F
=
Process, 0-5, 1-5, 0-10VÎ(dc), 0-20mA, 4-20mA
K
=
Solid state Form A, 0.5A amp relay
Auxiliary Retransmit Module
0
=
None
1
=
Single retransmit output 0-5, 1-5, 0-10VÎ(dc), 0-20mA, 4-20mA
2
=
Dual retransmit outputs 0-5, 1-5, 0-10VÎ(dc), 0-20mA, 4-20mA
Language and RTD Options
1
=
English
w/100Ω RTD
2
=
German
w/100Ω RTD
3
=
French
w/100Ω RTD
4
=
Spanish
w/100Ω RTD
5
=
English
w/500 & IKΩ RTD
6
=
German
w/500 & IKΩ RTD
7
=
French
w/500 & IKΩ RTD
8
=
Spanish
w/500 & IKΩ RTD
Display and Custom Options
RG =
Display
XX =
Custom options
W
A
T
L
O
W
PID with Time/
Temperature
Profiling Controllers
SERIES N7
Watlow’s SERIES N7 temperature
controllers provide ample flexibility
for use in a broad range of
applications. The controllers feature
expanded communication options
as well as modular architecture that
provides customers with design
options based on their unique
specifications. The SERIES N7
offers customizable firmware and
overlays including up to 32 LEDs
and 32 switches.
Watlow’s SERIES N7 offers an
optional NAFEM Ethernet
communications interface to meet
industry needs. The controller is UL®
and C-UL® recognized, carries the
EU LV and EMC directives for
emissions and immunity, the NSF
option and the CSA standard
C22.2-24.
Low voltage controller
Modular design
• Dual displays can be tailored to
offer flexibility and design options
• Vertical and horizontal
orientations offer mounting
options
• High voltage output module
provides for up to six high voltage
relays
• Mechanically fits within 69.85 mm
x 196.85 mm (2.75 in. x 7.75 in.)
outline
• Custom firmware allows multiple
applications in one controller
• Auto-tuning simplifies tuning of
PID parameters
• Overlay can be easily modified,
allowing users to create a unique
look with membrane switches
and LEDs
• Ambient temperature rating of
80˚C (176˚F) allows controller to
withstand hot environments
Enhanced Communications
• Ethernet communications module
enables NAFEM protocol option
• On board variable audible alarm
alerts operator of control
conditions
• Communications capable of flash
downloading software, Modbus™
and PC communications
Customizable inputs and outputs
• Up to four sensor inputs can be
customized to include thermocouples, RTDs or process inputs
• Up to 10 outputs provide ranges
including open collectors, SSRs,
electromechanical relays, no-arc
relays, current and voltage
• Up to eight event inputs allow for
door switch use
131
Multi-Loop
The base model is equipped with
six open collector outputs, each with
a nominal output voltage of 5V and
a maximum current of 30mA. Two
additional open collector outputs
can be added for a total of eight
possible outputs. The optional high
voltage board offers up to six high
voltage outputs which can be used
in place of the open collector
outputs. The SERIES N7 features
two solid state relays (SSRs) with
the option of six in total. Each SSR
has a maximum operating current of
0.4 amps.
Features and Benefits
PID with Time/Temperature Profiling
The SERIES N7’s enhanced
technology includes a powerful
processor with additional memory
for sophisticated control algorithms
as well as the ability to monitor and
count various events. The SERIES
N7 delivers up to four zones of
control that can be sensed with
thermocouples or two-wire or threewire RTDs. Input offerings are
process inputs available as either
voltage or current. The SERIES N7
also offers a wide variety of outputs.
PID with Time/
Temperature
Profiling Controllers
SERIES N7
Specifications
Control Mode
• Up to four zones of control, PID or
on-off control
• Microprocessor based,
programmable, direct-acting
control outputs, flash download
• User selectable time and
temperature display formats.
Time formats will include HH:MM,
MM:SS, MMM:SS. Temperature
formats will be ˚C or ˚F
• Menu driven operation and
manual modes available
• One step auto-tuning,
WATCURVE temperature
compensation
• Real time clock option displays
time of day
• Displayed in ˚C, ˚F or process
variable units
• Calibration accuracy and sensor
conformity: ±1˚F for Type J
thermocouple and RTD
• Battery backed, real-time clock
Accuracy
Current
• Input impedance: 100 W
• Input range: 0 to 22mA
• Accuracy: ± 40 mA
• Drift: ± 5 mA/F
Output Options
Switched DC Outputs
• 5V at 30mA maximum
Voltage Outputs
• Range: 0 to 12V at 50mA
maximum
• Minimum: load impedance 500 W
• Accuracy: ± 100mV
• Drift: ± 2.1mV/F
• One non-isolated passive serial
communications channel
• Voltage ± 25mV
Current Output
• Current ± 40µA
• One non-isolated master serial
communications channel
• Accuracy span: Normally 540˚C
(1000˚F) minimum span
• Range: 0 to 22mA at 20V
maximum
• Optional Ethernet
communications module
• Temperature stability
• Optional high-voltage output
module
• Update rate: 5Hz
Agency Approvals
• UL® 60730, C-UL®
• EU LV Directive 72/23/EEC
• EU EMC Directive 89/336/EEC
• Emissions
• Immunity
• NSF option
• NAFEM NDP communications
Configured Sensor Inputs
Thermocouple
• Requires ungrounded
thermocouples
• Maximum load impedance:
1000 W
• Accuracy: ± 100mA
• Drift: ± 4.3mA/F
DC Input
• Input high: 3 to 30V or >10kW
• Input low: -0.5 to 0.5V or <250W
• Accuracy: ±1.1˚C (2˚F)
Optional High Voltage Board
• Drift: ± 0.10˚C/˚C (±0.10˚F/˚F)
• Optional high voltage board has
six high-voltage outputs including
two standard SSR outputs. The
remaining four outputs can be
SSRs, electromechanical or no arc
relays
• Input ranges:
• Type J: -46˚C to 316˚C
(-50˚F to 600˚F)
• CSA standard E60730-209
• Type K: -46˚C to 316˚C
(-50˚F to 600˚F)
Operator Interface
RTD
• Embedded membrane switch
(LEDs and key switches
embedded in overlay)
• 2- or 3-wire platinum
• Operating temperature:
0˚ to 80˚C (0˚ to 176˚F)
• DIN-curve (0.00385 curve)
• Contact type: normally open
• Accuracy: ±1.1˚C (2˚F)
• Drift: ± 0.10˚C/˚C (± 0.10˚F/˚F)
• Maximum operating current:
8 Amps
• Range: -46˚C to 316˚C
(-50˚F to 600˚F)
• Maximum operating voltage:
250VÅ(ac)
Voltage
• 120/240VÅ(ac)
• Input impedance: 60kW
• 250VA pilot duty
• Up to 32 embedded LEDs and
32 embedded switches
• Contamination and water resistant
(Supplied by Watlow or customer)
• Displays: Four character
14.22 mm (0.56 in.) high, seven
segment LED display and an
eight character 5.08 mm (0.2 in.)
dot matrix display
132
• Displays times, temperatures,
user prompts and diagnostic
codes
• Input range: 0 to 12V
• Accuracy: ± 25 mV
• Drift: ± 5mV/F
• Relay specification:
• SSR specification
• Operating temperature:
0˚ to 80˚C (0˚ to 176˚F)
• Contact type: normally open
W
A
T
L
O
W
PID with Time/
Temperature
Profiling Controllers
SERIES N7
Communications
Connectors
Specifications Cont.
• Communications parallel
connector:
Connectors are customer
supplied - Molex
• Maximum operating current:
0.4 Amps
• Supports addition of Ethernet
communications board
• Standard I/O 16-pin connector
housing – 43025-1600
• Maximum operating voltage:
250VÅ(ac)
• Support development of
additional memory
• Optional I/O 14-pin connector
housing – 43025-1400
• 120/240VÅ(ac)
• 0.4A pilot duty
• No arc specification
• Operating temperature:
0˚ to 80˚C (0˚ to 176˚F)
• Contact type: normally open
• Maximum operating current:
8 amps
• Maximum operating voltage:
250VÅ(ac)
• DB 9 communications connector:
• Pins – 43030-0007
• EIA-232 and EIA-485
connections for:
High Voltage Module Adder Board
Ordering Information
• Flash download
• A007-2660-0000 – Two SSRs
• PC communications
• A007-2660-0001 – Two SSRs and
four mechanical relays
• Modbus™ communications
• A007-2660-0002 – Six SSRs
• Expansion bus connector
For connection to expansion
devices such as:
• A007-2660-0003 – Four SSRs and
2 mechanical relays
• Motor speed control
• A007-2660-0004 – Two SSRs and
four no-arc relays
Power/Line Voltage
• Encoder
• 24VÅ(ac) power input (20.4 to
26.4VÅ(ac))
• Multiple or custom displays
• Other custom remote I/O
• 47 to 63Hz
Location of Pins and Ports for Inputs and Outputs
• 15VA maximum
• Battery/real time clock option:
6 year lithium battery,
provides power upon backup
power failure, operation
resumption after power recovery,
ability to display time of day
Audible Alarm
• Internal audible alarm, 85dB @
10cm @ 2KHz. Output frequencies
supported: 250, 500, 1000, 2000,
4000Hz
5-pin Master
Communications Port
9-pin Slave
Communications Port
Input 3
Input 4
16 Pins
Power
Control Outputs 1 & 2
Event Inputs 1 to 4
Event Outputs 1 to 4
1
2
3
4
5
6
6
5
4
3
2
1
Input 2
Input 1
14 Pins
Control Outputs 3 & 4
Process Outputs 1 & 2
Event Inputs 5 to 8
Operating Environment
• 0˚C to 80˚C (32˚F to 176˚F), 0 to
90 percent relative humidity,
non-condensing
Storage Temperature
• -40˚C to 80˚C (-40˚F to 176˚F)
High Voltage Module
High-voltage
Control Outputs 1 to 3
Dimensions
• Vertical – 196.85 mm x 76.2 mm x
50.8 mm (7.75 in. x 3 in. x 2 in.)
• Horizontal – 76.2 mm x 196.85 mm
x 50.8 mm (3 in. x 7.75 in. x 2 in.)
High Voltage Module
High-voltage Control Outputs 4
High-voltage Event Outputs 5 & 6
133
Multi-Loop
• Program retention upon power
failure via non-volatile memory
PID with Time/Temperature Profiling
• Class 2 power source required
PID with Time/
Temperature
Profiling Controllers
SERIES N7
F.O.B.: Winona, Minnesota
Ordering Information
To order, complete the code number on the right with the information below.
N7__ -____-____
SERIES N7 = Up to four channels of microprocessor-based
time and temperature control: 24VÅ(ac) power input
Abbreviation for Customer Name
Input 1 and Input 2
1
=
Dual thermocouple
2
=
Input 1 thermocouple / input 2 process input
3
=
Input 1 thermocouple / input 2 RTD
4
=
Dual process inputs
5
=
Input 1 RTD / input 2 process input
6
=
Dual RTD inputs
Input 3 and Input 4
0
=
None
1
=
Input 3 and 4 thermocouples
2
=
Input 3 process / input 4 thermocouple input
3
=
Input 3 RTD / input 4 thermocouple
4
=
Input 3 process input / input 4 process input
5
=
Input 3 RTD / input 4 process input
6
=
Input 3 RTD / input 4 RTD
Process Outputs, Event Inputs and Control Outputs
0 =
No events or process outputs
Notes:
• If customer wants to use inputs 3 or 4 as
thermocouple, input 1 must also be
thermocouple. Requires at least one
ungrounded thermocouple.
• There is no option for suppression on any
of the high voltage outputs.
134
1 =
4 event inputs (rated @ 0 to 30V or contact closure) and 2 control outputs
(rated for 5V @ 30mA)
2 =
Current output 1 (0 to 20mA) with 4 event inputs and 2 control outputs
3 =
Current outputs 1 and 2 (both are rated 0 to 20mA) with 4 event inputs
and 2 control outputs
4 =
Current output 1 and dc output 2 (rated 0 to 10V) with 4 event inputs and
2 control outputs
5 =
DC output (rated 0 to 10V) with 4 event inputs and 2 control outputs
6 =
DC outputs 1 and 2 with 4 event inputs and 2 control outputs
7 =
DC output 1 and current output 2 with 4 event inputs and 2 control outputs
Add on Ethernet Module
0
=
None
1
=
Ethernet module board
Add on High Voltage Module
0
=
None
1
=
2 SSRs (rated at 0.4A, normally open)
2
=
2 SSRs and 4 mechanical relays (rated at 8A, normally open)
3
=
6 SSRs
4
=
4 SSRs and 2 mechanical relays
Display Options (Horizontal or Vertical)
1
=
Vertical
2
=
Horizontal left
3
=
Horizontal right
Custom Software and Options Designator
XX =
Made to order controller, code number assigned by factory
W
A
T
L
O
W
PID with Time/
Temperature
Profiling Controllers
MINICHEF® 2000
MINICHEF ® 2000 is an industry first
in an on-off or PID configurable
temperature/time and machinefunction controller offering dozens of
pre-programmed applications. The
foodservice equipment industry can
now rely on one product to provide
control of many cooking applications
including cook and hold ovens,
convection ovens, deep-fat fryers,
griddles and rotisseries. You can
easily switch the controller from one
application to another or customize
other applications by simply
pressing a combination of keys.
MINICHEF 2000 also adapts to
changing needs, evolving as the
product or process changes.
Performance Capabilities
Input 1
Thermocouple
or RTD
Input 2
Thermocouple
or RTD
Output 1
Switched dc or solid-state relay
G
Output 2
Switched dc or solid-state relay
H
A
B
C
D
E
F
Event Input 1
Event Input 2
Output 3
Event Output 1
Output 4
Event Output 2
Output 5
Audible Alarm Output
Compact design
Mid-point alarms
• Provides options for designing
space-efficient equipment
• Enables even cooking by alerting
the user to an action such as stir
or turn
Economical
Preheat option
• Thermometer accuracy to ±2°F
• Costs less than units with fewer
capabilities
• Operating environment
0 to 80°C (32 to 176°F)
WATHELP diagnostics
• Prevents menu start until
equipment is pre-heated
Features and Benefits
• Simplifies operation and
troubleshooting
Meets CE, UL®, CSA, NSF, AGA
standards
Configurable cooking controller
WATCURVE
• Allows you to standardize on one
controller simplifying inventory,
manufacturing and reducing
multiple suppliers
• Compensates for temperature
disturbances
• Helps obtaining international and
local code compliance
Multiple inputs/outputs
• Control temperatures, times and
machine functions
Three-year warranty
“Smart Control”
• Provides Control Confidence®
• Optimizes system performance
by calculating PID parameters
automatically
Applications
• Foodservice equipment
• Custom applications, consult
factory
Programmable menus
• Simplify repetitive tasks
135
Multi-Loop
MINICHEF 2000 withstands the
rigorous conditions of a kitchen
environment with an 80°C (176°F)
ambient rating and superior
immunity to electrical interference.
5 Outputs
PID with Time/Temperature Profiling
Because MINICHEF 2000 can
operate different types of equipment,
you can replace other controllers,
simplifying inventory, manufacturing
and reducing your supplier base.
With a compact electrical case of
82.55 mm (3.25 in.) square x 50.8 mm
(2 in.) deep, MINICHEF 2000
enables new opportunities for
space-efficient equipment designs.
4 Inputs
PID with Time/
Temperature
Profiling Controllers
MINICHEF 2000
• Time display formats: H:MM:SS,
HH:MM or MMM:SS
Specifications
• Audible alarms
• Eight red indicator lights
Control Mode
• Single and dual heat channels,
PID or on-off
• Microprocessor-based,
programmable, reverse-acting
control outputs
• User-selectable embedded
software applications define the
operation of display, keys, inputs,
outputs, timing action
• One-step auto-tuning, WATHELP
diagnostics, WATCURVE
temperature compensation
Agency
• CE approved:
89/336/EEC Electromagnetic
Compatibility Directive
• Menu-driven operation and
manual modes available
• Real-time clock option displays
time of day
• WATHELP diagnostics
Accuracy
• Calibration accuracy and sensor
conformityb: ±2.0°F for Type J
thermocouple and RTD, ±0.35
percent of span for Type K and E
thermocouples, ±1 LSD, 77°F ±5°F
ambient and rated line voltage of
±10 percent
• Accuracy span: 540°C (1000°F)
minimum
-EN 50082-1: Immunity
• Temperature stability: ±0.15˚C/ ˚C
(0.15˚F/˚F) change in ambient
typical
73/23/EEC Low-Voltage Directive
Sensors / Inputse
-EN 60730-1 and EN 60730-2-9
• Thermocouple,c software selectable Type J, K or E, 0 to 650°C
(32 to 1200°F) (Dual channel
applications require at least one
ungrounded thermocouple)
-EN 50081-1: Emissions
• NSF Listed, Criteria
2e
• A.G.A.: UL® tested to A.G.A.
standard Z21.23, (UL® File #
E43684).
• UL® and C-UL® recognized, UL®
197, 873, 991 and CSA standard
C22.2-24, (UL® File # E43684)
Operator Interface
• Membrane overlay, contamination
and water resistant (supplied by
customer)
• LED display, five digit seven
segment, 14.22 mm (0.56 in.)
high, red
• Displays times, temperatures,
user prompts and diagnostic
codes
• User-selectable time and
temperature display formats
• Temperature display formats
˚C or ˚F
136
• Six tactile feedback keys
• RTDc, 2- or 3-wire, platinum,
100, 500, 1000Ω, at 0°C (32°F),
software selectable DIN or JIS
curves,-20 to 650°C (0 to 1200°F)
(3-wire will function as 2-wire)
Audible Output Options
• Switched dc signal, 4.5V to 5.25V,
30mA maximum output, minimum
load resistance > 150Ω, non-isolated
• Internal audible alarm, 75dB at
10 cm
Connectors
• Sensor Input Terminal Stripd:
RIACON, 6-position, quickconnect available separately
• Power and Input / Output
Terminald: AMP, 15-position,
quick-connect available separately
Power / Line Voltage
• 20.4 to 26.4VÅ(ac), 47 to 63Hz
• 15VA maximum
• For CE applications, input power
must be limited to 15W external to
the control
• Program retention upon power
failure via non-volatile memory
• Battery / real-time clock option:
six-year lithium battery, provides
power backup upon power failure,
operation resumption after power
recovery, ability to display time of
day
Operating Environment
• 0 to 80°C (32 to 176°F), 0 to 90
percent RH, non-condensing
Storage Temperature
• -40 to 80°C (-40 to 176°F)
• Input A / D resolution: 15 bit
• Contact inputs, TTL compatible
with internal pull-up resistor, two
available
Output Options
• Solid state relay, 0.4A, with or
without contact suppression
• Switched dc signal, 4.5V to 5.25V,
30mA maximum output, minimum
load resistance > 150Ω, non-isolated
a The MINICHEF 2000 controller is to be used in
systems with an external high temperature
limiting device.
b Thermocouple lead resistance of 200Ω causes <
1°C error. RTD, 22 gauge wire will not contribute
more than 0.086°F error / ft.
c Dual channel applications require either two
thermocouple sensors or two identical RTD
sensor types.
d For mating connector information, see Ordering
Information Accessory section.
e NSF certified for thermometer accuracy (oven
and hot food holding applications from 0°C to
315°C (32˚F to 600˚F) when used with an RTD or
Type J thermocouple temperature sensor/probe).
W
A
T
L
O
PID with Time/
Temperature
Profiling Controllers
MINICHEF 2000
W
F.O.B.: Winona, Minnesota
Ordering Information
To order, complete the code number on the right with the information below:
Specifications Cont.
Mechanical
• Case: polycarbonate Lexan® with
adjustable mounting collar
(vertical or horizontal orientation),
designed for mounting on 16, 18,
20 and 22 gauge panels
• Internal panel mounting requires a
specified panel cutout and four
#6-32 studs or equivalent
• Vibration: 2g, 10 to 150Hz,
applied in any one of three axes
Dimensions
Program Storage
• All non-embedded user and
factory programs are stored in
non-volatile memory. Can be
changed by reprogramming
1
=
2
=
3
=
4
=
Output 1
Dual thermocouple, Type J, K or E
Dual RTD, platinum, 100Ω, curve selectable
Dual RTD, platinum, 500Ω, curve selectable
Dual RTD, platinum, 1000Ω, curve selectable
1
=
Switched dc, 5V nominal, 30mA, non-isolated
2
=
Solid state relay, Form A, 0.4A, without RC suppression
3
=
Solid state relay, Form A, 0.4A, with RC suppression
Output 2
1
=
Switched dc, 5V nominal, 30mA, non-isolated
2
=
Solid state relay, Form A, 0.4A, without RC suppression
3
=
Solid state relay, Form A, 0.4A, with RC suppression
Output 3 and 4
1
=
Two event outputs, switched dc, 5V nominal, 30mA, non-isolated
Battery and Real-time Clock
0
=
None
1
=
Includes battery and real-time clock
Audible Alarm
0
=
1
=
Software
AA =
XX =
Alarm signal available at connector, switched dc, 5V nominal,
30mA, non-isolated
Internal alarm included
Standard Food Equipment Application Software Set
Custom set-up parameters or Made-to-Order custom software.
Consult your local Watlow sales engineer. Code number assigned by factory
Sample/Update Rates
• 1 input: 4Hz
• 2 inputs: 4Hz
• PID: 1Hz
• Control outputs: 100Hz
• Display: 10Hz
Lexan® is a registered trademark of General Electric
Corporation.
137
Multi-Loop
• 6.50 oz maximum
Inputs
PID with Time/Temperature Profiling
• Overall width x height x depth:
Horizontal
105 mm x 83 mm x 51 mm
(4.13 in. x 3.25 in. x 2.00 in.);
Vertical
83 mm x 105 mm x 51 mm
(3.25 in. x 4.13 in. x 2.00 in.)
(Assumes mating connectors are
attached. Does not include wire
bundle space requirements.)
Weight
F2HA-___1-__AA
MINICHEF 2000 = Cooking controller with numerous foodservice
equipment application software sets, single and dual channel on-off or
PID temperature regulation, timer and machine-function control, microprocessor-based, programmable, auto-tuning, WATCURVE, WATHELP
diagnostics, 24VÅ(ac) power input, agency approved, flush mounted (membrane faceplate supplied by customer). Two switch contact event inputs
PID with Time/
Temperature
Profiling Controllers
MINICHEF 2000
Accessories
0238-0679-0000
Prototyping and Training Membrane
Overlay, adhesive-backed, 120.65 mm x
120.65 mm (4.75 in. x 4.75 in.)
A001-0249-0001
120VÅ(ac) – 24VÅ(ac), stepdown
transformer, class 2, quick-connect
terminals included
A001-0249-0002
208 / 240 VÅ(ac) – 24 VÅ(ac), stepdown
transformer, class 2, quick-connect
terminals included
138
MINICHEF 2000 Documentation Kit
Code Number
0600-0006-0008 Rev A
0600-0006-0010 Rev A
0600-0006-0000 Rev A
0600-0006-0001 Rev A
0600-0006-0002 Rev A
0600-0006-0003 Rev A
0600-0006-0004 Rev A
0600-0006-0005 Rev A
0600-0006-0006 Rev A
0600-0006-0007 Rev A
Description
The Complete MINICHEF 2000 User Manual
MINICHEF 2000 Tutorial Diskette (31⁄2 inch)
MINICHEF 2000 General Setup Guide
MINICHEF 2000 Cook & Hold Application Guide
MINICHEF 2000 Convection Oven Application Guide
MINICHEF 2000 Deep-Fat Fryer Application Guide
MINICHEF 2000 Griddle Application Guide
MINICHEF 2000 Timer Application Guide
MINICHEF 2000 Shelf-Timer Application Guide
MINICHEF 2000 Rotisserie Application Guide
W
A
T
L
O
W
Limits /Alarms
TLM-8 Thermal Limit
The Watlow Anafaze TLM-8 SERIES
is a low-cost solution for multichannel, redundant temperature
monitoring. Each TLM-8 has eight
channels to continuously monitor
thermocouples, RTDs or thermal
switches, making it ideal for multizone applications. The resistor key
model (TLME) has fixed
temperature limits. Choose an
individual temperature limit for each
channel from the standard list or
consult the factory for other limits.
The precision model (TLMP) is
available with specific limits, which
are also field adjustable.
The TLM-8 bears the CE mark (LVD
and EMC Directives), and is UL®
listed and FM approved.
Latching alarms
Multi-channel monitoring
• Protects process and equipment
• Eight channels in one package
make the TLM-8 ideal for multizone applications
CE, UL® and Factory Mutual (FM)
Approvals
Multiple sensor types
• TLM-8 supports six thermocouple
types, RTDs and thermal switches
(one sensor type per TLM-8)
Selectable alarm limits
• TLM-8 can be ordered with a
different temperature limit on each
channel
• TLM-P has field adjustable
temperature limits
Compact, easy to install,
sub-panel mounting
Applications
• Reduces installation time
• Any process requiring multichannel redundant temperature
monitoring
Flexible interlocks
• Semiconductor capital equipment
requiring SEMI S2-93
• Electronics packaging equipment
• Global acceptance for safety and
EMC compliance
Limits /Alarms
The TLM-8 is compact and easy to
install on a panel or a DIN-rail. No
cutout is required, reducing
installation and fabrication costs.
Troubleshooting is simplified through
a self-test diagnostics input which
simulates the alarm state.
Features and Benefits
• Interfaces with redundant
controls; ideal for SEMI S2-93
applications
Self-test diagnostics
• Simplifies troubleshooting
• Plastics injection molding and
extrusion equipment
UL® is a registered trademark of
Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc.
139
Multi-Loop
The TLM-8 is equipped with flexible
interlocks, which are designed to
interface with redundant controls.
The alarms latch and require operator
intervention to clear, resulting in
process and equipment protection.
Semiconductor capital equipment
OEMs will find these features ideal for
meeting SEMI S2-93 safety guidelines.
Limits /Alarms
TLM-8 Thermal Limit
Specifications
Analog Inputs
• Eight sensor input channels
Sensor Inputs (Trip Point Ranges)
• RTD 100Ω, platinum, 2-wire
(DIN-curve: -100 to 850°C
(-148 to 1562°F)
• Thermal switch
• Type E T/C (TLME: 100 to 801°C
(212 to 1474°F); TLMP: 100 to
660°C (212 to 1220°F))
• Type J T/C (100 to 754°C)
(212 to 1389°F)
• Type K T/C (100 to 1205°C)
(212 to 2201°F)
• Type R T/C (500 to 1720°C)
(932 to 3128°F)
• Type S T/C (500 to 1711°C)
(932 to 3112°F)
• Type T T/C (100 to 384°C)
(212 to 723°F)
Accuracy
• TLME: ±5 percent of trip point
• TLMP: ±1 percent of trip point
Repeatability
• <5°C (41°F)
Digital Inputs
• Alarm acknowledge digital input:
5-30VÎ(dc), optically isolated
• Alarm simulation digital input:
5-30VÎ(dc), optically isolated
Temperature Coefficient
• 40 ppm / °C accuracy
Alarm Outputs
For “fail safe” operation, relay
contacts are open in alarm and
power off condition
• Global: 2 Form A (normally open)
electromechanical relays, latching
• Channel: 8 Form A (normally open)
electromechanical relays, latching
• Maximum contact rating: 1A @
125VÅ(ac) or 60VÎ(dc)
• UL® contact rating: 1A @
30VÎ(dc)
Dimensions
• 235 mm x 93 mm x 47 mm
(9.25 in. x 3.65 in. x 1.85 in.)
(L x W x H), H = 66 mm (2.60 in.)
with DIN mount option
Power Requirements
• 10-26VÎ(dc) ±5 percent, 3.2
watts, class 2 power supply
Environmental
• Temperature: 0 to 60°C (32 to
140°F) (operating); -20 to 100°C
(-4 to 212°F) (storage)
• Relative humidity: 0-95 percent,
non-condensing
Agency Approvals/Compliance
• CE Directives:
Low Voltage Directive (LVD)
73/23/EEC,
Electromagnetic Compatibility
(EMC) Directive 89/336/EEC
• UL® listed: UL® 916 and UL® 508
• C-UL® listed: CSA 22.2-205-M19
• Factory Mutual approval:
temperature limit switches 3545
Miscellaneous
• 8 individual alarm status LEDs
(Red)
• 1 supply power LED (Green)
C-UL® is a registered trademark of
Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc.
140
W
A
T
L
O
W
Limits /Alarms
TLM-8 Thermal Limit
TLME Trip Point Chart - (see Ordering Information, Option 4)
Temperature
Trip Point
RTD
Unused Input
103˚C (217˚F)
121˚C (250˚F)
151˚C (304˚F)
215˚C (419˚F)
324˚C (615˚F)
404˚C (759˚F)
478˚C (892˚F)
584˚C (1083˚F)
708˚C (1306˚F)
824˚C (1515˚F)
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
Type E T/C
Unused Input
101˚C (214˚F)
202˚C (396˚F)
302˚C (576˚F)
403˚C (756˚F)
502˚C (936˚F)
600˚C (1112˚F)
702˚C (1296˚F)
801˚C (1474˚F)
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
Type J T/C
Unused Input
100˚C (212˚F)
152˚C (307˚F)
202˚C (396˚F)
251˚C (484˚F)
302˚C (576˚F)
350˚C (662˚F)
402˚C (756˚F)
450˚C (842˚F)
502˚C (936˚F)
554˚C (1027˚F)
600˚C (1112˚F)
653˚C (1207˚F)
704˚C (1299˚F)
754˚C (1389˚F)
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
Type K T/C
Unused Input
100˚C (212˚F)
150˚C (302˚F)
200˚C (392˚F)
252˚C (486˚F)
303˚C (577˚F)
353˚C (667˚F)
401˚C (754˚F)
455˚C (851˚F)
504˚C (939˚F)
556˚C (1033˚F)
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
Temperature
Trip Point
Type K T/C (con’t)
603˚C
651˚C
701˚C
753˚C
807˚C
851˚C
907˚C
952˚C
998˚C
1057˚C
1101˚C
1157˚C
1205˚C
Type R T/C
Unused Input
501˚C (934˚F)
602˚C (1116˚F)
708˚C (1306˚F)
800˚C (1472˚F)
903˚C (1657˚F)
999˚C (1830˚F)
1100˚C (2012˚F)
1206˚C (2203˚F)
1306˚C (2383˚F)
1410˚C (2570˚F)
1497˚C (2727˚F)
1593˚C (2899˚F)
1720˚C (3128˚F)
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
Type S T/C
Unused Input
506˚C (943˚F)
601˚C (1114˚F)
700˚C (1292˚F)
810˚C (1490˚F)
902˚C (1656˚F)
1005˚C (1841˚F)
1110˚C (2030˚F)
1210˚C (2210˚F)
1313˚C (2395˚F)
1404˚C (2559˚F)
1500˚C (2732˚F)
1600˚C (2912˚F)
1711˚C (3112˚F)
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
Type T T/C
Unused Input
100˚C (212˚F)
202˚C (396˚F)
291˚C (556˚F)
384˚C (723˚F)
A
B
C
D
E
Limits /Alarms
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Multi-Loop
(1117˚F)
(1204˚F)
(1294˚F)
(1387˚F)
(1485˚F)
(1564˚F)
(1665˚F)
(1746˚F)
(1828˚F)
(1935˚F)
(2014˚F)
(2115˚F)
(2201˚F)
141
Limits /Alarms
TLM-8 Thermal Limit
F.O.B.: Winona, Minnesota
Ordering Information
To order, complete the code number to the right with the information below:
TLME = Fixed temperature limits model
TLME___________
Sensor Type
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
RTD, 100Ω platinum/thermal switch
Type E T/C
Type J T/C
Type K T/C
Type R T/C
Type S T/C
Type T T/C
Alarm Relays
0
=
Global alarm relays only
1
=
Global alarm relays and 8 channel alarm relays
Mounting
0
=
Panel
1
=
DIN-rail
Trip Point (see Trip Point chart on page 141)
Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel 3
Channel 4
Channel 5
Channel 6
Channel 7
Channel 8
TLMP = Precision model with adjustable limits
TLMP- _ _ _ _
Sensor Type
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
RTD
Type E T/C
Type J T/C
Type K T/C
Type R T/C
Type S T/C
Type T T/C
Alarm Relays
0
=
Global relays only
1
=
Global alarm relays and 8 channel alarm relays
Mounting
0
=
Panel
1
=
DIN-rail
Trip Point
U
=
User specified (specify trip points in description)
D
=
Default trip points
TLMP Trip Point Descriptions
If user specified trip points are ordered in the
TLMP part number, specify the following
information for each channel in the part description:
TLMPCH _ - _ _ _ _
Channel Number
X
=
Channel number X (1-8)
Trip Point
XXXX = Trip point in Celsius. Include leading zeros to make four digits.
See table on page 141 for ranges for each sensor type. Unspecified channels
will be set to the default limit for the sensor.
142
W
A
T
L
O
W
Limits /Alarms
CAS200 Alarm
Scanner
The Watlow Anafaze CAS200
(Compact Alarm Scanner) has
16 channels of alarm monitoring and
data acquisition for a broad range of
applications and processes. Its
compact 1⁄8 DIN size, advanced
features and enhanced performance
make it ideal for industrial and
laboratory applications that require
reliable alarm monitoring and data
analysis. The CAS200 comes
standard with WATVIEW-CAS,
Windows® software that provides online setup, alarm notification, recipe
management, trend graphing and
spreadsheet importable report data.
The CAS200 now supports Modbus™
RTU protocol.
Digital inputs
Multiple and mixed inputs
• Eight digital inputs available to
select jobs
• Connect any combination of
thermocouples, linear dc voltage
or dc current
Serial communications
Digital outputs
• 34 digital outputs available for
alarms
Process variable scanning and
display
Process display in engineering
units
• Continuously monitor critical
process variables
• Shows the process in the
engineering units used
Versatile alarms
Remote alarm acknowledge
• Digital input acknowledges alarms
from an external contact or push
button
• Display one channel; or scan and
display each channel
Limits /Alarms
• Use EIA/TIA-232 or EIA/TIA-485
communications to connect up to
32 CAS200 alarm/monitoring
systems
• Configure independent high and
low process alarms and deviation
band alarms
Simple setup
• Configured with a series of
pass-sequence-protected
supervisory menus
Job storage and recall
• Stores up to eight jobs or recipes
Windows® is a registered trademark of
Microsoft Corporation.
Modbus™ is a trademark of Schneider
Automation Incorporated.
143
Multi-Loop
The CAS200 adds independent data
acquisition and alarm monitoring to
your process. It can measure up to
16 inputs. Sensor data is transferred
to a computer or programmable logic
controller (PLC) through a standard
RS-232 or RS-485 port.
Features and Benefits
Limits /Alarms
Type PL-II
CAS200 Alarm
Scanner
10 to 1100°C
(50 to 2012°F) (±1.8°F)
Type R
-18 to 1766°C
Type S
-18 to 1760°C
Operator Interface
• 32-character vacuum
fluorescent display
• 8-key keypad to access guided
menus and prompts,
enter passkey sequence, set
values, switch between
single channel and multiple
channel displays
• Controller configuration can be
loaded through the standard
serial port
Analog Inputs
• 16 single-ended
Type T
-268 to 399°C
(-450 to 750°F) (±2.9°F)
Note: Accuracy @ 25˚C (77˚F)
ambient. Valid for 10 to 100
percent of span except Type B,
which is specified for 427˚C to
1760˚C (800˚F to 3200˚F)
Linear Voltage and Current Inputs
Requires scaling resistors.
See Special Inputs in Ordering
Information
0-100mVÎ(dc)
0-500mVÎ(dc)
Sensors/Inputs
• Thermocouples: User-selectable
type, direct connection,
linearization, reference junction
compensation and upscale break
protection
• Linear: current and voltage
signals from linear transmitters
• Pulse input
0-5VÎ(dc)
66 to 1760°C
0-1VÎ(dc)
Accuracy
±4.0°C
(150 to 3200°F) (±7.2°F)
-200 to 787°C
±1.0°C
(-328 to 1448°F) (±1.8°F)
Type J
-212 to 760°C
±1.2°C
(-350 to 1400°F) (±2.2°F)
Type K
-268 to 1371°C
±1.3°C
(-450 to 2500°F) (±2.3°F)
Type N
-268 to 1299°C
±1.6°C
0-20mAÎ(dc)/4-20mAÎ(dc)
Input Range and Accuracy
±1.5°C
(-450 to 2370°F) (±2.7°F)
144
(0 to 3200°F) (±5.0°F)
Temperature Coefficient
• 40 ppm/˚C
Range
±2.8°C
0-10mAÎ(dc)
Noise Rejection
• 120db at 60Hz
Type E
±2.8°C
(0 to 3210°F) (±5.0°F)
Specifications
Type B
±1.0°C
0-10VÎ(dc)
0-12VÎ(dc)
Other ranges available. Consult
factory
Pulse Input
• 1 TTL-level square wave input up
to 2kHz
Input Sampling Rate at 60Hz
• 24 channels per second
• 1.5 samples per second,
(update time: 0.667 sec.)
Calibration
• Automatic zero and full scale
Digital Inputs
• TTL-level used for remote alarm
acknowledge and selecting
recipes or jobs
• 8 inputs and 1 pulse input with
50-pin terminal board option
• 2 inputs and pulse input or
3 inputs with 18-pin terminal block
option
Alarm Outputs
• Any alarm can be assigned to any
available digital output. These
include: process alarms and
deviation alarms
• Global alarm: Digital output for
any alarm. Output is cleared with
front panel alarm acknowledge or
remotely through the serial
interface
• Watchdog output: on when
scanner is functioning correctly
• Outputs sink up to 60mA each at
5VÎ(dc)
• 350mA at 5VÎ(dc) available from
onboard supply
Serial Interface
• EIA/TIA-232 or EIA/TIA-485
Baud Rate
• 2400, 9600 or 19200 user
selectable
Communication Protocol
• Modbus™ RTU
Line Voltage/Power
• 15-24VÎ(dc) ±3VÎ(dc) @ 1A
(maximum), 320mA (no load)
Agency Approvals
• UL®, C-UL® listed: UL® 916,
Standard for Energy Management
Equipment
• CE Mark: Electromagnetic
Compatibility (EMC) Directive
89/336/EEC
W
A
T
L
O
W
Limits /Alarms
CAS200 Alarm
Scanner
Dimensions
25 mm
(1.00 in.)
178 mm
(7.00 in.)
31 mm*
(2.00 in.)
Terminals
Bezel
Steel Case
SCSI Cable
*25 mm (1.00 in.) with Right Angle SCSI Connector
Limits /Alarms
96 mm (3.78 in.)
145
Multi-Loop
50 mm (1.96 in.)
Limits /Alarms
CAS200 Alarm
Scanner
F.O.B.: Winona, Minnesota
Ordering Information
To order, complete the code number to the right with the information below:
200- ________
Terminal Board
0 =
No terminal board accessory
1 =
18-pin terminal block mounted on unit, no SCSI cable required
2 =
50-pin terminal board (3 foot SCSI cable included)
Power Supply
0 =
None
2 =
120/240VÅ(ac) 50/60Hz power supply adapter
[5VÎ(dc) @ 4A, 15VÎ(dc) @ 1.2A] CE approved
SCSI Cables
0 =
No cable accessory (3 foot SCSI cable is included with
50-pin terminal board)
1 =
6 foot SCSI cable
2 =
3 foot right angle SCSI cable
3 =
6 foot right angle SCSI cable
Serial Communication Cables (For communications with computer)
0 =
4 foot serial communication cable (DB-9 female/bare wire)
1 =
10 foot serial communications cable (DB-9 female/bare wire)
2 =
25 foot serial communications cable (DB-9 female/bare wire)
3 =
50 foot serial communications cable (DB-9 female/bare wire)
Scanner Software
1 =
WATVIEW-CAS Windows®-based software
Serial Communication Jumper Settings
0 =
EIA/TIA-232
1 =
EIA/TIA-485
2 =
EIA/TIA-485 terminated
Special Inputs
(Standard unit is configured for thermocouples and -10 to 60 mV linear inputs.
For other sensors, order special inputs)
00 =
Thermocouples and -10 to 60 mV inputs only
XX =
Number of current or voltage inputs. Include leading zero as needed
CASSI __-__-__
Special Input Type
43 =
0-10mAÎ(dc)
44 =
0-20mAÎ(dc)/4-20mAÎ(dc)
50 =
0-100mVÎ(dc)
52 =
0-500mVÎ(dc)
53 =
0-1VÎ(dc)
55 =
0-5VÎ(dc)
56 =
0-10VÎ(dc)
57 =
0-12VÎ(dc)
Start Channel
XX =
Channel number XX
End Channel
XX =
Channel number XX
Availability
Up to four weeks depending on
complexity and order release
quantity. Consult factory for details.
146
W
A
T
L
O
W
PID with
Programmable Logic
Controllers
CPC400 SERIES
The Watlow Anafaze CPC400
controllers provide performance and
flexibility in a compact design and
integrate full-featured closed-loop
control with user-written logic.
Programmable logic can interact
with closed-loop control and operate
I/O independently.
Four and eight loop versions offer
complete control solutions for a
broad range of applications. The
CPC400 supports thermocouples,
RTDs, linear voltage, current and
frequency. Built-in diagnostics
automatically detect sensor failures
including open, shorted and
reversed conditions. I/O can also be
utilized for closed-loop control,
alarms and user programs.
Features and Benefits
Combines control loops with
programmable logic
• Easy integration of PID control
and logic
• Less time reinventing PID control
• Augment closed-loop control with
user-written logic
• Context-sensitive, on-screen help
saves time
• Built-in context sensitive help
• WATVIEW software minimizes
setup time
• 120dB at 60Hz
• Integrate with other serial devices
using Modbus™
• 40ppm/°C
• Connect to system components via
analog I/O to retransmit process
variables and read set points
Advanced control utilities
• Auto-tune optimizes control with
minimal effort and expertise
• Cascade minimizes overshoot
and improves control in systems
with excessive thermal lag
• Ratio and differential enhances
control where the relationship
between two or more loops is
paramount
Specifications
• Add custom functions to controller
Operator Interface
• Reduces installation and setup
time
• 32-character vacuum florescent
display
• Requires less panel space
• Eight-key keypad to access
guided menus and prompts, set
values and view channel displays
• Fewer parts reduces failures and
increases reliability
Noise Rejection
Temperature Coefficient
Programmable Logic
• Programming languages: Ladder
Logic, Sequential Function Chart,
Function Block Diagram
• Memory: 64k flash (nonvolatile)
• Logic programs run concurrently
with closed loop control
• Read/write access: controller I/O
and closed loop control
parameters
Watlow Anafaze’s
WATVIEW and
LOGICPRO software
applications are ideal to
use with the CPC400
SERIES. See page 197
for more information
and ordering details.
UL® is a registered trademark of Underwriter’s
Laboratories, Inc.
Modbus™ is a registered trademark of Schneider
Automation, Inc.
147
Multi-Loop
The CPC400 carries the CE mark
and is UL® listed.
• Easy setup with menu guided,
full-text prompts
• Controller’s configuration can be
loaded through the standard
serial port
PID with Programmable Logic
Using the built-in communications
port, system designers can interface
one or more controllers to a host
computer for operator controls and
data acquisition. The CPC400 offers
PID, cascade, ratio and differential
control strategies. Process variable
retransmit and remote analog set
point can be used to integrate the
CPC400 with other devices such as
chart recorders.
Flexible, easy-to-use interfaces
PID with
Programmable Logic
Controllers
Linear Voltage and Current Inputs
CPC400 SERIES
Requires scaling resistors. See
Special/Linear Inputs in Ordering
Information
Specifications Cont.
Analog Inputs
• Thermocouples: User selectable
type, direct connection,
linearization, reference junction
compensation, reversed and
shorted T/C detection and
upscale break protection with
output averaging
• RTD: 2-or 3-wire, platinum, 100Ω
@ 0°C, DIN curve. Requires
scaling resistors. See Special/
Linear Inputs in Ordering
Information
0-20mAÎ(dc)/4-20mAÎ(dc)
0-100mVÎ(dc)
0-500mVÎ(dc)
0-1VÎ(dc)
0-5VÎ(dc)
0-10VÎ(dc)
• Outputs sink up to 60mA each at
5VÎ(dc)
• 350mA at 5VÎ(dc) available from
onboard supply
Alarm Outputs
• Independent process and
deviation alarms for each channel
0-12VÎ(dc)
• Alarms can operate any output
not used for control
Other ranges available. Consult
factory
• User programmable deadband,
delay and startup suppression
Input Sampling Rate @ 60Hz
• Global alarm output activates
when any alarm occurs
• Linear: current and voltage
signals from linear transmitter
Each channel has the following
scans per second:
• Pulse input: One TTL-level square
wave input up to 2kHz
• CPC404: 6 samples per second,
(update time: 0.167 sec.)
Sensor Range
• CPC408: 3 samples per second,
(update time: 0.333 sec.)
• Use DAC and SDAC accessory
modules. See page 159
Internal Measurement Resolution
Serial Interface
• 0.006 percent, greater than 14 bits
• EIA/TIA-232 or EIA/TIA-485
Calibration
Baud Rate
• Automatic zero and full scale
• 2400, 9600 or 19200, user
selectable
Sensor
Type B
Range
Accuracy*
at 25°C
Ambient
66 to 1760°C
±4.0°C
(150 to 3200°F)
(±7.2°F)
Type E -200 to
787°C
±1.0°C
(-328 to 1448°F)
(±1.8°F)
Type J -212 to
760°C
±1.2°C
(-350 to 1400°F)
(±2.2°F)
Type K -268 to 1371°C
±1.3°C
(-450 to 2500°F)
(±2.3°F)
Type R -18 to 1766°C
±2.8°C
(0 to 3210°F)
(±5.0°F)
Type S -18 to 1760°C
±2.8°C
(0 to 3200°F)
(±5.0°F)
Type T -268 to
399°C
±1.6°C
(-450 to
RTD
750°F)
(±2.9°F)
-200 to 621.1°C
±0.5°C
(-328 to 1150°F)
(±0.9°F)
* True for 10 percent to 100 percent
of span except Type B, which is
specified for 430°C to 1760°C
(800°F to 3200°F.)
148
0-10mAÎ(dc)
• Each control output can be
configured for on-off, time
proportioning or distributed zero
crossing
Digital Inputs
• Watchdog output indicates
controller is functioning correctly
Analog Outputs
• TTL level used for logic, remote
alarm acknowledge, selecting
recipes or jobs
Communication Protocol
• 8 inputs and 1-pulse input with
50-pin terminal board option
• 12 to 24VÎ(dc) @ 1A (loaded) or
300mA (no load)
• 3 inputs (1 input configurable as
pulse) with 18-pin terminal block
option
Agency Approvals
• Modbus™ RTU
Line Voltage/Power
Digital Outputs
• UL®, C-UL® Listed: UL 916,
Standard for Energy Management
Equipment
• 34 digital outputs are available
with a 50-pin terminal
board option
• CE Mark: Electromagnetic
Compatibility (EMC) Directive
89/336/EEC
• 11 outputs available with 18-pin
terminal block option
• 1 or 2 control outputs are user
assigned for each loop
W
A
T
L
O
W
PID with
Programmable Logic
Controllers
CPC400 SERIES
Dimensions
50 mm (1.96 in.)
96 mm (3.78 in.)
25 mm
(1.00 in.)
178 mm
(7.00 in.)
41 mm*
(1.60 in.)
Steel Case
SCSI Cable
(not used with TB-18)
*15 mm (0.60 in.) with
Right Angle SCSI Connector
149
Multi-Loop
Bezel
PID with Programmable Logic
Terminals
PID with
Programmable Logic
Controllers
CPC400 SERIES
F.O.B.: Winona, Minnesota
Ordering Information
To order, complete the model number on the right with the information below.
4 0
- 1
Number of Loops
4
= 4 loops
8
= 8 loops
Controller Type
1
= Standard EPROM
Terminal Board
0
= No terminal board accessory
1
= 18-pin terminal block mounted on unit (no SCSI cable required)
2
= 50-pin terminal board (includes 3 foot SCSI cable)
Power Supply
0
= No power supply
2
= 120/240VÅ(ac), 50/60Hz power supply adapter
(5VÎ[dc] @ 4A, 15VÎ[dc] @ 1.2A) (CE approved)
SCSI Cables (For use with 50-pin terminal board)
0
= No special SCSI cable (3 foot cable included with 50-pin terminal block)
1
= 6 foot SCSI cable
2
= 3 foot right angle SCSI cable
3
= 6 foot right angle SCSI cable
Serial Communication Cables
(For communications with computer)
0
= No serial communication cable
1
= 10 foot serial communication cable (DB-9 female/bare wire)
2
= 25 foot serial communication cable (DB-9 female/bare wire)
3
= 50 foot serial communication cable (DB-9 female/bare wire)
Serial Communication Jumper Settings
0
= EIA/TIA-232
1
= EIA/TIA-485
2
= EIA/TIA-485 terminated
Special Inputs
(Standard unit is configured for thermocouples and -10 to 60mV linear inputs.
For other sensors, order special inputs.)
0
= Thermocouples and -10 to 60mV inputs only
X
= Number of current, voltage or RTD inputs
Special Inputs
Specify an input type for each channel or block of channels that needs factory installed resistors.
Include a descriptor in the controller part description in the form specified below for each special
input type. Make sure the number of special inputs specified is equal to the number of special
inputs in the controller part number.
CPCS I
-
-
Special Input Type
(Not required for thermocouple sensor inputs)
23 = RTD
43 = 0-10mAÎ(dc)
44 = 0-20mAÎ(dc)/4-20mAÎ(dc)
50 = 0-100mVÎ(dc)
52 = 0-500mVÎ(dc)
53 = 0-1VÎ(dc)
55 = 0-5VÎ(dc)
56 = 0-10VÎ(dc)
57 = 0-12VÎ(dc)
Start Channel
XX = Channel Number XX
End Channel
XX = Channel Number XX
Availability
Up to 4 weeks, depending on complexity and order release quantity. Consult factory for details.
150
W
A
T
L
O
W
PID with
Programmable Logic
Controllers
PPC-2000 SERIES
The Watlow Anafaze PPC-2000 is a
powerful, multi-loop programmable
process control system. It combines
easy-to-set up multi-loop process
control and programmable logic
control in one integrated package.
Its modular design enables users
to select a set of hardware and
develop a logic control program
based on their specific control loop
and logic application, making it
ideal for OEMs.
LOGICPRO, graphical logic programming software package allows
integration of programmable logic
functionality into this new breed of
multi-loop controller. Develop with
easy-to-use drag and drop tools, then
simulate and debug your program
before downloading to the PPC-2000.
Fill-in-the-blank setup
• Semiconductor processing
equipment
• Easily setup and monitor closedloop control
• Electronic packaging equipment
High density mixed analog input
modules
• Plastic extrusion and
thermoforming equipment
• Applications requiring 16 or more
temperature or analog inputs
Features and Benefits
Up to 48 PID control loops
• Precisely control a large number
of temperature zones and process
loops with a single controller
Advanced auto-tune on all loops
• Quickly optimize PID parameters
Integrated programmable logic
control
• Eliminates hard-wired relay logic
or stand alone PLC
• Shares data between process
control and logic functions
• Connect any combination of T/C,
RTDs, linear dc current or voltage
on the same input module
Flexible and expandable I/O
platform
• Saves cost and space by
customizing a system to the exact
I/O requirement
ANAWIN and LOGICPRO graphical
software tools
• Easily configure, monitor and
maintain processes
• Add custom functionality to
support application requirements
Watlow Anafaze’s
ANAWIN3 and
LOGICPRO software
applications are ideal to
use with the PPC-2000
SERIES. See pages 199
and 201 for more
information and
ordering details.
151
Multi-Loop
Two serial communication ports
support read/write access by a host
computer and/or operator interface
panel using Modbus™ RTU protocol.
ANAWIN® 3, the PPC-2000’s Human
Machine Interface (HMI) software
makes it easy to configure, monitor
and customize applications.
Applications
PID with Programmable Logic
The PPC-2000 controls up to 48
PID loops and supports additional
analog inputs for logic programming
or monitoring. It accepts multiple
sensor inputs including thermocouples, RTDs, linear dc voltage or
current inputs and counters. The
base system has 46 digital I/O for
temperature control or programmable logic. Plug-in I/O modules
expand the capacity of the base
system. Options include modules for
pulse inputs, current and voltage
analog outputs, digital inputs for ac
and dc signals and relay outputs.
PID with
Programmable Logic
Controllers
PPC-2000 SERIES
PPC-2000 Single Controller System
Analog Input
ANAWIN HMI Software
LOGICPRO Software
Encoder In
Analog Out
Processor
Power Supply
Encoder Input
Terminal Block
Operator
Interface
Panel
Digital I/O Terminal Block
Analog Input Terminal Block
PPC-2000 System
Specifications
General
CPU Specifications
• Control loops: 48 max.
• System power: 12-28VÎ(dc)
• Maximum number of modules per
system: 10
• PID tuning: auto-tune or manual
• Storage temperature: -20°C to
70°C (-4°F to 158°F)
• Operating temperature: 0°C to
60°C (32°F to 140°F)
• Protocol: Modbus™ RTU
• Humidity: 10 to 95 percent,
non-condensing
• Programmable logic: Ladder,
SFC, FBD
• Mounting: DIN-rail or panel mount
• HMI: ANAWIN3,
Windows®95/98/NT/2000/XP
• Module dimensions: 203.2 mm
(8.0 in.) H x 82.6 mm
(3.25 in.) W x 133.4 mm (5.25 in.) D
(add 24.38 mm (0.96 in.) width for
each additional module)
152
• Communications: 2 serial ports,
EIA-232/EIA-485
Process Control Specifications
• Control modes: P, PI, PID or on-off
• Output types: time proportioning,
distributed zero crossing or analog
• Alarms: high/low process,
deviation with configurable outputs
Safety and Agency Approvals
• UL® & C-UL® 3121-1 Listed,
File E212113
• CE Safety EN 61010-1
• CE EMC EN 61326, EN 55011
(PPC-2030 excepted)
• Outputs/loop: 2; heat, cool or
heat/cool
Windows® is a registered trademark of the
Microsoft Corporation.
W
A
T
L
O
W
PID with
Programmable Logic
Controllers
PPC-2000 SERIES
TB50-SCSI - Digital I/O
Terminal Board
Specifications
PPC-2010 - Processor Module
The PPC-TB50-1 connects to the
PPC-2010 or PPC-2040 through
a SCSI cable. The terminal board is
used to interface field wiring to the
PPC-2010 or PPC-2040.
• Maximum number of modules
per system: 4
The PPC-2010
executes PID
process control
and programmable logic
control. This
unit contains
the CPU,
memory,
communications and
digital I/O.
PPC-2010
PROCESSOR
STATUS
ERROR
1
2
Specifications
• Dimensions:
104 mm (4.1 in.) H x 102 mm
(4.0 in.) W x 40.6 mm (1.6 in.) D
• Number terminal points: 50
• Mounting: DIN-rail or panel mount
• Discrete terminal type: Captive
screw cage clamp
PXX-XXXXX
General
Analog input modules
accept a wide variety of
signals. A single module
can easily be configured
for any combination of
thermocouple, RTD,
linear voltage and linear
current signals. Analog
input modules are
available with high
isolation and standard
isolation.
• Memory: 512kB flash, 128kB
RAM (battery backed)
Digital Inputs and Outputs
• Number of digital I/O: 46
(24 input or output, 22 output only)
• 2 system outputs: System safe,
global alarm
• Input limiting and protection:
40VÎ(dc)
• Input logic levels: <0.6VÎ(dc) =
Low; >3.8VÎ(dc) = High
• 1 counter input up to 10kHz (16 bit)
• Output current capacity: 100mA
continuous sink to power common
• Maximum voltage on outputs:
24VÎ(dc)
Communication Ports
• Ports 1& 2: EIA/TIA-232 3-wire or
EIA/TIA-485 5-wire, isolated
• Baud rate: 19,200 or 9600
Total
Range
Accuracy
0 to 1820°C
±3.3°C
(32 to 3308°F) (±5.9°F)
C:
0 to 2316°C
±1.6°C
(32 to 4200°F) (±2.8°F)
D:
0 to 2316°C
±1.5°C
(32 to 4200°F) (±2.7°F)
E:
-270 to 661°C
±1.0°C
(-454 to 1221°F) (±1.8°F)
F*:
0 to 1232°C
±2.3°C
(32 to 2250°F) (±4.1°F)
G:
0 to 2316°C
±1.5°C
(32 to 4200°F) (±2.7°F)
J:
-210 to 870°C
±1.2°C
(-346 to 1598°F) (±2.1°F)
K:
-270 to 1232°C
±2.2°C
(-454 to 2249°F) (±3.9°F)
N:
-270 to 1300°C
±1.5°C
(-454 to 2372°F) (±2.7°F)
R:
-50 to 1768°C
±2.6°C
(-58 to 3215°F) (±4.6°F)
S:
-50 to 1768°C
±3.1°C
(-58 to 3215°F) (±5.6°F)
T:
-270 to 400°C
±1.2°C
(-454 to 752°F) (±2.1°F)
RTD: -240 to 272°C
±0.4°C
(-400 to 521°F) (±0.8°F)
RTD High:-250 to 850°C
±2.3°C
(-418 to 1562°F) (±4.2°F)
Type
B:
*Also known as Platinel® II
• Differential inputs:
PPC-2021, PPC-2024, PPC-2025
• Single-ended inputs: PPC-2022
• Input types supported:
thermocouples, 100Ω Platinum
RTD, linear voltage, linear current
• Isolation from input to bus:
500VÎ(dc) continuous
• Isolation from input to input
(PPC-2021): ±60VÅ(ac)
Platinel® is a registered trademark of Englehard
Industries.
• Isolation from input to input
(PPC-2024, 2025): 240VÅ(ac)
153
Multi-Loop
PPC-202X - Analog Input Module
Input
Thermocouple and RTD Ranges
PID with Programmable Logic
Specifications
General
PID with
Programmable Logic
Controllers
PPC-2000 SERIES
PPC-202X Analog Input Module Cont.
• Isolation between input and frame
ground: 120VÅ(ac)
• DC voltage input range: ranges
selectable 0-50mV, 0-100mV,
0-500mV, 0-1V, 0-5V or 0-10V
• DC mA input range: ranges
selectable 0-20mA or 4-20mA
• T/C open detect: 2.5kΩ or more
(upscale)
• Resolution: 0.003 percent greater
than 15 bits
• Accuracy (voltage at 25°C (75°F)):
0.05 percent, 0.1 percent
(PPC-2022)
Sensor Keys
Output
The PPC-AITB-1 sensor inputs can be
individually configured with sensor
keys to accept thermocouples, RTDs,
linear voltage and current. Sensor
keys used with PPC-2022 configure 2
input channels.
• Analog outputs: 4 individually
isolated analog outputs
PPC-2030 - Encoder Input Analog
Output Module
The PPC-2030 module
accepts input signals
from high speed pulse
output devices such as
encoders and generates
analog output signals
to control variable
frequency drives, SCRs
and other devices.
• Accuracy (current at 25°C (75°F)):
0.1 percent, 0.75 percent
(PPC-2022)
PPC-2021, PPC-2025: 380ms,
16 channels (2.6Hz)
PPC-2022: 666ms, 32 channels
(1.5Hz)
PPC-AITB-1 - Analog Input
Terminal Board
Sensor wires are terminated on a
terminal board. A cable connects the
analog input module to the terminal
board.
Specifications
General
• Dimensions: 129.5 mm (5.1 in.) H
x 106.7 mm (4.2 in.) W x 58.4 mm
(2.3 in.) D
• Mounting: DIN-rail or panel
mount
• Discrete terminal type: captive
screw cage clamp
154
• Resolution: 12 bits
• Range (voltage mode): 0 to +10V
@ 10mA max
• Accuracy (voltage mode):
0.3 percent of reading ±0.5
percent of range at 25°C (75°F)
• Range (current mode): 0 to 20mA
with 8V minimum compliance
(400Ω load)
• Accuracy (current mode):
1.5 percent of reading ±0.2
percent of range at 25°C (75°F)
• Output update time: 0.1 sec
PPC-EITB-1 - Encoder Input
Terminal Board
Pulse signal wires are terminated on
a terminal board. A cable connects
the module to the terminal board.
• Temperature coefficient:
<50ppm/°C, 0.005 percent/°C
• Input sample and PID update rate
PPC-2024: 220ms, 8 channels
(4.5Hz)
• Isolation: 120VÅ(ac) to power
common or ground
Specifications
Specifications
General
• Maximum number of modules per
system: 4
Input System
• Pulse inputs: 4 (high speed
counter or encoder)
• Maximum input frequency: 10kHz
(single-phase), 32 kHz (quadrature)
• Count range: 16 bits
• Sample rate: 250ms to sample all
4 inputs (4Hz)
• Dimensions: 101.6 mm (4.0 in.) H
x 51 mm (2 in.) W x 38.1 mm
(1.5 in.) D
• Mounting: DIN-rail or panel mount
• Discrete terminals: captive screw
PPC-2040 - Digital I/O Module
The PPC-2040
accepts input signals
from on-off sensors
and high speed pulse
output devices. It also
drives actuators,
relays, etc. Each
output is user
configurable for
control, alarms or
logic. Each I/O is user
selectable as input or
output. Field wiring is
terminated on the
TB50-SCSI terminal
board.
W
A
T
L
O
W
PID with
Programmable Logic
Controllers
PPC-2000 SERIES
PPC-205X - Analog Output Module
PPC-206X - Digital Output Module
The PPC-205X module
generates analog output
signals to control power
controllers, variable
frequency drives and
other devices. The
analog output module is
available with 4 or 8
outputs.
The PPC-206X relay
output drives actuators,
pilot lights and other
devices. Each output is
user configurable for
alarms or logic. The
digital output module is
available with 8 or 16
relays.
Specifications
Specifications
General
General
• Count range: 16 bits
• Maximum number of modules
per system: 4
• Output status LEDs
Digital Input
Output
• Number: 32
• Number: 4 (isolated) or 8 (pair
isolated)
Output
• Current or voltage selectable
• Contact voltage rating:
240VÅ(ac), 30VÎ(dc)
PPC-2040 Digital I/O Module Cont.
Specifications
General
• Each point selectable as input
or output
• 2 points selectable as input,
output or counter/frequency
• Maximum number of modules
per system: 6
Counter/Frequency
• Number: 2
• Maximum frequency: 10kHz
(single-phase)
32kHz (quadrature)
• Sample rate: 250 ms (4Hz)
• Isolation from power common and
earth ground: 120VÅ(ac)
Digital Output
• Isolation from output to output
(PPC-2051): 120VÅ(ac)
• Number: 32
• Maximum voltage: 24VÎ(dc)
• Maximum current: 150mA sink to
common
• Isolation between output pairs
(PPC-2050): 120VÅ(ac)
• Relay type: Form A (SPST, NO on
fault or inactive)
• Isolation: 240VÅ(ac) to power
common or ground
• Voltage range: 0-10VÎ(dc) @
10mA maximum
• Maximum load current: 2A per
relay (PPC-2062), 1A per relay,
5A per common (PPC-2061)
• Current range: 0-20mA with 8V
maximum compliance (400Ω load)
• Commons: 8 (PPC-2062), 2
(PPC-2061)
• Accuracy: ±0.5 percent voltage,
± 0.8 percent current of range at
25°C (75°F)
• Output update time: 0.1 second
• Resolution: 12 bit
155
Multi-Loop
• Logic levels: <0.6VÎ(dc) = Low;
>3.8VÎ(dc) = High
• Number: 8 or 16
PID with Programmable Logic
• Voltage limiting and protection:
40VÎ(dc)
• Maximum number of modules per
system: 6
PID with
Programmable Logic
Controllers
PPC-2000 SERIES
PPC-207X - Digital Input Module
The PPC-207X accepts
input signals from on-off
sensors. The digital input
module is available with
8 or 16 inputs.
F.O.B.: Winona, Minnesota
PPC-IPS-2 - Power Supply
• Mounting: DIN-rail or panel mount
The PPC-IPS-2 supplies power to a
PPC-2000 system which requires a
12 to 28VÎ(dc) power source. The
power supply also provides 5VÎ(dc)
to drive digital outputs on the
processor module.
• Input voltage: 120/240VÅ(ac),
50/60Hz
Specifications
General
• Dimensions: 114.3 mm (4.5 in.) H
x 48.3 mm (1.9 in.) W x 215.9 mm
(8.5 in.) D
• Output voltage:
V1 +5VÎ(dc) at 6 amps
V2 +24VÎ(dc) at 4 amps
• Peak current output: 9A @
5VÎ(dc); 6A @ 24VÎ(dc)
• Agency approvals: CE, UL® and
C-UL® recognized
PPC-2010 - Processor Module
Ordering Information
To order, complete the model number on the right with the information below.
PPC-2010-
General
The PPC-2010 Processor Module includes ANAWIN3-CNF
software for PPC-2000 configuration only and a TB50-SCSI
digital I/O terminal board. A PPC-2000 system can have up
to 10 modules.
• Input status LEDs
Processor Module (with TB50)
• Maximum number of modules
per system: 4
Digital I/O Cable
(Cable from module to terminal board)
1 = 3 foot cable (CA-SCSI-3)
2 = 6 foot cable (CA-SCSI-6)
Specifications
Input
• Number: 8 or 16
• Input range: 70-120VÅ(ac)
± 10 percent (PPC-2070/1),
12-24Vı(ac/dc) ± 10 percent
(PPC-2072/3)
• Input response time: 32ms,
64 ms 12-20VÅ(ac)
• Logic levels: < 20VÅ(ac) = Low,
>70VÅ(ac) = High (PPC-2070/1);
< 3VÎ(dc) = Low, >10VÎ(dc)
= High (PPC-2072/3)
Communication Cable
(Cable between processor and host computer)
1 = 10 foot EIA/TIA-232 cable,
Handset plug to DB9F (CA-232-DB910)
2 = 25 foot EIA/TIA-232 cable,
Handset plug to DB9F (CA-232-DB925)
3 = 50 foot EIA/TIA-232 cable,
Handset plug to DB9F (CA-232-DB950)
4 = 10 foot EIA/TIA-232 cable,
Handset plug to DB25F (CA-232-DB2510)
5 = 25 foot EIA/TIA-232 cable,
Handset plug to DB25F (CA-232-DB2525)
6 = 50 foot EIA/TIA-232 cable,
Handset plug to DB25F (CA-232-DB2550)
A= EIA/TIA-485 terminal block with 2 foot cable
B= EIA/TIA-485 terminal block with 4 foot cable
Power Supply
(DC power for the PPC-2000)
0 = No power supply (customer provides own supply)
2 = PPC-IPS-2 supply; 24VÎ(dc) @ 4 A and 5VÎ(dc) @ 6A
156
W
A
T
L
O
PID with
Programmable Logic
Controllers
PPC-2000 SERIES
W
F.O.B.: Winona, Minnesota
PPC-202X - Analog Input Module
Ordering Information
To order, complete the model number on the right with the information below.
PPC-202
-
Order up to four modules per system to accommodate
sensor inputs. Do not exceed 128 inputs total. Only 48
inputs may be used for control. All modules accept T/Cs,
current and voltage inputs. Only differential input modules
accept RTDs. The high isolation modules provide
240VÅ(ac) protection between inputs and 120VÅ(ac)
protection between input and ground. Each module
includes an analog input terminal board with T/C/linear
voltage keys (PPC-AITB-1). For other sensor input keys,
see the special inputs section below.
Analog Input Modules (with AITB)
1 = 16 channel module, differential inputs (PPC-2021)
2 = 32 channel module, single-ended inputs (PPC-2022)
3 = 4 channel high isolation module,
differential inputs (PPC-2023)
4 = 8 channel high isolation module,
differential inputs (PPC-2024)
5 = 16 channel high isolation module,
differential inputs (PPC-2025)
Ordering Information
To order, complete the model number on the right with the information below.
PPC-SIK
Each analog input terminal board ships
configured with T/C sensor keys (this key
can be also used for linear voltage). For
other sensor types, choose from the
special inputs below.
Input Type
1 = Single ended current (two inputs per key)
2 = Differential current 0-20mA (one input per key)
3 = 3-wire RTD (one input per key)
Note:
Contact the factory for fixed-configuration, analog input terminal boards in quantity.
157
Multi-Loop
PPC-SIKX - PPC Special Input Keys
PID with Programmable Logic
Analog Input Cable
(Cable from module to terminal board)
1 = 3 foot cable (CA-SCSI-3)
2 = 6 foot cable (CA-SCSI-6)
PID with
Programmable Logic
Controllers
PPC-2000 SERIES
F.O.B.: Winona, Minnesota
PPC-2030 - Encoder Input/Analog Output Module
Ordering Information
To order, complete the model number on the right with the information below.
PPC-2030Order up to four modules per system. The PPC-2030
includes four counter or encoder inputs and four analog outputs.
Optional encoder input terminal boards with 10 foot or 25 foot
cables are available to connect up to two counter or encoder
inputs each to the PPC-2030. To connect directly to an encoder
without a terminal board, a cable kit is available. The kit includes
connector parts only, the customer provides the cable.
Encoder Input/Analog Output Module
Encoder Inputs 1 and 2
1 = Encoder input terminal board with 10 foot cable (PPC-EITB-1-10)
2 = Encoder input terminal board with 25 foot cable (PPC-EITB-1-25)
3 = Encoder input connector kit (customer makes cable)
Encoder Inputs 3 and 4
1 = Encoder input terminal board with 10 foot cable (PPC-EITB-1-10)
2 = Encoder input terminal board with 25 foot cable (PPC-EITB-1-25)
3 = Encoder input connector kit (customer makes cable)
PPC-2040 - Digital I/O Module
Ordering Information
To order, complete the model number on the right with the information below.
PPC-2040Order up to six modules per system. A separate terminal
board is included to interface with devices.
Digital I/O Cable (Cable from module to terminal board)
1 = 3 foot cable (CA-SCSI-3)
2 = 6 foot cable (CA-SCSI-6)
PPC-205X - Analog Output Module
Ordering Information
To order, complete the model number on the right with the information below.
PPC-205
Order up to four modules per system.
The terminal block is built into the module.
Quantity of Outputs
0 = 8 analog outputs
1 = 4 analog outputs
PPC-206X - Digital Output Module
Ordering Information
To order, complete the model number on the right with the information below.
PPC-206
Order up to six modules per system.
The terminal block is built into the module.
Quantity of Outputs
1 = 16 relay outputs
2 = 8 relay outputs
PPC-207X - Digital Input Module
Ordering Information
To order, complete the model number on the right with the information below.
PPC-207
Order up to four modules per system.
The terminal block is built into the module.
Quantity and Type of Inputs
0 = 8 point 120VÅ(ac)
1 = 16 point 120VÅ(ac)
158
2 = 8 point 24Vı(ac/dc)
3 = 16 point 24Vı(ac/dc)
W
A
T
L
O
Multi-Loop
Controllers
W
F.O.B.: Winona, Minnesota
Accessories
DAC and SDAC Modules
The optional DAC and SDAC
modules are used to convert open
collector outputs to analog voltage
or current signals. SDAC modules
may only be used with Watlow
Anafaze CLS200, CPC400, D8,
MLS300 and PPC-2000 controllers.
DAC
The DAC (digital to analog converter)
converts a controller’s variable time
base (also known as distributed zero
crossing or DZC) output to an analog
process control signal. Each DAC
supports two independent analog
outputs. Output signals are available
in 4-20mA VÎ(dc), 0-5 VÎ(dc) and
0-10V Î(dc).
DAC Specifications
Storage Temperature
SDAC Specifications
Storage Temperature
• -20 to 60°C (-4 to 140°F)
Operating Temperature
• 0 to 50°C (32 to 122°F)
Humidity
• 10 to 95 percent non-condensing
Dimensions
Humidity
Power Requirements
• 10 to 95 percent non-condensing
• 4.75 to 5.25 VÎ(dc), 100 mA
Dimensions
Resolution
• Length 112 mm (4.4 in.), Width
91 mm (3.6 in.), Height 44 mm
(1.75 in.)
• 15 bits
Accuracy
Power Requirements
• 0.05 percent (voltage full scale);
0.5 percent (current full scale)
• 12 to 24 VÎ(dc),100 mA @ 15 VÎ(dc)
Agency Approvals
Accuracy
• UL® and C-UL® (UL® 916); CE
(EMC directive 89/336/EEC)
• ±6 percent of full scale
UL® and C-UL® are registered trademarks of
Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc.
Accessories
• 0 to 50°C (32 to 122°F)
• Length 137 mm (5.4 in.),
Width 91 mm (3.6 in.),
Height 44 mm (1.75 in.)
Operating Temperature
159
Multi-Loop
• -20 to 60°C (-4 to 140°F)
SDAC
The SDAC (serial digital to analog
converter) allows CLS200, CPC400,
D8, MLS300 and PPC-2000
controllers to output precise analog
voltage or current signals. The unit
is typically used for PV retransmit,
open-loop control, motor or belt
speed control or phase-angle fired
SCR power controller. The SERIAL
DAC is jumper-selectable for a 0 to
10 VÎ(dc) or 4 to 20 mA outputs.
Multiple SERIAL DAC modules can
be used with the same controller.
Multi-Loop
Controllers
Accessories
Ordering Information
To order, complete the code number to the right with the information below:
DACDAC Type
1 = Dual digital to analog converter module (converts two DZC control outputs
to two 0-5VÎ(dc) analog outputs). Separate power supply required
2 = Dual digital to analog converter module, (converts two DZC control
outputs to two 0 - 10VÎ(dc) analog outputs). Power supply is separate
3 = Dual digital to analog converter module, (converts two DZC control
outputs to two 4 - 20mAÎ(dc) analog outputs). Power supply is separate
4 = Serial digital to analog converter module (SDAC); provides one
high precision isolated voltage or current analog output (range is set
from the controller). Separate power supply required if more than
1 SDAC used
Additional Products
A = None
B = 120VÅ(ac) 60Hz wall mount power supply adapter
(15VÎ[dc] @ 800mA, powers up to 8 dual DAC modules)
C = 120/240VÅ(ac) 50/60Hz panel mount power supply adapter
(5VÎ[dc] @ 4A, 15VÎ[dc] @ 1.2A, powers up to 13 SDAC
modules or 12 dual DAC modules)
160
W
A
T
L
O
PEAN
URO
E
H
T
IVE
S WI
PLIE DIRECT ) and
M
O
C
EMC 6 (1997-98
Power Controllers
132
0178
EN 6
EN 5 Request…entative
n
es
DIN-A-MITE® Family
Co
Single Contactor
ac or dc,
Proportional
Voltage or Current
Burst Fired
to 100 Amps
DIN-A-MITE
Current
Monitor
Achieve Optimum Temperature
Control With Variable Time Base
Control
Variable time base control meets the
rapid switching demands of PID
temperature control to deliver more
accurate process control. It also
increases heater life by reducing
temperature over- and undershoot.
Low Electrical Noise
Burst firing switches ac current at
zero cross (zero potential) to
produce minimal RFI and EMI
electric noise (radio frequency
interference/electromagnetic
interference). This low electrical
noise quality helps prevent
Phase-Angle
Fired up to
80 Amps
Alarm
interference with sensor circuits and
particularly sensitive equipment in
your system.
Rugged, Back-to-Back SCR
Design Insures Long Term
Reliability
With solid state components, there's
no limit on the number of switching
cycles the DIN-A-MITE can perform.
The four DIN-A-MITE styles meet
most application requirements by
tolerating harsh industrial
environments, electrical spikes and
dissipating less power. When
properly applied, the DIN-A-MITE
will outlast all other types of nonelectronic power controllers.
DIN-A-MITE®
Agency Approvals
• UL®508 listed and C-UL®
• UL®50, UL®1604, and CE
o
Repr
lable
Avai r Watlow
u
o
Y
nsult
UL® and C-UL® are registered trademarks of
the Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc.
161
Power Controllers
Made in the United States of
America, Watlow's DIN-A-MITE®
family of solid state power controllers
provides SCR control, heatsink,
wiring and touch-safe exterior in
one package. By designing the
DIN-A-MITE® as a total power
controller unit, the need to prep
wires for terminals, find the right
heat sink and determine adequate
terminations is eliminated. It's a
complete package you can install
with Control Confidence®.
Performance Capabilities
Four DIN-A-MITE styles meet most
power controller needs with ratings
from 18 to 100 amps with voltages
from 120 to 600VÅ(ac).
Features and Benefits
DIN-rail or sub-panel mounting
• Simple, fast installation
No mercury
• Environmentally safe product
Compact size
• Reduced panel space; less cost
Touch-safe exterior
Increased safety for installer/user
Easy Installation
Installation is simple and fast; saving
time and money. All you have to do
is strip wires and make connections.
• Sub-panel or DIN-rail mounting
• No drilling and tapping necessary
• Same footprint as comparably
rated MDRs
W
Power Controllers
DIN-A-MITE Family
Reduce Wear On Thermal System
With optional variable time base
switching, the DIN-A-MITE
automatically adjusts output cycle
time to meet system demands.
The benefits of this option are:
• Heater output equal to load
demand
• Minimized temperature over- and
undershoot
Terminal System Helps Prevent
Wiring Failures
A proven high-current copper
terminal design ensures optimum
electrical connection to reduce heat
build-up. This helps avoid
connection failures and ensures
overall wiring reliability. To further
reduce “hot spots,” we've eliminated
all unnecessary wires and fasteners
which could possibly loosen, heat up
and break down.
Compact Solid State Power
Controller Delivers Big
Performance in a Small Package
Watlow's DIN-A-MITE Style A, B, C
and D power controllers provide a
low-cost, highly compact and
versatile solid state power control.
What's more, no need to worry about
mercury; all DIN-A-MITEs are
mercury free and fit the same
footprint as a comparably rated
MDR. Each feature sub-panel
mounting, while Styles A, B and C
also have DIN-rail mounting
capability.
Style A Capabilities
Style A capabilities include singlephase burst fire switching up to 25
amps at 600VÅ(ac) (see rating curve).
Variable time base, 4-20mAÎ(dc)
process control or VÅ(ac)/ VÎ(dc)
input contactor versions are
available. All configurations are code
number dependent and factory
selectable, 50/60Hz independent.
162
Style B Capabilities
Style B capabilities include 1-phase
and 3-phase burst fire up to 40 and
33 amps, respectively, at 600VÅ(ac)
(see rating curve).
Variable time base, 4-20mAÎ(dc)
process control or VÅ(ac)/VÎ(dc)
input contactor versions are
available. All configurations are code
number dependent and factory
selectable, 50/60Hz independent.
Style C Capabilities
Style C capabilities include 1-phase
and 3-phase, 2-leg, and 3-phase,
3-leg burst fire, as well as 1-phase,
phase-angle fire. Burst fire operation
from 120 to 600VÅ(ac), phase angle
operation from 120 to 600VÅ(ac).
Current switching capabilities range
from 30 to 80 amps depending on
the model ordered (see output rating
curve).
Input options include variable time
base, 4-20mAÎ(dc) process control,
linear voltage control, manual control
or VÅ(ac)/VÎ(dc) contactor input.
All configurations are code number
dependent and factory selectable.
All models are 50/60Hz independent.
Style D Capabilities
Style D capabilities include 1-phase
switching up to 100 amps at
600VÅ(ac) and 30°C (86°F) (see
rating curve). Limited 3-phase
operation is possible by ganging two
and/or three Style D DIN-A-MITE
contactor inputs together.
Style D features on-board
semiconductor fuses (accessible
from the front). Application is further
enhanced with optional current
transformer option for external load
current monitoring and “shorted SCR
detector” on some models.
Variable time base, 4-20mAÎ(dc)
process control or VÅ(ac)/ VÎ(dc)
input contactor options are available.
All configurations are code number
dependent and factory selectable,
50/60Hz independent.
The standard sub-panel mounting
footprint is equal to that of an industry
standard mercury displacement relay.
DIN-A-MITE Style A, B, C and D
Features
• Faster switching with solid state
components. Better control saves
energy and extends heater life.
• Back-to-back SCR design for
increased durability.
• Three-year warranty assures
Control Confidence®.
Style B and C Features
• 1- and 3-phase power permits
use in a variety of applications.
• Shorted output detector
(optional) notifies a shorted SCR
condition.
Style C Features
• Open heater detector (optional)
notifies when a partial or totally
open heater occurs.
Style D Features
• On-board semiconductor fusing
provides quick access with no
extra mounting necessary.
• Optional load current monitor
detects changes in load current.
Applications
• Petroleum/chemical
• Ovens/furnaces
• Wave solder and reflow
• Packaging
• Foodservice equipment
• Semiconductor processing
Agency Approvals
• UL® 508 Listed, File #E73741
• C-UL® approved
• CE approved with proper line filter
• DIN-A-MITE Style C thru-wall
mount is also UL®50 and UL®1604
approved.
• CE and EN 61326 Industrial
Immunity Class A emissions with
filter. EN 50178 safety directive
W
A
T
L
O
W
Power Controllers
DIN-A-MITE Family
DIN-A-MITE
Style A
DIN-A-MITE
Style B
Up to 25 amps
Up to 40 amps
Up to 80 amps
Up to 100 amps
@ 600VÅ(ac)
@ 600VÅ(ac)
@ 600VÅ(ac)
@ 600VÅ(ac)
3-Phase, 2-leg①
No
Up to 33 amps
Up to 80 amps
Gang 2 units
@ 600VÅ(ac)
@ 600VÅ(ac)
3-Phase, 3-leg①
No
Up to 22 amps
Up to 70 amps
@ 600VÅ(ac)
@ 600VÅ(ac)
24, 120 & 240VÅ(ac)
4.5-32VÎ(dc)
24, 120 & 240VÅ(ac)
4.5-32VÎ(dc)
24, 120 & 240VÅ(ac)
4.5-32VÎ(dc)
24, 120 & 240VÅ(ac)
4.5-32VÎ(dc)
Multizone VÅ(ac) & VÎ(dc) Input
No
Yes
Yes
No
4-20mAÎ(dc) Input - Variable
Time Base Output
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Phase-Angle Fire Output➁
No
No
Manual Control Via Potentiometer Input, or
0-5, 1-5 or 0-10VÎ(dc) Linear Voltage Input
No
No
Yes
No
Shorted SCR Alarm
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Open Heater Alarm
No
No
1-Phase①
VÅ(ac) & VÎ(dc) - Burst Fire
Contactor Input
No
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
Din-Rail Mount
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Sub-Panel Mount
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Cabinet Thru-Wall Heatsink Mount
UL® 50 and UL® 1604
No
No
Yes
No
Electrically Touch-Safe Package
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Back-to-Back SCR Design
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
UL® 508 Listed/C-UL®/CE w/filter
Yes
Yes
Yes➁
Yes
(95 X 45 X 98 mm)
3.7 H X 1.8 W X 3.9 in. D
(95 X 80 X 124 mm)
3.7 H X 3.1 W X 4.9 in. D
(150 X 80 X 146 mm)
6.0 H X 3.1 W➂ X 5.7 in. D
(185 X 65 X 240 mm)
7.25 H X 2.5 W X 9.4 in.D
0.32 (0.71)
0.68 (1.5)
1.18 (2.6)
2.95 (6.5)
N/A
N/A
1.45 (3.2)
N/A
DIN-A-MITE®
No
No
Refer to curves on page 164 for your specific application ratings.
Phase angle fire is not CE approved.
Will fit within the width dimension of most comparable MDRs.
163
Power Controllers
No
No
Controller Weight w/fan: kg (lbs)
c
Yes
With “S” input only
Gang 3 units
Load Current Monitor CT
Controller Weight: kg (lbs)
b
Yes
1-phase only
DIN-A-MITE
Style D
On Board Semiconductor Fusing
Dimensions
a
DIN-A-MITE
Style C
Power Controllers
DIN-A-MITE Family
Output Current Rating Curves
Style A
DIN-A-MITE Style A Ratings at 100% On
25
20
15
10
70
65
60
se
ha
eg
45
,2l
50
le p
55
g
Sin
Maximum Internal Enclosure Ambient Temperature (°C)
75
leg
25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85
Natural Convection
80
se, 3
0
85
3-pha
5
DIN-A-MITE Style B Ratings at 100% On
90
ase
3-ph
Current (Amps) into
a Resistive Load
30
Maximum Internal Enclosure Ambient Temperature (°C)
Style B
40
35
30
25
0
5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60
Current (Amps) into a Resistive Load
DIN-A-MITE Style C Ratings at 100% On
90
85
Natural Convection
80
75
as
ph
e
g
le
g
30
25
0
5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90
Current (Amps) into a Resistive Load
80
Recommended maximum
enclosure temperature is 80˚ C (176˚ F)
75
70
65
l
ng
ph
g
le
eg
3l
40
2
e,
45
e,
as
s
ha
50
se
ha
ep
3-
3- p
55
Si
Thru-Wall Heatsink
60
35
30
25
0
5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80
Current (Amps) into a Resistive Load
Maximum Internal Enclosure Ambient Temperature ( ˚C )
Style D
DIN-A-MITE Style C Ratings at 100% On
Ambient Air Around Heatsink Fins ( ˚C)
gle
2
35
Current (Amps) into a Resistive Load
Style C—Thru-Wall
164
40
le
5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80
3
0
e,
25
45
e,
30
50
as
e
35
55
as
as
g
2 le
leg
40
Fan-Cooled
60
ph
ph
se,
e, 3
45
65
ph
le
ng
50
ha
has
3-p
55
70
3-
Si
60
75
3-
65
DIN-A-MITE Style C Ratings at 100% On
80
Sin
70
Maximum Internal Enclosure Ambient Temperature (°C)
Style C - Fan Cooled
3-p
Maximum Internal Enclosure Ambient Temperature (°C)
Style C
DIN-A-MITE Style D Natural Convection Ratings at 100% On
85
80
75
70
65
60
55
50
45
40
35
30
25
0
5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105
Current (Amps) Into a Resistive Load
W
A
T
L
O
W
Power Controllers
DIN-A-MITE Family
Specifications Common To Styles
A, B, C and D
Control Mode-Burst Fire
• VÅ(ac) input contactor
• VÎ(dc) input contactor
• 4-20mAÎ(dc) variable time base
control
Operator Interface
• Command signal input
• Input signal indication LED
Input
• VÅ(ac): 24, 120, 240 nominal 25mA maximum per controlled leg
Specifications Unique To Each
Style
Multizone Input— Styles B & C
• VÅ(ac) input contactor
• VÎ(dc) input contactor
• Available 2 and 3 leg only
Amperage—Style A
• 1-phase, 24 amp output maximum
at 30°C (86°F) into a resistive loadc
• Maximum surge current for
16.6mSec. 380 amps peak
• Maximum I2t for fusing 4,000
A2 Sec.
a
b
c
Not available on Style D
Style C phase angle fire is not CE approved
See output current rating curves, page 164.
Output Voltage
• 120-240VÅ(ac) units: 48VÅ(ac)
minimum to 265VÅ(ac) maximum
• 277-600VÅ(ac) units: 85VÅ(ac)
minimum to 660VÅ(ac) maximum
• Off state leakage 1mAÎ(dc) at
25°C (77°F) maximum
Mounting
Options include DIN-raila or
standard sub-panel mounting
• The DIN-rail specification is: DIN
EN 50022, 35 mm x 7.5 mm
Style C—Phase Angle Firing2
• 1-phase operation
• Line voltage compensation
• Soft start (4 seconds) on power up
• Missing half cycle detection
(engages ESD and restarts soft)
• Optional current limit feature
• Linear voltage/current or manual
control input. 5kΩ input
impedance for voltage and
250 ohms for 4-20mA
• 120, 208, 240, 277, 400, 480, and
600VÅ(ac) operation. Model
number dependent
Shorted Output Alarm Option—
Styles B, C & D
• Triac output
• 24 to 240VÅ(ac), 300mA @ 25°C,
125mA @ 80°C (176°F)
• Energizes on alarm
• Holding current 200µA minimum
• Latching current 5mA typical
Style C—Single Cycle Variable
Time Base
• 1-phase and 3-phase operation
• Linearized input to output
• Linear voltage/current or manual
control input. 5kΩ input
impedance for voltage and 250
ohms for 4-20mA
• 120, 208, 240, 277, 400, 480,
and 600VÅ(ac) operation. Model
number dependent
Amperage—Style D
• 1-phase, 100 amp output
maximum at 30°C (86°F)c
• Maximum surge current for
16.6mSec. 1800 amps peak
• Maximum I2t for fusing 20,000
A2 Sec.
Storage Temperature
• -40 to 85°C (-40 to 185°F)
Terminals—Styles A & B
• Compression - will accept #8-18
AWG wire (8.4 mm2 - 0.82 mm2)
Terminals—Style C
• Compression - will accept #4-14
AWG wire (21.2 mm2 - 2.1 mm2)
Terminals—Style D
• Compression - will accept #2-6
AWG wire (33.6 mm2 - 13.3 mm2)
Mounting—Style D
• Standard sub-panel mounting; fits
the same mounting pattern as a
100 amp 1-phase MDR
• Mounting holes offer clearance for
#10 screw
• On-board semiconductor fusing,
Bussmann P/N 170N3437
DIN-A-MITE®
Amperage—Style C
• Natural convection and fan
cooled, in 1-phase and 3-phase
models. See output rating curves
on page 164
• Maximum surge current for
16.6mSec. 1350 amps peak
• Maximum I2t for fusing 9100 A2 Sec.
Operating Environment
• Up to 80°C (176°F),c see output
rating curve for specific
application
Current Sensing—Style D
• On-board current transformer,
0.2VÅ(ac) output signal per amp
load current into 1000Ω load
165
Power Controllers
Amperage—Style B
• 1-phase and 3-phase models.
See output rating curves on
page 164
• Maximum surge current for
16.6mSec. 380 amps peak
• Maximum I2t for fusing 4,000
A2 Sec.
• VÎ(dc): 4.5 to 32VÎ(dc):
maximum current @ 4.5V is 6mA
per leg. Add 2mA per LED used
to the total current
• 4-20mAÎ(dc) loop powered:
375Ω input impedance
Power Controllers
F.O.B. Winona, Minnesota
Style A
Ordering Information
To order, complete the code number on the right with the information below.
DA10-____-0___
DIN-A-MITE
Style A = Solid state power controller
Phase
1
=
1-phase, 1 controlled leg
Cooling and Current Rating
0
=
Natural convection current rating 18A @ 50˚C (122˚F)
(See derating curve for current rating at other temperatures)
Line and Load Voltage
02 =
24 to 48VÅ(ac)
24 =
100 to 240VÅ(ac)
60 =
277 to 600VÅ(ac)
Input Type
C0 =
4.5 to 32VÎ(dc) contactor
F0 =
4 to 20mAÎ(dc) proportional
K1 =
22 to 26VÅ(ac) contactor
K2 =
100 to 120VÅ(ac) contactor
K3 =
200 to 240VÅ(ac) contactor
Manual Language
0
=
English
1
=
German
2
=
Spanish
3
=
French
Availability
All combinations available in three
working days or less.
Custom parts Designation
00 =
Standard parts
CE approved product. Must use
CE filter listed on page 190 for
conducted emission.
Recommended Semiconductor Fuses and Fuse Kits
See page 191 for listings and part numbers.
Style A Dimensions
Front
Side
Top
Clearance for Air Flow and Bending Radius
34 mm
(1.34 in.)
Allowance for
Fastener
Metric = M4
26 mm
(1.03 in.)
102 mm
(4.00 in.)
Grounding Ha
(#6)
98 mm
(3.87 in.)
40 mm
(1.56 in.)
49 mm
(1.92 in.)
11 mm
(0.44 in.)
Allowance for #8
Fastener
DIN-EN 50022 35 mm by 7.5 mm Rail
Clipping Distance 34.7 mm (1.37 in.) to
35.3 mm (1.39 in.)
166
71 mm 94 mm
(2.80 in.) (3.69 in.)
8
(3.
41 mm
(1.60 in.)
Rail Release Tab
(Pull Down)
Clearance for Air Flow and Bending Radius
Zero Electrical Clearance Required
50 mm
(1.97 in.)
102 mm
(4.00 in.)
W
A
T
L
O
W
Power Controllers
Style B
F.O.B.: Winona, Minnesota
Ordering Information
To order, complete the code number on the right with the information below.
DB__-____-____
DIN-A-MITE
Style B = Solid state power controller
Phase
1
=
2
=
3
=
8
=
9
=
1-phase, 1 controlled leg
3-phase, 2 controlled legs
3-phase, 3 controlled legs
2 independent zones (Input Type C or K)
3 independent zones (Input Type C or K)
Cooling and Current Rating Per Pole
0
=
Natural convection standard DIN-rail or panel mount heatsink
Line and Load Voltage
02 =
24 to 48VÅ(ac)
24 =
120 to 240VÅ(ac)
60 =
277 to 600VÅ(ac)
Availability
All combinations available in three
working days or less.
CE approved product. Must use
CE filter listed on page 190 for
conducted emission.
Input Control Signal
C0 =
4.5 to 32VÎ(dc) contactor
F0 =
4 to 20mAÎ(dc) proportional
K1 =
22 to 26VÅ(ac) contactor
K2 =
100 to 120VÅ(ac) contactor
K3 =
200 to 240VÅ(ac) contactor
Alarm
0
=
S
=
No alarm
Shorted SCR alarm (not available with options 8, and 9 above)
User Manual
0
=
English
1
=
German
2
=
Spanish
3
=
French
Custom Part Numbers
00 =
Standard part
XX =
Any letter or number, custom options, labeling, etc.
Recommended Semiconductor Fuses and Fuse Kits
See page 191 for listings and part numbers.
54 mm
(2.11 in.)
46 mm
(1.81 in.)
38 mm
(1.51 in.)
Allowance for #8 Fastener,
Metric = M4
Top
102 mm (4.00 in.) Clearance for Air Flow
and Wire Bending Radius
26 mm
(1.03 in.)
Grounding Screw (#6)
DIN-A-MITE®
Side
Front
102 mm
(4.00 in.)
124 mm
(4.88 in.)
40 mm
(1.56 in.)
94 mm
(3.69 in) 75 mm
(2.97 in.)
71 mm
(2.80 in.)
83 mm
(3.25 in.)
49 mm
(1.92 in.)
49 mm
(1.91 in.)
Allowance for #8 Fastener,
Metric = M4
Rail Release Tab
41 mm
(Pull Down)
(1.60 in.)
102 mm (4.00 in.) Clearance for Air Flow
and Wire Bending Radius
102 mm
(4.00 in.)
83 mm
(3.25 in.)
Zero Electrical Clearance Required
DIN-EN 50022 35 mm by 7.5 mm Rail
Clipping distance 34.7 mm (1.366 in.)
to 35.3 mm (1.390 in.)
167
Power Controllers
Style B Dimensions
Power Controllers
F.O.B. Winona, Minnesota
Ordering Information
Style C
To order, complete the code number on the right with the information below:
DC__-____-____
Style C = Zero cross solid state power controller in natural and
forced air cooled versions
Phase
1
= 1-phase, 1 controlled leg
2
= 3-phase, 2 controlled legs
3
= 3-phase, 3 controlled legs (use with four wire wye)
8
= 2 independent zones (Input Type C, K)
9
= 3 independent zones (Input Type C, K)
Cooling and Current rating Per Leg (see table on left)
0
= Natural convection standard Din-rail or panel heatsink
1
= Fan cooled 120VÅ(ac) standard Din-rail or panel heatsink
2
= Fan cooled 240VÅ(ac) standard Din-rail or panel heatsink
3
= Fan cooled 24VÎ(dc) standard Din-rail or panel heatsink
T
= Natural convection through wall or cabinet heatsink (NEMA 4X)
Line and Load Voltage
02
= 24 to 48VÅ(ac) (Control C, F, K)
24
= 100 to 240VÅ(ac) (Control C, F, K)
60
= 277 to 600VÅ(ac) (Control C, F, K)
Input Control Signal
Current Rating Table
Phase
Cooling
1
1
1
2, 8
2, 8
2, 8
3, 9
3, 9
3, 9
0
T
(1,2,3)
0
T
(1,2,3)
0
T
(1,2,3)
Current
at 50˚C
(122˚F)
55A
60A
75A
40A
45A
65A
30A
35A
55A
Availability
All combinations available in three
working days or less.
CE approved product. Must use
CE filter listed on page 190 for
conducted emission.
168
C0 =
F0
=
K1 =
K2 =
K3 =
Alarm
4.5 to 32VÎ(dc) contactor
4 to 20mAÎ(dc) proportional
22 to 26VÅ(ac) contactor
100 to 120VÅ(ac) contactor
200 to 240VÅ(ac) contactor
0
= No alarm
S
= Shorted SCR alarm (not available with options 8, and 9 above)
Language
0
= English
1
= German
2
= Spanish
3
= French
Custom Part Numbers
00
= Standard part
XX = Any letter or number, custom options, labeling, etc.
Recommended Semiconductor Fuses and Fuse Kits
See pages 191 for listings and part numbers.
Note: Allow one fuse and one holder per leg fused. Example, a 3-phase,
2-leg DIN-A-MITE requires two fuses and two holders.
W
A
T
L
O
W
Power Controllers
Style C
F.O.B.: Winona, Minnesota
Ordering Information
To order, complete the code number on the right with the information below:
Style C Enhancements
D C _ _- _ _ _ _ - _ _ _ _
Style C = Zero cross and phase-angle fired solid state power
controller in natural and forced air cooled versions.
Phase
1
= 1-phase, 1 controlled leg
2
= 3-phase, 2 controlled legs
3
= 3-phase, 3 controlled legs (use with four wire wye)
Cooling and Current Rating Per Leg (see table on left)
0
= Natural convection standard Din-rail or panel heatsink
1
= Fan cooled 120VÅ(ac) standard Din-rail or panel heatsink
2
= Fan cooled 240VÅ(ac) standard Din-rail or panel heatsink
3
= Fan cooled 24VÎ(dc) standard Din-rail or panel heatsink
T
= Natural convection through wall or cabinet heatsink (NEMA 4X)
Line and Load Voltage
12
= 100 to 120VÅ(ac) (Control L, P, S)
20
= 200 to 208VÅ(ac) (Control L, P, S)
24
= 230 to 240VÅ(ac) (Control L, P, S)
27
= 277VÅ(ac) (Control L, P, S)
40
= 400VÅ(ac) (Control L, P, S)
48
= 480VÅ(ac) (Control L, P, S)
60
= 600VÅ(ac) (Control L, P, S)
Input Control Signal
= Phase-angle with current limiting1 (DC1 only, Alarm 0 only, includes
one current transformer - Single-phase only)
P (0 to 5) = Phase-angle1 (DC1 only, Alarm 0 only - Single-phase only)
S (0 to 5) = Single cycle variable time base
(Select one of the following input options for L, P, S (0 to 5))
0 = 4 to 20mA
1 = 12 to 20mA (single cycle variable time base only - option ‘S’)
2 = 0 to 20mA
3 = 0 to 5VÎ(dc) proportional
4 = 1 to 5VÎ(dc) proportional
5 = 0 to 10VÎ(dc) proportional
Alarm
L (0 to 5)
Option
• Manual Control Kit for process
input cards (1kΩ potentiometer)
order #08-5362 separately.
Current Rating Table
Phase
55A
60A
75A
40A
45A
65A
30A
35A
55A
CE approved product. Must use
CE filter listed on page 190 for
conducted emission.
0
S
H
=
=
=
No alarm
Shorted SCR alarm (for zero cross models only)
Open-heater and shorted-SCR alarm (for input control signal options S only)
1-phase, 1 controlled leg
3-phase, 2 controlled legs
3-phase, 3 controlled legs
Language
0
= English
1
= German
2
= Spanish
3
= French
Custom Part Numbers
00
10
XX
1
=
=
=
DIN-A-MITE®
0
T
(1,2,3)
0
T
(1,2,3)
0
T
(1,2,3)
Current
at 50˚C
(122˚F)
Standard part
1-second soft start (Control option P, L)
Any letter or number, custom options, labeling, etc.
Phase angle models are not CE approved for conducted emissions.
169
Power Controllers
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
3
3
Cooling
Power Controllers
Style C
Style C Dimensions
Without Cooling Fan
Side
Top
Front
38 mm (1.51 in.)
46 mm (1.81 in.)
54 mm (2.11 in.)
Allowance for M4
(#8 Fastener)
1
2
102 mm (4.0 in.) clearance for air flow and wire bending radius
146 mm (5.74 in.)
102 mm (4.0 in.)
142 mm (5.59 in.)
44 mm
57 mm
(1.73 in.)
(2.26 in.)
150 mm
(5.89 in.) 127 mm
(5.00 in.)
79 mm
(3.10 in.)
3
131 mm
(5.17 in.)
138 mm
(5.45 in.)
87 mm
(3.42 in.)
DIN-EN 50022
35 by 7.5 mm rail
(clipping distance =
34.7 to 35.3 mm
[1.366 to 1.390 in.])
4
5
146 mm
(5.74 in.)
Ground
Wire
Entry
Rail Release Tab
(pull down)
102 mm (4.0 in.) minimum
102 mm (4.0 in.) clearance for air flow and wire bending radius
6
83 mm
(3.25 in.)
Front panel is touch-safe, no clearance is required
48 mm
(1.89 in.)
Allowance for M4
(#8 Fastener)
With Cooling Fan
102 mm (4.0 in.) clearance for air flow and wire bending radius
146 mm (5.74 in.)
102 mm (4.0 in.)
142 mm (5.59 in.)
44 mm
57 mm
(1.73 in.)
(2.26 in.)
150 mm
(5.89 in.)
131 mm
(5.17 in.)
79 mm
(3.10 in.)
127 mm 182 mm
(5.00 in.) (7.16 in.)
Rail Release Tab
(pull down)
Front panel is touch-safe,
no clearance is required.
102 mm (4.0 in.) minimum
102 mm (4.0 in.) clearance for air flow and wire bending radius
Thru-Wall DIN-A-MITE Style Ca
Front
Top
102 mm (4.0 in.) minimum
clearance for air flow
(top and bottom)
Panel
Opening
Outline
M5 (0.8 by 10 mm) (8)
M5 Internal Tooth Lock Washer (8)
included
122 mm (4.81 in.)
1
2
Ground lug
(2-8 gauge)
3
178 mm (7.00 in.)
4
5
170
Drill 5.8 mm (0.228 in.) (8)
57 mm (2.25 in.)
outside
(any gauge)
Typical Panel
Opening
Heatsink Outline
9.5 mm (0.375 in.) Reference
10.8 mm (0.425 in.)
114 mm
(4.50 in.)
41.3 mm
(1.625 in.)
55 mm (2.17 in.)
inside
(12 gauge)
Sheet Metal (12 GA)
161.9 mm
(6.375 in.)
117.5 mm
(4.625 in.)
Front panel is touch-safe,
no clearance is required
148.6 mm
(5.850 in.)
6
10 mm (0.4 in.) minimum
clearance for air flow
(both sides)
a
Panel Cutout
With the potential for high thru-wall heatsink
temperatures, application may require a
touch-safe shield. See amperage curves on
page 164 for details.
8.6 mm (0.338 in.) Reference
7.0 mm (0.275 in.)
26.3 mm (1.034 in.)
78.8 mm
(3.103 in.)
98.1 mm
(3.862 in.)
105.1 mm
(4.137 in.)
W
A
T
L
O
W
Power Controllers
F.O.B.: Winona, Minnesota
Style D
Ordering Information
To order, complete the code number on the right with the information below:
DD10 -____-____
Style D = Solid state power controller
Phase
1
=
1-phase, 1 controlled leg
Cooling and Current Rating
0
=
Natural convection current rating 80A @ 50˚C (122˚F)
Line and Load Voltage
02 =
24 to 48VÅ(ac)
24 =
100 to 240VÅ(ac)
48 =
277 to 480VÅ(ac)
60 =
277 to 600VÅ(ac)
Input Control Signal
C0 =
4.5 to 32VÎ(dc) contactor
F0 =
4 to 20mAÎ(dc) proportional
K1 =
22 to 26VÅ(ac) contactor
K2 =
100 to 120VÅ(ac) contactor
K3 =
200 to 240VÅ(ac) contactor
Current Sensing or Alarm
Availability
All combinations available in three
working days or less.
0
=
No alarm
1
=
Load current transformer
S
=
Shorted SCR alarm
User Manual Language
CE approved product. Must use
CE filter listed on page 190 for
conducted emission.
0
=
English
1
=
German
2
=
Spanish
3
=
French
Custom Options
00 =
Standard parts
Recommended Semiconductor Fuses
Bussmann part number 170N3437 65 amp® 660VÅ(ac), Watlow part number 0808-0096-0000
requires two fuses per Style “D” DIN-A-MITE. These should be replaced in pairs.
Top
Side
67 mm
(2.63 in.)
185 mm
(7.28 in.)
61 mm
(2.38 in.)
13 mm (0.5 in.) Clearance
For Air Flow
13 mm
(0.50 in.)
67 mm
(2.63 in.)
(64 mm)
(250 in.)
203 mm (8.0 in.) Clearance For Air
Flow and Bending Radius
54 mm
(2.13 in.)
DIN-A-MITE®
Same mounting footprint as industry standard
mercury displacement relays.
203 mm
(8.0 in.)
Grounding Screw
9.5 mm (.375 in.) 406 mm (16 in.)
(239 mm)
(9.41 in.)
178 mm
(7.0 in.)
13 mm
(0.50 in.)
Allowance For #10 Fastener
Metric = M5
203 mm (8.0 in.) Clearance For Air
Flow and Bending Radius
203 mm
(8.0 in.)
(66 mm)
(2.58 in.)
171
Power Controllers
Style D Dimensions
Footprint
Power Controllers
System Diagram
Examples
1-Phase Output, Styles A, B and C
Semiconductor Fuses
2
1
1
3-Phase, 2-Leg Output, Styles B and C
240VÅ(ac)
and above
Semiconductor Fuses
120VÅ(ac)
and 277VÅ(ac)
L1
L1
L1
L2
L2
Neutral
L3
Limit Control
Contacts
(If Required)
3
1
2
Limit Control
Contacts
(If Required)
3
2
1 2
Input Signal
Input Signal
4
5
6
T3
4
5
6
T2
3-Phase, 3-Leg, 4-Wire Output, Styles B and C
3-Phase, 2-Leg Output, with Two Style D’s
Semiconductor Fuses
L1
L1
1
L2
L3
1
2
3
Limit Control
Contacts
(If Required)
VÅ(ac) or VÎ(dc)
Contactor Input Signal
only - not 4-20mA
DIN-A-MITE
D #1
1
2
2
N
1
L2
DIN-A-MITE
D #2
1
2
1 2
2
Input Signal
L3
4
172
5
6
T1
W
A
T
L
O
W
Power Controllers
SERIES CZR
The SERIES CZR solid state contactor
provides a low-cost, highly compact
and versatile solid state option for
controlling electric heat. With din-rail
and back panel mounting standard on
every controller, the CZR allows for
simple and quick installation.
The extensive capabilities of the
SERIES CZR include single-phase,
18 to 50 amp zero-cross and random
switching up to 600VÅ(ac) (see
output rating curve). The unique
integrated design removes the
guesswork associated with selecting
a proper heat sink and precise
terminations for the application.
SERIES CZR contactors are available
in Vı(ac/dc) input contactor versions.
All configurations are model number
dependent and factory selectable.
The SERIES CZR is reliably backed
by a two-year warranty from Watlow
Winona.
Performance Capabilities
• Output 18 to 50 amps
• Output voltage up to 660VÅ(ac)
Features and Benefits
DIN-rail or standard panel mount
• Versatile, quick and low-cost
installation
Compact size
• Reduces panel space; less cost
Mercury-free
• Environmentally safe
Faster switching with solid state
• Saves energy and extends
heater life
Agency Approvals
• UL® recognized, CSA certified,
VDE and CE
• Applications requiring agency
approval
• Rugged design
• 24 volt; 24VÅ(ac) min. to
280VÅ(ac) max.
Specifications
Control Mode
• Zero-cross or random fired
contactor output
Operator Interface
• Command signal input
• Input signal indication LED
Input Command Signal
• Input Type DC1
• Turn on voltage 4VÎ(dc) max.,
turn off voltage 1VÎ(dc) min.
• Input current: dc typically 10mA
@ 4VÎ(dc),13mA @ 32VÎ(dc)
• Input Type AC1
• 90 to 140Vrms, must turn on at
90VÅ(ac), must turn off at
10VÅ(ac)
• Input current: 15mA typical
@120VÅ(ac)
• Input Type AC2
• 18 to 36VÅ(ac) input, must turn
on at 18VÅ(ac), must turn off at
10VÅ(ac)
• 480 volt; 48VÅ(ac) min. to
530VÅ(ac) max.
• 600 volt; 48VÅ(ac) min. to
660VÅ(ac) max. (not available on
18 amp version)
• Off state leakage
1mA at 25°C (77°F) max. for
600VÅ(ac) models; 10mA at 25°C
(77°F) max. for 24 through
480VÅ(ac) models
• Holding current: 250mA max.
Output Amperage
• See output rating curve. Ratings
are into a resistive heater load
Output Amperage Rating
Model
18
24
34
Maximum Surge Current
16.6 mSec
625
250
625
Maximum I2t for fusing 1,620 260 1,620
42
50
Maximum Surge Current
16.6 mSec
1,000
1,000
Maximum I2t for fusing
4,150
6,000
Model
SERIES CZR
• Increase safety for installer and
operator
Output Voltage
• Input current: 10mA typical @
24VÅ(ac)
173
Power Controllers
Touch-safe terminals
Back-to-back SCR design
Power Controllers
F.O.B.: Winona, Minnesota
SERIES CZR
Mounting
Weight/Dimensions
Options include DIN-rail or standard
back panel mounting.
• 260 g (9.2 oz)
Specifications Cont.
• Class II construction
• UL® 508 recognition, File #E73741
and CSA File LR 700195
• 73/23/EEC CE Low Voltage
Directive
• VDE 0805, registration number
126921
• License number 136037 for
18 amp models
• The DIN-rail specification:
DIN EN 50022, 35 mm x 7.5 mm
(1.37 in. x 0.30 in.)
• Minimum clipping distance:
34.8 mm (1.37 in.)
• Mount cooling fins vertical
Output Rating Curves
Maximum Ambient Temperature °F
• For 18 amp models:
• Maximum wire size 3.0 mm
(10 AWG), torque to 0.6 Nm
(5.3 in. lbs)
50
Operating Environment
86
104 122 140 158 176
50
34 A
40
24 A
30
18 A
20
10
0
75
• Insulation only tested to 3,000
meters
• Units are suitable for “pollution
degree 2”
• Cycle time should be less than
three seconds
86
104 122 140 158 176
50 A
60
45
42 A
30
15
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
Maximum Ambient Temperature °C
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
Maximum Ambient Temperature °C
Ordering Information
To order, complete the code number to the right with the information below:
• Up to 80°C (176°F). See output
rating curves for your application.
• 0 to 90 percent RH, noncondensing
68
90
50
• For 24 to 50 amp models:
• Maximum wire size 16.0 mm
(6 AWG stranded) torque to
1.5-1.7 Nm (13-15 in. lbs)
68
Maximum Ambient Temperature °F
60
Current (Amps)
• Compression type
• 18 amp models: 100 mm (3.95 in.)
high x 22.6 mm (0.89 in.) wide x
99 mm (3.9 in.) deep
• Maximum clipping distance:
35.3 mm (1.39 in.)
• License number 130515 for
24 to 50 amp models
Output Terminals
• 24 to 50 amp models: 100 mm
(3.95 in.) high x 45 mm (1.75 in.)
wide x 109 mm (4.3 in.) deep
Current (Amps)
Agency Approvals
C___-A__V-___0
Control Mode
R
=
Random
Z
=
Zero-cross
Output Amperage
18 =
18 amp (not available with 600V output)
24 =
24 amp
34 =
34 amp
42 =
42 amp
50 =
50 amp
Output Voltage
24 =
24 to 280VÅ(ac)
48 =
48 to 530VÅ(ac)
60 =
60 to 660VÅ(ac) (not available with 18A model)
Input Type (Contactor)
DC1 =
AC1 =
AC2 =
4 to 32VÎ(dc)
90 to 140VÅ(ac)
18 to 36VÅ(ac)
Note: Do not use the AC1 and AC2 input type models with temperature control outputs that
include an AC snubber filter. This could cause the CZR to stay full on.
174
W
A
T
L
O
W
Power Controllers
POWER SERIES
Watlow has manufactured solid state
power controllers for over 30 years.
Watlow’s POWER SERIES represents
the latest in SCR power controller
technology. This microprocessorbased product offers features and
application flexibility unmatched by
any other SCR power controller on
the market today.
Capabilities of Watlow’s POWER
SERIES controllers include singlephase and three-phase models from
65 to 250 amps. Field configurable
phase-angle or zero cross firing
improves application flexibility on site
where you need it. The 50/60Hz
independent operation allows
utilization almost everywhere in the
world without special calibration
considerations. Serial communication
utilizing Modbus™ protocol provides
remote control setup and monitoring
of load status from a nearby
computer station or control room.
On-board semiconductor fusing
improves reliability by protecting the
SCRs from heater short circuits. Plus,
on-board heater bakeout and control
diagnostics can help eliminate initial
start up problems. All these benefits
are in a touch-safe package that can
be quickly and easily mounted in
your control cabinet.
• 65 to 250 amps
• Up to 660VÅ(ac)
Power Bases
• Extremely versatile, field
configurable
• Single-phase, (2 SCRs)
Snap-fit on a pre-mounted plate
• Easy installation
Models 65 through 250 amp
ratings
• Handles a wide range of loads
Adjustable soft start
• Provides application flexibility
Heater and control diagnostics
capabilities
• Monitor actual heater and control
performance
• 3-phase, 2-leg control, (4 SCRs),
resistive load only, zero cross
firing only
• 3-phase, 3-leg control, (6 SCRs)
• 3-phase, 3-leg control, (6 SCRs)
for 4-wire wye loads
• Multizone, two and three singlephase zones
Output Control Options
• Zero cross control, fixed time
base
Electrically touch-safe package
• Time base one or four seconds
with digital programmer
• Increased safety for installer and
users
• Zero cross control, variable time
base
Serial communications with
Modbus™ RTU protocol
• Phase-angle control and phaseangle control with current limit
(not for 3-phase, 2-leg models)
• Computer control and/or
monitoring
Multizone capability
• Increased application flexibility,
reduced panel space
POWER SERIES
Performance Capabilities
Specifications
Microprocessor-based technology
• Soft start factory default four
seconds upon power-up, and
adjustable from 0.0 to 120
seconds
Modbus™ is a registered trademark of Schneider
Automation, Inc.
175
Power Controllers
Watlow’s POWER SERIES controllers
are UL® listed and C-UL®, so users
can be assured that the controllers
meet world safety and operational
standards.
Features and Benefits
Power Controllers
POWER SERIES
Heater Bakeout
Specifications Cont.
• For single-phase (phase to
neutral) and 3-phase 6 SCR
models only (not for 3-phase,
2-leg models)
• Soft start upon input signal
change, output rate of change
adjustable to limit max rate of
change from 0.1 to 100 percent
per 0.1 second. Factory default
10 percent
• Current transformer included
when required
• Line voltage compensated
(variable time base and
phase angle controllers only)
• Adjustable 0 - 9999 minutes with
over current trip
• Internal current transformer
included
• Standby or non-operational mode
Command Signal Input
Output Voltage and Current Rating
Analog
• 24 to 120VÅ(ac) (+10 percent,
-15 percent)
• Field selectable linear voltage
and current of low and high
points within 0-20mA and
0-10VÎ(dc)
• 200 to 480VÅ(ac) (+10 percent,
-15 percent)
• 200 to 600VÅ(ac) (+10 percent,
-15 percent)
• 65 through 250 amps per pole,
model dependent; see Output
Amperage Chart page 178
• Minimum load 1 amp rms ac
• Maximum leakage current 5mA
Alarms
• Manual control input through front
panel as a percent power
• Factory default 4-20mA input
• Voltage input impedance 11kΩ
nominal
• Current input impedance 100Ω
nominal
Digital
• Latching or non-latching
• On-board digital programmer/
display and optional serial
communications
• Separate high and low values
Retransmit
• Alarm silencing (inhibit) on power
up for alarm
• Field selectable and scalable
within 0-20mA, 800Ω maximum or
0-10VÎ(dc), load, 1KΩ minimum
load. The default is 4-20mA
• Single alarm relay
• Alarm indication LEDs, shorted
SCR, open heater
• Electromechanical relay, form C
contact, software configurable
• Minimum load current 10mA @
5VÎ(dc)
• Rated resistive loads: 3 amps @
250VÅ(ac) or 30VÎ(dc) max.,
inductive load rating 1.5 amps
with a power factor ≥ 0.4 without
contact suppression
176
• Soft start with over current trip,
runs until programmed bakeout
time expires, then goes burst or
phase-angle firing. Factory
default of 24 hours
• Resolution:
mA ranges = ±5µA nominal
VÎ(dc) = ranges 2.5mV nominal
• Calibration accuracy:
mA ranges = ±20µA
VÎ(dc) ranges = 10mV nominal
• Temperature stability: 100ppm°C
Digital Programmer/Display and
Communications Capabilities
• Programming functions
• Adjust input and output control
type, alarms and soft start, heater
bakeout and current limit prompts
• Monitoring functions
• Display input and output values
along with actual output current
• Data retention of digital
programmer/display upon power
failure via nonvolatile memory
Serial Communications
• RS-232 for single drop control
• EIA-485 for single or multidrop
control
• 32 units maximum can be
connected. With additional 485
repeater hardware, up to 247
units may be connected
• Isolated
• Modbus™ RTU protocol
• 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600,19200
baud rates
Controller Power Supply
• Universal line voltage input range
100 to 240VÅ(ac) (+10 percent,
-15 percent) at 55VA max
• 50/60Hz ± 5 percent line
frequency independent
• Controller line voltage for
electronic power supply can be
run on separate line voltage
Natural Convection and Fan
Cooled Models
• Cabinet venting may be required
• See chart on page 178 for models
that include fan cooling
Power Dissipation (Watts)
• Approximately 1.25 watts/amp
per controlled leg
W
A
T
L
O
W
Power Controllers
POWER SERIES
Agency Approvals
•
UL®
Specifications Cont.
508 listed, File #E73741,
Vol. three, Sec. two
Isolation
•
C-UL®
• Command signal to load and
line/load to ground 2200VÅ(ac)
minimum
• VDE EN 50178 License 115054
• On-board semiconductor fuses
provide SCR protection
Mounting
• Mounts on a removable subplate
• Heat sink fins must be mounted in
vertical orientation
High Current Terminals
• Touch safe
• 10 mm (0.375 in.) Allen head
compression terminals will accept
#6 AWG to 350 MCM wire. Allen
wrench adapter (included)
for 10 mm (0.375 in.) socket,
6 point only
• Torque to 180 in.-lbs (20.3 Nm)
• Wire strip to 30 mm (1.125 in.)
Controller Terminals
• Touch safe
• 2.5 mm (0.125 in.) blade screwdriver, accepts 12-22 AWG or
2 No. 22-18 AWG wires
• Torque to 8 in.-lbs (0.9 Nm)
• Wire strip to 6 mm (0.24 in.)
Operating Environment
• 50°C (122°F) base rating
• 0 to 90 percent RH,
non-condensing
• Meets EN50178, pollution degree
three
Storage Temperature
• -40 to 85°C (-40 to 185°F)
Shipping Weight
• 10.3 kg (23 lbs)
Single-Phase Configuration
Heater Diagnostics
This configuration can be purchased
with any or all the features available
on the POWER SERIES, based on
customer preference. It is intended
for resistive heaters, but can also be
used on transformer connected
loads in the phase-angle firing mode.
Heater diagnostics may include
some or all of the features that
require heater current monitoring,
depending on the model selected.
Heater current monitoring is only
available with heater diagnostics
installed on the controller. The
features dependent on heater current
monitoring are heater bakeout,
current limiting, heater kVA
monitoring, retransmit and heater
monitoring alarms such as open
heater, heater out of tolerance, load
balance and shorted SCR
detection/error. Heater diagnostics
must also be installed if you need
phase-angle control with current limit.
listed to C22.2 NO. 14
Three-Phase, Two-Leg
Configuration
This configuration is intended for
zero cross firing only into a stable
resistive heater. Typically, a threephase delta or ungrounded wye
connected heater is used and only
two of the three VÅ line phases are
switched. The third-phase is a direct
connection through a bussbar on
board the POWER SERIES. Heater
current monitoring and kVA options
are available via the heater
diagnostics option.
Three-Phase, Three Leg
Configuration
All POWER SERIES options are
available with this configuration.
It works well with phase-angle firing
into a three-phase, three-wire wye
or delta connected heater. In this
configuration, the more common
applications are transformer
connected loads with heaters
requiring a soft start and/or
current limiting.
POWER SERIES
• 0 to 65°C (32 to 149°F) natural
convection cooled
• CE 89/336/EEC (EN61326), Class
A with filter,
CE 73/23/EEC (EN50178)
This configuration is available in two
and three single-phase zones and all
the features of a single-phase unit
are available. (Note that there is only
one alarm relay and all zones in the
controller must use the same control
method.)
The three-phase, four-wire
configuration is intended for zero
cross firing into a three-phase
grounded wye/star heater (This is a
separate hardware option, model
number dependent.)
177
Power Controllers
• 0 to 60°C (32 to 140°F) fan cooled
Single-Phase, Multizone
Configuration
Power Controllers
POWER SERIES
F.O.B.: Winona, Minnesota
Ordering Information
To order, complete the code number on the right with the information below.
PC__ -____-____
Front View
POWER SERIES = Microprocessor-based, solid state
power controller
1
2
3
Package Style
C
=
Phase
POWER SERIES
Solid State Power Controller
354 mm
(14.0 in.)
1
=
1-phase
2
=
3-phase/2-leg control, (4 SCRs)
3
=
3-phase/3-leg control, (6 SCRs)
4
=
3-phase/4-wire, wye connected load
8
=
2 single-phase zones
9
=
3 single-phase zones
Heater Diagnostics
0
1
4
5
65 to 250 amps
None
Heater diagnostics (required for any heater current
monitoring or current limiting).
Output Amperage Rating
(See amperage chart below.)
Output Voltage Rating
6
Top View
=
=
A
=
24 to 120V
B
=
200 to 480V
C
=
200 to 600V
Communications
200 mm
(7.9 in.)
0
=
None
1
=
EIA/TIA-232/485 communications, opto-isolated (field selectable)
Feedback/Retransmit
0
1
=
=
None
Load current feedback (0 - 10V or 0 - 20mA scalable retransmit output)
Must have heater diagnostics selected)
Custom
191 mm
(7.5 in.)
00 =
AA =
XX =
Mounting Plate Dimensions
None
No watlow logo with agency approval marks
Custom, consult factory for options
Note: See replacement semiconductor fuses on page 190.
Amperage Chart—50˚C (122˚F)
Mounting Holes (4)
7 mm
(0.27 in.)
Non-Fan Cooled
Release Tab
Key Slots
178 mm
(7.00 in.)
102 mm
(4.00 in.)
151 mm
(5.93 in.)
178
39 mm
25 mm (1.53 in.)
(0.97 in.)
Single Phase
Code Amperage
N20
100A
N25
140A
N30
165A
2-Zone and
3-Phase, 2-Leg
Code Amperage
N20
80A
N25
105A
N30
120A
3-Zone and
3-Phase, 3-Leg
Code Amperage
N20
65A
N25
85A
N30
105A
Fan Cooled
Single Phase
Code Amperage
3-Phase, 2-Leg
Code Amperage
3-Phase, 3-Leg
Code Amperage
F20
F25
F30
125A
200A
250A
F20
F25
F30
120A
160A
185A
F20
F25
F30
90A
140A
155A
W
A
T
L
O
W
Power Controllers
E-SAFE® RELAY
The E-SAFE® mercury-free relay
from Watlow provides reliable and
accurate power switching for
processing applications.
This relay can exceed the
performance of typical mercury
relays while fitting within the same
footprint. The E-SAFE RELAY bridges
the gap between mercury
displacement relays (MDRs) and
solid state relays (SSRs) by providing
superior power switching in a
non-mercury solution at a lower cost.
This mercury-free relay also provides
longer contact life and higher
performance than typical mechanical
relays used in equipment.
The E-SAFE RELAY eliminates
mercury, reduces arcing and
electrical noise and provides
processors with an excellent solution
for equipment power switching. The
absence of mercury in the E-SAFE
RELAY reduces toxic metal hazards
in processing environments.
Performance Capabilities
• Up to 40 amps
• 240 VÅ(ac)
Features and Benefits
High current transient suppression
Specifications
Output Rating
• Output rating: from 20A to 40A
maximum resistive load at
-30 to 55°C (-22 to 130°F)
• 20A to 40A max. per pole into a
resistive load
• Maximum power switching
voltage: 208/240VÅ(ac),
three pole
• Coil voltage: 24VÅ(ac),
120VÅ(ac) and 220VÅ(ac)
• Maximum operating ambient
temperature: 55°C (130°F)
Control Mode
• Low electrical noise
• Zero cross switching output
• Out performs mechanical
contactors
• Form A outputs, without arcing
Compact size
• Fits footprint of definite purpose
relays and most 30 to 50 amp
mercury relays
• Easily retrofittable
Environmentally safer than
mercury contactors
• Eliminates toxic waste (mercury)
from the application environment
and disposal from failed mercury
contactors
• Cycle rate: 30 cycles per minute,
maximum
Input Command Signal
• 24VÅ(ac) (+10 / -15 percent),
120VÅ(ac) (+10 / -10 percent)
220VÅ(ac) (+10 / -15 percent)
• 50/60Hz, less than 9VA
Operating Life
• 1,000,000 switching cycles at
max. rating
Weight/Dimensions
• Weight: 0.560 kg (1.25 lbs.)
• 96.0 mm (3.78 in.) high x
82.3 mm (3.24 in.) wide x
90.2 mm (3.55 in.) deep
Terminals
• Controller input: Compression,
accept #22 to 10
(0.2 to 6 mm2) AWG wire. Torque
to 7 in.-lbs (0.8 Nm) max.
• Output: Compression, accept #14
to 6 (2.5 to 16 mm2) AWG wire.
Torque to 35 in.-lbs max.
(3.95 Nm)
E-SAFE® RELAY
• Extended contact life
• Three pole
Note: Do not place an R/C snubber
(filter) on the E-SAFE RELAY
input command signal. Do not
place on temperature control
output.
Agency approvals
• UL® 508 listed and C-UL®
179
Power Controllers
• High reliability
• Maximum cycle rate: 30 cycles
per minute
• 208/240VÅ(ac), 50/60Hz, each
pole
Power Controllers
F.O.B.: Winona, Minnesota
Ordering Information
E-SAFE RELAY
To order, complete the code number on the right with the information below.
Specifications Cont.
ES__ -____-____
Operating Environment
• Operating temperature up to
-30 to 55°C (-22 to 130°F)
E-SAFE RELAY = Hybrid zero cross contactor
• 5 to 85 percent RH,
non-condensing
20 =
20 amp
40 =
30 amp
Number of Poles
• Shipping and storage
temperature -40 to 85°C
(-40 to 185°F)
3
=
Three pole
Control Voltage
Amperage
024-AC = 24VÅ(ac)
120-AC = 120VÅ(ac)
220-AC = 220VÅ(ac)
Label Options
Mounting
• Definite purpose relay and MDR
mounting footprint
00
Agency Approvals
=
Standard product
• UL® 508 listed, C-UL® approved,
File #E213822
5.0 mm x 12.0 mm slots 4x
(0.197 in. x 0.472 in.)
L1
83.1 mm
(3.27 in.)
L3
L2
96.1 mm
(3.78 in.)
Terminal
Label
T1
T3
T2
48.3 mm (1.90 in.)
82.3 mm (3.24 in.)
90.2 mm
(3.55 in.)
Safety Label
E-SAFE RELAY In Operation
Normally
Open
Relay
Off
Normally
Open
Relay
Normally
Open
Relay
Off
On
Triac
Triac
Å
OFF
240VÅ(ac)
Å
ARC ABSORBED
Triac
Triac
Off
On
Off
Load
Load
Load
240VÅ(ac)
Off
Off
Triac
On
Off
Normally
Open
Relay
Normally
Open
Relay
240VÅ(ac)
Load
240VÅ(ac)
Å
Å
OPERATING
ARC ABSORBED
Å
Conduction Path
180
Load
240VÅ(ac)
OFF
W
A
T
L
O
W
Power Controllers
Solid State Relays
(SSRs)
Lower cost and longer heater life are
the main advantages provided by
Watlow solid state relays (SSRs).
A unique loop-powered firing card
permits a very fast time proportional
cycle rate of less than one-tenth of a
second that allows using higher watt
density heating elements and/or
increasing heater life. In addition,
temperature control accuracy is
optimized with this fast cycle card.
Watlow SSRs can be ordered with all
the components necessary for
hassle-free mounting, including
heatsinks, thermal foil and bevel
washers along with semiconductor
fuses.
Performance Capabilities
• Burst firing, 10 to 75 amps
• Operating environment
-25 to 50°C (-13 to 122°F) with
proper heatsink
• Can switch up to 575VÅ(ac)
Features and Benefits
Fast cycle card
• Heater life is increased,
temperature control is optimized
and higher watt density heaters
can be used
Zero cross firinga
• Minimal electrical noise
• Will withstand harsh or hostile
environments
• For applications requiring agency
approval
Applications
• Food processing equipment
• Lighting equipment
• Resistive heating
DC Control Input
Voltage range
• 3-32VÎ(dc), model no. dependent
• 4-32VÎ(dc), model no. dependent
Input current
• 4mA @ 5VÎ(dc)
Turn on voltage
• 3VÎ(dc) minimum
Turn off voltage
• 1VÎ(dc) maximum
Output (Maximum)
Forward voltage drop
• 1.5VÅ(ac) typically
Minimum holding current
• 50mAÅ(ac)
Turn on-off time
• 8.3ms
SSR
UL® recognized, CSA certified,
VDE licensed
Dielectric Strength
• 4000 Volts RMS
AC Control Input
Voltage range
• 90-280VÅ(ac)
Input current
• 2mA max. @ 120VÅ(ac)
Turn on voltage
• 90VÅ(ac) minimum
Turn off voltage
• 10VÅ(ac) maximum
Storage Temperature
• -40 to 85°C (-40 to 185°F)
SSR Weight
• 0.090 kg
(0.21 lb)
Shipping Weight
• 0.045 kg
(1.0 lb)
a
Not available on random fired models.
181
Power Controllers
Back-to-back SCR design
Specifications
Standard to all SSRs:
Agency Approvals
• UL® 873, File #E151484, E73741
• CSA #LR700195
• VDE 0805 EN60950,
File #90995ÜG
• CE 60950
Power Controllers
F.O.B.: Winona, Minnesota
Solid State Relays
(SSRs)
Ordering Information — Order by selecting the code number from the specifications table below.
Code
Number
Output
Current
(Amps)
SSR-240-10A-DC1
10
SSR-240-25A-DC1
25
SSR-240-40A-DC1
40
SSR-240-50A-DC1
50
SSR-240-75A-DC1
75
SSR-240-10A-AC1
10
SSR-240-25A-AC1
25
SSR-240-40A-AC1
40
SSR-240-50A-AC1
50
SSR-240-75A-AC1
75
SSR-480-25A-DC1
25
SSR-480-50A-DC1
50
SSR-480-75A-DC1
75
SSR-480-25A-AC1
25
SSR-480-50A-AC1
50
SSR-480-75A-AC1
75
SSR-600-25A-DC1
25
SSR-600-50A-DC1
50
SSR-600-75A-DC1
75
SSR-600-25A-AC1
25
SSR-600-50A-AC1
50
SSR-600-75A-AC1
75
SSR-240-10A-RND
Output
Voltage
120/
240VÅ(ac)
120/
240VÅ(ac)
120/
240VÅ(ac)
120/
240VÅ(ac)
120/
240VÅ(ac)
3-32VÎ(dc)
Zero Cross
3-32VÎ(dc)
Zero Cross
3-32VÎ(dc)
Zero Cross
3-32VÎ(dc)
Zero Cross
3-32VÎ(dc)
Zero Cross
120/
240VÅ(ac)
120/
240VÅ(ac)
120/
240VÅ(ac)
120/
240VÅ(ac)
120/
240VÅ(ac)
90-280VÅ(ac)
Zero Cross
90-280VÅ(ac)
Zero Cross
90-280VÅ(ac)
Zero Cross
90-280VÅ(ac)
Zero Cross
90-280VÅ(ac)
Zero Cross
Off
State
Leakage
One
A2 Sec.
Cycle
I2t
Surge
For
Current
Fuse
Amps
Thermal
Resistance
Frequency
Range
Output
Voltage
Range
PIV
Rating
10mA
120
60
1.48°C/W
47-63Hz
24-280VÅ(ac) 600VÅ(ac)
10mA
250
260
1.02°C/W
47-63Hz
24-280VÅ(ac) 600VÅ(ac)
10mA
625
1620
0.63°C/W
47-63Hz
24-280VÅ(ac) 600VÅ(ac)
10mA
625
1620
0.63°C/W
47-63Hz
24-280VÅ(ac) 600VÅ(ac)
10mA
1000
4150
0.31°C/W
47-63Hz
24-280VÅ(ac) 600VÅ(ac)
10mA
120
60
1.48°C/W
47-63Hz
24-280VÅ(ac) 600VÅ(ac)
10mA
250
260
1.02°C/W
47-63Hz
24-280VÅ(ac) 600VÅ(ac)
10mA
625
1620
0.63°C/W
47-63Hz
24-280VÅ(ac) 600VÅ(ac)
10mA
625
1620
0.63°C/W
47-63Hz
24-280VÅ(ac) 600VÅ(ac)
10mA
1000
4150
0.31°C/W
47-63Hz
24-280VÅ(ac) 600VÅ(ac)
480VÅ(ac) 4-32VÎ(dc)
Zero Cross
480VÅ(ac) 4-32VÎ(dc)
Zero Cross
480VÅ(ac) 4-32VÎ(dc)
Zero Cross
10mA
250
260
1.02°C/W
47-63Hz
48-660VÅ(ac) 1200VÅ(ac)
10mA
625
1620
0.63°C/W
47-63Hz
48-660VÅ(ac) 1200VÅ(ac)
10mA
1000
4150
0.31°C/W
47-63Hz
48-660VÅ(ac) 1200VÅ(ac)
480VÅ(ac) 90-280VÅ(ac)
Zero Cross
480VÅ(ac) 90-280VÅ(ac)
Zero Cross
480VÅ(ac) 90-280VÅ(ac)
Zero Cross
10mA
250
260
1.02°C/W
47-63Hz
48-660VÅ(ac) 1200VÅ(ac)
10mA
625
1620
0.63°C/W
47-63Hz
48-660VÅ(ac) 1200VÅ(ac)
10mA
1000
4150
0.31°C/W
47-63Hz
48-660VÅ(ac) 1200VÅ(ac)
600VÅ(ac) 4-32VÎ(dc)
Zero Cross
600VÅ(ac) 4-32VÎ(dc)
Zero Cross
600VÅ(ac) 4-32VÎ(dc)
Zero Cross
10mA
250
260
1.02°C/W
47-63Hz
48-660VÅ(ac) 1200VÅ(ac)
10mA
625
1620
0.63°C/W
47-63Hz
48-660VÅ(ac) 1200VÅ(ac)
10mA
1200
6000
0.28°C/W
47-63Hz
48-660VÅ(ac) 1200VÅ(ac)
600VÅ(ac) 90-280VÅ(ac)
Zero Cross
600VÅ(ac) 90-280VÅ(ac)
Zero Cross
600VÅ(ac) 90-280VÅ(ac)
Zero Cross
10mA
250
260
1.02°C/W
47-63Hz
48-660VÅ(ac) 1200VÅ(ac)
10mA
625
1620
0.63°C/W
47-63Hz
48-660VÅ(ac) 1200VÅ(ac)
10mA
1200
6000
0.28°C/W
47-63Hz
48-660VÅ(ac) 1200VÅ(ac)
10
240VÅ(ac) 4-32VÎ(dc)
Random
10mA
120
60
1.48°C/W
47-63Hz
24-280VÅ(ac) 600VÅ(ac)
SSR-480-50A-RND
50
480VÅ(ac) 4-32VÎ(dc)
Random
10mA
625
1620
0.63°C/W
47-63Hz
48-530VÅ(ac) 1200VÅ(ac)
SSR-480-75A-RND
75
10mA
1000
4150
0.31°C/W
47-63Hz
48-530VÅ(ac) 1200VÅ(ac)
SSR-100-20A-DC1
20
480VÅ(ac) 4-32VÎ(dc)
Random
100VÎ(dc) 3-32VÎ(dc)
0.3mA
NA
NA
1.06°C/W
N/A
Availability
Stock: Same day shipment
182
Input
Control
Voltage
0-100VÎ(dc) N/A
W
A
T
L
O
W
Power Controllers
Solid State Relays
(SSRs)
Temperature Operating Curve
Ambient Temperature—°C
40
heat. Use two #8-32 screws,15.8 mm
(0.625 in.) long to secure the relay to
the heatsink. See the derating curve,
Temperature Operating Curve, for
operation without heatsinks.
Percent of Rated Current
Application Hints
Thermal Transfer
A thermal foil is provided with each
solid state relay for mounting on the
base of the relay to improve heat
transfer. In addition, two bevel
washers are supplied to provide the
proper pressure for the transfer of
50
65
80
100
Note: This rating curve applies only to 10 and
25 amp SSRs. 40 through 75 amp SSRs
should not exceed a seven amp load without
using a heatsink.
80
With Heatsink
60
40
In Free Air
20
0
75
100
125
150
175
200
Ambient Temperature—°F
Replacing Contactors or MDRs
Improvements in heater life and
control accuracy can be anticipated
with solid state relays operated with
rapid cycle times as compared to
slower operating electromechanical
relays or even mercury displacement
relays in some applications. When
replacing these types of relays with
the SSR, it is important to consider
two aspects:
2. Failure Mode
Solid state devices should last for
many years when properly protected
with voltage and RC suppressors
Single Phase—SDA
command signal from the
temperature controller.
The triac can be wired to a bell, or
to a normally closed latching relay
to remove power to the heater.
Thermocouple
L1
Heater
Mounted
Current
Transformer
L2
Temp
Control
Open
Collector
-
Contactor
Single-Phase—AT and BT
Requires external power switching
transformer. Consult factory for part
number and voltage required. AT
requires a VÎ(dc) input, random
fired output SSR. BT requires VÎ(dc)
input, zero cross output SSR.
SSR
Card
SBL
SDA
AT
BT
Description
Burst firing 4-20mA only
loop powered card
for dc input relays only
Shorted SSR alarm
for dc input relays only
Single-phase, phaseangle firing
Single-phase variable
time base, single cycle,
burst firing, 4-20mA input
Code
No.
Temp
Control
+
0 and
5VÎ(dc)
on-off
Relay
With Loop Powered Board
SSR
Single-Phase—SBL
4-20mA loop powered firing card for
direct mounting on a dc solid state
relay. Can be used in three-phase
mode with two dc input and zero
cross solid state relays (SSR).
SDA
Shorted SSR
Detector
Solid
State
Relay
D.C.
08-5399
SBL
4-20
mAÎ(dc)
Output
08-5386
08-5422
Fuse
+
-
DC
SSR
Heater
L1
08-5406
L2
183
Power Controllers
System Diagrams
Shorted SSR Alarm—SDA
The most prevalent concern when
using solid state relays is the
possibility of a relay failing in a
shorted condition. With this in mind,
Watlow has designed a cost
effective “Shorted SSR Alarm” SDA.
The device monitors the output
(current through the heater) and
activates a triac (alarm) if there is no
mounted on appropriate heatsinks,
and when fused against the high
currents caused by electrical shorts.
However, if the unit fails, the most
probable condition will be a short.
Both mechanical relays mentioned
above also have a good probability
of failing short. In all cases where
uncontrolled full power can cause
damage, it is recommended that a
high limit temperature controller and
contactor be used for protection.
1. Heat
Solid state devices require a small
voltage to turn on, which is
consumed as heat (1.5 watts/amp).
This heat must be removed from the
device, and is usually accomplished
by mounting the relay on heatsinks.
Power Controllers
Solid State Relays
(SSRs)
Heatsinks - HS-10, 25, 40, 50 and 75
C
E
Dimensions
Solid State Relay
4.83 mm
(0.19 in.)
44.45 mm
(1.75 in.)
29.94 mm
(1.10 in.)
A
H
A
B
8-32
Thread
7.62 mm
(0.30 in.)
W
43.18 mm
(1.70 in.)
D
47.625 mm
(1.875 in.)
Note: The 50 amp 1-phase width
mounting dimension has four mounting
clips instead of the 1⁄2 round cutouts.
57.15 mm
(2.25 in.)
4.369 mm
(0.172 in.) Dia.
2 Places
13.46 mm
(0.53 in.)
25.40 mm
(1.00 in.)
6-32
Thread
Case Temp.
Ref. Point
3.0 mm
(0.12 in.)
22.86 mm
(0.90 in.)
Z100-0815-000 - A, B and C Heatsinks
See Note
19.56 mm
(0.77 in.)
W
H
D
Drilled
and Tapped
8-32
Heatsinks – 1-Phase
Amps
10
18
25
35
40
50
55
75
75
b
Maximum Overall Dimensions
Height (H)
Width (W)
Depth (D)
mm (in.)
mm (in.)
mm (in.)
100 (4.00) 115 (4.50)
25 (1.03)
94 (3.70)
46 (1.80)
48 (1.90)
75 (3.00) 120 (4.75)
65 (2.60)
94 (3.70)
81 (3.20)
74 (2.90)
140 (5.50) 120 (4.75)
65 (2.60)
230 (9.00) 125 (5.00)
90 (3.50)
145 (5.70)
81 (3.20)
91 (3.60)
190 (7.50) 125 (5.00)
140 (5.50)
190 (7.50) 125 (5.00)
140 (5.50)
A
mm
75
N/A
50
N/A
115
175
N/A
175
175
(in.)
(3.00)
N/A
(2.00)
N/A
(4.50)
(7.00)
N/A
(7.00)
(7.00)
Mounting Dimensions
C
E
mm (in.)
mm (in.)
mm
12 (0.50)
4 (0.15)
105
N/A
N/A
N/A N/A
N/A
12 (0.50)
4 (0.15)
115
N/A
N/A
N/A N/A
N/A
12 (0.50)
4 (0.15)
115
N/A N/A
N/A N/A
150
N/A
N/A
N/A N/A
N/A
25 (1.00)
4 (0.15)
120
25 (1.00)
4 (0.15)
120
Heatsink includes fan; requires customer to supply and wire 120VÅ(ac) to the fan.
Heatsink includes fan; requires customer to supply and wire 240VÅ(ac) to the fan.
Note: Z100-0815-000 A, B and C are DIN-rail or back panel mount heatsinks.
c
184
Fan
Cooled
B
(in.)
(4.20)
N/A
(4.45)
N/A
(4.45)
(5.90)
N/A
(4.70)
(4.70)
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes2
Yes3
Code
Number
HS-10
Z100-0815-000A
HS-25
Z100-0815-000B
HS-40
HS-50
Z100-0815-000C
HS-75-1
HS-75-2
W
A
T
L
O
W
Power Controllers
QPAC SCRs
Watlow’s modular QPAC SERIES SCR
power controller features plug-in
flexibility with ratings from 150 to
1000 amps in 1-phase, 3-phase,
2-leg and 3-phase, 3-leg. A variety
of transformers from 120VÅ(ac) to
575VÅ(ac), along with 50/60Hz
operation, enables the QPAC to
operate virtually anywhere in the
world. Firing modes are defined by
plug-in cards that set the QPAC for:
• Burst fire variable time base
• Phase-angle operation
• Burst fire firing to act as a solid
state contactor
Models are available with a wide
variety of options. High speed
semiconductor fuses are included to
protect the SCR from higher
currents. This modular approach,
using a standard base and plug-in
transformers and control cards,
allows quick shipment of a power
controller specifically tailored to a
particular application.
Performance Capabilities
• Available in ratings from
150 to 1000 amps
• Ambient operating temperatures
0 to 50°C (32 to 122°F)
Signal Contactor—
ac or dc, Proportional
Voltage or Current
Burst Fired
150 to 1000 Amps
Features and Benefits
OR
QPAC
Phase-Angle Fired
150 to 1000 Amps
With or W/O
Current Limit
Available in 150 to 1000 amp ratings
• Provides appropriate power
switching for small and large loads
Burst firing, solid state contactor
and phase-angle firing modes
• Meets most application
requirements
High speed semiconductor fuses
and RC snubbers
• Protects the SCR from voltage or
current surges or spikes
High capacity heatsinks for
50˚C (122˚F) ambient operation
Standard models up to 300 amps
UL® 508 listed and C-UL®
• Allows using full power rating in
industrial applications
• For applications requiring agency
approvals
QPAC
• Delivers application flexibility with
a variety of plug-in transformers
and control cards
Open heater or shorted SCR
detector option
• On burst fire models, provides
diagnostic capability
185
Power Controllers
Completely modular power
controller
Power Controllers
QPAC SCRs
Specifications
Operation
Modular control base with plug-in
card and transformer
• Plug-in control cards
Solid state contactor, ac
or dc input
Burst fire control,
fixed or variable time base
Phase-angle fire control with
soft start
• Phase-angle control with soft start
and current limiting
• Plug-in transformers (50/60Hz)
• 120, 208, 240, 380, 415,
480, 575VÅ(ac) operation
Power bases
• Single-phase (Q01),
1 pair of SCRs
• Three-phase (Q32), 2-leg control,
2 pair SCRs. Resistive load only,
burst firing only.
• Three-phase (Q33), three pair
hybrid SCRs/diodes.
Recommended for phase-angle
only with balanced load.
Agency Approvals
• UL® 508 and C-UL® Listed, File
#E73741
Control Card Inputs
(CA) Solid state contactor,
AC input
• 120VÅ(ac) @ 30mA minimum
• Ac signal input sources (i.e.,
triacs or mechanical relay outputs
with noise suppression) require
customer supplied resistors
across the power controller ac
command signal input terminals to
prevent false firing.
24VÅ(ac) input, 200Ω/10 watts
typical;
120VÅ(ac) input, 1kΩ/25 watts
typical;
240VÅ(ac) input, two 1kΩ/25
watts in series typical
186
(CD) Solid state contactor,
DC input
• On, 4-10VÎ(dc); off, 0.5VÎ(dc)
• Built-in noise reduction network
(BF) Burst firing control fixed time
base
• Process input factory set
@ 4-20mAÎ(dc)
• Input impedance 250Ω
(clip resistor for 5kΩ voltage
input), or manual control input
• Time base four seconds
(clip resistor for one sec)
(BV) Burst firing control, variable
time base
• Process input factory set
@ 4-20mAÎ(dc)
• Input impedance 250Ω
(clip resistor for 5kΩ voltage
input), or manual control input
(AF) Phase-angle control
• Process input factory set
@ 4-20mAÎ(dc)
• Input impedance 250Ω (clip
resistor for 5kΩ voltage input), or
manual control input
• Soft start approximately six
seconds upon power-up,
one second upon set point
change
(AL) Phase-angle control with
current limit
• Process input factory set
@ 4-20mAÎ(dc)
• Input impedance 250Ω (clip
resistor for 5kΩ voltage input), or
manual control input
• Soft start approximately 10
seconds upon power-up, one
second upon set point change
• Current transformer included
Open Heater/Shorted SCR
Detector
• Triac output
• 24 to 240VÅ(ac), 300mA @ 25°C,
125mA @ 80°C
• Energizes on alarm
• Holding current 200µA minimum
• Latching current 5mA typical
Outputs
• 120VÅ(ac) through 575VÅ(ac)
• One, two, or three leg
• 150 through 1000 amps per leg
Line Voltage/Power
• 50/60Hz ac line frequency
• Voltage: ±10 percent, 120, 208,
240, 277, 380, 415, 480, 575VÅ(ac)
Line Voltage Compensation
• 10 percent ∆ in line, 2 percent
∆ in load in the 30 percent to
70 percent power region (AF, AL
and BV)
Power Dissipation (Watts)
• 1.5 watts/amps per controlled leg
Isolation
• Command signal to load
1250VÅ(ac) minimum
Linearity
• Within 2 percent, 30 to 70 percent
power region (All units except
CA & CD)
Off-State Leakage Current
• 20mA @ 480VÅ(ac)
SCR Protection
• Semiconductor fuses provided
dv/dt 200V/µsec minimum
• MOV1 and RC snubber network
standard
• (Q32) 3rd leg fuse kit may be
used, but not required, with
3-phase, 2-leg models
Mounting
• Heatsink fins must be mounted in
vertical orientation
W
A
T
L
O
W
Power Controllers
Ordering Information
QPAC SCRs
To order, complete the code number to the right with the information below:
Controller Weights
Amps
1Ø
3Ø, 2-leg
Q01
Q32
kg (lbs) kg (lbs)
150
6.8 (15)
200
6.8 (15)
300
6.8 (15)
400-600 19.9 (44)
800-1000 22.2 (49)
16.3
16.3
16.3
38.5
54.4
F.O.B.: Winona, Minnesota
(36)
(36)
(36)
(85)
(120)
3Ø, 3-wire
Q33
kg (lbs)
22.7
22.7
22.7
45.4
61.2
(50)
(50)
(50)
(100)
(135)
Specifications Cont.
Operating Environment
• 0 to 50°C (32 to 122°F)
• 0 to 90 percent RH,
non-condensing
Storage Temperature
• -40 to 85°C (-40 to 185°F)
Options
• Manual Control Kit for process
input cards (1kΩ potentiometer)
order #08-5362 separately
Note
• The Q32 and Q33 models are
50/60Hz line frequency
dependent. Specify application
line frequency when ordering for
proper calibration.
Q__-___-___-___
QPAC = Modular power controller;
phase-angle, burst or solid state contactor
with fuse(s) and holder(s) included.
Phase
01 =
Single-phase
32 =
3-phase,-2 leg (optional 3rd leg fuse kit extra.)
33 =
3-phase, 3-leg
Operating and Output Voltage
12 =
120VÅ(ac)
20 =
208VÅ(ac)
24 =
240VÅ(ac)
27 =
277VÅ(ac)
38 =
380VÅ(ac)
41 =
415VÅ(ac)
48 =
480VÅ(ac)
57 =
575VÅ(ac)
Cooling Fan Voltage2
Customer to supply wiring and hook-up.
1
=
120VÅ(ac)
2
=
240VÅ(ac)
Output Current (Amps)
150 =
150 amps
200 =
200 amps
300 =
300 amps
400 =
400 amps
500 =
500 amps
600 =
600 amps
800 =
800 amps
01K =
1000 amps
Note: See POWER SERIES and DIN-A-MITE® equivalent products on
pages 168 and 175 for 30 through 100 amps.
Input Control Card
Availability
Shipment within five working days
on models up through 300 amps.
Beyond 300 amps consult the factory.
0
1
2
=
=
=
a
3
2
MOV comes only on Q33 (3-phase, 3-leg).
All cooling fans rated @ 20 watts each,
must be wired by customer.
Solid state ac input (08-5285) contactor
Solid state dc input (08-5286) contactor
Burst fired, fixed time base (08-5289) 4-20mA
Burst fired, variable time base (08-5342) 4-20mA
Phase-angle fired, not available on Q32 (08-5288) 4-20mA
Phase-angle fired w/current limit, not available on Q32 (08-5411) 4-20mA;
includes one current transformer. Add second CT for 3-phase, 3-leg.
AL models 75 amps and above require one interstage transformer.
Open Heater/Shorted SCR Detector34
QPAC
=
=
=
=
=
=
None
Single-phase operation
Three-phase operation
The open heater/shorted SCR detector is
for burst fire operation only.
4
Included one current transformer for
1-phase and two current transformers for
3-phase. Models 150 amps and above
require one interstage transformer.
187
Power Controllers
CA
CD
BF
BV
AF
AL
Power Controllers
QPAC SCRs
Amps
Fuse Recommended
Rating
Wire Size
Bending
Radius
mm (in.)
Wiring Information
150
200
300
400
500
600
800
1000
200
250
400
500
600
800
1000
1250
100 (4)
115 (4.5)
205 (8)
380 (15)
380 (15)
380 (15)
380 (15)
380 (15)
Note: A circuit breaker (or disconnect) is required in addition
to, and at least of the same rating
as the semiconductor fuses. Fuse
mounting for those controllers
with external (EXT) fuses will
require space near the terminal
block. The space for the fuse will
depend upon the current rating.
On board fuses (O/B) do not
require extra fuse space. Where
third-leg fusing is selected,
additional space is required. On
575VÅ(ac) models the fuses are
mounted external to the QPAC.
Triple 0
250 MCM
500 MCM
Dual 250 MCM
Dual 350 MCM
Dual 500 MCM
Quad 250 MCM
Quad 350 MCM
Lugs
Accept
Wire No.
Phase
Code
4 to 3/0
6 to 350 MCM
4 to 500 MCM
2 to 600 MCM
2 to 600 MCM
2 to 600 MCM
2 to 600 MCM
2 to 600 MCM
Fuse
Mounting
All models
All models
All models
All models
All models
All models
All models
All models
O/B
O/B
O/B
O/B
O/B
O/B
O/B
O/B
Current
Transformer
16-0008
16-0045
16-0073
400A-0004-0286-0400
500-0004-0286-0500
600-0004-0286-0600
800-0004-0286-0800
1000-0004-0286-1000
Case Styles
Style C
Style E
Note: Style D eliminated and replaced with Style E.
Q01
Style
Ca
Ca
Ca
Ea
Ea
a
Q32
Amps
Height (H)
mm (in.)
150
330 (13)
200
330 (13)
300
330 (13)
400-600 685 (27)
800-1000 685 (27)
Width (W) Depth (D)
mm (in.) mm (in.)
175 (6.9) 255 (10)
175 (6.9) 255 (10)
175 (6.9) 255 (10)
430 (17)
300 (11.7)
430 (17)
340 (13.3)
Weight
kg (lbs)
6.8 (15)
6.8 (15)
6.8 (15)
19.9 (44)
22.2 (49)
Includes fan cooling
QPAC Replacement SCRs and Diodes
See page 189
a
Third Leg (Semiconductor) Fuse Kits
See page 192
188
Amps
Ca
Ca
Ca
Ea
Ea
150
200
300
400-600
800-1000
Height (H)
mm (in.)
Width (W)
mm (in.)
330
330
330
685
840
355
355
355
535
535
(13)
(13)
(13)
(27)
(33)
(14)
(14)
(14)
(21)
(21)
Depth (D)
mm (in.)
260
260
260
300
340
(10.25)
(10.25)
(10.25)
(11.7)
(13.3)
Weight
kg (lbs)
16.3 (36)
16.3 (36)
16.3 (36)
38.5 (85)
54.4 (120)
Includes fan cooling
Q33
Current Transformers
See page 189
Semiconductor Replacement Fuses
See page 192
Style
a
Style
Amps
Ca
Ca
Ca
Ea
Ea
150
200
300
400-600
800-1000
Height (H)
mm (in.)
Width (W)
mm (in.)
330
330
330
840
840
525
525
525
685
685
Includes fan cooling
(13)
(13)
(13)
(33)
(33)
(20.7)
(20.7)
(20.7)
(27)
(27)
Depth (D)
Weight
mm
(in.) kg (lbs)
260
260
260
300
340
(10.25)
(10.25)
(10.25)
(11.7)
(13.3)
23
23
23
45.4
61.2
(50)
(50)
(50)
(100)
(135)
W
A
T
L
O
W
Power Controllers
F.O.B.: Winona, Minnesota
Accessories
The following accessories and
replacement parts are available to
enhance the application and service
of Watlow power controllers.
To order, simply identify the
specification of the desired
component and use its part number.
Consult your Watlow representative
for availability.
QPAC Replacement SCRs and Diodes
Current Transformers
QPAC Part Numbers
Amps
Q01
Q32
Q33
150 amp
18-5052
18-5052
18-5052d
200 amp
300 amp
400-600 amp
800 amp
1000 amp
18-5052
18-5052
18-5214
18-5215
18-5216
18-5052
18-5052
18-5214
18-5215
18-5216
18-5052d
18-5052d
18-5214d
18-5215d
18-5215d
Diodes
150 amp
200 amp
300 amp
400-600 amp
800 amp
1000 amp
d
18-1044d
18-1044d
18-1044d
18-1064d
18-1068d
18-1068d
All units (except Q33) require two SCRs (1 pair) per controlled leg.
Q33 (150 amp and above) uses one replaceable diode and one
SCR per controlled leg.
Part No.
Current Transformer
16-0230
16-0231
16-0232
16-0233
16-0246a
Current Ratio
(See 16-0246)
(See 16-0246)
(See 16-0246)
(See 16-0246)
20 amp: 20mA
to
50 amp: 50mA
75 amp:
16-0008b
16-0044
100 amp:
16-0072
125 amp:
16-0008
150 amp:
16-0045
200 amp:
16-0073
300 amp:
0004-0286-0400
400 amp:
0004-0286-0500
500 amp:
0004-0286-0600
600 amp:
0004-0286-0800
800 amp:
0004-0286-1000
1000 amp:
Interstage Transformer
16-0176
5 amp:
5 amp
5 amp
5 amp
5 amp
5 amp
5 amp
5 amp
5 amp
5 amp
5 amp
5 amp
20mA
Accessories
189
Power Controllers
Note: An interstage transformer
(code no. 16-0176) is required with any
current transformer rated 75 amps or above.
a Supercedes code numbers 16-0230,
16-0231, 16-0232, 16-0233.
b Use 2-wire passes through the current
transformer 16-0008 for 75 amp
applications.
Power Controllers
F.O.B.: Winona, Minnesota
Accessories
Noise Suppression Devices
Description
Code No.
MOV, 150VÅ(ac), 20 joule
MOV, 275VÅ(ac), 15 joule
Quencharc® (250VÅ(ac) max)
0802-0273-0000
0802-0266-0000
0804-0147-0000
CE Filters for DIN-A-MITE Products
Code Number
14-0019
14-0020
Description
Stocked
Single-phase, parallel connected filter
Three-phase, parallel connected filter
Yes
Yes
Replacement Fuses for Power Series
Watlow
Code No.
Description
Ferraz
Part No.
0808-0102-0100
0808-0102-0125
0808-0102-0160
0808-0102-0200
0808-0102-0250
0808-0102-0315
100 amp @ 600VÅ(ac)
125 amp @ 600VÅ(ac)
160 amp @ 600VÅ(ac)
200 amp @ 600VÅ(ac)
250 amp @ 600VÅ(ac)
315 amp @ 600VÅ(ac)
L330037
M330038
N330039
P330040
Q330041
R330042
Quencharc® is a registered trademark of ITW
Paktron.
190
Bussmann
Part No.
170M1317
170M1318
170M1319
170M1320
170M1321
170M1322
W
A
T
L
O
W
Power Controllers
F.O.B.: Winona, Minnesota
Accessories
Semiconductor Fuse Selection
Guidelines
The following steps will help you
identify the proper semiconductor
fuse for your application.
1. Semiconductor fuses are required
for SCR protection.
2. In North America, semiconductor
fuses are considered a specialty
fuse and not yet approved for
branch circuit or cable protection.
3. All fuses should be rated at
125 percent of the connected
load (or the next standard fuse
rating above 125 percent). Do not
exceed 160 percent of the
DIN-A-MITE®.
For example:
A 30 amp Style B DIN-A-MITE with
a 20 amp connected load should
use a 25 amp semiconductor
fuse.
Semiconductor Fuses for
DIN-A-MITE® Power Controllers
DIN-Rail Mount Semiconductor Fuses and Holders
Fuse Amp
Rating
Styles A, B, C and D…Can Also Be
Used For VPAC, SSRs and CZR’s
4. Due to special applications,
cooler ambient temperatures,
small loads, etc., the connected
load should be the determining
factor—although the
semiconductor fuse I2t rating must
not exceed the SCR I2t
requirement.
The following charts may be
modified following the above guide
lines.
Fuse Voltage
Watlow
Ferraz
Bussman Equiv.
Watlow
Rating
Fuse Part No. Fuse Part No. Fuse Part No.
Holder Part No.
12
600
17-8012
H330011
FWC-12A10F
17-5110
20
600
17-8020
K330013
FWC-20A10F
17-5110
25
600
17-8025
L330014
FWC-25A10F
17-5110
32
700
17-8030
M330015
FWP-32A14F
17-5114
40
700
17-8040
A93909
FWP-40A14F
17-5114
50
700
17-8050
B093910
FWP-50A14F
17-5114
63
700
17-8063
T094823
FWP-63A22F
17-5122
65
660
0808-0096-0000
N /A
170N3437
See Note 1
80
700
17-8080
A94829
FWP-80A22F
17-5122
100
700
17-8100
N/A
FWP-100A22F
17-5122
Note 1: Replacement fuse for DIN-A-MITE Style D
Note 2: On part number 17-8030 the fuse is a 32 ampere fuse
W
DIN-Rail Mount Fuse Holders Maximum Dimensions
Holder Part No.
Height
mm (in.)
Width
mm (in.)
Depth
mm (in.)
Fuse Type
(mm)
17-5110
17-5114
17-5122
81 (3.18)
111 (4.36)
128 (5.04)
18 (0.71)
26 (1.02)
35 (1.38)
59 (2.32)
77 (3.03)
77 (3.03)
10 X 38
14 X 51
22 X 58
Accessories
D
H
191
Power Controllers
Dimensions
Power Controllers
Accessories
QPAC Semiconductor Fuses
Description
20 amp @ 700VÅ(ac)
30 amp @ 700VÅ(ac)
40 amp @ 700VÅ(ac)
70 amp @ 700VÅ(ac)
100 amp @ 700VÅ(ac)
100 amp @ 500VÅ(ac)
125 amp @ 500VÅ(ac)
200 amp @ 500VÅ(ac)
250 amp @ 500VÅ(ac)
400 amp @ 500VÅ(ac)
500 amp @ 500VÅ(ac)
600 amp @ 500VÅ(ac)
800 amp @ 500VÅ(ac)
1,000 amp @ 700VÅ(ac)
1,250 amp @ 700VÅ(ac)
Part No.
17-7071
17-7072
17-7007
17-7010
17-7012
17-7050
17-7051
17-7053
17-7054
17-7056
17-7057
17-7058
17-7059
17-7082
17-7081
QPAC Models Used On
All Q01 30 amp - 2 fuses required
All Q01 50 amp - 2 fuses required
All Q32 and Q33 30 amp
All Q32 and Q33 50 amp
All 75 amp, 600V QPACs
All 75 amp, 480V or less QPACs
All 100 amp, 480V or less QPACs
All 150 amp, 480V or less QPACs
All 200 amp, 480V or less QPACs
All 300 amp, 480V or less QPACs
All 400 amp, 480V or less QPACs
All 500 amp, 480V or less QPACs
All 600 amp, 480V or less QPACs
All 800 amp QPACs
All 1,000 amp QPACs
Third Leg Semiconductor Fuse
Kits for QPAC and VPACs
Description
Fuse Block Dimensions
Part No.
A
mm
Dimensions
B
(in.) mm
(in.)
One 15 amp fuse, one 1-phase holder
One 25 amp fuse, one 1-phase holder
One 40 amp fuse, one 1-phase holder
One 70 amp fuse, one 1-phase holder
One 100 amp fuse, one 1-phase holder
One 125 amp fuse, one 1-phase holder
3LF-10
3LF-20
3LF-30
3LF-50
3LF-75
3LF-100
85
85
110
110
90
90
(3.25)
(3.25)
(4.25)
(4.25)
(3.50)
(3.50)
110
110
135
135
115
115
One 200 amp fuse, one 1-phase holder
One 250 amp fuse, one 1-phase holder
One 400 amp fuse, one 1-phase holder
One 500 amp fuse, one 1-phase holder
One 600 amp fuse, one 1-phase holder
3LF-150
3LF-200
3LF-300
3LF-400
3LF-500
90
85
85
85
85
One 800 amp fuse, one 1-phase holder
One 1000 amp fuse, one 1-phase holder
One 1250 amp fuse, one 1-phase holder
3LF-600
3LF-800
3LF-1000
Consult factory
Consult factory
Consult factory
(4.25)
(4.25)
(5.25)
(5.25)
(4.50)
(4.50)
C
mm
(in.)
120
120
145
145
125
125
(4.75)
(4.75)
(5.75)
(5.75)
(5.00)
(5.00)
(3.50) 115 (4.50) 125 (5.00)
(3.28) 20 (0.76) 150 (6.00)
(3.28) 20 (0.76) 150 (6.00)
(3.28) 20 (0.76) 150 (6.00)
(3.28) 20 (0.76) 150 (6.00)
Note: For safe operation, fuses must be rated 125 percent of power controller rating.
Example: 100 amp power controller should use a 125 amp semiconductor fuse.
This 125 amp fuse is already included in the above 3LF-100 fuse kit.
192
44.45 mm
(1.75 in.)
A
B
31.75 mm
(1.25 in.)
C
W
A
T
L
O
W
Communication
Gateways
Communication Gateways
and Software
EM GATEWAY
Watlow’s EM GATEWAY serves as a
bridge for Modbus™ communication
between Ethernet and Watlow
standard controllers. The gateway
provides a quick, convenient and
economical means of adapting
controllers to Ethernet connectivity.
Ethernet communications is rapidly
gaining popularity in industrial
control applications by enabling the
flow of information between processing equipment and the company’s
Ethernet-based management systems.
Watlow’s EM GATEWAY provides an
operator interface by serving web
pages to an Internet browser to
support key control operations such
as process monitoring, set point
changes, alarm management and
error notification. The browser can
be used to monitor the process,
make set point changes, manage
alarms and generate e-mails to notify
remote locations of an alarm
condition.
The gateway communicates with
Watlow controllers via a Modbus™
EIA-485/EIA-232 communications
network. Watlow controllers
supported by the EM GATEWAY
include:
operate, monitor and data log key
control parameters such as process,
value, set point and alarm status.
The EM GATEWAY supports up to
16 controllers in any combination,
making it ideal for applications that
require multiple loops of control.
The EM GATEWAY is a standard
product available from stock for
quick shipment, and is backed by a
three-year warranty.
Features and Benefits
Specifications
Power Supply
• Voltage input 24Vı(ac/dc) + 10
percent, -15 percent, 50/60Hz ± 5
• Connection through two position
removable screw style terminal
block
Environmental
• Operating temperature range
0 to 60˚C (32 to 140˚F)
• SERIES 981/982*
Ethernet/Internet connectivity
• Storage temperature range
-40 to 70˚C (-40 to 158˚F)
• SERIES 988/989*
• SERIES 998/999*
• Allows the user to operate and
monitor their process remotely
• Operating and storage humidity
0 to 90 percent non-condensing
• SERIES 96/97
Embedded Web Server
Indication
• SERIES F4
• Green LED for Ethernet
connection
• SERIES SD
• Remote operation & process
monitoring with standard web
browsers
• POWER SERIES
Dedicated web page design
• CLS200
• Web pages specifically designed
for easy use and operation
• Green LED for EIA-485/232
activity
• MICRODIN®
WATVIEW, Watlow’s Windows®
based HMI (Human/Machine
Interface) software, can utilize the
gateway to configure as well as
* These controllers are not
supported by WATVIEW.
Windows® is a registered trademark of Microsoft
Corporation.
Modbus™ is a trademark of Schneider Automation
Incorporated.
E-mail alarm notification
• Green LED for Ethernet activity
Agency
• EN 50082-1 light industry
• Reduces process monitoring costs
WATVIEW communications
capability
• Allows the user to operate
WATVIEW or a browser with the
same PC connection
193
Communication
Gateways
EM GATEWAY
F.O.B.: Winona, Minnesota
Ordering Information
Order part number EM00-GATE-0000
Specifications Cont.
Communications
Top View
• Modbus™ RTU communications
• EIA-485/EIA-232 supported
• Connection through five
position removable screw style
terminal block
ø .19
85.09 mm
(3.35 in.)
• Ethernet communications
• Ethernet RJ 45 connector
• 10 base T
53.85 mm
(2.12 in.)
• HTTP interface
• Modbus™ TCP
127 mm
(5.0 in.)
• DHCP, Auto IP or fixed IP
address
139.7 mm
(5.50 in.)
• E-mail alarm notification
Dimensions
Front View
• 85.09 mm (3.35 in.) width
139.7 mm (5.50 in.) length
34.54 mm (1.36 in.) depth
34.54 mm
(1.36 in.)
3.18 mm
(0.125 in.)
EM GATEWAY Network Wiring Diagram
194
W
A
T
L
O
W
Communication
Gateways
F.O.B.: Winona, Minnesota
Communication Gateways
and Software
CDN GATEWAY
The new CDN GATEWAY enables
customers to connect Watlow’s
Modbus™ RTU-based controllers
to their existing DeviceNet™ on
CAN-based management systems.
DeviceNet™ on CAN communication
protocol has widespread popularity
in industrial control applications where
communication between computers,
controllers, sensors and actuators
is necessary to improve process
performance and reduce costs.
The CDN GATEWAY enables
DeviceNet™ master nodes to send
and receive data using standard
POLL or EXPLICIT messaging. Up to
32 unique Modbus™ pairs may be
accessed in each POLL transaction
and the Modbus™ registers may
reside in one or a combination of up
to 32 supported controllers.
The CDN GATEWAY unit is enclosed
in a 63.5 mm x 82.55 mm (2.5 in. x
3.25 in.) plastic housing with
mounting tabs. A nine-pin D-sub
connector provides the EIA-485
interface and is fully isolated from
the DeviceNet™ power. The CDN
GATEWAY is backed by a 12-month
warranty from Watlow Winona.
Features and Benefits
Specifications
Allows existing Modbus™
RTU-based controllers to interface
with DeviceNet™-based networks
Temperature
• Eliminates the need to purchase
new controllers
Five-pin DeviceNet™ microconnector
0-70° C (32-158° F)
Size
83 mm x 62 mm x 28 mm
(3.30 in. x 2.45 in. x 1.10 in.)
Mounting
• Industry standard for DeviceNet™
13 mm (0.50 in.) tab
• Enhances ease of use
5 mm (0.1875 in.) hole
Nine-pin D EIA-485 interface
connector
Encapsulation
RTV silicon compound
• Allows multiple controllers to work
effectively with one gateway
EIA-485 serial channel is fully
isolated from the DeviceNet™
power
• Allows temperature controllers to
operate independently from the
DeviceNet™ network
DeviceNet™ is a trademark of the Open DeviceNet
Vendors Association.
195
196
W
A
T
L
O
W
Software
Communication Gateways
and Software
WATVIEW HMI
Software
Searching for a quick, efficient way
to set up your controllers? Need
rapid data-logging and graphing
capabilities? We have the answer:
WATVIEW.
WATVIEW is Watlow Anafaze’s HMI
(Human/Machine Interface) software
designed to set up and monitor up to
32 Watlow controllers. With easy
controller setup, a recipe and alarm
manager, data-logging and trend
plot graphing capabilities, animated
custom overview screens and a
superior online help system, you can
be assured that WATVIEW is the
ideal software for your application.
WATVIEW Editions:
WATVIEW is available in three
editions making your software
decision quick and effortless.
• WATVIEW-R:
The Run-Time Edition
Provides trend plot graphing,
setup screens, data-logging,
recipe manager with calendarstart, spreadsheet data editor,
system activity log and alarm
manager. The Run-Time Edition
will “play back” custom screens
created with the Developer
Edition.
• WATVIEW-D:
The Developer Edition
Includes all functions of the RunTime Edition plus a custom
screen designer and user-defined
variables.
• WATVIEW-C:
The Configurator Edition
Includes only spreadsheet data
editor, recipe manager without
calendar-start and system
activity log.
Excel® is a registered trademark of Microsoft
Corporation.
Features and Benefits
Easy controller setup
• WATVIEW automatically detects
which controllers are connected
to the computer, then WATVIEW
loads the appropriate setup
screens for those controllers.
Use built-in setup screens to
adjust the controller parameters,
or the simple “spreadsheet view”
for a quick, intuitive interface. The
spreadsheet categorizes all
controller parameters according
to their parameter groupings.
Recipe manager
• All editions of WATVIEW include
the ability to create recipes
(arrays of controller settings).
Recipes can be created, edited,
stored and downloaded to the
controllers. Use recipes to store
commonly used controller
settings, to speed up repetitive
controller setups and to create a
“snapshot” of your setups.
The Run-Time and Developer
Editions also include a calendarstart function, allowing users to
automatically download recipes
on a one-time or repeating
schedule.
Alarm manager
• WATVIEW Run-Time and
Developer Editions receive alarms
from controllers, maintain a log of
alarms and allow users to clear
and acknowledge alarms.
Data-logging and trend plot graphs
• WATVIEW Run-Time and
Developer Editions include
continuous data-logging of the
parameters you choose. You can
export the collected data to an
Excel®-compatible spreadsheet
file, or view up to 20 data items on
a WATVIEW trend plot graph. An
unlimited number of graphs may
be named and stored for simple
future retrieval.
197
Software
WATVIEW HMI
Software
Specifications
Controllers Supported:
System Requirements:
WATVIEW supports the following
controllers when equipped with the
listed firmware revision or later:
1.
Features and Benefits, con’t.
Colorful, animated custom
overview screens
• Use WATVIEW Developer edition
to create custom screens.
WATVIEW’s Custom Overviews
(COVs) incorporate your graphic
images (such as digital camera
photos) with real-time data from
the controllers to make a custom
interface. You can also use
WATVIEW’s AnaMator program to
create animated sequences,
which can show your actual
process in action. Custom
Overviews created with the
Developer edition can be used
with any WATVIEW edition.
Superior online help system
• Use the online help to navigate
through setup procedures, obtain
specific help for various Watlow
controllers, locate contextsensitive help or search and
browse the entire contents. This
online help system is a superior
feature for HMI software and is
included with each edition of
WATVIEW.
Pentium® is a registered trademark of Intel
Corporation.
Windows®95, 98 and NT are registered trademarks
of Microsoft Corporation.
Microsoft® is a registered trademark of Microsoft
Corporation.
198
Pentium®
200MHz processor
(depending on operating
system)
2. 32 MB RAM
3. 800 x 600 screen resolution
• SERIES 96 (Rev. 1.20)
• SERIES 96 with ramping
(Rev. 1.05)
4. 16-bit or higher color palette
(“High Color”)
• SERIES 97 (Rev. 1.10)
5. Communications port capable of
19.2 kbaud (16550 UART)
• CAS200 (Rev. 2.0)
6.
Microsoft®-compatible
pointing
device (mouse or trackball)
7. High-density floppy drive
8. 200 MB hard drive space
9. CD-ROM drive
10.Windows®95, 98, NT 4.0, ME,
2000 or XP
Note: For Windows®NT 4.0 you
must have 64 MB of RAM.
For Windows® 2000 and XP
you must have 128 MB
of RAM
• MICRODIN™ (Rev. 1.01)
• F4S/F4D (Rev. 2.06)
• CLS200 SERIES standard,
enhanced and extruder (Rev.
3.30), ramp and soak (Rev. 3.40)
• MLS300 SERIES standard,
enhanced and extruder (Rev.
3.30), ramp and soak (Rev. 3.40)
• CPC400 SERIES (Rev. 1.00)
• F4P (Rev. 3.00)
• POWER SERIES (Rev. 1.00)
• SERIES SD Dual Display
(Rev. 1.00)
• SERIES SD Dual Display Limit
(Rev. 1.00)
W
A
T
L
O
W
Software
Communication Gateways
and Software
ANAWIN®3 HMI Software
for PPC-2000
ANAWIN®3 is Watlow Anafaze’s HMI
(Human/Machine Interface) software
designed specifically for PPC-2000.
Use it to set up and monitor up to 32
controllers. With easy controller
setup, a recipe and alarm manager,
data-logging and trend plot
graphing capabilities, animated
custom overview screens and a
superior online help system, you can
be assured that ANAWIN3 is the
ideal software for your application.
ANAWIN3 Editions:
ANAWIN3 is available in three
editions making your software
decision quick and effortless.
• ANAWIN3-R:
The Run-Time Edition
Provides trend plot graphing,
setup screens, data-logging,
recipe manager with calendarstart, spreadsheet data editor,
system activity log and alarm
manager. The Run-Time Edition
will “play back” custom screens
created with the Developer
Edition.
• ANAWIN3-D:
The Developer Edition
Includes all functions of the RunTime Edition plus a custom
screen designer and user-defined
variables.
• ANAWIN3-C:
The Configurator Edition
Includes only spreadsheet data
editor, recipe manager without calendar-start and system activity log.
Recipe manager
• All editions of ANAWIN3 include
the ability to create recipes
(arrays of controller settings).
Recipes can be created, edited,
stored and downloaded to the
controllers. Use recipes to store
commonly used controller
settings, to speed up repetitive
controller setups, and to create a
“snapshot” of your setups. The
Run-Time and Developer Editions
also include a calendar-start
function, allowing users to
automatically download recipes
on a one-time or repeating
schedule.
Alarm manager
Features and Benefits
• ANAWIN Run-Time and
Developer Editions receive alarms
from controllers, maintain a log of
alarms and allow users to clear
and acknowledge alarms.
Easy controller setup
Data-logging and trend plot graphs
• Use ANAWIN3’s built-in setup
screens to adjust the controller
parameters, or the simple
“spreadsheet view” for a quick,
intuitive interface. The spreadsheet
categorizes all controller
parameters according to their
parameter groupings.
• ANAWIN3 Run-Time and
Developer Editions include
continuous data-logging of the
parameters you choose. You can
export the collected data to an
Excel®-compatible spreadsheet
file, or view multiple data items on
ANAWIN3 trend plot graph. An
unlimited number of graphs may
be named and stored for simple
future retrieval.
Colorful, animated custom
overview screens
• Use ANAWIN3 Developer edition
to create custom screens, easily!
ANAWIN3's Custom Overviews
(COVs) incorporate your graphic
images (such as digital camera
photos) with real-time data from
the controllers, to make a custom
interface. You can also use
ANAWIN3's AnaMator program
to create animated sequences,
which can show your actual
process in action. Custom
Overview’s created with the
Developer edition can be used
with any ANAWIN3 edition.
Ordering Information
ANAWIN3-C ANAWIN3 HMI
Configurator Edition
ANAWIN3-R ANAWIN3 HMI
Runtime Edition
ANAWIN3-D ANAWIN3 HMI
Developer Edition
199
Software
WATCONNECT™
Communications
Library
WATCONNECT™ is Watlow’s new
Windows®-based software library for
Modbus™-RTU communications. This
software tool kit makes it easy for
programmers working in Visual Basic,
C, C++ and Visual C++ to develop
Windows® applications that communicate with Watlow controllers using
the Modbus™ RTU protocol. The
simplicity of the interface insures a
short learning curve and shortened
development times for Human
Machine Interface or other applications that communicate with
controllers.
The main benefit of the tool kit is that
the programmer does not need to
learn the details of the Modbus™
protocol or the operation of a
Windows® serial port to successfully
develop programs that read and set
parameter values in controllers. The
library provides four, easy-to-use
functions: open port, close port, read
data and write data. To use these
functions, the programmer just
needs to know the communications
port settings and address of the
desired data.
For more information, please contact
your local Watlow representative.
Features and Benefits
Allows communication with one to
247 controllers
• Scalable
Safe for multithreaded applications
• Several parts of a program can
use the same communications
port
Single source solution
• Eliminates multiple vendors
Modbus™ is trademark of AEG Schneider
Corporation.
200
• Easy to follow examples shorten
the learning curve
Reads and writes all standard
Modbus™ data table locations:
coils, inputs and registers
• Allows access to all controller
parameters
• Assures compatibility
Can handle custom-named ports
such as serial port expanders
• Saves time and money
• Assures flexibility
License agreement allows user
written applications to be
distributed royalty free
• Adds no recurring cost to
applications
Windows® is a registered trademark of Microsoft
Corporation.
Sample code provided for Visual
C++ and Visual Basic
environments
W
A
T
L
O
W
Software
Communication Gateways
and Software
LOGICPRO™:
Logic Programming
Software for PPC-2000
and CPC400
LOGICPRO™
LOGICPRO™ is a Windows®-based
graphical logic programming
software package. LOGICPRO is the
perfect counterpart to the powerful
multi-loop PID control features in the
PPC-2000 and CPC400. Develop
programs in a choice of three logic
programming languages: ladder
diagram, sequential function chart or
function block diagram.
Features and Benefits
Develops custom logic programs
with easy-to-use, drag-and-drop
tools, then simulates and debugs
on the development PC before
downloading to the PPC-2000
Full set of logic functions and
programming tools
System requirements:
• Reduces time and cost during
system start-up, trouble-shooting
and fine tuning
• Adds value by easily customizing
your process
• EIA-232 serial port
Real-time monitoring
LOGICPRO-S supports up to 150 I/O
driver points. I/O driver points are
physical I/O and any data table
accessed parameters.
• Reduces time to verify system
logic operation
Integrates programmable logic and
PID control in a single controller
• Eliminates cumbersome and
inflexible communications
schemes between separate
process and logic controllers,
saving development time and
costs
LOGICPRO Editions
LOGICPRO-P supports an unlimited
number of I/O points. Both utilize keys,
which are attached to the development computer's parallel port.
• IBM compatible PC
• Pentium® processor, 166 MHz
minimum
• Windows® 95/98 or Windows® NT
• 32 MB RAM
• 40 MB minimum hard disk space
• Parallel port
Ordering Information
LOGICPRO-S LOGICPRO Standard
Edition
LOGICPRO-P LOGICPRO
Professional Edition
201
202
W
A
T
L
O
W
Control Systems
Process Systems
Watlow has the manufacturing
capability to design and fabricate
complete thermal heating systems for
process industries.
Technical Specifications
Standards and Certifications
Thermal systems from Watlow are
made up of components that have all
passed the same high standards of
quality control testing. Watlow’s
process engineers and technicians
are trained for specialized system
design and construction and are the
experts in the application of Watlow
product lines.
Process Systems
Watlow has the distinct advantage of
being the only designer of electric
thermal systems to actually
manufacture all of the major
components in the thermal system.
Watlow’s vast technical knowledge
and experience is combined with
these individual components to
produce the most effective thermal
solution for each unique need.
Modular dual circuit heat/cool DI water
system fully enclosed in cabinet with
caster wheels.
Prior to manufacturing, designs for all
projects are submitted for customer
approval. This process ensures you
of an exacting custom design along
with complying to local and
international technical standards.
Watlow can build assemblies to fit the
following standards and certifications:
• TEMA - Tubular Exchanger
Manufacturers Association
• ASME - American Society of
Mechanical Engineers
• US MIL STDS
• ANSI - American National Standard
Institute
• FM - Factory Mutual
• API - American Petroleum Institute
• NEMA - National Electrical
Manufacturers Association
• AWS - American Welding Society
• ASTM - American Society for
Testing and Materials
• ASHRAE - American Society of
Heating, Refrigerating and AirConditioning Engineers
• SSPC - Steel Structures Painting
Council
• UL® - Underwriter’s Laboratories
• NFPA - National Fire Protection
Association
UL® is a registered trademark of Underwriter’s
Laboratories, Inc.
203
Control Systems
Watlow’s application engineers work
hand in hand with our customer’s
technical staff, insuring that detailed
system proposals provide a clear
technical description of the product,
as well as costing options. This close
communication continues with
detailed approval drawings for
customer review and confirmation,
before production is started.
Production schedules and in-plant
production or final review visits by our
customers are available based on
each customer’s preference.
Complete, technical installation and
maintenance (I&M) instructions, asbuilt drawing packets and component
specification sheets are provided to
support setup of the system once it is
shipped. On-site, factory training or
start-up assistance can be provided,
when needed. Follow-up service after
commissioning is provided by local
Watlow sales engineers.
Control Systems
Process Systems
• NEC - National Electric Code
• Post-weld heat treating
• CSA - Canadian Standards
Association
• Chemical passivation
• CE - European Union Mark of
Conformance
• Microscopic analysis
• CENELEC - European Committee
for Electrotechnical Standardization
• PED - European Union Pressure
Equipment Directive
• BASEEFA - British Approval
Service for Electrical Equipment in
Flammable Atmospheres
• IEC - International Electrotechnical
Commission
• JIC - Joint Industrial Council
• SEMI-S2 - Semiconductor
Equipment and Materials Institute
Testing and Services
Watlow can provide special testing
and services for a variety of needs.
These include:
• Radiography
• Charpy impact testing
• Die penetrant testing
• Hydrostatic pressure testing
• Ultrasonic thickness testing
• Magnetic particle testing
• MTRs (Material Test Reports)
• ASME calculations
• Earthquake, stress or vibration
calculations
• PE stamp documents (Professional
Engineer)
• Helium leak testing
• Tensile testing
• PMI (Positive Material Identification)
testing
204
• Electropolishing
• Brinell hardness testing
• Special metal coatings from
thermal spray to galvanizing
Summary of Product Capabilities
and Services
Watlow builds any system to suit your
needs. We design and fabricate
specialty systems to simulate unique
industry needs. Some of the
capabilities available to build a
Watlow process system include:
• Complete fabrication of low alloy
carbon steel through alloy 800, alloy
600, alloy 20 and all exotic metals
• Fabrication of special parts of with
CNC machining, lathes, mills,
plasma cutting and laser cutting
• ASME Section IX welder and weld
procedure qualifications, ASME
“U,” “S” and “R” stamps
• Electrical control panel design and
assembly. UL® listed and CE
certified panels available
• Full interconnection of various
system components prior to
shipment to minimize field
installation difficulties
• Ability to integrate valves, pumps,
flow switches, strainers, expansion
joints, expansion tanks, level glass,
level switches, blowers,
compressors, differential pressure
switches and all fluid flow
components as required
• Specialize in high pressure and
high temperature design including
pressures to 4500 psi and gas
heating from cryogenic -226°C to
982°C (-375°F to 1800°F)
• Heater systems designed with best
heater for application. Low end
temperatures using silicone rubber
heaters to ultra-high temperature
using ceramic fiber heaters
• Skid-mounting designing and
fabrication
• Piping design and fabrication
• Fabrication of heating and control
systems for all hazardous and nonhazardous locations. CSA and
CENELEC certified enclosures to
1270 mm (50 in.) flange
• Special cleaning procedures
including passivation and
electropolishing
• Special finishing, blasting and
painting of complete thermal
systems
• Special packaging and crating for
domestic and export systems
• Design and fabrication of larger
systems - heater sizes from single
element, 20 watt assemblies to 600
plus elements, 1016 mm (40 in.)
flanges, to multi-vessel stacked
systems to 2.5 megawatt
• Able to ship F.O.B. factory, F.O.B.
U.S. port, ex-factory, C&F
destination, CIF destination
• Standard vessel fabrication up to
1524 mm (60 in.) diameter and wall
thickness from schedule five to
specialty plate rolled vessels over
25.4 mm (1 in.) thick with lengths
up to 20 feet, larger sizes can also
be provided
• Complete I&M packages, drawings,
nameplates in English or other
international languages as required
• Can coordinate all Freight
Forwarder shipping issues to insure
smooth and timely export
• On-site technical reviews, training,
commissioning, service by factory
engineers and local representatives
W
A
T
L
O
W
Control Systems
F.O.B.: Wright City, Missouri
Process Systems
Multi-Zone Control Panel
• Four Watlow Anafaze 32MLS controllers
• 128 total control loops
• Four loops per zone
• Two process and two alarm outputs
• Emergency stop pushbutton
• Interior lighting
• NEMA 12 fan cooled cabinet
• Watlow DIN-A-MITE® for power switching
• Capacitors and resistors for Torodial heater coil
Process Systems
• On-off selector switch with pilot light
22-Zone Control System
• 75 kVA, 480V x 240V step-down transformer
• Four C-Style DIN-A-MITE SCR power switching devices
• Three Watlow Anafaze MLS332 multi-loop controllers
• Four Watlow SERIES 988 temperature controllers with
remote set point
• NEMA 12 skid-mounted cabinet
• Main disconnect switch
• 22 safety contactors
• 22 sets of load fusing
• Watt transducer
Water Heating System
• Two 50kW heaters piped in parallel
• 60 gpm pump
• Solenoid valve
• Isolation valve
• Flow switches
• High limit thermocouples
Completely interconnected to control system consisting of:
• Watlow process temperature and limit temperature
controllers
• Main disconnect
• Mechanical contactors for power switching
205
Control Systems
Each zone contains
Control Systems
F.O.B.: Wright City, Missouri
Process Systems
High Temperature 399°C (750°F) Hot Oil System
• 20kW, 480V, 3PH
• Watlow circulation heater
• 30 gpm high temperature “canned” sealless pump
• Water cooled heat exchanger
• Cooling water pressure switch and solenoid valve
• High temperature three way control valve
• Expansion tank with sight level gauge
• Pressure relief and back pressure purge valves
• Watlow SERIES 988 process temperature controller
• Watlow SERIES 988 mixing valve temperature controller
• Manual disconnect
• Watlow DIN-A-MITE power controller
• NEMA 12 control cabinet
• Framed skid with sealed drip pan
• Insulated skid shroud for low temperature safe touch
Panel-Mounted Calorifier Tank
• 400 gallon water calorifier
• Internal epoxy coating on tank
• 40kW, 400V, 3Ph flange immersion heater
• NEMA 4X control panel
• Watlow SERIES 988 process temperature controller
• Two Watlow DIN-A-MITE power controllers with through
wall heatsinks
• Drain and vent valves
• Pressure relief valve
• Pressure and temperature indicating gauges
206
W
A
T
L
O
W
Control Systems
Standard and
Made-to-Order
Control Panels
Operating Environment
• 0 to 35°C (32 to 95°F)
• Consult factory for higher or lower
temperatures
Accuracy For Span
• SCR: ±1°C (±2°F)
• DIN-A-MITE: ±1°C (±2°F)
Temperature Controller
• The microprocessor-based digital
SERIES 988 1⁄8 DIN temperature
controller offers auto-tuning
capability plus a 10Hz sampling
rate to provide optimum process
control. The controller also offers
a large variety of thermocouple,
RTD and process signal input
options and communications
capabilities.
The controller is also designed to
meet NEMA 4X standards for
water and corrosion resistance.
This makes the control panel ideal
for many applications where
equipment needs to be cleaned
frequently.
• Watlow’s SERIES SD 1⁄16 DIN
microprocessor-based digital
controller has auto-tuning
capability plus thermocouple,
RTD or process inputs.
NEMA Rating
• All control panels: NEMA 12
standard.
Control Panels
Performance Capabilities
Amperage Ranges
• SCR to 300 amps
• Con to 300 amps
• For higher amperages consult
factory
• DIN-A-MITE to 120 amps
Control Panel Features
Documentation
• All control panels versions have a
complete wiring schematic
provided with every unit.
Panel Power Disconnect and
Fusing, Etc.
• All models: A manual disconnect
switch with a through-door interlocking operating mechanism,
terminal blocks for heater
connection, plus a control circuit
transformer with primary and
secondary fusing.
• When necessary, a fan, with filter,
cools the cabinetry to extend
solid state power controller life.
• Semiconductor fuses and a
control circuit transformer with
primary and secondary fusing
protects the panel.
Safety Limit Controller
• The SERIES LV, UL®/C-UL®/
CE/FM approved high limit safety
controller automatically shuts
down the system when an overtemperature condition exists.
UL® and C-UL® are registered trademarks of
Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc.
207
Control Systems
SCR Control Panel
The SCR control panel provides the
highest degree of process control
accuracy with the capability to
maintain process temperatures
within ±1°C (±2°F).
DIN-A-MITE® Control Panel
The DIN-A-MITE control panel is a
lower cost alternative to the SCR and
provides greater life than a
mechanical contactor.
Mechanical Contractor Control Panel
The M.C. control panel is a lower
DIN-A-MITE cost alternative to the
SCR panel. This control panel is
well suited for stable applications
requiring multiple heater circuits with
separate fuse protection.
Control Systems
F.O.B.: Wright City, Missouri
SCR (Silicon Controlled Rectifier)
Nominal
Voltage Phase
208
Max.
kW
Fused Est.Ship.
Circuits Weight
(lbs)
DIN-A-MITE Solid State Power Controller
Code
No.
240
380
480
3
3
3
60
95
120
1
1
1
450
450
450
271
371
471
240
380
480
240
380
480
3
3
3
3
3
3
60
95
120
60
95
120
3
3
3
4
4
4
450
450
450
450
450
450
273
373
473
274
374
474
240
380
480
240
380
480
3
3
3
3
3
3
80
125
160
80
125
160
1
1
1
2
2
2
550
550
550
530
530
530
281
381
481
282
382
482
240
380
480
240
380
480
3
3
3
3
3
3
80
125
160
80
125
160
3
3
3
4
4
4
580
580
580
580
580
580
283
383
483
284
384
484
240
380
480
240
380
480
3
3
3
3
3
3
120
190
240
120
190
240
1
1
1
2
2
2
830
830
830
840
840
840
291
391
491
292
392
492
240
380
480
240
380
480
3
3
3
3
3
3
120
190
240
120
190
240
3
3
3
4
4
4
850
850
850
840
840
840
293
393
493
294
394
494
240
380
480
3
3
3
120
190
240
6
6
6
850
850
850
296
396
496
Nominal
Voltage Phase
Max.
kW
Fused Est.Ship.
Circuits Weight
(lbs)
Code
No.
120
240
380
480
1
1
1
1
6
12
19
24
1
1
1
1
165
165
165
165
111
211
311
411
240
380
480
3
3
3
16.6
26.3
33.2
1
1
1
165
165
165
231
331
431
240
380
480
3
3
3
33.2
52.6
66.5
2
2
2
230
230
230
232
332
432
240
380
480
3
3
3
49.8
78.9
99.7
3
3
3
375
375
375
233
333
433
MDR (Mercury Displacement Relay)
Nominal
Voltage Phase
Max.
kW
Fused Est.Ship.
Circuits Weight
(lbs)
Code
No.
240
380
480
1
1
1
12
19
24
1
1
1
135
135
135
221
321
421
240
380
480
3
3
3
20
32
40
1
1
1
135
135
135
241
341
441
240
380
480
3
3
3
40
62
80
2
2
2
200
200
200
262
362
462
240
380
480
240
380
480
3
3
3
3
3
3
60
95
120
60
95
120
3
3
3
4
4
4
270
270
270
350
350
350
273
373
473
274
374
474
240
380
480
240
380
480
3
3
3
3
3
3
80
125
160
120
190
240
4
4
4
6
6
6
350
350
350
490
490
490
284
384
484
296
396
496
W
A
T
L
O
W
Control Systems
F.O.B.: Wright City, Missouri
Made-to-Order
Control Panels
Power/
Temperature
Controller
Code
Number
DIN-A-MITE
SERIES SD
SERIES 988
SD6C-HCAA-AARG
988A-10CA-AARR
SCR
SERIES SD
SERIES 988
SD6C-HCAA-AARG
988A-10CA-AARR
CON
SERIES SD
SERIES 988
a
b
SD6C-HKAA-AARG
988A-10BA-AARR
To order, complete the code number to the right with the information below:
___-___-__-___-___-___-_
Power Controller Type
DIN = DIN-A-MITE solid state
power controller
SCR = SCR power controller
CON = Mechanical contractor
Code Number
Enter three digit code number from table on page 208
NEMA Rating
01 =
NEMA 1 general purpose enclosure
04 =
NEMA 4 moisture resistant enclosure
4X =
NEMA 4Xa corrosion resistant enclosure
47 =
NEMA 4/7 moisture/explosion resistant enclosure
07 =
NEMA 7 explosion resistant enclosure
12 =
NEMA 12 dust resistant enclosure (standard)
Temperature Controller b
Control Panels
Temp. Controller Specifications
Ordering Information
00 =
No temperature controller
SD =
SERIES SD 1⁄16 DIN temperature controller
98 =
SERIES 988 temperature controller
Temperature Controller Sensor Type
0
=
No sensor
D
=
RTD
J
=
Type J
K
=
Type K
X
=
Special (Specify in notes)
Limit Controller
00 =
No limit controller
LV =
SERIES LV limit controller
Limit Controller Sensor Type
0
=
No limit sensor
D
=
RTD (DIN/JIS)
J
=
Type J (max. 540°C/1000°F)
K
=
Type K (max. 1205°C/2200°F)
X
=
Special (specify in notes)
System Power Requirements (kW)
Specify maximum kW here
Options
0
1
=
=
Without options
With options (See options list on page 210)
Stainless steel enclosure.
See temperature controller specification table.
209
Control Systems
How to Order
To order your standard control
panel, please specify:
• Watlow code number
• Process sensor type
• High limit thermocouple/sensor
type
• Options
• Quantity
If our standard units do not meet
your application needs, Watlow can
manufacture control panels to your
special requirements.
For standard units, please complete
the code number in the build-a-code
to the right and include any
additional requirements.
Availability
Standard: DIN and CON configured
panels available in five to seven
days shipment. SCR panels
available in 10 to 15 days shipment.
Made-to-Order: Consult factory.
Control Systems
Made-to-Order
Control Panels
Dimensions
NEMA 12 Panel
SCR
Amps
Size
mm (in.)
150
1260 x 915 x 305
(48 x 36 x 12)
200
1524 x 915 x 305
(60 x 36 x 12)
300
1524 x 1220 x 406
(60 x 48 x 16)
11 mm Dia., Typical
(0.4375 in.)
16 mm
(0.625 in.)
DIN-A-MITE
20, 40, 50
610 x 508 x 254
(24 x 20 x 10)
80
914 x 610 x 254
(36 x 24 x 10)
120
1065 x 915 x 255
(42 x 36 x 10)
CON
16 mm
(0.625 in.)
76 mm
(3 in.)
50
610 x 510 x 205
(24 x 20 x 8)
100
760 x 610 x 205
(30 x 24 x 8)
150 & 200
1030 x 915 x 205
(42 x 36 x 8)
300
1524 x 915 x 305
(60 x 36 x 12)
Options
• NEMA 4
• NEMA 4X
• NEMA 1
• NEMA 7
• Other Watlow temperature and
limit controllers
• UL® listing per UL® 508
• Other third part certification
• Special paint
• Other custom features available
upon request
210
Height
31 mm
(1.1875 in.)
Depth
5 mm
(0.1875 in.)
Width
Accessories
• Air conditioning/mechanical
cooling
• Air-flow switch
• Alarm (with alarm silence push
button)
• Amperage meter
• Back-up mechanical contactors
(per load circuit)
• Circuit breaker
• Conformal coating
• Control panel (UL® listed per
UL® 508)
• Control relay
• Enclosure heater
• Expedited shipping date
• Fungicide protection
• Ground fault detection with relay
• Installation operation and
maintenance manual
• Interlocks
• Mechanical cooling
• Motor starters
• NFPA 496 Purge for Class 1,
Division 2 areas
• Pilot light (120VÅ[ac])
• Purge systems to meet NFPA 496
Type Z Purge for Class 1, Division
2, Groups B, C and D
• Push button
• Two position selector switch
• Three position selector switch
• Volt meter
W
A
T
L
O
W
Control Systems
Control Consoles
Watlow combines superior products
and innovative mechanical designs
in its new series of control consoles.
Watlow designed these units using
many of its temperature and process
controllers, making them an
excellent choice for point of use
applications.
Watlow provides total system
development from concept to
design... through quality controlled
manufacturing to on-site installation
and start-up.
Control Consoles
Custom-made systems are also
available. Please consult a Watlow
sales representative for details.
Features and Benefits
Applications
Compact size
•
•
•
•
•
•
• Fits easily into confined areas
Control options including on-off,
proportional or PID control
• Provides simple, reliable operation
Self-contained units
• Require no external components
Pre-wired
• Fast start-up and installation time
Thermocouple and RTD input
• Allows use of a low cost sensor of
your choice
Serial communications
• Support for one-on-one, as well as
remote networking of controllers
Plastics
Packaging
Food processing
Semiconductor
Laboratory
Process
Windows® is a registered trademark of Microsoft
Corporation.
211
Control Systems
The standard Watlow control
consoles are available in one,
two or four control loop
configurations. Each unit is supplied
with a heavy-duty fused line cord,
fused output receptacle, a solid state
relay and on-off rocker switch. The
powder-coated metal case has vent
openings on the top and bottom for
heat dissipation, keeping internal
case temperatures lower. On some
models, serial communication
options are available through
Watlow’s ANAWIN® Windows® 95based software or EIA/TIA-232 or
EIA/TIA-422.
Control Systems
F.O.B.: Winona, Minnesota
Control Consoles
Mini Control Consoles
Features
• Small foot print
• Pre-wired output
• AMP Mate-’n’-Lok® output
connection (2-pin)
• Miniature thermocouple connector
• Watlow SERIES SD controller
• On-off rocker switch
Specifications
The mini series is the smallest and
most compact control console
offered, but features are not limited.
The mini utilizes a Watlow SERIES
SD controller which can be set to a
number of different control modes.
The solid state relay provides longer
heater life and a lower cost than
other power switching devices. The
heater output is pre-wired for your
convenience. The AMP Mate-’n’Lok® heater connector makes
installation quick and easy.
Controller
• Watlow SERIES SD (SD3C)
Dimensions
• 76 mm H x 90 mm W x 180 mm D
(3.0 in. H x 3.5 in. W x 7.1 in. D)
Output Power Switching
• 8 amp maximum load
• Output is powered through the
line cord
Ordering Information
To order, complete the code number on the right with the information below:
MINI - _ _ _ _ - 0 0 0 0
Mini Control Console
Input
J =
K =
T =
R =
Control
Type J thermocouple
Type K thermocouple
Type T thermocouple
RTD (2-wire)
5 = SERIES SD
Display
SERIES SD
R = Red/Green
Line Voltage
1
2
Mate-’n’-Lok® is a registered trademark of
AMP Company.
212
Power Requirements
• 120VÅ(ac), +10 percent,
-15 percent (NEMA 5-15 Plug)
• 208/240VÅ(ac), ±10 percent
(NEMA 6-15 Plug)
• Fused 10 amp
Sensor Input
• Factory selectable thermocouple
• Miniature thermocouple jack and
plug
Output Configuration
• AMP Mate-’n’-Lok® connector
• Mating connector provided
Operating Environment
• 0 to 45˚C (32 to 113˚F)
• 0 to 90 percent RH, non-condensing
Weight
• 2 lbs (0.9 kg)
=
=
120VÅ(ac)
208/240VÅ(ac)
W
A
T
L
O
Control Systems
Control Consoles
Single Control Consoles
Specifications
Controller
• Watlow SERIES 96
• Watlow SERIES SD
Dimensions
Sensor Input
• 119 mm H x 76 mm W x 191 mm D
(4.7 in. H x 3.0 in. W x 7.5 in. D)
Output Power Switching
• Factory selectable
AMP Mate-’n’-Lok® connector
• Utilizes a solid state relay
• 8 amp maximum load
• Output is powered through the
line cord
Power Requirements
• Mating connector provided
Operating Environment
• 120VÅ(ac), +10 percent,
-15 percent (NEMA 5-15 Plug)
• 208/240VÅ(ac), ±10 percent,
(NEMA 6-15 Plug)
• Controller is fused to 1.0 amp
• Factory selectable thermocouple
• Miniature thermocouple jack and
plug
Output Configuration
A twist and lock connector
• 0 to 45˚C (32 to 113˚F)
• 0 to 90 percent RH, non-condensing
Weight
• 2 lbs (0.9 kg)
Control Consoles
• Small foot print
• Pre-wired output
• AMP Mate-’n’-Lok® (two-pin) or a
twist and lock output connection
• Miniature thermocouple connector
• Watlow SERIES 96 or SERIES SD
controller
• On-off rocker switch
F.O.B.: Winona, Minnesota
Ordering Information
To order, complete the code number on the right with the information below:
SNGL - _ _ _ _ - _ _ 0 0
Single Control Console
Control
4 = SERIES 96
5 = SERIES SD (1/32 DIN)
6 = SERIES 96 w/232 comms
7 = SERIES SD (1/16 DIN)
A = SERIES 96 with ramp and soak
Input
J = Type J thermocouple
T = Type T thermocouple
K = Type K thermocouple
R = RTD (2-wire)
Display
SERIES 96/SD
RG = Red/Green (only color option available on SD (1/32 DIN)
RR = Red/Red
GG = Green/Green (only available on 96)
GR = Green/Red (only available on 96)
Output Connector
1 = AMP Mate-’n’-Lok®
2 = Twist and lock
Line Voltage
1 = 120VÅ(ac)
2 = 208/240VÅ(ac)
213
Control Systems
The single series offers a variety of
control, input and heater output
options. The single series can be
fitted with either a Watlow SERIES
96 or SD controller. The heater
output and control circuit are fused
to protect the internal components
from damage. The heater output
connector can be ordered as either
an AMP Mate-’n’-Lok® or a twist and
lock connector. The heater output is
pre-wired making installation quick
and easy.
Features
W
Control Systems
Control Consoles
Dual Control Consoles
The dual series is the first package
that offers multiple control zones in
one package. Watlow’s SERIES
SERIES 96 or SERIES SD controller
can be used as the controller for
the dual series. Each zone utilizes a
solid state relay for longer heater
life and a lower cost than other
power switching devices. The
heater output connector can be
ordered as either an AMP Mate-’n’Lok® or a twist and lock connector.
Features
• Small foot print
• Pre-wired outputs
• AMP Mate-’n’-Lok® (2-pin) or a
twist and lock output connection
• Miniature thermocouple
connector
• Watlow SERIES 96 or
SD controller
• On-off rocker switch
F.O.B.: Winona, Minnesota
Specifications
Controller
• Watlow SERIES 96
• Watlow SERIES SD
Dimensions
• 114 mm H x 152 mm W x
191 mm D
(4.5 in. H x 6.0 in. W x 7.5 in. D)
Output Power Switching
• Utilizes solid state relays
• Output is powered through
line cord
• Light duty dual
• 8 amp maximum load
(4 amps per zone)
• Heavy duty dual
• 16 amp maximum load
(8 amps per zone)
• Light duty control/limit
• (8 amps maximum load)
• Heavy duty control/limit
• (12 amps maximum load)
Power Requirements
• Light duty dual or controller/limit
• 120VÅ(ac), +10 percent,
-15 percent (NEMA 5-15 plug)
• 208/240VÅ(ac), ±10 percent,
-15 percent (NEMA 6-15 plug)
• Heavy duty dual or controller/limit
• 120VÅ(ac), +10 percent,
-15 percent (NEMA 5-20 plug)
Sensor Input
• Factory selectable thermocouple
• Miniature thermocouple jack and
plug
Output Configuration
• Factory selectable
AMP Mate-’n’-Lok® connector
A twist and lock connector
• Mating connector provided
Operating Environment
• 0 to 45˚C (32 to 149˚F)
• 0 to 90 percent RH, non-condensing
Weight
• 5 lbs (2.3 kg)
Ordering Information
To order, complete the code number on the right with the information below:
DUAL - _ _ _ _ - _ _ 0 0
Dual Control Console
Control
A = SERIES 96 with ramp and soak
B = SERIES 96/SERIES 97 with ramp and soak
4 = SERIES 96
5 = SERIES SD (1/32 DIN)
7 = SERIES SD (1/16 DIN)
8 = SERIES 96/SERIES 97 controller/limit
9 = SERIES SD6C/SERIES SD6L controller/limit
Input
J = Type J thermocouple
K = Type K thermocouple
Display
T = Type T thermocouple
R = RTD (2-wire)
SERIES 96/97/SD
RG = Red/Green (only color option available on SD (1/32 DIN)
RR = Red/Red
GG = Green/Green (only available on SERIES 96 and SERIES 97)
GR = Green/Red (only available on SERIES 96 and SERIES 97)
Output Connector
1 = AMP Mate-’n’-Lok®
2 = Twist and lock
Line Voltage/Power
1
2
3
214
= 120VÅ(ac) (4A per zone; 8A total)
= 208/240VÅ(ac) (4A per zone; 8A total)
= 120VÅ(ac) (4A per zone; 16A total)
W
A
T
L
O
W
Control Systems
F.O.B.: Winona, Minnesota
Quad Control Consoles
Controller
• Watlow SERIES 96
• Watlow SERIES SD
Dimensions
• 114 mm H x 305 mm W x 191 mm D
(4.5 in. H x 12.0 in. W x 7.5 in. D)
Output Power Switching
• Utilizes solid state relays
• Output is powered through
line cord
• 16 amp maximum load
(4 amps per zone)
Power Requirements
• 120VÅ(ac), +10 percent,
-15 percent (NEMA 5-20 plug)
The quad series offers four zones
of control in one compact package.
Watlow SERIES 96 or SERIES SD
controllers can be utilized for each
zone. Each zone utilizes a solid
state relay for longer heater life and
a lower cost than other power
switching devices. The heater
output connector can be ordered
as either an AMP Mate-’n’-Lok® or a
twist and lock connector.
Features
• Small foot print
• Pre-wired outputs
• AMP Mate-’n’-Lok® (2-pin) or a
twist and lock output connection
• Miniature thermocouple
connector
• Watlow SERIES 96 or SD
controllers
• On-off rocker switch
Sensor Input
• Factory selectable thermocouple
• Miniature thermocouple jack and
plug
Output Configuration
• Factory selectable
AMP Mate-’n’-Lok® connector
A twist and lock connector
• Mating connector provided
Operating Environment
• 0 to 45˚C (32 to 11˚F)
• 0 to 90 percent RH, non-condensing
Weight
• 6 lbs (2.7 kg)
Control Consoles
Specifications
Ordering Information
To order, complete the code number on the right with the information below:
QUAD - _ _ _ _ - _ _ 0 0
Quad Control Console
Control
A = SERIES 96 with ramp and soak
4 = SERIES 96
5 = SERIES SD (1/32 DIN)
7 = SERIES SD (1/16 DIN)
Input
J = Type J thermocouple
K = Type K thermocouple
Display
T = Type T thermocouple
R = RTD (2-wire)
SERIES 96/SD
RG = Red/Green (only color option available on SD (1/32 DIN))
RR = Red/Red
GG = Green/Green (only available on 96)
GR = Green/Red (only available on 96)
Output Connector
1 = AMP Mate-’n’-Lok®
2 = Twist and lock
Line Voltage
1
=
120VÅ(ac)
215
Control Systems
Control Consoles
Control Systems
Control Consoles
PLCC Control Console
Watlow has combined superior
products, innovative mechanical
design and time-proven temperature
control knowledge into a new control
system ideal for vacuum pump line
heating applications.
The single-loop control enclosure is
built around a Watlow SERIES SD
temperature controller. Standard
features for this unit include full PID
control, high and low process alarms
and digital readout of the process
temperature. These enclosures are
built with solid state relays for noisefree operation and tight power
control of the heating system. A
mechanical relay is included to
provide positive break of the load
power in case of an alarm or error
condition. Each unit is supplied with
a heavy duty line cord, fused output
receptacle and on-off rocker switch.
The standard console powers up to
8 amps @ 120VÅ(ac). All Watlow
pump line heating system heater
and thermocouple cables plug right
in for quick, tool-free installation.
A ground fault circuit interrupt is
available as an option.
Custom made systems are also
available. Please consult a Watlow
sales representative for details.
216
Process Benefits
• In combination with Watlow pump
line heaters, vacuum pump lines
can be controlled to a maximum
of 200°C (392°F) to greatly reduce
solid buildup.
• Using multiple control zones, the
temperature may be varied or
staged at different points along
the line to “steer” buildup to a
manageable location.
Features and Benefits
Compact Size
• Small foot print
PID control
• Maintains precise temperature
Self-contained units
• No external components required
Prewired output, miniature
thermocouple connector, on-off
rocker switch
• Quick, tool-free installation and
fast start up
W
A
T
L
O
W
Control Systems
Control Consoles
PLCC Control Console
Specifications
Controller
• Watlow SERIES SD 1⁄32 DIN
Alarm Output
• Disconnects power to heaters
when tripped
• Alarm signal via 5 amp contact
closure
• Amp Universal Mate-N-Lok®
connector, 2-position
• Alarm set points adjustable
Power Requirements
• 120VÅ(ac) (+10 percent -15
percent, 50/60Hz)
• IDE style fused input power
receptacle with six foot long
power cord
• On-off rocker switch
• Optional GFCI line cord available
• Data retention upon power failure
via non-volatile memory
Extension Cables
• Heater Power Extension Cable:
Type SJ, 16-3 stranded.
Enclosure connection: Amp
Universal Mate-N-Lok® connector,
3-position. Heater connection:
Amp Universal Mate-N-Lok®
connector, 2-position, with
separate ring terminal ground.
Control Consoles
Heater Output
• Solid state relay power control
• Maximum 8 amps @ 120VÅ(ac),
fused at 10A
• Amp Universal Mate-N-Lok®
connector, 3-position
• Mates with Watlow pump line
heaters
Mechanical
• Overall Dimensions: 76.2 mm W x
114.3 mm H x 178 mm D
(3 in. W x 4.5 in. H x 7 in. D)
• Weight: Approx. 1.7 lbs
• Table-top style rubber mounting
feet
Operating Environment
• Ambient temperature: 0 - 45°C
(32 - 113°F)
• 0 - 90 percent RH, non-condensing
Ordering Information
To order, complete the code number on the right with the information below:
PLCC-————-00——
SERIES PLCC = Control console with single
thermocouple control input, 8A heater control output,
contact alarm output
Input Type
J
=
Type J thermocouple
K =
Type K thermocouple
Extension Cable Length* (ft)
00 =
None
05 =
5 ft
10 =
10 ft (standard length)
15 =
15 ft
25 =
25 ft
Power Options
0 =
Standard line cord
G =
GFCI line cord
Custom Options
00 =
None
AA - ZZ = Consult factory for options
* Includes both heater and thermocouple cables
Teflon® is a registered trademark of E.I.
du Pont de Nemours & Company
217
Control Systems
Sensor Input
• Type K or Type J thermocouple,
factory selectable
• Miniature type thermocouple jack
• Mates with Watlow pump line
thermocouples
• Thermocouple Extension Cable:
FEP Teflon® insulated, 24 Ga
stranded. Enclosure connection:
miniature type thermocouple plug.
Sensor connection: miniature type
thermocouple jack. Calibration as
specified
Control Systems
Control Boxes
To complete or upgrade a heater
installation, Watlow offers complete,
ready-to-install control boxes. Three
basic models save time and hassle
by allowing customers to specify
controller and power switching
devices to meet application
objectives.
Control Box Configurations
Model 1—Process and high-limit
controllers
Model 2—Process or high-limit
controllers
Capable of switching up to 50 amps
and 480VÅ(ac), each control box
comes pre-wired with customer
specified options.
Fast Shipment
All configurable control boxes ship
within five to 10 working days.
Enclosure Options ➀
• Moisture resistant steel (NEMA 4)
• Corrosion resistant fiberglass
(NEMA 4X)
Controller Options ➀
• PID auto-tuning SERIES SD and
96 with ramp-to-set point
• On-off SERIES CV controllers
• High-limit protection SERIES LV
and 97
Power Switching Options➀
• Electromechanical relay
(contactor)➁
• E-SAFE® RELAYS
• SCR DIN-A-MITEs®
Control Box Dimensions
Control
Box
NEMA
Enclosure
Rating
Enclosure
Material
A
Dimensions (in.)
B
C
G
H
Model 1
4
4X
Metal
Fiberglass
12
12
12
10
6
6
12.75
12.9375
10
8
Model 2
4
4X
Metal
Fiberglass
12
10
14.375
8
6
6
12.75
10.9375
10
6
➀ Consult specific model option information for availability.
➁ Electromechanical relays are not recommended for PID control. They are warranted for only
100,000 contact closures.
➂ Application at stated ampacity is sensitive to ambient temperature.
➃ Assembly Stock units with catalog options.
218
Availability
Assembly Stock: Five to 10 working
days
Modified Stock ➃: Five to 10 working
days
Made-to-Order: 15 working days
Options, complexity and quantity
may affect availability and leadtimes. Consult factory.
W
A
T
L
O
Control Systems
W
F.O.B.: Wright City, MO
Control Boxes
Control Box Model #1—Process and High Limit Controller
Base Model CBCVJ4XLVJLD30 Includes:
CB _ _ _-_ _-_ _ _-_ _ _-_
- SERIES CV on-off controller, Type J input, 0 to 315°C (32 to 600°F)
- NEMA 4X - fiberglass box 305 x 254 x 152 mm (12 x 10 x 6 in.)
- SERIES LV high-limit with Type J input, 0 to 750°C (32 to 1382°F)
- E-SAFE RELAY
- Mechanical relay for high-limit circuit isolation
- Illuminated on-off control switch
- Control fusing
On-off
On-off
PID
PID
PID
PID
PID
PID
Enclosure
Material Dimensions
NEMA 4
NEMA 4X
Metal Box
Fiberglass
Type J
Type K
Type J
Type K
Type J
Type K
Type J
Type K
Code No.
0 to 315°C (32 to 600°F)
0 to 1250°C (32 to 2282°F)
0 to 750°C (32 to 1382°F)
0 to 1250°C (32 to 2282°F)
0 to 750°C (32 to 1382°F)
0 to 1250°C (32 to 2282°F)
0 to 750°C (32 to 1382°F)
0 to 1250°C (32 to 2282°F)
305 x 305 x 152 mm (12 x 12 x 6 in.)
305 x 254 x 152 mm (12 x 10 x 6 in.)
High-Limit
Function Input
Range
SERIES LV
SERIES LV
SERIES 97
SERIES 97
➀SERIES SD 1⁄32 DIN
➀SERIES SD 1⁄32 DIN
➀SERIES SD 1⁄16 DIN
➀SERIES SD 1⁄16 DIN
High-Limit
High-Limit
High-Limit
High-Limit
High-Limit
High-Limit
High-Limit
High-Limit
0 to 750°C (32 to 1382°F)
0 to 1250°C (32 to 2282°F)
0 to 750°C (32 to 1382°F)
0 to 1250°C (32 to 2282°F)
0 to 750°C (32 to 1382°F)
0 to 1250°C (32 to 2282°F)
0 to 750°C (32 to 1382°F)
0 to 1250°C (32 to 2282°F)
Type J
Type K
Type J
Type K
Type J
Type K
Type J
Type K
CVJ
CVK
P3J
P3K
P6J
P6K
96J
96K
93
HI-LIMIT CONDITION
PUSH TO ALERT
OFF
SET
UP
RUN
CONTROL CIRCUIT
328.7 mm
(12.94
2.94 in.)
305 mm
(12
2 in.)
Control Boxes
SERIES CV
SERIES CV
➀SERIES SD 1⁄32 DIN
➀SERIES SD 1⁄32 DIN
➀SERIES SD 1⁄16 DIN
➀SERIES SD 1⁄16 DIN
➀SERIES 96
➀SERIES 96
254 mm (10
(10 in.)
04
4X
203 mm (8 in.)
LVJ
LVK
97J
97K
L3J
L3K
L6J
L6K
METAL BOX
305 mm (12 in.)
Power Switching Devices
(Includes appropriately sized high-limit electromechanical relay)
93
HI-LIMIT CONDITION
Type
Amps
PUSH TO ALERT
E-SAFE RELAY
E-SAFE RELAY
SCR
SCR
SCR
dControl
SET
UP
OFF
RUN
Poles/Phase
20 amp
40 amp
bc16 amps, 480V, DIN-A-MITE A
bc20 amps, 480V, DIN-A-MITE B
bc45 amps, 480V, DIN-A-MITE C
3-Pole
3-Pole
1-phase
3-phase
3-phase
LD3
MD3
D16
D20
D45
CONTROL CIRCUIT
305 mm
(12 in.)
323.8 mm
(12.75 in.)
Transformers
240 to 120VÅ(ac)
480 to 120VÅ(ac)
208 to 120VÅ(ac)
No Transformer
W
X
Y
0
254 mm (10 in.)
Availability: Five to 10 working days
Notes:
a Not recommended for use with electromechanical relays.
b Metal enclosure required for SSR, choose from above. For derating curves above stated ambient temperature,
consult factory.
c Includes semiconductor fusing, 3-phase units have 2-leg control.
d Includes semiconductor fusing, 3-phase units have 2-leg control, NEMA 4 enclosure is not available.
e If no transformer option is selected, 120VÅ(ac) service is required. Connections on terminal block provided.
219
Control Systems
Options—Choose Only One In Each Category
Controller
Function Input Range
FIBERGLASS BOX
Control Systems
F.O.B.: Wright City, MO
Control Boxes
Control Box Model #2—Process or High Limit Controller
Base Model CBCVJ4X000LD30 Includes:
CB _ _ _-_ _-000-_ _ _-_
- SERIES CV on-off controller,
ANSI Type J input, 0 to 315°C (32 to 600°F)
- NEMA 4X - fiberglass box - 254 x 203 x 152 mm (10 x 8 x 6 in.)
- E-SAFE RELAY
- Illuminated on-off control switch
- Control fusing
Options—Choose Only One In Each Category
Controller
Function Input Range
SERIES CV
SERIES CV
➀SERIES SD 1⁄32 DIN
➀SERIES SD 1⁄32 DIN
➀SERIES SD 1⁄16 DIN
➀SERIES SD 1⁄16 DIN
➀SERIES 96
➀SERIES 96
SERIES LV
SERIES LV
SERIES 97
SERIES 97
➀SERIES SD 1⁄32 DIN
➀SERIES SD 1⁄32 DIN
➀SERIES SD 1⁄16 DIN
➀SERIES SD 1⁄16 DIN
On-off
On-off
PID
PID
PID
PID
PID
PID
High-Limit
High-Limit
High-Limit
High-Limit
High-Limit
High-Limit
High-Limit
High-Limit
Enclosure
Material Dimensions
NEMA 4
NEMA 4X
Metal
Fiberglass
Type J
Type K
Type J
Type K
Type J
Type K
Type J
Type K
Type J
Type K
Type J
Type K
Type J
Type K
Type J
Type K
0 to 315°C (32 to 600°F)
0 to 1250°C (32 to 2282°F)
0 to 750°C (32 to 1382°F)
0 to 1250°C (32 to 2282°F)
0 to 750°C (32 to 1382°F)
0 to 1250°C (32 to 2282°F)
0 to 750°C (32 to 1382°F)
0 to 1250°C (32 to 2282°F)
0 to 750°C (32 to 1382°F)
0 to 1250°C (32 to 2282°F)
0 to 750°C (32 to 1382°F)
0 to 1250°C (32 to 2282°F)
0 to 750°C (32 to 1382°F)
0 to 1250°C (32 to 2282°F)
0 to 750°C (32 to 1382°F)
0 to 1250°C (32 to 2282°F)
254 x 203 x 152 mm (12 x 12 x 6 in.)
254 x 203 x 152 mm (10 x 8 x 6 in.)
Power Switching Devices
Type Amps
FIBERGLASS BOX
with SERIES 93 Controller
203 mm (8 in.)
Code No.
CVJ
CVK
P3J
P3K
P6J
P6K
96J
96K
LVJ
LVK
97J
97K
L3J
L3K
L6J
L6K
93
SET
UP
277.8 mm
(10.94
(1
0.94 in.)
254 mm
(10
(1
0 in.)
152
52 mm (6 in.)
04
4X
Poles/Phase
Transformers
240 to 120VÅ(ac)
480 to 120VÅ(ac)
208 to 120VÅ(ac)
No Transformer
RUN
CONTROL CIRCUIT
METAL
MET
AL BOX
with SERIES 103 Controller inside
203 mm (8 in.)
E-SAFE RELAY 20 amp
3-Pole
LD3
E-SAFE RELAY 40 amp
3-Pole
MD3
SCR c16 amps, 480V, DIN-A-MITE A
1-phase
D16
SCR c20 amps, 480V, DIN-A-MITE B
3-phase
D20
SCR c45 amps, 480V, DIN-A-MITE C
3-phase
D45
304.8 x 304.8 x 152.4 mm (12 x 12 x 6 in.) metal enclosure required for SSR and SCR,
choose from above
dControl
OFF
W
X
Y
0
SET
UP
OFF
CONTROL CIRCUIT
273 mm
(10.75 in.)
(10.75
254 mm
(10
(1
0 in.)
Availability: Five to 10 working days
Notes:
➀ Not recommended for use with electromechanical relays.
➁ Metal enclosure required for SSR, choose from above. For derating curves above stated ambient
temperature, consult factory.
c Includes semiconductor fusing, 3-phase units have 2-leg control.
d Includes semiconductor fusing, 3-phase units have 2-leg control, NEMA 4 enclosure is not available.
e If no transformer option is selected, 120VÅ(ac) service is required. Connections on terminal block provided.
220
RUN
MODEL #2 FIBERGLASS 965
152
52 mm (6 in.)
W
A
T
L
O
W
Control Accessories
Thermostats and
Accessories
Pilot Light
An optional pilot light gives visual
indication whether the power
supplied to the heating element(s) is
on or off. To order, please specify
suffix code PL11.
Thermostat Conversion Kits
Kits are available to convert a
heater’s general purpose (NEMA 1)
terminal enclosure to accept either a
single or double pole thermostat.
The kit contains all the necessary
parts to change out the existing
terminal enclosure cover and mount
the thermostat inside. These are
hardware and wiring kits only.
NEMA 4 and 12 Single-Pole
91 mm
(3.187 in.)
83 mm
(3.25 in.)
55 mm
(2.156 in.)
70 mm
(2.75 in.)
84 mm
(3.312 in.)
88 mm
(0.437 in.)
(2) 6 mm
(0.218 in.) Dia. Holes
112 mm
(4.375 in.)
View Above Shown Without Cover
75 mm
(2.937 in.)
148 mm
(5.812 in.)
NEMA 7 Single-Pole
117 mm
(4.625 in.)
83 mm
(3.25 in.)
56 mm
(2.5 in.)
135 mm
(5.937 in.)
162 mm
(6.375 in.)
56 mm
(2.812 in.)
76 mm
(32 in.)
NEMA 4 and 12 Double-Pole
Thermostats and Accessories
Remote Mount Thermostat
Assemblies
Remote mounted thermostat
assemblies can be supplied with the
following enclosures:
• General purpose (NEMA 1)
• Moisture resistant (NEMA 4)
• Explosion resistant (NEMA 7)
• Explosion/moisture resistant
(NEMA 7/4)
• Dust resistant (NEMA 12)
NEMA 1 Single and Double-Pole
NEMA 7 Double-Pole
197 mm
(7.75 in.)
167 mm
(6.562 in.)
178 mm
(7 in.)
167 mm
(6.562 in.)
152 mm
(6 in.)
165 mm
(6.5 in.)
108 mm
(4.25 in.)
13 mm (0.5 in.)
164 mm
(6.25 in.)
152 mm
(6 in.)
220 mm
(8.75 in.)
Single pole conversion kit covers
25.4, 31.75, 50.8 and 63.5 mm
(1.125, 2 and 2.5 in.) NPT screw
plugs. To order, specify code.
K492-000-35-(thermostat type).
See Watlow’s Heater catalog, page
425 for type.
Double pole conversion kit covers
50.8 and 63.5 mm (2 and 2.5 in.)
inch NPT screw plugs. To order,
specify code K492-000-34(thermostat type). See Watlow’s
Heater catalog, page 425 for type.
11 mm
(0.437 in.)
Celsius Dial Scale
Thermostats are shipped with
Fahrenheit (°F) dial scales. If your
application requires a Celsius (°C)
scale, order the optional dial face.
To order, specify code CD. Scale
will match thermostat temperature
range.
Incoloy® is a registered trademark of the Special
Metals Corporation.
221
Control Accessories
Thermostats regulate temperature in
non-critical applications. They sense
temperature, within a preset range
and cycle heaters on and off to
maintain the set point.
Thermostats may be mounted inside
a terminal enclosure or remote
mounted (separate from the heater
assembly). If using a remote
mounted thermostat, be sure to
order sufficient capillary tube length
to permit installation.
All Watlow thermostats are normally
closed circuit and either single-pole,
single throw (SPST) or double-pole,
single throw (DPST). They can be
used with or without an enclosure.
Thermostat selection should be
based on temperature range,
capillary tube length and sensor
bulb size (diameter/length).
Thermostats with Enclosures
Control Accessories
Controls and
Accessories
Application Hints
• Locate the thermostat where
ambient temperatures do not
exceed 65°C (150°F).
• Mount the thermostat in an
enclosure that is compatible with
the surrounding environment.
• Immerse the entire sensing bulb
in the media being heated.
• Make sure the sensing bulb is
mounted away from the heating
element(s) to negate any undue
influence on the sensing bulb’s
temperature “reading.”
• Keep the capillary tube insulated
from electrical connections.
• Do not use a thermostat for highaccuracy temperature sensing.
Use an appropriate
thermocouple, RTD or thermistor
and temperature control.
• Do not use thermostats as a
primary power switching device.
Use a disconnect switch or
circuit breaker to cut power when
servicing.
Pilot Duty Wiring
SPST,1-phase
1 L1
• Interconnect the thermostat to the
heater only if:
- The heater has one circuit
- The heater’s ampere draw is
lower than the thermostat’s
rated ampacity at prescribed
voltage.
• Interconnect either a single or
double-pole thermostat with a
single-phase heater when the
supply voltage does not exceed
277VÅ(ac) for SPST or 480VÅ(ac)
for DPST.
• Only interconnect three-phase
delta heaters to DPST
thermostats.
• Use a single-pole thermostat for
pilot duty where the thermostat is
not interconnected with the
heater, or heater exceeds the
volt/amp rating.
Warning
Do not use thermostats for high-limit
sheath protection. Thermostats fail
in a closed circuit mode and will not
cut power to the heaters. Limit
control should be provided by an
isolated, redundant sensor and
control system of the appropriate
type, design and installation.
Thermostats are precalibrated at the
factory. No adjustment, other than
selecting the desired operating
temperature, is required. All wiring
should be performed by qualified
personnel and comply with the
National Electrical Code and other
applicable state and local codes.
To help assure you select the
correct thermostat, as well as install
and wire it properly, we have put
together a few helpful hints.
Schematics are provided for
interconnecting thermostats to
single- and three-phase heaters.
SPST, 3-phase delta
SPST, 3-phase wye
1 L1
1 L1
1 L2
1 L2
1 L3
1 L3
1 L2
SPST
SPST
SPST
120V (ac)
120V (ac)
P
Interconnected Wiring
SPST, 1-phase
SPST
1 L1
120V (ac)
DPST, 1-phase
DPST, 3-phase delta
DPST
1 L1
DPST
1 L1
P
P
P
1 L2
1 L2
1 L2
222
P
P
1 L3
W
A
T
L
O
W
Control Accessories
F.O.B.: Hannibal, Missouri
Controls and
Accessories
Thermostat
Control
Mode
On-off
Temp
Control
Type
SinglePole
Single
Throw
(SPST)
Temperature
Range
°C
(°F)
0-40
0-120
0-120
80-290
80-290
150-350
Ampacity @
Bulb
Differential
Line Voltage
Diameter
˚C (˚F) 120 240 277 480 mm (in.)
Bulb
Length
mm (in.)
(8)
(15)
(15)
(26)
(26)
(12)
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
22
22
22
22
22
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
6
6
6
6
6
10
(0.250) 121
(0.250) 85
(0.250) 85
(0.250) 85
(0.250) 70
(0.375) 95
15-70
(60-160)
Double- 0-40
(30-110)
Pole
15-120 (60-250)
Single 15-120 (60-250)
Throw 40-290 (100-550)
(DPST) 40-290 (100-550)
10
7
7
7
12
12
(19)
(12)
(12)
(12)
(22)
(22)
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
20
21
21
21
21
21
6
10
10
6
10
6
(0.250)
(0.375)
(0.375)
(0.250)
(0.375)
(0.250)
On-off
with
(DPST) 15-120 (60-250)
40-290 (100-550)
7 (12) 30
12 (22) 30
30
30
30
30
—
—
6
8
(0.250) 165
(0.188) 305
Manual
Reset
(SPST) 180
—
30
20
—
6
(0.250)
(350➀)
30
(4.75) 455
(3.25) 455
(3.25) 2135
(3.25) 455
(2.75) 2135
(3.75) 1525
1
2
2A
3
3A
10
0.4
0.4
0.4
0.4
0.4
0.4
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(14)
#8-32
12A
(36)
4
(48)
#10-32
5
(48) Screw Lug 5A
(48)
7
(48)
7A
0.4
0.9
0.9
0.9
0.9
0.9
(1)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(2)
(6.5) 1220
(12) 1220
(48)
#10-32
(48) Screw Lug
8
9
0.9 (2)
0.9 (2)
(3.5)
(36)
11
0.4 (1)
110 (4.375)
160
(6.25)
115
(4.25)
165
(6.5)
100 (3.875)
179 (7.0625)
90
355
915
1220
1220
1220
1220
915
(18)
(18)
(84)
(18)
(84)
(60)
Code Est. Net
No. Weight
kg (lbs)
#12 AWG
Stranded
Leads
#10-32
Screw Lug
Controls and Accessories
0
8
8
14
14
7
Terminal
Type
➀ Fixed temperature setting
How to Order
-
-
Thermostat Code Number
(See stock chart above)
Enclosure (Remote Mount Only)
S
= General purpose (NEMA 1)
W
= Moisture resistant (NEMA 4)
E
= Explosion resistant (NEMA 7)
E/W = Explosion/moisture resistant (NEMA 7/4)
D
= Dust resistant (NEMA 12)
Options
Celsius dial scale = CD
Chrome bezel
= CB
Liquid-tight brass fitting
(0.375 in.-18 NPT) = LTB
Pilot Light
= PL11
Availability
Thermostats
Stock: Same day shipment
Remote Mount Thermostats
Stock: Same day shipment
Assembly Stock: Three to five
working days
Modified Stock ➁: Three to five
working days
Standard: Eight to 10 working days
Options, complexity and quantity
may affect availability and lead
times. Consult factory.
➁ Stock or Assembly Stock units with catalog
options.
223
Control Accessories
(30-110)
(30-250)
(30-250)
(175-550)
(175-550)
(300-700)
Capillary
Length
mm
(in.)
Control Accessories
F.O.B.: Hannibal, Missouri
Sensors and
Accessories
Low Liquid Level Sensor
The Watlow low liquid level sensor
can protect a heating system by
sensing when a liquid drops below
a predetermined level. This is
accomplished by locating the sensor
at the minimum desired liquid level
in the tank or vessel. The sensor’s
ANSI Type J thermocouple output
can be connected to a variety of
controls, alarms and limit protection
devices.
To provide an additional margin of
protection, the Type J thermocouple
makes this low liquid level sensor
respond considerably faster than
conventional capillary bulb
thermostats.
To order, specify code number
BCN5J1SJ.
Application Hints
• Only use sensor in nonflammable liquids that are
compatible with the Incoloy®
sheath and 304 stainless steel
screw plug.
General Purpose (NEMA 1) Enclosure
19 mm (0.75 in.) NPT Conduit Opening
FIREROD®
Cartridge Heater
• Application should tolerate sheath
temperature at limit set point.
• The time delay between the
low liquid level condition on-set,
and the sensor’s ability to signal
the control device should be
adequate to protect the heater(s).
See Installation and Maintenance
Instructions for details.
Controller Recommendation
• Use Watlow Safety Limit
Temperature Controller
SERIES 142 (Code number
142A-3605-1300). This controller
features compact sub-panel
mounting and is sealed against
ambient environment. UL®
recognized for limit protection
(UL® 991, “Tests For SafetyRelated Controls Employing Solid
State Devices”).
Controller supplied by Watlow in
Winona, Minnesota.
13 mm (0.5 in.)
No-Heat
140 mm (5.5 in.)
Specifications
Screw plug: 26 mm (1 in.) NPT
Plug material: 304 stainless steel
Sheath material: Incoloy®
Watt density: 13 W/in2 (2 W/cm2)
Watts: 100
Volts: 120VÅ(ac)
Immersed length: 140 mm (5.5 in.)
Thermocouple: ANSI Type J
Est. ship. wt.: 1 kg (2 lbs)
Availability
Stock: Same day shipment
Modified Stock➀: Five to seven
working days
Made-to-Order: Four to six weeks
Options, complexity and quantity
may affect availability and lead
times. Consult factory.
➀ Stock units with catalog options.
Protective Wells
Protective wells isolate and protect
thermostat bulbs and other
temperature sensors (thermocouples, RTDs or thermistors). They
allow inserting the sensing element
sufficiently into the media being
heated without being damaged.
Steel or stainless steel protective
wells are available in three lengths.
They are supplied with 13 mm (0.5 in.)
NPT mounting and 10 mm (0.375 in.)18 NPT internal thread for mating to
a liquid-tight bushing (LTB).
All units are stock. To order, specify
the appropriate code number from
the stock table.
224
Internal 10 mm (0.375 in.) - NPT
13 mm (0.5 in.) O.D.
Immersed Length
B ± 6 mm (0.25 in.)
13 mm (0.5 in.) NPT
Protective Wells
Plug and
Thermowell
Material
Immersed
B Dimension
mm
(in.)
Steel
305
610
915
(12)
(24)
(36)
PWS12
PWS24
PWS36
0.5
1.0
1.0
(1)
(2)
(2)
305
610
915
(12)
(24)
(36)
PWSS12
PWSS24
PWSS36
0.5
1.0
1.0
(1)
(2)
(2)
Stainless
Steel
Code No.
Availability
Stock: Same day shipment
Modified Stock ➁: Five to seven
working days
Made-to-Order: Three weeks
Est. Ship.
Weight
kg (lb)
Options, complexity and quantity
may affect availability and lead
times. Consult factory.
➁ Stock units with catalog options.
13 mm
(0.5 in.)
Dia.
W
A
T
L
O
W
Controller Output
Comparison Guide
I want to switch…
I want to control…
Controller Output
•
•
•
•
Solenoid coil/valve
Mercury displacement relay (MDR)
Electromechanical relay
General purpose contactor
Solid state relay, Form A,
with RC suppression
•
•
•
•
•
AC input solid state relay (SSR)
AC input solid state contactor
High impedance load, typ.≥ 5kΩ
Piezoelectric buzzer
Indicator lamps
Solid state relay, Form A,
without contact suppression
Output
Life
Electromechanical relay, Form A,
• Various devices in on-off mode (high
impedance or inductive devices with coils
suppressed)
• Indicator lamps
• Small heaters
• AC input solid state contactor
Electromechanical relay, Form A,
without contact suppression
• A safety limit circuit with contactor,
electromechanical relay or
mercury displacement relay (MDR)
Electromechanical relay, Form A or B,
with RC suppression
N/A
• A safety limit circuit with contactor,
electromechanical relay or
mercury displacement relay (MDR)
Electromechanical relay, Form C,
without RC suppression
N/A
•
•
•
•
Various devices in on-off mode
Indicator lamps
Small heaters
AC input solid state contactor
Electromechanical relay, Form A or B,
without contact suppression
•
•
•
•
•
•
Various devices in on-off mode
Solenoid coil/valve
Mercury displacement relay (MDR)
Electromechanical relay
General purpose contactor
Pilot duty relays
Electromechanical relay, Form C,
with RC suppression
• Various devices in on-off mode (high
impedance or inductive devices with coils
suppressed)
• Indicator lamps
• Small heaters
• AC input solid state contactor
Electromechanical relay, Form C,
without contact suppression
• DC input solid state relay (SSR)
• PLC-dc input
• Low voltage panel lamp
Switched dc, isolated
• DC input solid state relay (SSR)
• PLC-dc input
• Low voltage panel lamp
Switched dc, non-isolated
• DC input solid state relay (SSR)
• PLC-dc input
• Low voltage panel lamp
Open collector, isolated
Controller Output
Comparison Guide
• Various devices in on-off mode
with RC suppression
225
Controller Output
Comparison Guide
I want to switch…
I want to control…
Output
Life
Controller Output
•
•
•
•
Phase-angle or burst fire SCR
0-20mAÎ(dc)a valve positioner
Cascade control
Other instruments
Process 0-20mAÎ(dc), non-isolated
•
•
•
•
Phase-angle or burst fire SCR
4-20mAÎ(dc) valve positioner
Cascade control
Other instruments
Process 4-20mAÎ(dc), non-isolated
•
•
•
•
Multiple SCRs, phase-angle or burst fire
0-5VÎ(dc) valve positioner
Cascade control
Other instruments
Process 0-5VÎ(dc), non-isolated
•
•
•
•
•
Multiple SCRs, phase-angle or burst fire
0-5VÎ(dc), 1-5VÎ(dc) or
0-10VÎ(dc) valve positioner
Cascade control
Other instruments
Process 0-5VÎ(dc), 1-5VÎ(dc),
0-10VÎ(dc), 0-20mAÎ(dc),
4-20mAÎ(dc), isolated
•
•
•
•
Multiple SCRs, phase-angle or burst fire
0-10VÎ(dc) valve positioner
Cascade control
Other instruments
Process 0-10VÎ(dc), non-isolated
• Sensor transmitters
• Ancillary devices
Power supply, 5, 12 or
20VÎ(dc) @ 30mA
N/A
Retransmit/Alarms
•
•
•
•
1 or 2 devices, impedance dependent
Chart recorder
Master-remote (slave) system
Data logging device
0-20mAÎ(dc), 4-20mAÎ(dc),
non-isolated
•
•
•
•
1 or 2 devices, impedance dependent
Chart recorder
Master-remote (slave) system
Data logging device
4-20mAÎ(dc), non-isolated
•
•
•
•
Multiple devices, impedance dependent
Chart recorder
Master-remote (slave) system
Data logging device
0-5VÎ(dc), non-isolated
•
•
•
•
Multiple devices, impedance dependent
Chart recorder
Master-remote (slave) system
Data logging device
0-5VÎ(dc), 1-5VÎ(dc),
1-10VÎ(dc), Isolated
• Various devices in on-off mode
with RC suppression
Electromechanical relay, Form A or B
• Various devices in on-off mode
without RC suppression
Electromechanical relay, Form C
• Various devices in on-off mode
without RC suppression
Electromechanical relay, Form A
Best Life
a
Better Life
Good Life
226
b
Watlow power controller process inputs
calibrated for 4-20mA unless otherwise
specified with order.
Standard output, no option code.
W
A
T
L
O
W
Power Controller
Comparison Guide
Power Controller Characteristics
Initial
Cost
3 Year
Cost a
Control
Life
Electromechanical Relay and Contactor
Low for low
Highest
Limited
current
electrical and
mechanical
Heater
Life
EMI
Generation
Control
Response
Rate
Options
Comments
Shortest
Yes, coil
and contacts
Poor
Slowest
None
To extend life the cycle
time is normally extended
to 30 seconds or more.
Good
Minimal
Good
Fast
None
240VÅ(ac)
maximum
High
Good
Yes, coil
and contact
Fair to
good
Medium
to fast
None
Mercury is not desirable.
Minimum cycle time is
two seconds. Position
sensitive.
Extended
Extended
Minimal
with burst
fire
Good
Fast
None
Excellent control with one
second cycle time.
Requires heatsink.
SCR Solid State Contactor
Medium
Low
Extended
Extended
Minimal
Good
Fast
None
Excellent control with one
second cycle time.
SCR Burst Firing
High
Low
Extended
Longest
Minimal
Excellent
Fastest
None
Fastest variable time base
unit.
SCR Phase-Angle Firing
High
Lowest
Extended
Longest
High
Excellent
Fastest
Current
limit
Required for tungsten
elements, transformers,
or for current limiting.
Saturable Core Reactor
Highest
Low
Longest
Minimal
Very
good
Fast
Current
limit
Cannot be turned full on
or off, inefficient.
E-SAFE RELAY®
Low
Medium
High
Mercury Displacement Relay (MDR)
Low for
Medium
low to
medium
current
Solid State Relay (SSR)
Medium
Medium
heater replacement and lost production.
Power Controller Quick Selection Chart
Amps
18 to 100A
Power
Controller
DIN-A-MITE®
Firing Mode
Electric Heating
Element Type
Features
Agency
Approvals
Burst fire,
variable time base
Phase-angle firingc
Nichrome™ wire Four models meet power, budget and feature
requirements. Same footprint as popular MDRs.
Otherb
Convenient DIN-rail mounting.
UL® 508 listed,C-UL®
up to 100 amps and CE
with proper filter
150 to 1000A QPAC
Burst fire,
variable time base
Phase-angle firing
Nichrome™ wire Modular design incorporating plug-in cards
for contactor, burst fire, variable time base,
Otherb
or phase angle. Quick delivery.
UL® 508 listed and
C-UL® up to 300A
10 to 75A
SSR
VÅ(ac) or VÎ(dc),
burst fire contactor
input
Nichrome™ wire Low cost, requires heatsink. Heatsink and
over-temperature protection recommended.
Stocked for same day shipment.
UL® 873 Recognized,
CSA Certified and
VDE 0805
18 to 50A
CZR
Contactor input
Nichrome™ wire Compact electrically.
Touch safe package.
Convenient DIN-rail mounting.
UL® 508 listed
CSA Certified,
VDE, CE
65 to 250A
POWER
SERIES
Burst fire,
Variable time base
Phase-angle firingc
Nichrome™ wire Microprocessor-based heater diagnostics.
Otherb
RS-232/485 communications.
Heater bakeout feature.
UL® 508 listed C-UL®,
VDE 50178, CE
20-40A
E-SAFE
RELAY®
Contactor
Nichrome™ wire Touch safe, long contact life.
24VÅ(ac), 120VÅ(ac)
Mercury free.
and 220VÅ(ac)
Fast cycling.
Controller Output
Comparison Guide
a Includes
Extended
UL® 508 listed
C-UL®
b Heating
elements that change resistance value over time and temperature, i.e; silicone carbide and tungsten.
angle fire up to 65 amps. Single phase only. Not CE approved.
Nichrome™ is a trademark of Driver-Harris Company.
c Phase
227
Ranges and
Tolerances
Thermocouples
ANSI Tolerances
In 1969, nomenclature of the
American National Standards
Institute, Inc. (ANSI) superseded
previously used ISA designations.
Reference Junction 0 °C (32 °F)
Thermocouple
Type
B
E
J
K
N
R or S
T
Cryogenic Range
Eb
Kb
Tb
a
2
The standard and special tolerances
in this table come from ANSI Circular
MC96.1-1982.
The standard and special tolerances
stated apply only to the temperature
ranges listed for each thermocouple
type.
Cd
CP W5Re (Tungsten 5% Rhenium)
CN W26Re (Tungsten 26% Rhenium)
Dd
DP W3Re (Tungsten 3% Rhenium)
DN W25Re (Tungsten 25% Rhenium)
E
EP Chromel®, Tophel®, HAI-KP®
EN Constantan, Cupron®, Advance®
J
JP Iron
JN Constantan, Cupron, Advance
K
KP Chromel, Tophel, HAI-KP
KN Alumel®, Nail®, HAI-KN®
N
NP Nicrosil
NN Nisil
Standard
Special
whichever is greater
870 to 1700 1598 to 3092
0 to 900
32 to 1652
0 to 750
32 to 1382
0 to 1250
32 to 2282
0 to 1250
32 to 2282
0 to 1450
32 to 2642
0 to 350
32 to 662
± 0.5%
± 1.7 °C or ± 0.5%
± 2.2 °C or ± 0.75%
± 2.2 °C or ± 0.75%
± 2.2 °C or ± 0.75%
± 1.5 °C or ± 0.25%
± 1.0 °C or ± 0.75%
-328 to 32
-328 to 32
-328 to 32
Where tolerances are given in percent, the
percentage applies to the temperature
being measured in degrees Celsius. For
example, the standard tolerance of Type J
is ± 0.75 percent. If the temperature being
measured is 538°C, the tolerance is ± 0.75
percent of 538°C, or ± 4.0°C. To determine
the tolerance in degrees Fahrenheit,
multiply the tolerance in degrees Celsius
times 1.8.
Thermocouples and thermocouple material
are normally supplied to meet the
tolerances specified in the table for the
normal specified range. The same
materials, however, may not fall within the
cryogenic tolerances in the second section
of the table. Tolerances indicated in this
ANSI T/C
Popular Generic
Letter Leg
and Trade Names
B
BP Platinum 30% Rhodium
BN Platinum 6% Rhodium
Tolerancesa
Temperature
Range
°C
°F
-200 to 0
-200 to 0
-200 to 0
Letter Designations
± 1.0 °C or ± 0.4%
± 1.1 °C or ± 0.4%
± 1.1 °C or ± 0.4%
± 1.1 °C or ± 0.4%
± 0.6 °C or ± 0.1%
± 0.5 °C or ± 0.4%
3
± 1.7 °C or ± 1%
± 2.2 °C or ± 2%
± 1.0 °C or ± 1.5%
3
Pt 2d
3
R
RP Platinum 13% Rhodium
RN Pure Platinum
S
SP Platinum 10% Rhodium
SN Pure Platinum
T
TP Copper
TN Constantan, Cupron, Advance
3
table are not necessarily an indication of
the accuracy of temperature measurements
in use after initial heating of the materials.
Little information is available to justify
establishing special tolerances for
cryogenic temperatures. Limited
experience suggests the following
tolerances for Types E and T
thermocouples:
Type E -200 to 0 °C ±1.0 °C or ±0.5%
(whichever is greater)
Type T -200 to 0 °C ±0.5 °C or ±0.8%
(whichever is greater)
Due to the characteristics of the materials,
cryogenic tolerances for Type J
thermocouples and special cryogenic
d
PTP Platinel® 5355
PTN Platinel® 7674
tolerances for Type K thermocouples are
not listed.
Not an ANSI symbol.
Cupron®, Nial® and Tophel® are registered
trademarks of Carpenter Technology.
Advance®, HAI-KP® and HAI-KN® are
registered trademarks of Harrison Alloys Co.
Chromel® and Alumel® are registered
trademarks of Hoskins Manufacturing
Company.
Platinel® is a registered trademark of the
Engelhard Corporation.
RTDs
RTD Tolerance Class Definitions
The two equations below define tolerances for platinum
DIN Class A and B RTDs, where [t] is the actual
temperature of the platinum elements. JIS tolerances are
the same as DIN tolerances.
DIN class A:
±(0.15 + 0.002 [t°C])
DIN class B:
±(0.30 + 0.005 [t°C])
Base resistance:
Temperature Coefficient
of Resistance (TCR):
100Ω @ 0°C
Table of Tolerance Valuese
Temperature
(°C)
-200
-100
0
100
200
Resistance
Value
Ω
18.49
60.25
100.00
138.50
175.84
300
400
500
600
650
212.02
247.04
280.90
313.59
329.51
0.00385 Ω/Ω/°C (DIN-IEC-761)
0.003916 Ω/Ω/°C (JIS 1604-1981)
For more information on thermocouples and
RTDs…plus thermistors and more, order your Watlow
Sensors catalog using the postcard in the back of this
228 catalog.
e
Tolerance DIN-IEC-761
Class A
Class B
°C (Ω)
°C (Ω)
±0.55 (±0.24)
±1.3 (±0.56)
±0.35 (±0.14)
±0.8 (±0.32)
±0.15 (±0.06)
±0.3 (±0.12)
±0.35 (±0.13)
±0.8 (±0.30)
±0.55 (±0.20)
±1.3 (±0.48)
±0.75
±0.95
±1.15
±1.35
±1.45
(±0.27)
(±0.33)
(±0.38)
(±0.43)
(±0.46)
±1.8
±2.3
±2.8
±3.3
±3.6
(±0.64)
(±0.79)
(±0.93)
(±1.06)
(±1.13)
Tolerance values applicable to JIS Curve 0.003916 (JIS 1604-1981).
W
A
T
L
O
W
Responsible
Engineering
Think Safety
All thermal systems inherently pose
hazards associated with
misapplication, improper application
and failure to adhere to recognized
national, state and local electrical
codes as well as agency standards.
These can result in injury to
personnel, or damage to plant and
process.
The user is responsible for
determining controller-to-application
suitability. Care should always be
exercised in controller selection,
installation and use.
Each temperature and power
controller comes with its own User’s
Manual.
Controller installation and wiring is
the customer’s responsibility. Take
time to review and understand the
User’s Manual. This useful
information will help maximize
safety, thermal system performance,
efficiency and life.
All Watlow temperature and power
controllers should be installed by
qualified personnel knowledgeable
about the thermal system’s
characteristics and in accordance
with the National Electrical Code
and any applicable state or local
codes.
The following recommendations
apply to all Watlow temperature
and power controllers as well as
control panels and boxes:
• Carefully read, understand and
follow the instructions contained
in the User’s Manual.
• Always disconnect electrical
power prior to installing, servicing
or replacing temperature or
power controllers.
• All temperature and power
controllers should be used with
approved conductors of the
correct wire gauge.
• Do not use solid state power
controllers in safety limit controller
circuits. Solid state components
tend to fail in a closed circuit
mode and will not cut power.
• Safety limit control should be
provided by an isolated,
redundant sensor and controller
system of the appropriate type,
design and installation.
• Electrical enclosures and/or
control panels housing
temperature and power
controllers should match the
application’s environment and be
able to withstand worst-case
failures—especially in hazardous
locations.
• Do not apply temperature or
power controllers where ambient
conditions exceed specified
operating environments and/or
exceed power draw permitted by
the device or applicable rating
curve.
• Special attention should be paid
to wiring practices. Power, sensor
and communications wiring
should be effected in an
appropriate way to avoid
inductive and capacitive
coupling. These conditions can
create errant and/or erratic
operation, and pose a safety
hazard. Use noise suppression
devices where appropriate. Make
ground connections for any
device only to the appropriate
electrical ground for that device
(chassis ground, safety ground or
computer ground).
229
Terms and
Conditions
Quantity and Weights:
Products purchased and sold hereunder
shall be those for which Buyer submits
an Order which is accepted by Watlow.
Watlow’s quantities shall govern unless
proved to be in error. On Orders for
Products carried in stock, Watlow will
deliver the ordered quantity specified.
However, in the manufacture of Products
it is agreed that Watlow will be allowed
production losses. Watlow shall have the
right to manufacture, deliver and invoice
for partial deliveries of Products as
stated below:
Quantity
Ordered
Delivery
Variation
1-4
No variation
5-24
± 1 unit
25-74
± 2 units
75-99
± 3 units
100+
± 3 percent
SERV-RITE® Insulated
Wire and Cable
± 10 percent
XACTPAK® Sheathed Wire ± 10 percent
Note: Watlow will deliver exact quantities
on Products with a net price of $100.00
or more. If Buyer expressly requests no
variation in delivered quantity of
Products with a total net price under
$100.00, a ten percent (10%) surcharge
will be added to the net billing on the
invoice for such Order.
Delivery:
F.O.B. Watlow’s Plant. Risk of loss shall
pass to Buyer on delivery at the F.O.B.
point. Watlow shall prepay freight,
assure the shipment and select the
means of transportation unless Buyer
provides specific written instructions
otherwise with Buyer’s order. Watlow
shall not be bound to tender delivery of
any quantities for which Buyer has not
given shipping instructions. Watlow shall
be entitled to designate from time to time
the locations from which Buyer may
receive or pick up Products.
Payment Terms:
Terms are net 30 days upon approved
credit. Prices and discounts are subject
to change without notice. All quotations
are valid for 30 days unless otherwise
stated.
Restocking Charges:
Stock heaters, controls, sensors and
accessories which have not been used
or modified may be returned to the
relevant Watlow Plant for a twenty
230
percent (20%) restocking charge. For
Watlow’s Hannibal Plant Products only,
modified-stock Products may be
returned if not permanently modified,
for a minimum thirty percent (30%)
restocking charge. All stock and
modified-stock Products require
Watlow’s prior authorization to be
returned and must be returned within
one hundred twenty (120) days from the
date of delivery. Controls may not be
returned if the packaging seal is broken.
Non-stock (custom) heaters, controls,
sensors and accessories are not
returnable.
Price Revision:
Prices are subject to change without
advance notice. If Watlow desires to
revise the discounts, prices, points of
delivery, service allowances or terms of
payment but is restricted to any extent
against so doing by reason of any
governmental request, law, regulation,
order or action, or if the discounts,
prices, points of delivery, service
allowances or terms of payment then in
effect are altered by reason of
governmental request, law, regulation,
order or action, Watlow shall have the
right (i) to terminate this Order by notice
to Buyer, (ii) to suspend deliveries for the
duration of such restriction or alteration
or (iii) to have applied to this Order (as of
the effective date of such restriction or
alteration) any discounts, prices, points
of delivery, service allowances or terms
of payment governmentally acceptable.
Any delivery suspended under this
Section may be canceled without
liability.
Return Policy:
Prior approval must be obtained from the
relevant Watlow Plant to return any
Product. Watlow will assign a return
authorization number and record the
reason for the return. Watlow will
examine returned Product to determine
the actual cause, if any, leading to
Buyer’s return. If Product has a
manufacturing defect, Watlow, in its sole
discretion, may issue a credit for the
returned Product or repair or replace
with like Product. If returned Product is
not subject to Watlow’s warranty, Buyer
will be notified of the estimated cost of
repair, if possible. Thereafter, Buyer
must advise Watlow whether or not
Buyer chooses to have Product repaired
at Buyer’s expense.
Order Changes:
Buyer must notify Watlow in writing of
requested changes in the quantity,
drawings, designs or specifications for
Products which are ordered but not yet
in the process of manufacture. After
receipt of such notice, Watlow will inform
Buyer of any adjustments to be made in
price, delivery schedules, etc. resulting
from Buyer’s requested changes prior to
incorporating requested changes into
manufactured Products. Control
Products require written notice of
requested changes not less than sixty
(60) days prior to last scheduled
shipping date.
Freight and Taxes:
Prices do not include prepaid freight,
federal, state or local taxes. Any
increase in freight rates paid by Watlow
on deliveries covered by this Order and
hereafter becoming effective and any
tax or governmental charge or increase
in same (excluding any franchise or
income tax or other tax or charge based
on income) (i) increasing the cost to
Watlow of producing, selling or
delivering Products or of procuring
Products used therein or, (ii) payable by
Watlow because of the production, sale
or delivery of Products, such as Sales
Tax, Use Tax, Retailer’s Occupational
Tax, Gross Receipts Tax, Value Added
Tax, and Ways Fees may, at Watlow’s
option, be added to the prices herein
specified and be added to invoices.
Engineering Charge:
On complex Products, systems or
control software modifications, an
engineering charge shall be applied or
included in the price of Prototypes. This
charge is not subject to discounts.
Tooling:
All tooling and fixtures are the property
of Watlow. Watlow will accept Buyer’s
special tooling if sent freight prepaid.
Watlow will maintain this tooling,
exercising reasonable care, in order to
produce Buyer’s Products. Permanent
molds for aluminum cast-in and Polymer
Products shall be the property and
responsibility of Buyer.
Cancellation Charges:
There will be no cancellation charge for
non-modified stock Products. Non-stock
and modified-stock Products may be
subject to a cancellation charge to be
determined by Watlow depending upon
the portion of Product completed at the
time of such cancellation.
W
A
T
L
O
W
Terms and
Conditions
Excuse of Performance:
(A) Deliveries may be suspended by
either party in the event of: Act of God,
war, riot, fire, explosion, accident, flood,
sabotage; lack of adequate fuel, power,
raw materials, labor, containers or
transportation facilities; compliance with
Governmental Requirements (as
hereinafter defined); breakage or failure
of machinery or apparatus; national
defense requirements or any other event,
whether or not of the class or kind
enumerated herein, beyond the
reasonable control of such party; or in
the event of labor trouble, strike, lockout
or injunction (provided that neither party
shall be required to settle a labor dispute
against its own best judgment); which
event makes impracticable the
manufacture, transportation, sale,
purchase, acceptance, use or resale of
Products or a material upon which the
manufacture of Products is dependent.
(B) If Watlow determines that its ability to
supply the total demand for Products, or
obtain any or a sufficient quantity of any
material used directly or indirectly in the
manufacture of Products, is hindered,
limited or made impracticable, Watlow
may allocate its available supply of
Products or such material (without
obligation to acquire other supplies of
any such Products or material) among
itself and its purchasers on such basis
as Watlow determines to be equitable
without liability for any failure of
performance which may result therefrom.
(C) Deliveries suspended or not made by
reason of this Section shall be canceled
without liability, but this agreement
and/or Order shall otherwise remain
unaffected.
Prototypes:
If Buyer orders and/or Watlow delivers
a Product designated as a “Prototype”,
no guarantees, warranties or
representations as to fitness for a
particular purpose or merchantability are
made with respect to such Prototype.
Buyer shall have the duty and sole
responsibility to test a Prototype prior to
acceptance and/or incorporation into
end-use applications. Further, a
production Product based on a
Prototype design may differ in assembly
methods and materials from the
Prototype. Buyer, therefore, shall have
the duty and sole responsibility for
testing and acceptance of production
Products which are based on Prototype
designs.
Warranty and Limitation of Liability:
Watlow warrants its Products against
defects in material and workmanship for
at least one (1) year (three (3) years on
some controls) from the date of delivery,
provided such Product is properly
applied, used and maintained. Refer to
the express written warranty time period
for each individual Product or contact the
relevant Watlow plant for such warranty
time period information. Watlow does not
warrant any Product against damage
from corrosion, contamination,
misapplication, improper specification or
wear and tear and operational conditions
beyond Watlow’s control. The terms of
this Warranty are the exclusive terms
available to Buyer and to any other
person or entity to whom Products are
transferred during the period of this
Warranty. No person has authority to
bind Watlow to a representation or
warranty other than this express
Warranty. Watlow shall not be liable for
incidental or consequential damages
resulting from the use of Products
whether a claim for such damages is
based upon warranty, contract,
negligence or other cause of action.
Should any Product fail while subject to
this Warranty, such Product shall be
repaired or a substitute Product shall be
provided, at Watlow’s option, at no
charge to Buyer or to any other person or
entity to whom Product is transferred
during the period of this Warranty.
Watlow must be notified of the alleged
failure of Product within thirty (30) days
of such event and advanced
authorization for repair or replacement
must be obtained in writing from Watlow.
THIS WARRANTY IS MADE
EXPRESSLY IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION,
ANY WARRANTY ARISING FROM A
COURSE OF DEALING OR USAGE OF
TRADE, AND ALL OTHER SUCH
WARRANTIES ARE SPECIFICALLY
EXCLUDED. THE CORRECTION OF
ANY DEFECT IN OR FAILURE OF
PRODUCTS BY REPAIR OR
REPLACEMENT TO THE EXTENT SET
FORTH ABOVE, SHALL BE WATLOW’S
LIMIT OF LIABILITY AND THE
EXCLUSIVE REMEDY FOR ANY AND
ALL LOSSES, DELAYS OR DAMAGES
RESULTING FROM THE PURCHASE
OR USE OF THE PRODUCTS. IN NO
EVENT SHALL WATLOW BE LIABLE
FOR SPECIAL, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES.
WATLOW SHALL NOT BE LIABLE
FOR, AND BUYER AND ANY OTHER
PERSON OR ENTITY TO WHOM
PRODUCTS ARE TRANSFERRED
DURING THE PERIOD OF THIS
WARRANTY ASSUMES RESPONSIBILITY FOR, ALL PERSONAL INJURY
AND PROPERTY DAMAGE RESULTING FROM OR RELATED TO THE
HANDLING, POSSESSION OR USE OF
PRODUCTS AND PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURED AND SOLD BY
WATLOW HEREUNDER.
Miscellaneous:
THE VALIDITY, INTERPRETATION
AND PERFORMANCE OF THIS
AGREEMENT AND/OR ORDER AND
ANY DISPUTE CONNECTED
HEREWITH SHALL BE GOVERNED
AND CONSTRUED IN ACCORDANCE
WITH THE LAWS OF THE STATE OF
MISSOURI. These Terms and Conditions
constitute the full understanding of the
parties, a complete allocation of risks
between them and a complete and
exclusive statement of the terms and
conditions of their agreement and/or
Order relating to the subject matter
herein. Except as otherwise expressly
provided herein, no conditions, usage of
trade, course of dealing or performance,
understanding or agreement and/or
Order purporting to modify, vary, explain
or supplement the terms or conditions of
this agreement and/or Order shall be
binding unless hereafter made in writing
and signed by the party to be bound,
and no modification shall be effected by
the acknowledgment or acceptance of
any purchase order or shipping
instruction forms containing terms or
conditions at variance with or in addition
to those set forth herein. No waiver by
either party with respect to any breach or
default or of any right or remedy and no
course of dealing or performance shall
be deemed to constitute a continuing
waiver of any other breach or default or
of any other right or remedy, unless such
waiver be expressed in writing signed by
the party to be bound. If any term,
condition or provision of this agreement
and/or Order or the application thereof is
judicially or otherwise determined to be
invalid or unenforceable, or if the parties
mutually agree in writing to any revision
of this agreement and/or Order, the
remainder of this agreement and/or
Order and the application thereof shall
not be affected, and this agreement
and/or Order shall otherwise remain in
full force and effect.
11/02
231
232
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement